SAP ERP Functional Enhancements

Functional Enhancements Release Available my 2004 Solution Area Procurement and Logistics Execution Module(s) Delta Functionality Functionality Description Business Benefits MM Order processing with radio frequency identification Order processing with radio frequency identification (RFID) provides comprehensive and integrated portfolio of autoidentification-enabled applications and infrastructure functions: - Receiving and processing RFID/autoidentification data streams from readers - Writing data to RFID tags - Enabling RFID data processing in shipping, receiving, and packing - Handling RFID automatically RFID-enabled outbound processing provides a generic outbound processing solution to industries. The automatic identification development enhances the efficiency and quality of outbound processing operations by enabling the following: Order processing with radio frequency identification (RFID) provides the following benefits: - It automates the identification and tracking of physical objects (pallets, goods, and so on). - It improves transparency through real-time connection between the real world and business applications to optimize all kind of activities (supply chain, maintenance, and so on). my 2004 End-User Service Delivery - Automated hands-free goods issue/loading confirmation - Verification of physical goods issued against the fulfillment requirements stipulated by the back-end software in the form of a delivery document, presenting a real-time quality control function at source for correct issuing of goods ordered - Nearly instantaneous communication of pallet and case-level electronic product code (EPC) information to business partners and enterprise backend software upon goods issue, which means that the roles impacted by this development extend well beyond the warehouse worker and manager: they apply to sales executives, as well as business partners In conjunction with the Event Management application, RFIDenabled outbound processing allows visibility at delivery and handling unit levels inside the company and also between business partners. MM Purchasing agent role The purchasing agent role accomplishes the following: - It provides overview of the actual workload. - It provides decision support. - It executes corresponding functions such as source determination, purchase requisition The purchasing agent role provides these benefits: - It improves efficiency and effectiveness of purchasers through the personalization of information, as well as a single point of entry. - It

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution conversion, and creation of requests for quotation (RFQs). - It offers access to reporting functions. SRM Service procurement Service procurement accomplishes the following: - Request for external staff A manager can send a request to the supplier before actually ordering the service or external staff, and can request further information for example, on availability, skills information, or curriculum vitae. The request can be based on existing contracts. - Order management This includes the standard purchase order management functionality offered by the Supplier Relationship Management application, including purchase order processing and purchase order responses by the supplier, as well as monitoring - Confirmation and service entry Once the services have been performed, the supplier records times worked and additional costs. These must be approved by the requesting manager. - Invoice handling An invoice can be sent in electronically by the supplier and must then be approved by the requesting manager. enhances visibility of daily issues and figures. - It increases speed in routine work. - It increases demand visibility and order responsiveness. This functionality automates the procure-topay business scenario for temporary labor and consulting services by accomplishing the following: - It provides easy-to-use self-service for managing the procurement of external resources. - It offers seamless integration of suppliers into the service procurement process. - It enhances shift operation. 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution SRM Invoice Management This situation supports line managers or project managers in finding temporary staff as required. Although situations such as this were in the past routed through the procurement department with various iteration loops, procurement was in most cases not involved in line or project activities. This situation empowers the employees who have the knowledge about what to order or from where to source it, by providing professional sourcing functionality together with workflow enablement to line or project managers. The Invoice Management The invoice management application provides a single point of functionality provides access for all invoices. Invoices can be preprocessing of incoming entered manually, through Extensible invoices on top of existing Markup Language (XML), or through invoice verification. If there electronic data interchange (EDI). are no exceptions, the There is also an option to receive invoices are automatically scanned invoices based on optical posted. In the case of character recognition (OCR). If an error exceptions, various occurs when the invoice is posted, they workflow and monitoring can be viewed by various exception activities, including types and statuses with the invoice notification of vendors

monitor software. The clarification of incorrect invoices is based on Interactive Forms by Adobe and e-mail, which the software monitors. about exceptions, are triggered and tracked. Predefined exceptions are as follows: - Missing or incorrect internal or external information The invoicing party or internal user can change or add missing or wrong information in an Adobe interactive form. Changes are transferred into the invoice document. - Duplicate invoice Tthe invoicing party or internal user is asked to check whether an invoice really is a duplicate. If the answer is yes, the invoice is deleted automatically. If the answer is no, the invoice can be posted automatically (if answer was sent by internal user) or the status is updated to "in clarification (if the answer was sent from invoicing party). - Price, quantity, or tax differences The e-mail recipient can accept or reject differences within the Interactive Forms by Adobe application. If the acceptance by an e-mail recipient is sufficient, the invoice can automatically be posted or deleted; otherwise, the answer is recorded in the protocol. - Missing goods receipt The invoice arrives before the goods receipt is posted. You can clarify with the goods receipient whether the goods already arrived at the loading ramp or ask the supplier directly why the goods have not arrived yet. - Wrong reference The e- mail recipient can correct a purchase order in the Interactive Forms by Adobe application. The new purchase order is transferred into the invoice and then posted. - Invoice in approval All invoices that are awaiting approval for more than a

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM Design collaboration with suppliers, based on cfolders Exchanging product documentation with suppliers and partners is supported by the collaboration on product structure data (such as bills of material or product variant structures) and product-related documents (such as technical drawings and computeraided design models). certain number of days are displayed. - Other error This refers to other error messages. This functionality improves productivity and collaboration with partners and suppliers during the product design phase. 6.0 End-User Service Delivery See also the description "Development collaboration with partners and suppliers (cfolders)." MM role: buyer This role supports buyers in their dayto-day purchases (operational procurement) as it provides for both materials and services procurement. The main target group is operational buyers who are involved mostly in ordering activities (operational procurement), as well as reporting. Targeted purchasers may operate in several industries (cross-industry role) and buy direct materials and maintenance, repair, and operations (MROs), as well as services: - In work overview, you obtain an overview of your daily work. The purchasing work list is the point of entry for the processing of current workflow tasks, such as the release of purchase requisitions and purchase orders or the processing of faulty vendor confirmations. You can obtain information about forwarded workflow tasks and obtain an overview of the tasks you have completed. The purchasing group analysis provides an overview of the workloads of the individual buyers and buyer groups within your enterprise. For this purpose, the software accesses enterprise-wide consolidated data of the former Business Information Warehouse component (now included in NetWeaver Business Intelligence). The purchasing group analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data. - In transaction processing, you obtain an overview of your purchasing documents (such as purchase orders and purchase requisitions). With the aid of queries, you can assemble your transactions to be processed in any number of work lists. You therefore This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables you to react to questions and problems immediately. - It provides quick access to personalized work lists. - It helps you achieve analytical insight.

6.0 End-User Service Delivery role: invoicing clerk have the opportunity to structure and perform your daily work in accordance with your own needs. The integration of the document storage application Collaborative Folders (cfolders) allows you to display the attachments to your purchase transactions directly in the portal. - In vendor information, you obtain an overview of your vendors. You can display the contact data and partner roles of your vendors. You can use a source-of-supply overview to obtain an overview of the assortment of products offered by your vendors. The vendor analysis informs you of the goods supplied and services performed by your vendors. In the process, the system accesses enterprise-wide consolidated data stored in the former Business Information Warehouse component. The vendor analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data. - With information on material, you obtain an overview of your materials. You can display master data for, and stocks information about, your materials, or you can obtain information on the possible sources of supply of these materials. The material analysis informs you about the materials that you procured. In the process, the software accesses enterprise-wide consolidated data stored in the former Business Information Warehouse component. The materials analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data. - With service procurement, you can perform all tasks and access all documents involved in the procurement of external services. You can start the sourcing application, or you can process documents of all types. Alternatively, you can open the work lists for different documents, which are based on prespecified selection criteria. If you know the document number, you can also open documents directly. This role provides access to the invoice management function. The main target group of this role is invoicing clerks, who are responsible for the incoming invoices in the logistics department. The invoice management function allows the processing of incoming electronic invoices (with and without purchase order reference) on an exception basis. The invoicing clerk role contains one work center for This functionality accomplishes the following: - It streamlines invoice verification by delivering a high degree of process automation. - It improves efficiency and effectiveness through the personalization of the information.

6.0 End-User Service Delivery role: supplier processing invoices and monitoring the complete exception handling process. It can be enhanced with additional work centers, especially in companies in which single individuals often have various different jobs. In work overview, the invoicing clerk can start all tasks and get access to all documents involved in the invoice management process. He or she can search for related invoices and invoice exceptions. Alternatively, the clerk can create a document or start the related service without any previous selections. The work center provides preprocessing of incoming invoices on top of existing invoice verification. If there are no exceptions, the invoices are automatically posted. In the case of exceptions, various workflow and monitoring activities are triggered and tracked, including notification of vendors about exceptions. A work list enables the invoicing clerk to monitor the incoming invoices quickly and also shows all invoice exceptions. In the case of exceptions, various workflow and other activities are offered, including informing suppliers and noninvoice specialist users. With regard to analytics, appropriate reports and queries on every work center support relevant user scenarios with respective business intelligence queries, such as excessive invoice documents or invoice document overview. This role provides suppliers with a single point of access to data and the following benefits: - It transactions in the Supplier Self- improves productivity and Service component, therefore collaboration with integrating self-service capabilities as suppliers. - It speeds up part of the end-to-end procurement the procurement process. - process. Extending the capabilities of It reduces costs. - It to business partners, expands value proposition specifically to a company s supplier by linking any kind of base, is one of the next logical steps in suppliers through the evolution of the appropriate and cost application. The introduction of effective channels. accessibility to information and transactions for suppliers brings selfservice functionalities to, which allow companies to further streamline their processes and information exchange and, therefore, to further capitalize on their investments. Work centers support various activities associated with orders, purchase order responses, and invoices, as well as

my 2004 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM Management of internal controls reporting activities. The main target group is small suppliers without their own enterprise resource planning (ERP) software. Usually these are small to middle-sized businesses in which individual employees take on a variety of tasks. The employee working with the supplier role accesses data in the customer s system and uses this data to start both internal ands collaborative processes. - In work overview, you can start all tasks and get access to all documents involved in the collaboration process with your customer. You can see a status-related overview of all documents, as well as incoming alerts that need your immediate attention. - You can search for information on requests, purchase order responses, or invoices. The document overview provides quick access to documents, such as requests for quotation, purchase orders, shipping notifications, confirmations, goods receipt confirmations, and invoices. - You can create shipping notifications, confirmations, or invoices. - With administration, you can administer your company s access to the portal by requesting user access rights, and administer your own or your company s master data in the portal. - With regard to analytics, appropriate reports and queries on every work center support relevant user scenarios with respective business intelligence queries, such as sales value reporting or evaluations. Management of internal controls accomplishes the following: - It supports documentation, assessment, and testing of internal controls needed to fulfill the requirements of Sections 302 and 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (SOX), as well as the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO I) framework and other internal control initiatives. - It provides scheduling functionality and workflow-supported issueremediation functionalities. - It includes predefined and easily customized management reports, ranging from a high-level overview of the status of internal control to detailed analyses. Management of internal controls produces the following benefits: - Lower risk of failing to comply with financial compliance regulation - Reduced internal communication and administration expenses related to compliance documentation - Improved management reporting that highlights issues before legal and regulatory reporting deadlines, to reduce the risk of noncompliance SOX makes management responsible for the effectiveness of disclosure controls and procedures for financial reporting, operations, and compliance

my 2004 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM (Section 302) and requires managers to document internal controls, assess their effectiveness, and prepare a report on the state of internal controls in their organization (Section 404). SOX is applicable not only to United States based companies and their foreign subsidiaries but also to foreign companies that are registered with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission. Management of internal controls centralizes the documentation of internal controls and assessments of control design, efficiency, effectiveness, and management reporting to support companies in their SOX and other internal control initiatives. The scheduling functionality and workflow-supported issue remediation ensure on-time disclosures and reduce internal communication and administration expenses related to compliance. Predefined and customizable management reports provide managers, as well as internal and external auditors, with an overview of the state of internal control. Audit information support This function offers new roles that support two different business audit approaches: - An account-oriented approach that provides a balance sheet, an income statement, and segment reporting, as well as internal activity allocation and a consolidated financial statement - A process-oriented approach that supports two different processes: order to cash and purchase to order The audit information function provides methodical approaches for business and system auditing, comprising a structured collection of preconfigured evaluation programs. The audit information function is the external or internal auditor s toolbox within an environment, providing online controls and data export functionality to specialized auditing software. This function has been enhanced to offer a more complete suite of preconfigured business audit functionality. The enhanced scope of this function includes further components within financial applications, such as asset accounting, cost accounting, cash journal, consolidation, real estate, and treasury, and within operation applications, such as procurement. This functionality lowers risk of internal audit failures, improves ability to satisfy requirements of internal audit commitees, improves quality of internal and external auditing, and improves efficiency of internal and external audits.

6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Management of internal controls: customerdefined fields Management of internal controls: import of thirdparty tests Customers can create their own This function provides the attributes for control-related master following benefits: - It data such as organizational units, improves managerial controls, and processes. In addition, insight into internal controls fields can be added to assessments, analysis and reporting. test logs, issues, and remediation - It improves effectiveness plans. These fields can be made of processes in compliance available in reporting and can help with the Sarbanes-Oxley companies deliver on company-specific Act. requests by auditors. - It reduces risk of failure to comply with the Sarbanes- Oxley Act. This function accomplishes the This function provides the following: - It supports the direct import following benefits: - Lower of third-party test results of control cost of compliance through effectiveness (from separately licensed the automation of testing testing tools) to support the testing procedures required by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. - Real-time identification of - It enables authorized users to internal control violations or document the results of their controleffectiveness tests, in accordance with - Improved effectiveness of fraudulent transactions a predefined testing procedure. processes in compliance - It provides master data structures that with the Sarbanes-Oxley facilitate data mapping with dedicated Act control testing environments. 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Management of internal controls: upload of master data Management of internal controls: mass assignment of testers New functionality in supports the import of third-party tests of control effectiveness results directly into management of internal controls to support the testing required by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. To implement this functionality, the customer must be using a separately licensed testing tool (Virsa, Approva, SecurInfo) in which the customer's side of the interface has been developed for pushing the test results into management of internal controls. This function supports upload of process- and control-related documentation which is required for compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, Section 404 from other applications, such as Microsoft Excel, with a standardized Extensible Markup Language (XML) interface. This function supports mass assignment of testers to controls (test objects) within a cycle or business unit. This function provides the following benefits: - Lower cost of compliance through the automated process documentations - Real-time identification of internal control violations or fraudulent transactions - Improved effectiveness of processes in compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act This function provides the following benefits: - Improved automation of activities that ensure compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act - Elimination of manual assignment processes - Improved ability to monitor key controls

6.0 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM Management of internal This functionality accomplishes the controls: audit information following: - It enables authorized function interface testers to document the results of their control effectiveness tests in the management of internal controls. - It allows testers to drill down to the individual document level in the audit information function, if necessary, to track down results. The audit information function is a listing of reports that can be accessed through a hierarchically structured menu of reports. Auditing is made easier because data ranges for analysis can be limited and there is no need to learn transaction codes and navigation. This function provides the following benefits: - Improved automation of activities that ensure compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act - Elimination of manual assignment processes - Improved ability to monitor key controls In accordance with the predefined testing procedure, the tester uses a link in management of internal controls to open the audit information function in a Web-based transaction. The tester is taken to a report that has been assigned to test a particular control (in a particular system for example, a logistics control would bring the tester automatically into an audit information function in the business unit s logistics software). Using selection criteria as provided in the testing procedure, the tester executes the report. The audit information report is displayed. The user can drill down to the individual document level if necessary to track down results. 6.0 Analytics FI, CO, AM, FSCM Cost center planning and budgeting: express planning The tester enters the results of the report in management of internal controls. If problems were identified, the tester initiates any necessary remediation activities to fix problems with the control. The express planning self-service composite application combines various services into one convenient and easy-to-use planning application for occasional users such as line managers: - It supports the technical preparation of planning, communication, execution of planning, and review and release of planning details. - It includes planning guidelines for reference. - It provides status overview for planners and planning supervisors. - It integrates planning software such the following benefits: - It lowers the cost of planning and budgeting. - It improves accuracy of plans. - It better enables you to monitor changes and approvals to plans. - It enhances business performance through more effective planning and performance management.

as the former Business Information Warehouse ( BW) component (now part of NetWeaver); the former Business Planning and Simulation Service Select; and Central Component ( ECC) based cost center planning. This functionality helps with planning for the entire organization. It improves the productivity of the entire organization during planning cycles and produce a better audit trail of all associated documentation, e-mail, and unstructured information. Express planning bundles all this into a single application and presents it in a structured way to the user. A status manager tells you at any time what you have done already and what still has to be done. Altogether, this makes planning much easier for the user. 6.0 Analytics 6.0 Analytics FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Cost center planning and budgeting: planning coordination and monitoring Product design cost estimate Express planning is a new collaborative planning function that accelerates planning and is available with road map user interfaces, making it easy to use, even for occasional users. The standard end users for express planning are occasional users: for example, line managers. Express pplanning is not a new planning technology but a new composite function framework. As a composite function, express planning combines various services (such as planning and reporting services, master data maintenance services, and internal service requests) into a single application framework. As a selfservice function, express planning guides users through a series of business process steps to allow them to accomplish tasks related to planning without additional training. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It supports planning the following benefits: - It process organization through lowers the cost of planning collaboration rooms. and budgeting. - It provides monitor with status - It improves accuracy of information on the progress of planning plans. tasks. - It better enables you to - It offers links to jump directly into a monitor changes and single planning task of a single approvals to plans. planning user for example, for - It enhances business inserting comments or approving performance through more certain parts of the planning. effective planning and performance management. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It imports bills of materials the following benefits: - It

my 2004 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM General ledger: data structure standardization and routing from R/3 and any enables manufacturing other logistics software. organizations to make - It imports existing cost estimates from accurate price predictions R/3 software. before production. - It enables you to develop target costs - It allows more accurate and accurately estimate product measurement of product profitability. profitability. - It performs simulations and model - It improves ability to outcomes of your production plans. forecast product profitability. - It enables engineering staff to evaluate cost implications of design decisions. - It improves ability of production staff to evaluate change requests. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides single data structure across various ledgers. - It offers a simplified approach to extend the general ledger functionality as needed. - It lowers the cost of expanding general ledger and training accounting staff. - It smoothes the transition path from the existing general ledger. contains a new crossindustry and cross-country general ledger, which, because of its architecture, provides considerable advantages with regard to transparency and compliance, the option of with industryspecific and customer-specific terms, fast close, reduction of total cost of ownership (TCO) on implementation, and extended options for reflecting parallel accounting standards. The new general ledger functionality exists parallel to the classic general ledger that is the current functionality in R/3 and R/3 Enterprise. Upgrade customers can continue to use the classic functions for the time being. plans to provide a migration from the classic to the new general ledger at the start of unrestricted shipment. In the standard offering, the new general ledger has a data structure that is equally suitable for financial statement reporting, for management reporting, and as a source for analytical applications. This means that customers no longer have to implement additional components with partially redundant ledgers (profit center ledger, cost of sales ledger, special purpose ledger, consolidation staging ledger, the following benefits: - It simplifies data management. - It enables more flexible consolidated reporting and analysis. - It eliminates need for manual postings to various ledgers.

my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 Financials Financials Financials Financials Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM General ledger: extensions General ledger: document online split General ledger: real-time integration from controlling General ledger: parallel accounting Fast close support industry-specific ledger) in addition to the general ledger, as was the case in R/3 and R/3 Enterprise. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It allows organizations to add dimensions to general ledger as business evolves. - It offers an extensible general ledger in which standard data structure is used. - It maintains existing functionality from current general ledger. This funcitonality accomplishes the following: - It simplifies the generation of financial statements and reports on segments or dimensions that are unique to an industry. - It eliminates the need for businesses to create new or special ledgers for each view of the company by allowing documents to be automatically balanced online for any desired view of the company. This functionality automatically reflects any postings from management accounting (for example, cost center allocations) in the general ledger at the appropriate level of detail. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides additional functionality for parallel ledgers to reduce costs. - It enables organizations to use identical interfaces and functions to process all ledgers in the general ledger, as well as to update ledgers individually or simultaneously. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides a simplified overview of the entire closing process through a closing cockpit for period-end closing of individual financial statements. - It offers an intuitive user interface for scheduling and beginning the closing process. - It enables reconciliation of open items and intercompany balances in general ledger accounts. - It supports loading of intercompany data from non- software through a the following benefits: - It quickly modifies general ledger to fit business needs. - It reduces requirements for technical migration or training. - It eliminates the need to maintain separate ledgers. the following benefits: - It supports transparency and fast closes. - It simplifies the ability to report by industry-specific requirements. - It enables greater internal control when generating industry-specific financial statements. the following benefits: - It eliminates need for a separate reconciliation ledger. - It eliminates reconciliation processes between financial and managerial accounting. - It increases the opportunity to close monthend books faster. the following benefits: - It reduces manual postings to individual ledgers. - It enables greater efficiency of accounting staff. - Its document numbering improves internal control for managing parallel ledgers. the following benefits: - Reduced errors through transparency and support for compliance through a concise overview of the closing status and remaining tasks - Significantly reduced time to reconcile intercompany activities - Improved employee productivity and reduced costs

6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM General ledger: document online split simulation General ledger: periodend closing tax accounting General ledger: periodend closing new interface. There is an increasing worldwide demand by companies management, as well as external institutions, such as regulators and stock exchanges, to reduce time spent on closing the books. software supports the fast and efficient creation of accurate and transparent financial statements by means of application integration, process automation, comprehensive reconciliation, and collaboration functionality. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It offers functionality to the following benefits: - simulate the result of an online split, Increased transparency of which can be previewed and analyzed postings in the new general before a document is posted. ledger - It allows posted documents to be - Improved usability analyzed with regard to the - Necessity for less configuration that led to the resulting additional customizing to split. support standard - It offers standard customizing content processes such as down for processing special indicator payments and so on transactions, such as down payments and down payment clearings. A program (data retention tool [DART]) creates data files to support the periodic transfer of value-added tax related data to tax authorities. These files are then sent to the tax authorities. Note: this functionality has also been made available in R/3 and the 2004 version of. The reporting tools available in the audit information function now also support the new general ledger. the following benefits: - Compliance with U.S. tax law (IRS Revenue Procedure 98-25) - Increased reporting and auditing capability This functionality improves business and tax audit capability. 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM General ledger: depreciation of fixed assets General ledger: migration from classic to new general ledger Note: this functionality is also available in the 2004 version of with support package 10. This functionality offers a completely automated depreciation of fixed assets, the following benefits: - even for customers from countries with Greater flexibility and special requirements in this area, such easier compliance, as Japan and Russia. especially for customers in Japan and Russia - Improved compliance with International Accounting Standards (IAS) This functionality supports R/3 and R/3 Enterprise customers in their migration efforts, providing standardized migration paths and programs. This functionality reduces migration effort and costs. Note: this functionality is also available in the 2004 version of with support package 10. If a customer

6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials my 2004 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM General ledger: default derivation of profit center General ledger: enhanced reporting General ledger: statistical key figures General ledger: archiving of documents General ledger: euro conversion General ledger: enhanced interfaces and integration to new general ledger Credit management: credit limit management and control wants to apply as a pilot, he has to create an open source software ticket according to note 812919 and will be provided with further information concerning the next steps). This functionality supports derivation of the default profit center. This functionality offers the following: - Enhanced standard line-item reporting for the fields segment and profit center - Reconciliation report for totals and documents Note: this functionality is also available in the 2004 version of with support package 10. This functionality allows allocation within general ledger through the use of statistical key figures as a basis. This function allows archiving of documents and totals created in the new general ledger. Note: this functionality is also available in the 2004 version of with support package 10. This functionality reduces the need for additional customizing effort. This functionality reduces the need for additional efforts in generating specific reports on standard content. greater flexiblity for allocations within general ledger. This functionality results in better performance of the software and lower maintenance costs. This functionality creates zero balance This functionality improves on document level when changing over audit capability. to euro currency. This functionality offers enhanced interfaces and integration concerning the applications public sector, financial accounting contract accounting, human capital management, travel management, and material ledger (transfer prices). the following benefits: - Improved ability to support public sector accounting requirements - Improved integration with human resources, travel and expense, and contract accounting solutions This functionality accomplishes the Credit Management following: - It provides a portal for credit helps companies manage managers to view, analyze, and their customers credit change current credit limits for lines. Companies can customers. analyze credit information - It enables access and visibility to by using both external and customer credit scores according to internal information to external or internally created adapt the customer scoring standards. to fit the reality. Credit - It displays intuitive view of customer Management makes use of credit risk levels and order limits. the latest components of - It triggers a notification process if an the NetWeaver exception is needed. technology platform, including NetWeaver Master Data Management, NetWeaver Portal, and NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure. Effective credit management can reduce

my 2004 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM Credit management: Requesting external credit information credit information support is completely integrated in Credit Management and enables companies to request information electronically using appropriate Extensible Markup Language (XML) interfaces. Because credit departments often use several external credit information providers, Credit Management can save the information provided by such an interface separately according to the data provider. arrears and prevent potential nonpayment after delivery has occurred. Credit Management meets all the prerequisites for a company-wide credit policy, including automated, real-time decisions and access to both internal and external credit information by all employees. By bringing customer data from various sources together, Credit Management enables centralized customer credit checks and helps companies avoid the risk that customers would use different distribution channels to extend their credit limits. Credit Management can be used by companies in all industries. the following benefits: - Ability to utilize external and internal credit ratings in a single portal - Ability of companies to generate credit standards by using external data - Ability to develop an industry-specific credit rating system my 2004 my 2004 Financials Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Credit management: credit rules automation Credit management: credit decision support This functionality supports credit managers in determining and managing the external and internal credit information on customers information used primarily to set up input parameters for the credit rules engine in, which can make credit decisions or automatically calculate credit limits. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It allows organizations to apply or change credit rules to groups of customers. - It enables automated calculations of credit limits on the basis of new standards or changes to external standards. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It helps credit managers the following benefits: - Ability to change new credit rules without transforming processes - Simplified implementation of new credit rules and standards - Ability of credit department to change standards faster and react to market conditions the following benefits: -

visualize customer credit risks and limits. - It reduces training costs for credit managers through an intuitive user interface. - It allows credit managers to make decisions faster and with greater certainty through improved reporting. Enhanced customer care - Reduced customer credit risks - Reduced levels of bad debt or default accounts my 2004 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM Credit decision support contains, for example, evaluations for analyzing the credit history for a customer and for analyzing payment or purchase behavior. Collections management This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables greater the following benefits: - productivity through a single view of Enhanced productivity of customer accounts receivable status. collections and accounts - It enables individual collections receivable departments managers to set promise-to-pay flags - Increased collections that include automatic workflow triggers rates, lower days sales if dates have passed. outstanding (DSO) - It offers customer-improved invoice - Customer-oriented history overview. approach to the accounts - It simplifies the task of applying receivable process credits to open invoices or splitting payments to multiple invoices. my 2004 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM In-house cash Collections Management provides new functions that enable you to display and process receivables per customer. All open invoices are displayed, with their status, at customer account level, and this enables fast further processing. It is therefore possible to create and monitor promises to pay, to create dispute cases, and to display a detailed invoice history. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides integration with cash management and treasury management features. - It provides new payment orders, flexible routing, and new currency conversion functionalities. - It supports international payments with real-time exchange rate information. In-House Cash is an application for companies that operate globally to manage their intragroup and external payment transactions more efficiently by setting up a virtual house bank. With In-House Cash, international companies can centrally process payments made by their affiliates by netting and consolidating internal accounts. You can use In-House Cash to pay external business partners the following benefits: - Accurate current accounts forecasting for cash managers - Reduced complexity of intercompany netting and payments - Reduced cost of intercompany payments or cross-border settlements

my 2004 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM Dispute management on behalf of the subsidiaries or to forward incoming payments from external business partners to the correct subsidiary. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables organizations to the following benefits: - process receivables-related disputes. Reduced days sales - It supports structuring and outstanding (DSO) streamlining the dispute resolution - Reduced days deduction process and reduces processing time outstanding (DDO) through an electronic communication - Improved liquidity and process. liquidity forecasting - It integrates with accounts receivable, - Accelerated processes sales and distribution, Customer through automation Relationship Management ( CRM), - Improved customer and Business Workflow (including relationships through e-mail notification). targeted inquiries and fast - It supports automatic creation of processing of complaints dispute cases for underpayments - Reduced costs through generated by the electronic account early identification and statement. notification about possible - It offers a correspondence function problems in the logistics that enables standard letters, faxes, value chain or internal and e-mail to be sent automatically. processes - It supports various communication channels, including those through Biller Direct and Collections Management. my 2004 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM Electronic bill presentment and payment ( Biller Direct) Dispute Management contains functions for processing receivablesrelated disputes such as reduced payments and disputes because of a customer action. Dispute Management enables companies to structure and streamline the process of dispute resolution and to reduce processing time. Communication is managed entirely in electronic form. Dispute Management is closely integrated with the accounts receivable function but also with the sales and distribution function, CRM, and Business Workflow. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables companies to deploy Web-based billing, invoicing, account management, and payment services through Internet portals. - It supports Internet-based authorization of automatic payment debits. - It enables collaboration with customers and trading partners without requiring paper- and electronic data interchange (EDI) based payment methods. - It provides a portal for suppliers to view invoices and payments. - It supports the complete communication process from bill the following benefits: - Reduced billing and settlement transaction costs - Improved payment and exception processing - Improved cash flow - Integrated data both in accounts receivable and accounts payable, which eliminates the need to reenter information - Reduced accounting errors on the customer side - Reduced processing time on the supplier side

my 2004 Financials 6.0 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Treasury and risk management Credit management: credit limit management and control presentation to discrepancy handling and final reconciliation. - It eliminates duplicate data entry by integrating data in accounts receivable and accounts payable. - It reduces administrative burden with easy Web-based configuration management. This functionality allows corporate entities to present invoice and account information through the Internet. Biller Direct supports the complete communication process from presenting the bill through dealing with discrepancies to the final reconciliation. Biller Direct also supports the authorization or cancellation of automatic debits through the Internet. This function is of particular interest to the utilities and telecommunication sectors. It also enables the presentment of vendor information in the Web. At the same time, bill recipients can import bill data into their software in Extensible Markup Language (XML) form. There are further improvements in the areas discount, partial payments, and configuration. Biller Direct is an application based on the Java 2 platform, enterprise edition compatible functionality of NetWeaver. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It improves compliance with the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and financial accounting standards (FAS), including hedge accounting, and supports the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and German regulations. - It adds new products for foreign exchange trading. The Treasury and Risk Management application is used to manage financial transactions and the associated financial risk. Common instruments can be handled within the money market, foreign exchange, derivatives, and securities functions, both on the investment side and on the borrowing side. Financial risks can be monitored through the use of risk tools, and a range of derivatives can be employed to limit the risk. the following benefits: - Improved corporate controls, by integrating treasury reporting with finance and accounting - Greater array of transaction support - Elimination of the need to support a treasury management function separate from finance and accounting This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides a list of the following benefits: - It documents that are blocked because of lowers the cost of their credit status. operating your credit

6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Credit management: credit decision support In-house cash - It offers automated work lists for credit limit checks triggered by sales orders and delivery documents. The major processes in credit management that are subject to continuous improvements development in are as follows: - Credit check called by sales orders and delivery documents (delivery and shipping) - Liability updates triggered by sales orders, delivery documents, and billing documents - List of documents that are blocked because of their credit status (blocked sales order list) - Rebuilding of liabilities from sales documents (linked partner messages) Exposure from deliveries is decreased only if the corresponding financial accounting accounts receivable invoice is sent to credit management. This functionality improves reporting and scoring abilities. This functionality release workflows for in-house cash payment orders. You can define the workflow for in-house cash payment orders and assign the possible users for the workflow. department. - It improves productivity of individual credit analysts within your credit department. - It improves ability of credit managers to monitor risks throughout the entire value chain. - It drives down customer credit risk and levels of bad debt. the following benefits: - It lowers the cost of operating your credit department. - It improves productivity of individual credit analysts within your credit department. - It improves ability of credit managers to monitor risks throughout the entire value chain. - It drives down customer credit risk and levels of bad debt. The Business Workflow tool can be used with this functionality. Collections management This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables the definition of the following benefits: - organization-specific rules for collecting Reduced days sales receivables and determining the outstanding (DSO) selection and prioritization of - Increased efficiency in customers to be contacted. collecting receivables from - It presents a work list with prioritized complex transactions or accounts to collections specialists contracts automatically, based on defined - Improved customer collection rules and strategies. relationships - It enables collections specialists to - Ensured collection remove customers from their work list strategy execution with until the resubmission date. automatic creation of work - It allows collections specialists to lists document customer contacts and - Improved user provides an overview of past contacts productivity

to facilitate contact preparation and optimize contact results. - Reduced preparation time for customer contacts 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials my 2004 Corporate Services FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Electronic bill presentment and payment Treasury and risk management A focus area in financial supply chain management is the Collections Management application in which collection specialists can process automatically created work lists to ensure efficient execution. User productivity s were also made to bank statement reporting in the Cash and Liquidity Management application. Specifically, a report was added that helps customers to do better cash management reporting. Collections Management is not licensed separately. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides integration with the Dispute Management application, thereby allowing users to upload or download business documents. - It offers various options for filtering invoices, such as by sold-to party. - It provides a company administrator mode that allows company administrators to create and maintain their users' profiles themselves. Within Biller Direct, disputehandling functions are enhanced, and an additional company administrator mode allows company administrators to maintain their users' profiles themselves. This component is separately priced. the following benefits: - It improves your dispute resolution processes and drives down days sales outstanding (DSO). - It accelerates your ability to manage supplier and business customer relationships. - It improves insight and ability to examine invoice information. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It offers new instruments for the following benefits: - It debt management and asset-backed improves your securities. effectiveness in managing - It provides significantly improved financial instrument and reporting and hedge-accounting hedging transactions. capabilities. - It improves the accuracy and speed of reporting investment income and losses. - It reduces currency exposure and risk. RE-FX Space management enhanced maintenance of the linkage that connects architectural views (physical structure of a building) and rental objects (the different rental spaces to lease out) to the real estate contract. the following benefits: - Better management of the allocation and utilization of space - Enhanced transparency of vacancies in the space utilization - Faster creation of rental objects and related contracts

my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services RE-FX Rental vacancy management This functionality enables managers to assign the reasons why a vacancy has occurred (and the date on which it occurred). RE-FX Rent adjustments This functionality allows rent adjustments to be made according to representative lists of rents and comparable objects. RE-FX RE-FX Service charge settlements Integration to financial accounting This functionality supports metered consumption for the apportionment of service charges if meters are assigned to settlement units or pooled spaces. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables easier retrieval of related open times by using the realestate contract number in the incoming payment transaction. - It enables open items to be easily distributed into multiple installments. - It allows assets to be created and assigned directly from buildings and properties. - It facilitates reporting, revenue, and cost planning on real estate objects by allowing real estate master data to be easily assigned to individual sets. Until this release, the financial accounting functions used for real estate related transactions were not able to reflect the specific information important for real estate. Now the number of the real estate contract is included in the incoming payment transaction. Also, the tenant account is displayed in standard reporting for financial accounting. In addition, you can record an installment agreement in the software by splitting an open item in financial accounting into smaller amounts later on. RE-FX Reports and invoicing This functionality accomplishes the following: - It includes new reports for the following benefits: - Analysis of condition changes by reasons - Easier assignment through automatic setting of change reasons, depending on the adjustment method during the adjustment process the following benefits: - Higher legal reliability of rent adjustments through automation of the calculation procedure - Increased revenues through improved usage of adjustment opportunities the following benefits: - Improved distribution of consumptions through the assignment of meters to pooled spaces - Enhanced settlement possibilities as a result of a one-, two-, or three-level hierarchy of meters for the settlement units the following benefits: - Easier posting of incoming payments by better selection function - Time savings through automatic generation of installments - Simplified creation and assignment of assets - Faster selection of specific parts of a real estate portfolio the following benefits: -

6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services plant maintenance (costs on Enhanced analysis options maintenance orders), asset accounting for joining data from the (depreciation of real-estate objects), Real Estate and controlling (costs on internal orders Management application for real estate objects). with data originating from - It allows rent invoices to be printed other from the periodic postings function and applications dispatched to tenants (Note: Line items - Simplified creation of on the invoice are grouped together, invoices to real estate and the invoice number is based on the contracts real estate document.) RE-FX Real estate search This application enables the following: - Search for offered objects (vacant objects) on the basis of the prospect s property requirements and general prospect data - Creation of a contract offer, when a fitting real estate object is found, by copying all relevant prospect and rental object data to the offer document - Monitoring of contract offer approvals or rejections and creation of the accompanying correspondence for property managers Real estate search is a functionality that was not available in previous releases. It supports the lease-out process. In real estate search, you collect the prospect s requirements for the property that the prospect wishes to rent, as well as all data on the prospect in the real estate search request. the real estate manager with enhanced insight into demand for property and own supply, and it optimizes the occupancy levels within the manager's real estate portfolio. The process is automated and integrated to master data and contract management processes, and it allows for accurate occupancy reporting. RE-FX Land use management This functionality enables management This functionality supports and viewing of public law related information found in cadastral and better decision making and business insight. property registers about parcels of land and properties, as well as related rights and encumbrances, such as rights of ways and contracts for usage and sales. (This functionality has been released only for Germany). RE-FX Condominium ownership association (COA) management Condominium ownership association (released only for Germany) accomplishes the following: - It provides real estate managers with a separate book of accounts per real estate and enables real estate managers to manage various such associations on their behalf. - It enables viewing of specific master data such as mandates and management contract. - It supports regularly scheduled processes: > Calculation of event-driven fees > Creation of a proposal for the next year s annual budget > Final settlement of costs to the owners This functionality enables more efficient management of condominium ownership associations.

6.0 Corporate Services In comparison to standard property management, the condominium ownership association functionality focuses on the management of communities of owners per real estate. The community gives the real estate manager the power of attorney (mandate) to manage the property and all associated activities. RE-FX Adjustment measure This functionality enables the following: - Using the adjustment measure, the real estate manager can set new rents or increase rents for any rental objects and, on the basis of this action, make a rent adjustment. - Adjustment measures are especially suited for adjusting conditions and notifying tenants when the adjustment is based on the following: > Modernization measures > Expert opinion > Special assessments for condominiums (condominium ownership association) Adjustment according to modernization is considered by German organizations as a legal requirement. Organizations profit from an earlier, faster, and safer increase of revenues and return on their (modernization) investment. Additional management costs are reduced. 6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services RE-FX RE-FX Integration to financial accounting Service charge settlements In general, you can use the adjustment measure when rental conditions for objects are to be adjusted through a particular adjustment method, and an adjustment for these conditions should be calculated. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It adapts one-time posting the following benefits: - transactions and templates to standard Optimization of integration financial accounting interfaces to better with other parts of meet the needs of the real estate ERP (such as controlling manager. and plant management) - It utilizes the accrual engine to post - Increased efficiency accruals and deferrals to the correct through automated periods for expenses and revenues processes from real estate contracts. - Better compliance with - It offers tax summarization for the (local) legislation and summarization of tax lines, which is taxation requirements in required in some countries, such as the area of real estate Italy and Austria. This compresses all tax postings sharing certain criteria into one line. - It allows input tax distribution in accounting objects for real estate to meet taxation requirements, thereby avoiding time-intensive manual checks and transfer postings. - It integrates with public sector contract accounting to allow for unified open-item accounting in the public sector through real estate processes, while being able to transfer these documents to general ledger accounting. Because of local law, organizations in some countries have to calculate, in This functionality enables organizations to ensure

6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services my 2004 End-User Service Delivery RE-FX RE-FX RE-FX RE-FX FI, CO, AM, FSCM Localization support: Germany addition to the service costs, the that taxation requirements apportionment loss risk, while are met and to avoid timeintensive work on manual executing service charge settlement. This functionality is a legal requirement checks and transfer and was not available in previous postings. releases. This functionality includes the following: This functionality enables - Data retention tool better compliance with (DART)/Grundsätze zum Datenzugriff (local) legislation and und zur Prüfbarkeit digitaler Unterlagen taxation requirements in (GDPDU) compliance (reporting the area of real estate. support for tax authorities) - Land use management - Condominium ownership association Localization support: Italy This functionality calculates the This functionality enables following: - Imposta comunale sugli better compliance with immobili (local property taxes and fees) (local) legislation and - Imposta di registro (registration tax) taxation requirements in - Posta di bollo (stamp tax) the area of real estate. Localization support: Austria Localization support: Switzerland Business unit analyst role testing 123 This functionality calculates the following: - Condition adjustments (Austrian real estate, 1/15 adjustment) - Service charge settlement (current occupancy principle) - Correspondence (according to Austrian real estate template) This functionality enables better compliance with (local) legislation and taxation requirements in the area of real estate. This functionality accomplishes the This functionality enables following: - Creation of better compliance with Einzahlungsscheine mit (local) legislation and Referenznummer (ESR) (reference taxation requirements in numbers) in credit postings of vendor the area of real estate. contract - Service cost settlement (calculation of heating material consumption; refer management fee to vendor and invoice/document printing; exchange of data tapes in individual heating cost settlement; results of meter reading for consumption of energy) - Correspondence (including forms that are released by the state of Switzerland) This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides monitors to track aggregate key figures for a business unit and identify budget overruns, postings that exceed a given threshold, and unusual postings. - It offers hierarchical reports to help visualize the relationships between profit centers, cost centers, and orders in the business unit and to facilitate navigation through large numbers of items, such as information for multiple cost centers. The business unit analyst is typically part of the management team for his or her unit with responsibility for the financial health of the unit. The business unit analyst monitors a the following benefits: - It improves productivity for the occasional user by making it easier to find all the relevant reports for his or her business unit and to access the reports without filling out a selection screen. - It helps analysts focus on the information that matters, by allowing them to set rules to help them monitor key figures, budgets, and individual postings. - It makes it easy to verify and examine the selected

6.0 End-User Service Delivery FI, CO, AM, FSCM number of financial and operational key information and perform or figures for his or her business unit and request adjustment reports these figures to senior postings if necessary. management. This analyst also has an - It helps analysts visualize advisory role to the line managers in the relationships between his or her business unit, explaining the profit centers, cost postings to them and communicating centers, and orders in the with the back office. The business unit business unit and helps the analyst is a key player in the planning user see how costs roll process and coordinates the handover through these structures. to the back office and to corporate - It provides a framework planners. He or she is a supporting for the planning process player in the fast close process, and access to the planning monitoring the key figures for the data entered by the line operational processes, reporting managers. anomalies to the back office, and - It supports collaboration signing off the figures for his or her unit between the business unit when postings are complete. All analyst and the managers. organizations have business unit analysts, although the key figures monitored can differ significantly between industries. Business unit analyst role This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides monitors to track aggregate key figures for a business unit and to identify budget overruns, postings that exceed a given threshold, and unusual postings. - It offers hierarchical reports to help visualize the relationships between profit centers, cost centers, and orders in the business unit and to facilitate navigation through large numbers of items, such as information for multiple cost centers. Within the release 6.0, the solution has been redesigned to help analysts to monitor their business unit and collaborate more effectively. The new work center approach provides the business unit analyst with a list of alerts each morning that show depending on rules for exception handling set by the analyst key figures that have exceeded a threshold, cost centers that are over budget, unusual postings, and so on. From here, the business unit analyst can drill down into the details behind the posting and start collaboration services with, for example, the cost center manager responsible for the high variances. In the event of errors or changes in the organization, the analyst can use formbased processes to initiate a correction posting or request a change: for example, to a profit center or cost center in his or her area. All formbased business processes have been reimplemented to use Interactive Forms by Adobe software. the following benefits: - Improved business productivity through automated alerts and exception handling - Improved decision support and employee productivity - Increased quality of employee support and project management through better access to budgets and project status information - Better usability and enriched user experience

A separate work center focuses solely on the planning process allowing the analyst to set up a collaborative planning process to organize all tasks associated with planning. This includes ad hoc planning tasks and the guided express planning application that leads the managers through the process of planning head count, costs, equipment, internal orders, and other costs. As the managers submit their data, the business unit analyst can monitor their responses and check the results both in total and individually, returning the work item to the manager for further work: for example, if the planned travel costs exceed the organization guideline. my 2004 Analytics FI, CO, AM, FSCM Briefing book An additional work center shows the analyst the master data in his or her area of responsibility, and a dedicated analytics work center provides access to all the reporting applications that the analyst works with. This application has been expanded in to include projects in addition to the profit centers, cost centers, and orders available in the 2004 version of. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It makes it easy to create custom reports, summarizing specific data in the Balanced Scorecard application for different audiences. (Note: Users simply drag and drop desired data from the scorecard into the briefing book, tailoring contents for particular audiences as needed while keeping other Balanced Scorecard data confidential.) - It enables PC-based download that can be forwarded to the relevant parties either as an Adobe PDF file or as a printout. the following benefits: - Less time needed to prepare reports based on data from the Balanced Scorecard application - Personalized collection of data from Balanced Scorecard - Many options for printing and viewing through the use of Adobe PDF files In general, the strategy management process communicates strategies and objectives throughout the entire organization through the Balanced Scorecard. It supports value-based management, management by objectives, and strategic initiatives. my 2004 Analytics FI, CO, AM, FSCM Legal and management consolidation: integration of statutory and Reporting for strategy management has to consider the individual needs of the recipients of the different types of information. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It delivers time- and version-dependent assignment validity This release extends the existing online analytical processing (OLAP) based

my 2004 my 2004 Analytics Analytics FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM management consolidation Legal and management consolidation: consolidation of investments Legal and management consolidation: data collection capabilities from statutory and managerial consolidation units. - It provides specific definition of first consolidation/divestiture accounting dates through consolidation unit combinations. - It supports customer-defined attributes of consolidation unit combinations. The process of consolidation encompasses extensive functions for the efficient collection of data from internal and external accounting and for ensuring the necessary quality and details of the data. These functions offer an almost fully automatic creation of consolidated financial statements for a broad spectrum of accounting methods in compliance with various generally accepted accounting rules. External and internal group reporting can be built on a basis of shared, consolidated data, so that timeintensive reconciliation and synchronization of different sets of data are no longer necessary. Thus, an efficient, integrated consolidation process for statutory and management reporting contributes significantly to realizing a fast-close strategy. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It supports goodwill in local currency. - It provides automatic treatment of method change between equity method and purchase method. - It supports organizational changes. - It enables amortization/write-up of investments. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables users to read data from an integrated business data warehouse. - It supports conversion of data from business data warehouse or flat file. - It enables customers to use customized calculations to update data before the consolidation process. - The cut-and-paste functionality can be used to move data from third-party software to consolidation software. consolidation functionality in various places with regard to usability, compliance with International Accounting Standards (IAS) and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), and a reduction in total cost of ownership (TCO). The concepts of full integration of statutory and management consolidation are extended with new functionality and s in the area of master data. The user interface is more clearly structured. The logic of consolidation of investments has been extended to automatically support new requirements for IAS and IFRS. Furthermore, this release significantly facilitates the integrated collection of data from subsidiaries. the following benefits: - It improves cost of generating consolidated financial statements. - It improves accuracy of financial reporting. - It enables more effective treatment of investment accounting. - It supports consolidated financial reporting for complex, multinational organizations. the following benefits: - Less complexity in the relationship between operational software and the consolidations software - Ability to link third-party accounting software to the consolidation software - Improved usability, which accelerates the consolidation process and improves close times - Support of consolidated financial reporting for complex, multinational

my 2004 Analytics 6.0 Analytics 6.0 Analytics 6.0 Analytics FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Legal and management consolidation: reporting features Legal and management consolidation: consolidation of investments Legal and management consolidation: interunit profit elimination in transferred assets Legal and management consolidation: interunit profit elimination in inventory the following features: - Configurable task logs - Simpler configuration of reporting for data matrices - Database list with report logic - Extensible Business Reporting Language (XBRL) outbound interface (support for multiple periods) This functionality is characterized as follows: - New alternative posting logic provides enhances flexibility in handling goodwill in investment consolidations, including decrease of ownership. - Handling of manual goodwill entry and correction is facilitated. Automated functionality for the elimination of interunit profit in transferred assets is characterized as follows: - It enables the elimination of interunit profit in transferred assets, including functionality for the treatment of transfer chains. - It creates automatic postings to correct ongoing depreciations. This functionality enables elimination of interunit profit in the following: - Inventory supply chains, while all interunit profit along the supply chain is considered within a consolidation group - Inventory in upstream, downstream, and horizontal transactions Also, delivery between purchased and at-equity units can be handled in various combinations. organizations the following benefits: - Quick and handy ad hoc analysis of preliminary consolidated data - Easy creation of performance-optimized reports - Information tailored to the user s needs the following benefits: - Increased automation during the creation of consolidated financial statement and thus reduced closing times - Support of legal compliance - More flexibility in goodwill treatment the following benefits: - Lower total cost of ownership (TCO): no manual elimination documents ncesessary to execute consolidation steps - Faster closing: predefined business logic for automatic postings, which eliminates recurring adjustments after a manual parallel posting - Better compliance as a result of standard business logic for new legal requirements from International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) 3 the following benefits: - Lower total cost of ownership (TCO): no manual elimination documents necessary to execute consolidation steps - Faster closing: predefined business logic for automatic postings, which eliminates recurring adjustments after a manual parallel posting - Better compliance as a result of standard business logic for new legal requirements from

6.0 Analytics 6.0 Analytics my 2004 Corporate Services FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Legal and management consolidation: master data integration Legal and management consolidation: migration support Employee Self- Service: for travel and expenses International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) 3 support for reading master data from an InfoObject the following benefits: - (the smallest information object in the Streamlined maintenance former Business Information of master data in integrated Warehouse [ BW] component, scenarios which is now part of NetWeaver), - Lower total cost of either from its physical storage in the ownership (TCO): no former BW or through a remote programming of dowload connection from its origin. interfaces necessary to It also provides the ability to load create files that are master data that has been extracted readable by SEM: from BW with traditional business BCS flexible file upload intelligence extractors into the functionality SEM: BCS workshop. Moreover, it allows you read an info object's master data, not from physical storage in BW, but online through remote connection from the original location in R/3 or Central Component. Improved migration support from the enterprise controlling component for the following benefits: - It consolidation to Strategic lowers cost of migration Enterprise Management is and shortens project characterized as follows: schedules. - Downloadable reports can be used to - Facilitated project create flat files (for chart of accounts; organization: the migration financial statement items and project can, as a first step, hierarchies; subassignments; and fully concentrate switching consolidation units, consolidation the consolidation software groups, and hierarchies) that can be without the need for uploaded with standard methods for subsidiaries to change their master data file upload in the data extraction method; SEM: BCS workshop. switching the data - Flexible file upload of SEM: BCS extraction method can be has been enhanced to read transaction done as a second step data files in formats created by periodic whenever it fits best in the extract or special ledger rollup. project schedule. - Statistical items can be recalculated in C/I; no reopening of already closed periods is necessary. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It integrates maps to support hotel and airport searches, indicating exact distances to destination addresses. - It integrates airline and car rental logos, hotel images, and amenities information in availability searches. - It integrates external Web content regarding up-to-date visa, health, and security information, as well as important travel news. - It integrates company-specific texts on and links to important policy information. - It maintains personal traveler profiles through new self-service functions. the following benefits: - Easy and direct access to a range of travel services for employees - Improved user acceptance - Minimized training costs and decreased help-desk calls - Reduced administrative costs

my 2004 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services FI-TV FI-TV Enhancements in mobile travel expenses for ERP Self-service for managers (approvers) and travel arrangers - It supports subsequent assignment of imported credit card data to expense reports. - It provides several options, including country-specific versions. Travel Management provides a fully integrated end-to-end trip life-cycle management solution to improve processes in pretrip approval, online booking, expense reporting, and data warehousing. This process optimization results in a reduction in indirect travel costs, lower travel agency transaction fees, enhanced supplier negotiations, and higher company policy compliance. For, the major new travel management development is in the area of people-centric user interface redesign, increasing user productivity for travelers as self-service users. The s include the redesign of the user interface and the integration of external services such as maps and visa, health, and security information. The Mobile Time and Travel application has been enhanced as the following benefits: - follows: Reduced costs, by - Usage with the 2004 version of eliminating paper-based ERP provides the following: processes and double data > Redesigned, step-by-step guided entry data user interface, in complete - Speedier billing cycles for analogy to the new online self-service services rendered, which application increase cash flow > Enablement of offline users to attach - Increased visibility of credit card receipts directly to expense accounting data reports > Receipt itemization functions to break down complex receipts such as hotel bills - Usage with version 6.0 of provides the above plus: > Travel requests and travel plans that are created in the online application can be brought down to the offline application > Ability to customize for long-term travel (for example 90-days-rule) > Integration with Collaberation Projects (cprojects) application This functionality accomplishes the following: - Enhanced process support for managers (highlighting of policy exceptions, instant access to most important travel data, details of business trips in summarized Adobe form, and one-click approval function) - Personalized access for travel arrangers the following benefits: - Accelerated approval processes and reduced indirect costs - Increased transparency about anticipated costs for managers - Faster access to data of other employees for team assistants

6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Pretrip budget availability control in funds management Travel planning and online booking Expense report management and reimbursement This functionality enhances availability control of funds management budgets at the stage of travel requests (estimated amounts) and travel plan (exact costs of online booking). The direct hotel connects functionality includes a generic interface based on NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure ( NetWeaver XI) to computer reservation software for hotels. The low-cost carrier airlines and Web fares functionality includes a generic interface based on NetWeaver XI to consolidator systems for low-cost carriers or Web fare with full integration into Travel Management booking processes: - Services not registered in central reservation software (for example, taxis, shuttles, and so on) can now easily be requested and their booking status can be updated in a travel plan. - Processing status at the agency side can now be made transparent to users, and communication dialogue between traveler, travel preparer, and agency is improved with an additional status field. - Enhancements for car rental bookings include special drop-off and pickup addresses, as well as handling of negotiated fares differentiated by organizational area. - German Rail (NVS) bookings through the Amadeus global travel distribution program have been integrated in the Web-based self-service user interface. - Country-specific airline fares such as Lufthansa s pay as you fly program can now be booked online. - A new program for the offline synchronization of Amadeus bookings allows for a much faster update of bookings that have been changed outside the software for example, by the travel agent. No additional system components are needed any more. the following benefits: - More accurate availability control before start of a business trip, at the time of pretrip approval - Elimination of manual availability control and paper-based processes the following benefits: - Increased flexibility in using different reservation software in the booking process - Lower total cost of ownership (TCO) and implementation costs through service provider specific integration support - Lower direct purchasing costs based on access to a wider range of low-price offers - Significantly reduced costs for interface modifications - Streamlined and more efficient back-office processes for the interaction of traveler and travel agency/shared service centers This functionality includes the following: - New print forms as Adobe PDF forms, the following benefits: - facilitating the configuration and Improved usability for adaptation of the look and feel online and offline travel (including the option for bar codes and management business company logos) of Adobe PDF forms scenarios technology - Significantly reduced

my 2004 my 2004 Product PM Development and Manufacturing Product PM Development and Manufacturing Mobile Asset Management version 2.5 Maintenance cost budgeting - Automatic distance calculations effort for entering travel between start-of-trip and end-of-trip and expense data, as well locations based on geocoding services, as associated simplifying audit-proof and tax-proof administration efforts, as mileage calculations paper receipts become - Credit card feeds through the generic obsolete interface in NetWeaver Exchange - Increased flexibility in Infrastructure ( NetWeaver XI) that importing credit card capture itemized hotel folio statements information into the to populate expense reports software and, - Integration with Collaboration Projects subsequently, reduced (cprojects) to capture travel expenses total cost of ownership on project budgets (TCO) - New user interface for mobile travel - Reduced cost of expenses compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act through deployment of standard, fast-toimplement, compliancerelevant workflows The Mobile Asset Management application assists the field service and the field maintenance technicians in performing their daily activities at customer sites and within plants with all the needed data synchronized onto their handheld devices. Also, the field technicians have the ability to capture related data on their devices and then synchronize up with the back-end software. This functionality enables the following: - Radio frequency identification management - Order management, in which time/material confirmation resides on device until final confirmation - Measurement and counter reading: condition recording - Technical object management: display characteristics/classification data for equipment and functional locations - Usability improvements > To show links on the front end for activated business add-ins (BAdIs) > To display counterinformation for warranties and measurement points related to equipment and functional locations With maintenance cost budgeting functionality, offers a crossapplication component for product lifecycle management that enables planning a maintenance cost budget. Maintenance cost budgeting in general This functionality enables easy and fast access to timely information from everywhere, anytime: - Field technicians can resolve problems faster and better. - It reduces travel time and lowers costs per work order. - It eliminates or decreases the need for paper-based orders. - It enables easy access to the latest stock information based on actual usage. Technician can enter data directly on site, which results in the following benefits: - Data entry accuracy (for example, notification or counterreading data) is improved. - Data entry is direct, and there is no loss of data. - Clerical time spent in the back office re-entering field information is reduced. - Total cycle time from job completion to invoice submission is reduced, with associated cash flow benefits. The benefits of an appropriate budgeting tool include the following: - Driving down maintenance costs - Better data integrity than

6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services PM Mobile Asset Management version 3.0 helps you budget for all costs for maintenance, inspection, and repair of technical assets. In the stricter sense of R/3 software, maintenance cost budgeting helps you budget for plant maintenance order costs. Maintenance cost budgeting provides the following planning scenario with preconfigured standard entries: - The history-based scenario is derived from records, and the budget categories are combined in one overall planning scenario. In this scenario, you can create records with the preventive, planned, and unplanned budget categories. - The ad-hoc (hist) scenario is - The maintenance plan scenario is zero based, and in it, you can create records only with the "preventive" budget category. - The task list scenario is zero based, and you can create records only with the "planned" budget category. - The ad hoc (plan) scenario is zero based, and you can create records with the planned and unplanned budget categories. This application provides new functionality: - Push alert for technicians - Ability to change orders (created in the back end) - Geographic information system (GIS) integration - Signature capture - Free-sorting functionality - Ability to create and change equipment and functional location - Usability improvements > Confirmation process (time and material) > Optimized inspection result recording > Enhanced search functionalities > GUI for laptop/tablet PC with spreadsheet-based budgeting - Access to your plan data from everywhere with a user-friendly front end (Web interfaces) - Ability to reflect changes in the near future - Flexible and accurate reporting - Integration with other enterprise software - Automatic extraction of data from back-end software - Reduction of the budget preparation time - Continuous planning with standardized, automated budget processes - Better transparency of the budget planning process - Support of planning as a company-wide effort, with a great number of managers and employees contributing - Analytical applications, in addition to use as a tool the following benefits: - It alerts technicians to download new work orders or notifications. - It improves productivity. - It improves data capture quality. - It provides better information for route planning. - It improves the user's experience. - It improves and expedites the billing cycle. PM Basic order view The new basic order view functionality comes with 19 predefined subscreens that can be used to create order types tailored to customer-specific needs, including the following: - Responsibilities - Technical reference object - Dates (basic or enhanced view) - Description (short or long text) - Operation data (with selected fields or detailed data) - Partner overview (basic or enhanced view) - Address data with dynamic tabs, depending on the number of available addresses - Service-specific data (being invisible for plant maintenance orders) - Benefits of the new basic order view are summarized as follows: - Improved flexibility of user interface - Adjustability to business needs and different users - Faster identification of important data - Speededup data entry

6.0 End-User Service Delivery PM Maintenance technician role Notification data (if customized for the order type to be visible) - Table control with operations - Ability to switch between old and new GUI at any time This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides an overview for orders and notifications, including technical object details. - It enables technical structure display with the option to access further relevant information and services. - It offers recording of orders, notifications, and confirmations, including after-event order recording for emergency work. - It provides easy access to analyses and reporting. the following benefits: - Easy maintenance processing ensures high user acceptance - Information is always up to date, which leads to time savings and error reductions. - Personalization of the information improves efficiency and effectiveness. The maintenance technician role provides a simple user interface for maintenance execution, request processing, confirmations, and reporting, and it offers a display of the asset structure. my 2004 This role is used mainly by maintenance technicians. They need to get an overview, always up to date, of the maintenance work assigned to them, and they also need to check the status of the technical assets for which they are carrying out maintenance work. In addition, they need a tool that easily makes timely confirmations of the work they have done. Product Development and Manufacturing PP Documentary batch This functionality accomplishes the following: - It supports batch tracking, eliminating the need to manage batch inventory. - It manages all required data such as material-tracking numbers to support legal regulations. Industries such as consumer products and automotive suppliers face legal requirements to store where-used data of materials used for production and delivered to customers. Enabling recall actions is mandatory and a critical issue for these industries. Although this could be achieved by managing of all relevant materials in batches, this approach has a negative impact on data volume and subsequent processes. When batch management is turned on, entering a batch number becomes obligatory for all goods movements. Furthermore, inventory postings must be executed on batch level; therefore, costs for inventory management may drastically increase. the following benefits: - It fulfills the tracking requirements of many industries without the need to manage inventory in batches. - It simplifies internal logistic processes. - It allows traceability of material flow with minimal total cost of ownership (TCO).

Documentary batches are integrated in the following processes: - During goods movements documentary Batches can be entered. - Manufacturing orders In contrast to real batches, entering documentary batches is possible only at back-flush and not when maintaining manufacturing orders (for example, in component overview). - Entering documentary batches for deliveries Delivery transactions must be enabled for entering documentary batches during picking. - Entering documentary batches for transport orders Entering documentary batches must be enabled during transport order confirmation. my 2004 End-User Service Delivery PP Plant or production manager role Radio frequency transactions are not in scope, inasmuch as end-customers already use their own transactions or screens. In task and resource management, mainly radio frequency transactions are used. Therefore, entering documentary batches is not intended. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides overview of the current status of key performance indicators. - It provides exception alerts. - It offers real-time event management. - It enables easy access to integrated decision support. This role offers aggregated information for managers that are responsible for production processes in one plant or different production plants in one company. The information is provided on one portal page in a structured format. The portal technology offers easy integration of information from different sources and easy handling. The plant production manager role improves efficiency and effectiveness through the personalization of the information to accomplish the following: - Proactively respond to production events and exceptions to preclude fire fighting - Look up and analyze pertinent key performance indicators to continuously improve operations 6.0 End-User Service Delivery PP Production supervisor role The role addresses plant managers in all industries and in companies of all sizes. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It supports production personnel in order to respond to exceptions and unforeseen changes in demand or supply and to deliver superior production performance through higher transparency. - Manufacturing intelligence dashboards provide configurable entry pages that display alerts, key the following benefits: - You can execute production plans on time and within budget. - You can find and resolve production problems quickly and proactively with real-time exception detection and workflows.

my 2004 my 2004 Product PS Development and Manufacturing Product LO Development and Manufacturing Management of collaborative projects Collaboration with partners and suppliers performance indicators, manufacturing content, work lists and production confirmations, and decision support. Dashboards have also been created for the new maintenance technician and quality inspector roles to further leverage transparency and promote collaboration on the shop floor. This functionality is characterized as follows: - It offers support for collaborative product development processes from the planning phase to product (or process) validation on the basis of stage-gate process methodology. - It offers flexibility in sharing information with partners through Microsoft Project integration and uploads, in creating project snapshots and simulation versions, and in assigning substitutes for tasks when someone is on vacation. - It includes usability s such as an easy-to-customize interface and the ability to perform mass maintenance of task lists and checklists. - It allows sharing of information during bidding scenarios by setting up collaboration groups and linkage to single folders within a collaboration group. To succeed with today s complex product development efforts, companies need powerful solutions that allow them to employ sophisticated project management methods that drive speed and quality. They also need easy-to-use and easy-toimplement tools that enable engineers to work together to innovate, share knowledge, and track progress. What they do not need, however, is the traditional stand-alone project management point solution, which tends to lead to islands of information and extensive integration efforts later on. In short, companies need a different approach: one that enables them to manage product development projects more effectively today, without limiting their options for tomorrow. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It supports sharing a variety of objects such as documents, bills of material (BOMs), technical assets, and custom-defined objects with the ability to view two- and three-dimensional - You can monitor, measure, control, and improve production performance. the following benefits: - It helps you develop more reliable products in less time at lower cost. - It reduces subsequent nonconformity costs. - It enhances business integration. - It provides one instance within enterprise core component. the following benefits: - It enables users to work collaboratively on product design and development data in virtual teams with

my 2004 Product LO Development and Manufacturing Trials in recipe management: new product and development introduction process support objects. external partners. - It ensures data confidentiality and - It reduces costs and time integrity of objects shared with external necessary for traveling and partners by providing secure meetings. collaboration through encrypted files. - It reduces number of - It is integrated with other errors as a result of functionalities (such as document improved communication. management and BOM processing) - It increases capacity as a and with collaboration tools such as result of faster time to WebEx online conferencing. market. - It simplifies access for occasional - It secures information users through integration with Windows during external Explorer. communication with contains a Web-based external partners. cooperation application from Product Lifecycle Management ( PLM), referred to as the Collaboration Folders (cfolders), which is dedicated to promoting collaboration and exchange of information on the basis of a structured format between groups of people who need to work together but are regionally dispersed. For example, the collaboration functionality supports cooperation between all the internal and external people involved in product development in a single joint work area, whereas the competitive functionality supports setting up separate areas for rival suppliers taking part in a competitive bidding procedure. new product and development introduction (NPDI) process support with recipes, specifications, formulas, materials, and production operations generated by the recipe development environment. The new trial management function integrates the definition, planning, execution, and monitoring of trials during development in the laboratory, in pilot plants, and in handover to production phases. It integrates access to all information and objects required, including quality inspection definitions and stability studies for the trials, directly in one work environment: the Recipe Management application. Integration in pilot plants and production lines was enhanced to allow fully automated transformation to production planning process instruction recipes and even creation of process orders to allow ease of use of process management objects normally handled only by production. The new functionality enhances the existing recipe development scenario and implements a new trial management. The new function helps research and development staff in the following the following benefits: - It enhances usability by integrating product, formula, and quality definition and execution into one environment. - It speeds up development process through user guidance and automation of development steps.

ways: - It enables managers to have control and an overview of ongoing product development and testing at product/recipe level. - It enables developers to manage the trial and formulation process in an easier and more guided way, including the creation, variations and grouping of trials. Without exiting the application environment, a developer can define a trial and the corresponding quality inspections and stability studies and can execute and review the trial results in the application. my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 Product LO Development and Manufacturing Product LO Development and Manufacturing Product LO Development and Manufacturing Product LO Development and Manufacturing Trials in recipe management: recipe creation Trials in recipe management: trial development The new s address the development process throughout the whole process industry for consumer products, chemicals, and pharmaceuticals. The new recipe creation feature enables rapid access to objects and functions, as well as providing support for faster calculations. The new function improves control of the trial development process through integration with software for project management and workflow. Trials in recipe This simplifies access to management: information information for trials in recipe access management (including existing recipes and formulas). Document management: simplified document management The simplification of document management allows employees to accomplish the following tasks: - Manage personal and group document structures and documents - Check documents in from Microsoft Windows Explorer through the dragand-drop functionality - Check documents in and out directly from Microsoft Office applications - Manage classification and object links To work efficiently in all kinds of business processes, such as project management, research and development, production, and service, comprehensive document management is a necessity. In many cases, it has turned out that tight integration between business documents and other business objects, such as materials, equipment, projects, customers, and production orders, is key for companies using document management, and it ensures highquality processes and saves a lot of This new function improves efficiency in recipe creation. This new function speeds up the trial development process. This simplifies the development process and improves usability and productivity. This simplifies the handling of documents in software for document management and provides the following benefits: - It reduces the document maintenance time. - It facilitates team and group work through group structures. - It offers intuitive handling. - Its use requires minimal training, even for occasional users.

my 2004 my 2004 Product LO Development and Manufacturing Product LO Development and Manufacturing Document management: internal and external document access Handling documents made easy by improvements in the interface time. Only a direct link allows the people who are involved in any kind of document-based business process to directly find and access the relevant documents without leaving their usual software environment. The improvement of internal and external document access accomplishes the following: - It provides internal and external users with transparent, up-to-date documents such as design drawings, contracts, and original application files through enhanced document-sharing features in the document management function. - It facilitates searches for documents in separate repositories by connecting document management and knowledge management functions through a knowledge management connector in the document management function. This newly comprehensive, detailed information can be a profit-bringing production factor only if the information is available quickly and securely to the various decision makers. Electronic search techniques reduce labor costs when multiple or different storage software systems are involved. To reduce the time spent evaluating the documents, the documents need to be clearly presented. It should be possible to integrate the information determined into the editing processes rapidly. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It allows users to access and edit computer-aided design (CAD) document structures directly in CAD software or from within the application, enabling the inclusion of new product information in business processes at an early stage. - It offers enhanced viewing options, including tabbed pages for different views and the ability to view two- and three-dimensional files (such as drawings and CAD models) in a single view. - It provides ease of use through automatic document structure, visual version control, and mass checkin/checkout. - It supports a variety of industrystandard CAD software systems, including Pro/ENGINEER, CATIA, and Autodesk Inventor. The CAD desktop is the CAD engineer s workplace on the R/3 This provides Web-based help for engineering and logistical processes, which secures and facilitates cross-system collaboration. It provides the following benefits: - It allows efficient document retrieval across multiple repositories. - It provides generic services for the integration of documents into your business processes. - It ensures higher quality because of data transparency. - It reduces access times and labor costs for routine tasks, which results in lower costs. the following benefits: - It provides a single access point to all computer-aided design (CAD) documents (multi-cad back-end integration). - It supports enterprisewide collaboration with concurrent engineering and versioning. - It enhances comfort and flexibility in using the CAD documents. - It reduces costs through an enhanced application process.

my 2004 Product LO Development and Manufacturing Document management: product modeling for configurable products side when working with a direct CAD integration to manage CAD parts and assemblies. Information about new products is thereby introduced into other business processes at an early stage. Product modeling for configurable products accomplishes the following: - It eases maintenance of variant configuration models in software by means of an integrated user interface. - It ensures tight integration with the existing logistics processes of variant configuration (planning, pricing, order processing, availability checking, production, fulfillment, billing, and financial reporting) in. - It offers ease of use through model tree visualization, a dependency wizard, and drag-and-drop features. the following benefits: - It makes it easy to define and maintain product models that require variant configuration. - It ensures a consistent view of the product in sales orders, production plans, and profitability analysis. - It reduces costs of master data maintenance. - It enables faster ramp-up for product modeling experts. my 2004 Product LO Development and Manufacturing Document management: guided procedures Offering off-the-shelf products is no longer enough in many industry sectors. In order to meet all of the customers' needs, a company must be able to constantly expand its product offering. Variant configuration addresses this challenge and ensures the necessary product data can be managed efficiently. Variant configuration is fully integrated into planning, pricing, order processing, availability, production, fulfillment, billing, and financial reporting. This ensures a consistent view of the product in sales orders, production plans, and profitability analysis. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It allows the creation of customized electronic forms that have the same look and feel as traditional paper forms but can be completed and submitted online. - It supports flexible business processes by allowing employees to change the workflow dynamically, which ensures appropriate handling of exceptions. Companies that want to optimize their workflows often face the same challenges: - Too much time and money is lost in inefficient, often paper-based process execution. - Form-based paper processes are often distributed manually to one or more IT systems. the following benefits: - It improves business processes by replacing inefficient, paper-based processes with automated business workflow processes. - It enhances responsiveness by allowing workflows to be modified as needed. - It reduces administrative burden.

my 2004 Corporate Services LO Data import from external content providers - Current business process workflows cannot be altered during running time by fully visualizing the ongoing workflow status through a generic Web user interface. - Business process workflows are not enabled for ad hoc collaboration. - Employees without specialized software skills lack a flexible tool to set up and execute business processes in their daily work. To eliminate these limitations, companies must provide their employees with far-reaching access to all information and processes that enable employees to take informed, timely, and appropriate actions and ultimately to meet the goals of the organization. Original workflow software has proved too static for these purposes. It can be changed ad hoc during running time only with great effort, and it offers little transparency for users or process managers in collaborative scenarios. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides an Extensible Markup Language (XML) based open interface for loading content to the Environment, Health & Safety ( EH&S) application. - It enables a defined interface syntax and semantics to be made available to interested providers. - It ensures seamless integration with third-party content providers through content-provider certification. Previously, EH&S itself did not provide a standard interface for uploading content to the specification database. Third parties provided interfaces for proprietary purposes only. The aim of the open content connector in EH&S is to enable customers to import any EH&S data (typically regulatory data, United Nations listed substances, physical/chemical data, and so on) from a content provider. the following benefits: - The standardized interface avoids product-specific interfaces and related maintenance costs. - The openness of the interface has a positive impact on content pricing. - Content creation is flexible and fast. - Organizations from all types of industries are helped in better complying with regulations. 6.0 Product Development LO Development collaboration with EH&S addresses all industries with a demand for scientific and regulatory data on substances and chemicals. This means both producers and users of products relevant to the environment, health, and safety. This functionality is characterized by the following: - Bill of material (BOM) the following benefits: -

and Manufacturing partners and suppliers (Collaboration Folders) comparisons (single level) and tracking Better and more effective of changes external collaboration for - Integration of product structure product development and management with integrated product engineering and process engineering (ippe) by - Increased ROI through an allowing the following functions: extended set of object > Export a filter or focus in ippe to types that can be managed Collaboration Folders (cfolders) by Collaboration Folders > Change attributes of ippe nodes and (cfolders), such as variants in cfolders improved collaboration on > Import changed data back to the computer-aided design ERP application (CAD) and product - Export of computer-aided design structure data (CAD) assemblies from CAD desktop - Support for high-tech to cfolders industry requirements - Web distributed authoring and - Reduction in costs for versioning (DAV) based connectivity training, user between the knowledge management administration, and function and cfolders software integration - Easy access for occasional users through integration with Microsoft Windows Explorer - Work center for development collaboration - Introduction of a business partner user type to restrict user information visibility based on organization membership, such as supplier company, and the user administration for organizations by external users - Support of manufacturer part numbers (MPN) and reference designators as objects in cfolders (both mainly used in the high-tech industry) cfolders is a vertical collaboration application that enables users to work on design and development projects in virtual teams with external business partners. cfolders supports the collaboration on product structure data (for example, BOM and product variant structures) and product-related documents (for example, technical drawings and CAD models). By the integration of cfolders in BOM management, it is possible to publish product designer (product structure management with ippe), document management, and CAD desktop product (structure) information from the application to cfolders so that external users can access this data. After the collaboration is finished, processed results from cfolders can be incorporated in a reconciliation process in the product structure in. The external users do not have direct access to the application

6.0 Product LO Development and Manufacturing Easy document management during the collaboration. This makes the data in more secure, because external data is transferred from cfolders to only once it has been checked, and you can trigger this import only from the application. In the new release, Easy Document Management is enhanced with the following developments: - Extended authorization concept with authorizations on folder and document level - Thumbnails - Extendable user interface for customer-specific s - Mass change of document status by setting a common status to a list of documents - Document localization with ability to get a list of folders in which a document is referenced - Digital signature on reaching a certain document status - Enhanced offline access with ability to create documents and folders offline and availability of more metadata offline - Enhanced search function - Viewing and redlining with the engineering client viewer the following benefits: - Easy-to-use, intuitive authorization handling - Simplified and fast document management and maintenance - Reduced access times and labor costs for routine tasks - Better support for critical work areas through digital signatures - More flexibility for customer-specific implementations 6.0 Product Development and Manufacturing Product ideas are often collected in the form of drawings or descriptions. Functional specifications for a new product are often compiled with customers in a specification catalog. In specifications, technicians describe how they want to implement the product. Additional documents are created with increasingly sophisticated information technologies, such as computer-aided technology (CAx) systems, digital mock-up, and the Internet, and models are integrated in the product design phase from the very start. This massive influx of information, which can take on enormous dimensions even in the design phase, has to be managed in a variety of formats throughout the complete life cycle of a document. LO Document management In the new release, Easy Document Management is enhanced with the following developments: - Extended authorization concept with authorizations on folder and document level - Management of folder and document the following benefits: - Easy-to-use, intuitive authorization handling - Simplified and fast document management and maintenance - Reduced access times

structures - Thumbnails with integration of thumbnail viewing within search function and labor costs for routine tasks 6.0 Product LO Development and Manufacturing Computer-aided design (CAD) integration (CAD desktop) Product ideas are often collected in the form of drawings or descriptions. Functional specifications for a new product are often compiled with customers in a specification catalog. In specifications, technicians describe how they want to implement the product. Additional documents are created with increasingly sophisticated information technologies, such as computer-aided technology (CAx) software, digital mock-up, and the Internet, and models are integrated in the product design phase from the very start. This massive influx of information, which can take on enormous dimensions even in the design phase, has to be managed in a variety of formats throughout the complete life cycle of a document. The new release enhances the computer-aided design (CAD) desktop with the following developments: - Preview functionality (thumbnails) - CAD data export to Collaboration Folders (cfolders), Microsoft Excel, and Extensible Markup Language (XML) files - Display of Easy Document Management structures and CAD documents - Support for working with folder structures, facilitating team and group work - Delete assistant function to delete a full work directory - New replace component function in CAD view to replace one component with another component, which can be found through integrated search functionality The key factor for successful product development is the integration of CAD and business software from a holistic, process-oriented standpoint. It means resolving technical and organizational stovepipes. Research and development teams inside your organization need an environment that supports them in their daily task of designing products. Using CAD modeling functions alone does not achieve overall product success. Companies must reduce the time from the following benefits: - Reduced costs through an enhanced application process - Simplified handling of computer-aided design (CAD) documents through a single point of access to all CAD documents - Reduced need for multiple interfaces by enabling viewing of files from different CAD software systems - Increased user productivity with faster and more efficient access to CAD documents

6.0 Product LO Development and Manufacturing 6.0 Product LO Development and Manufacturing Engineering change management Integrated product and process engineering the initial product idea to product shipment while meeting customer expectations of product quality. Even the very best product idea will not be a commercial success if developed in an information silo, which causes it to reach the market too late. The traditional strategy for solving product data management issues in a CAD design department was to establish CAD-centric product data management processes. However, this solved the problem only for processes focused on extremely specialized CAD design tasks. It did not help CAD design departments support the complete product development process. The new engineering change management features are as follows: - Extended undo capability by including bills of material (BOMs) and variant configuration objects - Increased flexibility for change processes engineering change requests and engineering change orders - Support for new object creation for engineering change requests and engineering change orders - Customer screens and customer extensions for the object management record Integrated product and process engineering (ippe) brings new innovations, such as the following: - Collaboration Folders (cfolders) integration with export of product structures to cfolders and import of product structures from cfolders - Project management software integration - Archiving of ippe objects - Improved reporting, variance scheme, and dependency editor, as well as filter and sorting functionality - Use of release management framework the following benefits: - Faster correction of errors - Faster processing of change requests and change orders - More flexibility for customer-specific implementations the following benefits: - It makes it easy to define and maintain product models that require variant configuration. - It ensures a consistent view of the product in sales orders, production plans, and profitability analyses. - It reduces costs of master data maintenance. - It enables faster ramp-up for product modeling experts. 6.0 Product Development Enhancements in the area of ippe focus on integration and reporting. New integration options to link data with cfolders and Microsoft Excel are offered. Also, extended services and archiving for engineering change management are available. LO Variant configuration The s in the product modeling engine for variant The variant configuration provides

and Manufacturing 6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services configuration enable a wizard-based definition of product variant for sales. LO Basic data and tools Enhanced Whirlwind I (WWI), a modified version of Microsoft Word that is called from the software to edit a document template, is provided for more flexible document creation and generation. LO Dangerous goods management Because of the integrated architecture of the basic data and tools of Environment, Health & Safety ( EH&S), consistency of the data exchanged between all the software enabled business processes is ensured automatically. Redundant data maintenance, therefore, is not necessary. Up-to-date data and documents are always available when needed. EH&S basic data and tools can be implemented by every organization that handles chemical or nonchemical substances in any form, whether it is in manufacturing, processing, storage, transportation, or end applications. This functionality enables you to accomplish the following tasks: - Release of packaged products during the product definition process - Extended dangerous goods checks for packaging and product release in sales, shipping, and transportation processes The dangerous good management functionality in Environment, Health & Safety ( EH&S) supports all processes connected with the manufacturing and distribution of dangerous goods and also ensures compliance with the valid national and international legislation. To comply with the different packaging regulations worldwide, it is necessary to record the essential packaging information in the corresponding EH&S master data and to use this information within the dangerous goods checks in transactions in different software. With EH&S dangerous goods management, it is possible to record relevant legal packaging information in the specification management and the dangerous goods master, which mainly allows combinations of packaging codes, and the management of packing instructions and special packaging more usability. the following benefits: - Reduction in administrative efforts for managing large basic data documents - Enhancement in the flexibility to specify the output content of the documents the following benefits: - It simplifies handling of the product release process. - It supports compliance with packaging regulations throughout the main business processes.

6.0 Corporate Services provisions. LO Waste management This functionality supports flexible data collection based on disposal data and facilitates the creation of variants in reports of country-specific waste lifecycle analysis, including error handling for unconsidered disposal documents. Environment, Health & Safety ( EH&S) waste management supports you in handling waste disposal processes, complying with national and international regulations and laws that are relevant for generation, transport, and disposal, and in distributing costs proportionally among the departments within the enterprise that generated the waste. the following benefits: - It reduces administrative efforts to comply with country-specific regulations by simplifying data collection for waste lifecycle analysis. - It allows the user to adapt the layout of the report to his or her individual needs. 6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services LO LO Industrial hygiene and safety Occupational health management The waste life-cycle analysis is an analysis of type, quantity, and location of wastes recovered (recycled) or disposed of. The results of the waste life-cycle analysis must be submitted to the authorities on request. The analysis is often used for creating a waste management concept. This functionality allows the definition of customer-specific information fields to record all relevant data in measurements projects. Environment, Health & Safety ( EH&S) industrial hygiene and safety supports industrial hygiene and safety professionals and occasional users of software, enabling them to obtain and store information on work areas, any substance or material used or stored in the organization, exposure situation, status of safety measures, incidents and accidents, health and safety briefings planned and held, and technical equipment (functional location, equipment). This functionality accomplishes the following - It triggers the proposal of health surveillance protocols on the basis of multiple parameters, extensible by customer-specific definitions. - It enables flexible adjustment of appointments between the organization s medical health center and employees by integrating the calendar in the software in the scheduling process. - It speeds data entry for physicians (during diagnoses) and health center staff (during repetitive brief consultations and examinations) This functionality enables better and easier compliance with national laws and customer-specific regulations concerning industrial health and safety. the following benefits: - Organizations can use preventive medical management with less administrative effort and more transparency. - Enhanced process flexibility facilitates legal compliance and enables a customer-specific health care engagement.

through several user interface s. - It enables assignment of any kind of documents (physician letters, laboratory results, x-ray films, and so on) to employees, medical services, or examinations, through the document management functionality. - It provides flexible and customerspecific documents that are based on a new business add-in (BAdI) for document generation. 6.0 End-User Service Delivery my 2004 Corporate Services LO QM Development collaboration Trial-specific stability studies Occupational health management in Environment, Health & Safety ( EH&S) supports general employee occupational healthcare in an enterprise, as well as the planning and execution of special health surveillance protocols and the treatment of injuries. It is also smoothing the path for implementing a full-scale health-care management process in the enterprise. This new role-based portal for development collaboration is characterized as follows: - It provides a work center for collaboration in product development and design. - It supports communication with external partners and suppliers, including data export and import to the Collaboration Folders (cfolders) application and browsing of the product structure. - It integrates cfolders notifications into the work center s universal work list. An essential part of product development in process industries especially in the food and beverage industry is the planning, execution, and evaluation of laboratory trials. Closely linked with this process is the need to conduct stability studies with samples that originate from the different trials, including quality inspections. The given solution performs the following tasks: - It handles inspection characteristics, trials, and trial-specific stability studies. - It allows direct access to trial-related quality inspection data from the recipe management workbench. - It ensures more efficient initiation of stability studies by using building blocks with fixed planning parameters such as time intervals, storage conditions, and testing plans. This new role-based portal for development collaboration improves productivity and collaboration with partners and suppliers and ensures data consistency. the following benefits: - It simplifies and accelerates the planning of stability studies through the use of reusable building blocks, user guidance, and automation of planning steps. - It integrates qualityrelevant information into the product development process. - It supports Goods Manufacturing Practices requirements of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration.

my 2004 my 2004 Corporate Services Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services QM Quality assurance and control: sample management This new process enables the integration of stability studies into recipe management and trial management and includes the use of building blocks during stability planning. Enhancements in sample management are as follows: - Users can archive the physical samples related to inspection lots with their sample drawing information. - Samples can be flexibly selected for archiving, as can various display functions for archived samples. - The sample master record is extended with new fields. - Sample-oriented work lists can be created. The new development enables the archiving of physical samples and completes the sample management capabilities of the quality management application. This function is of special importance in the process industries, in which the quality management application is used as a laboratory information management system and a huge number of samples and sample drawings are handled every day. The same applies to service laboratories, which provide sample analysis on customer request. the following benefits: - It improves usability and user acceptance. - It enables better software performance by removing mass data from the software, which results in less real-time data. - It supports Goods Manufacturing Practices requirements of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration. QM Quality improvement This functionality enables the maintenance of quality manuals with the Easy Document Management application. The NetWeaver Business Intelligence component is used to analyze stability studies. This functionality helps businesses address the ongoing challenge of quality improvement. QM Quality assurance and control: multiple specifications The enablement of multiple specifications within the quality management functionality in Product Lifecycle Management ( PLM) supports the entire inspection process, from planning and testing through batch classification and determination to certificate processing. The business demand arises from the fact that individual specifications may exist for different customers or countries, whereas production follows a make-to-stock protocol (non customerspecific). Thus, the resulting batch could be within the internal organization specification but may not be suitable for a specific customer or country because of individual specifications. For example, exporting a drug to Japan instead of Europe may require two tolerances for a specific the following benefits: - t improves operational efficiency in industry scenarios requiring quality inspections that are based on multiple specifications. - It facilitates the allocation of production batches to customer orders, through integration with inventory and batch management.

6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services QM QM Quality assurance and control: operation completion Flexible reporting functionalities characteristic because of different legal requirements. As part of the laboratory information management system offerings within the quality management function of PLM, the functionality provides the following: - Different inspection specifications for an inspection characteristic, such as customer-specific requirements or requirements specified by pharmacopoeia, authorities, or countryspecific legal requirements - Determination of the suitability or admissibility of a batch on the basis of multiple specifications In order to offer an additional control mechanism and provide status the following benefits: - information on inspections, an Increased visibility into the operation completion is required. After inspection process processing the characteristics in an throughout the organization inspection lot, an authorized user must - Increased efficiency in the be able to complete the operation laboratory that is, to set some kind of a status on - Improved control operation level (for example, if all mechanism, which covers inspections for this particular operation Good Manufacturing are completed). This information is Practices and other U.S. often required in making a usage Food and Drug decision, in order to check preceding Administration (FDA) steps. regulations (especially Functions for the following tasks are important for companies provided: with commercial and - Planning and executing a decision to industrial laboratories for complete an inspection operation by example, those in laboratory personnel regulated industries such - Assigning textual information and a as pharmaceuticals or valuation to an inspection lot consumer products) - Triggering follow-up actions after operation completion - Making operation completion information available for usage decisions The new tool allows the creation of analytical reports on quality data combined with meaningful graphical representation, which can be adjusted individually in the following ways: - Selection of inspection lots, inspection characteristics, and inspection results - Evaluation of actual and archived data - Comparison of results for several characteristics - Representation of results in table view or as graphics, including the option to view several tables or graphics in one screen - Definition of table and graphical layouts for customization - Determination and display of key figures (customer-specific) the following benefits: - It increases visibility of quality data throughout the organization. - It enables implementation of improved quality control mechanisms. - It decreases total cost of ownership (TCO) by providing relevant information without the need to export quality management data to other components such as NetWeaver Business Intelligence.

- Control charts without detailed planning - Export of selected data and integrated visualization of external statistical results (for example, from a statistical subsystem) Extended reporting functionalities for quality management results are necessary for simplifying the evaluation process. The integration aspect also plays an important role: the functionalities are available within the operational system with online and also with archived data. A business warehousing function cannot always fulfill this requirement. 6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 End-User Service Delivery The new flexible reporting tool enables you to create reports and analytics on quality management data in combination with meaningful graphical representation. These graphics can be adjusted according to the customer s and user s needs. The tool also offers the capability to export the selected data through the quality management statistical interface. QM Audit management The audit management functionality is versatile in areas such as quality the following benefits: - It management, environment decreases total cost of management, safety and security ownership (TCO) by management, financial revision, and providing the relevant risk management. Completely selfcontained, functionality as part of the it does not require any other NetWeaver software and has been transferred from technology platform, which Customer Relationship is included in the license Management ( CRM) to for. NetWeaver and enhanced with - It is a flexible and easyto-use additional functions (such as links to tool that assists in the former Business Information compliance with legal Warehouse [whose functionality is now requirements universally. part of NetWeaver] and quality notifications). The audit management functionality supports the entire audit process for all types of audits. It is now available as part of NetWeaver for all components and offers integration with the former Business Information Warehouse. New features include the following: - Creation of quality notifications out of audit tasks - Archiving of audits - Object links to other components QM Quality inspector role This functionality accomplishes the following: - It offers work lists for inspection lots, notifications, tasks, and production orders, including technical the following benefits: - It minimizes cost of defects and product recalls.

object details. - It allows recording of results, defects, notifications, and confirmations. - It provides easy access to analyses and reporting. - It reduces cost of quality compliance. This role addresses quality inspectors in different industries and processes. A quality inspector is usually responsible for the following tasks: - Processing of inspection lot - Drawing of samples - Recording of results and defects (values of inspection characteristics, nonconformity data) - Running of quality control charts - Recording of problem notifications - Usage of calibrated test devices - Usage decision making for in-process inspection lots (optional) 6.0 Corporate Services PS Project and portfolio management with software These tasks entail highly repetitive steps and time pressure, which requires fast data entry. Personalized work lists for inspection lots, notifications, and tasks (for exceptions) are expected. A simple user interface also helps fulfill the tasks. software helps companies with all aspects of project and portfolio management. With Collaboration Projects (cprojects), the project system function, and Resource and Portfolio Management ( RPM), the customer is empowered to set up comprehensive project and portfolio management. This solution can be leveraged in various industry scenarios and software, such as new product development and introduction (NPDI), enterprise IT portfolio management, or for Professional Services. The customer benefits from software that includes all aspects of integration into (logistics, human resources, and financials), collaboration with internal and external partners, and promoting project visibility at all stages. Scalability and an open, extendable framework are also provided. cprojects, which is an integral part of, is a powerful and easy-touse application that enables operational project management with a phase-based approach focusing on resources and project roles, documents, and collaboration. 6.0 Corporate Services PS Project planning: management of Collaborative Projects RPM provides the foundation for strategic portfolio management by combining financial, strategic, and operational aspects of the entire portfolio (projects, products, assets, services, and so on). Collaborative Projects (cprojects) is a Web-based application that supports collaborative phase-based project the following benefits: - Improved communication

management processes, especially in with international or IT, research and development, and external partners through a professional services with a focus on secured Web-based deliverables, roles, and commitments. application It provides the following: - More efficient and reliable - Flexible project structuring by phases, projects from improved with gates, tasks, checklists project modeling, - Process standardization through the scheduling, and use of templates visualization for example, - Creation of tasks and checklists faster time-to-market in directly below project definition level, product development which enhances flexibility in project - Support for industry planning processes such as new - Java-based Gantt chart, which offers product development and additional features such as printing introduction (NPDI) - Bottom-up scheduling functionalities that include all types of relationships, such as cross-phase relationships, and the setting of constraint dates - Project versioning, simulation, and status reports - Integration of business processes with the project system function, ERP Financials solution, document management functionality, and quality management functionality 6.0 Corporate Services PS Project planning with project system function You use this application to plan and structure a project. By using project management methods, you obtain a better overview of the activities to be carried out and the effect they have on the schedule. Moreover, project planning helps you to estimate the amount of work required to carry out the project. The following tasks are accomplished: - Transfer of material components from the product structure of integrated product and process engineering (ippe) to the project system function - Usage of the progress analysis workbench as a single point of entry in order to analyze the progress of your projects and input their earned value percent complete - Open project system ability to upload and download customer-specific fields on work breakdown structure (WBS) elements and activities, prevent download of networks that are marked for deletion, and transfer networks only (without WBS elements) - New functions in the easy cost planning function: aggregation of items by summarizing the values of items at lower levels and archiving ad hoc cost estimates A new project structure overview (transaction CN41N) is available in the project information system. This the following benefits: - Prototyping and production are based on flexible and configurable integrated product and process engineering (ippe) structures. - The progress analysis workbench improves performance and data accuracy. - The project structure overview is very user friendly. - The budgeting and cost planning process is optimized. These s increase the flexibility and integration of the project system function, thereby leveraging existing investments.

6.0 Corporate Services PS Resource and time management with Collaboration Projects overview is a user-friendly alternative to CN41 that provides you with the most important functions for viewing your project information. You can perform the following tasks: - Navigate to detail screens for the project objects, where you can edit the master data - Select a number of projects and then release them simultaneously; you can adopt the budget or plan values in these releases, either with their full amounts or by using a release percentage to weight the values, or you can limit the adoption of the values to one fiscal year Collaboration Projects (cprojects) is a Web-based application that supports the following benefits: - resource management processes as Improved resource follows: planning and allocation - Assignment of multiple resources to - Better support for service one role, even in overlapping time and consulting projects as intervals, which allows more than one a result of integrated employee to be responsible per project functionalities for external element service procurement - Optimization of the resource planning process by reconciling resource demands between the strategic layer ( Resource and Portfolio Management) and cprojects - Ability to allocate resources to projects on the basis of their availability - Procurement of external services and material for projects, using Supplier Relationship Management - Integration with time recording (crossapplication time sheet) - Integration with the Travel Management application, which facilitates the settlement of travel expenses for a project element 6.0 Corporate Services PS Project execution with Collaboration Projects You use this application to plan the necessary quantitative and qualitative resources for a project and allocate project roles to suitable employees from your company. The employees you have chosen can record hours worked on the project afterwards. Collaboration Projects (cprojects) is a Web-based application that supports project management execution processes, based on a project planning, as follows: - Project dashboard, which enables a quick overview on my projects, my tasks, and my checklist items to be confirmed, as well as relevant key figures - New standard object links for example, to production orders This functionality enables more effective and transparent project execution as a result of integration with other business processes, such as time confirmation, and improved communication between project members.

- Issue lists to facilitate tracking and delegating of issues that arise during a project - Flexibility to share information with partners through cfolders integration and improved internal collaboration through virtual room integration 6.0 Corporate Services PS Project accounting with Collaboration Projects You use this business process to carry out a planned project. You can monitor and control how the project is executed by using a number of different mechanisms that enable you to react quickly to any variations from the project plan. Collaboration Projects (cprojects) is a Web-based application that supports project accounting processes: - New multilevel controlling by means of work breakdown structure (WBS) hierarchies from project system for flexible accounting of projects in cprojects, which enables the following: > Bottom-up planning and top-down budgeting, billing, and results analysis, aggregating values and quantities along the hierarchy > Either manual creation of WBS hierarchies in the project system function and assignment of WBS elements to tasks, phases, or roles, or automatic creation of WBS hierarchies and assignments based on cprojects structures; alternatively, assignment of internal orders as accounting objects > Calculation services that create cost estimates based on the assigned cprojects structure (while costs are stored on WBS elements) the following benefits: - Ability to leverage existing project system function investments - Better transparency and insight, with more flexible capabilities to control project-related costs - Increased efficiency through simplification of the settlement of projectrelated costs as a result of enhanced integration - Settlement of costs originating from various sources: > Actual costs derived from recorded and confirmed time on cprojects tasks through cross-application time sheet integration > Costs derived from procured services > Costs derived from project-related travel 6.0 End-User Service Delivery PS Project self-service only for Collaboration Projects You use this business process to plan, budget, and monitor the costs and revenues of a project. cprojects provides accounting integration in ERP so that all costs and revenues for a project can be collected. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides quick access to all projectrelated information and tasks. - It offers work lists for projects, tasks, the following benefits: - It increases transparency of project performance and issues.

my 2004 my 2004 Corporate Services Human Capital Management FI-TV HR Available Web-based environments (Web Dynpro development environment) Recruiting: talent relationship management checklist items, and issues and - It pushes tasks to the enables triggering of relevant selfservices from those work lists. work lists. user through configurable - It covers most common Collaboration - It speeds up Projects processes with self-servic administrative work. The new Web-based employee selfservice software for travel management the following benefits: - includes redesigned and easy-to-use Improved user adoption functions for the following: across end-to-end - Travel requests processes - Travel plans (online bookings) - Reduced training efforts - Travel expense reports - Non travel-related expense reports - Imports from corporate credit card programs - Traveler profiles In addition, the functions can also be used by travel arrangers and team assistants, handling the application on behalf of their team members. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It includes talent relationship management, sourcing, evaluation, hiring/reassigning, and retention. - It offers enhanced search-and-match functions. - It provides clear classifications of candidates by ranking. - It includes active talent-bonding features such as event invitations and newsletters. Talent relationship management is the forward-looking approach of managing relationships with candidates on a longterm basis and documenting their qualifications and potential. The basis for relationship management in recruitment is the talent warehouse, an advanced talent database in which the skills and preferences of potential employees are managed. Extensive search-and-match functions to analyze the talent warehouse simplify navigation in the database and make the recruiter s job of managing prospects and finding suitable candidates for open positions significantly easier. The talent selfservice applications with which candidates and applicants access the talent warehouse, as well as the internal functions in the E- Recruiting application, are delivered in flexible user-friendly interfaces. Candidates can use the talent warehouse to register their interests and skills, as well as communicate their wish to be considered or informed about open jobs. On the basis of this the following benefits: - Intuitive user interface and new features for candidates, including employee referrals - Ability to find suitable high quality candidates to fill positions quickly - Ability to discover hidden potential in the talent pool

my 2004 Human Capital Management HR Recruiting: applicant tracking and requisition management information, companies can use personal information services to establish and maintain long-term relationships with all of the candidates who have entered their details in the talent warehouse. Companies can then submit specific job offers, and applicants can access their own job offers to apply. The talent warehouse in E-Recruiting provides a wealth of possibilities for maintaining good and active relationships with candidates. This functionality supports candidate rankings by recruiters, as well as candidate and application administration. This functionality also provides comprehensive applicant tracking with support for the following tasks: - Creating and submitting job requirement profiles for approval - Viewing candidate short lists and profile and application data - Responding to questionnaires about candidates the following benefits: - Extended support for handling both unsolicited applications, as well as advanced searches for ideal candidates - Improved efficiency of hiring managers - Reduced sourcing and administration costs my 2004 Human Capital The recruiter functionality offers everything that recruiters need to make their administrative tasks easier, including functions that noticeably increase speed, efficiency, and costeffectiveness throughout the entire application process. Support from the recruiter is available right from the job requisition stage and continues throughout the process of closing job offers. Job postings can be directed into internal channels and transported via a human resources functionality Extensible Markup Language (XML) interface to external job boards. The recruiter functions regulate incoming applications, both postal and online, through workflow-supported processes. The recruiter automatically triggers application rejections, invitations to interview, and interview appointments, and it coordinates the activities of all parties involved in the recruitment process. A powerful document management process manages electronic application documents and archives all documents that have been sent and received. The circle of support in recruitment is closed, without hindering the openness offered by the integration options with other functions, such as personnel planning and organizational management. HR Recruiting: analytics This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides a broad range of the following benefits: -

my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management HR HR HR Employee performance management: integration with employee development Employee performance management: attachment processing Employee performance management: appraisal calibration reports and analyses, including Improved decision support standard reports, ad hoc reports, and and control evaluations, based on key performance - More transparency in indicators (KPIs), as well as important matters such as source statistics such as time to fill, offer efficiency versus acceptance rate, interview - Closing of the loop on versus offer rate. your talent relationship - It enables the analysis of various management sourcing strategies and alternative recruitment concepts through comprehensive planning and reporting functions. Access to up-to-date information is crucial for ensuring ongoing optimization of recruitment processes. In this area, the E-Recruiting application reflects s extensive experience in data warehousing. You can use a broad spectrum of reports and analyses that are specifically tailored to the needs of recruitment from standard reports evaluation based on KPIs. Key statistics concerning time to hire and cost per hire are just as quick and easy to ascertain as the effectiveness of all the processes involved in recruitment. This functionality includes the following: - Items of the employee s current development plan integrated into the objective setting document (if the validity period of the item corresponds to the validity period of the objective setting document) - Training courses from the Learning Solution integrated into the objective setting document Previously, objective setting agreements and appraisals were not integrated with individual development plans. This functionality ensures that documents associated with employee appraisals, such as documentation of a certain achievement or notes taken during the performance feedback period, can be added, displayed, and deleted in a Web-based software environment through file attachments. This functionality offers comparative overviews of appraisal results as reports and graphics. the following benefits: - Training and development plan items can be included in the objective setting document. - There is direct linkage between personnel objectives and development and training needs. Extended employee information, such as notes taken during the year, can be linked to the appraisal document. the following benefits: - It supports calibration processes to ensure fairness in employee appraisals and compensation packages. - It provides important decision support for succession management

my 2004 Human Capital Management HR Employee performance management: template management This functionality accomplishes the following: - It allows linking of different appraisal templates to different groups of employees. - It provides appraisal templates that can be customized depending on the job, personnel area, subarea, or home country (in the case of global companies) of the employee being appraised. and individual promotions. the following benefits: - It helps businesses to ensure that employees are fairly and appropriately reviewed. - It speeds up the creation of appraisal documents. my 2004 Human Capital Management HR Employee performance management: template management Employees with different jobs or responsibilities have different objectives, and the appraisal process may also vary. Therefore, companies often use different appraisal templates for different groups of employees. Previously, you could not check in the software whether a template was suitable or permitted for an employee. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It allows the entry of explanations when an appraisal is exceptionally bad or good. - The entry of one value influences the availability of other elements (new elements are included in the document or existing elements are deleted). This functionality enables dynamic reactions on certain entries. my 2004 my 2004 Human Capital Management Human Capital Management HR HR Enterprise learning: integrated collaboration features THIS SHOULD BE LEARNING SOLUTION. EL WAS NOT AVAILABLE UNTIL ECC 6.0 EP2 Enterprise learning: content integration THIS SHOULD BE The current process supports adding or changing values for criteria but does not allow for subsequent events as a reaction on the entered value. However, there are certain situations in which it is necessary to have a dynamic reaction on certain entries. This functionality leverages components of the NetWeaver technology platform to deliver these enhanced collaboration tools for online learning: - Synchronous collaboration (instant messaging, chat, shared contact lists, application, and desktop sharing) - Asynchronous collaboration (team news, team calendar, team tasks, and document sharing) This functionality enables the seamless integration of collaboration and communication tools with the Learning Solution. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables training administrators to coordinate, integrate, the following benefits: - Improved effectiveness of online learning experience - Improved communication and learner interaction - Tutorial support - Document sharing Seventy percent of learning happens outside of a traditional classroom setting. The integrated collaboration capabilities enable learners to collaborate by sharing document, helpful websites, chats, etc., to promote continuous learning outside the traditional classroom setting New internal and external content can easily be integrated. Enables

LEARNING SOLUTION. EL WAS NOT AVAILABLE UNTIL ECC 6.0 EP2 and communicate with external and internal content providers through a Web-based interface. - It allows training administrators to customize teaching and learning situations by using Web services to integrate external functions and services into the learning technology. integration to 3rd party learning services which can include virtual learning sessions, external collaboration tools, externally hosted content, or testing services. my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management HR HR HR Enterprise learning: content authoring THIS SHOULD BE LEARNING SOLUTION. EL WAS NOT AVAILABLE UNTIL ECC 6.0 EP2 Enterprise learning: new layout of learning portal, content player, and test player THIS SHOULD BE LEARNING SOLUTION. EL WAS NOT AVAILABLE UNTIL ECC 6.0 EP2 Enterprise learning: correspondence management The services and functional s enable closer integration between internally hosted and externally hosted training catalogs (external learning management software or virtual classrooms) and between two systems running the Learning Solution. provides an open interface based on simple object access protocol. Externally hosted learning services can be integrated seamlessly through NetWeaver, the foundation of enterprise SOA. Learning services can include virtual learning sessions, external collaboration tools, externally hosted content, or testing services. From the learning portal, learners can book, launch, and cancel courses that are hosted by a third-party provider. The learning progress is then seamlessly transfered from the external system and stored in the learner s record in. New functionality accomplishes the following: - It simplifies authoring the following benefits: - It processes and includes separate views ensures individual learning for subject matter experts and experience. instructional designers. - Instructional designer and - It speeds the development of new subject matter experts can course material through a learning focus their efforts on strategy preview - New wizards, are structuring or creating available to improve ease of use such content in a personalized as a configuration wizard and an import environment. wizard. - Third-party content can easily be imported and reused. - New wizards Improve usability This functionality includes a new layout of the learning portal, content player, and test player for learners. correspondence functions for multiple delivery methods (sending notifications in Adobe PDF format, for example). intuitive navigation for learners. the following benefits: - It facilitates communication with learners. - It streamlines and automates administrative

6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Human Capital Management HR HR HR HR Recruiting: talent relationship management Recruiting: integration within Succession management: redesigned processes Enterprise learning: content integration This functionality accomplishes the following: - Recruiters are able to proactively cultivate specific pipelines of applicants suitable for particular roles within the organization. - Candidate questionnaires enable recruiters to collect valuable information about the qualification of applicants. Included are processes that enable applicants and candidates to selfregister and maintain their information in a talent warehouse. Recruiters have comprehensive functionality to find potential hirees quickly, maintain longterm relationships with individuals registered in the warehouse, and to use advanced applicant tracking and reporting functions. Analytics are also available to measure the effectiveness of the overall recruiting and hiring processes. processes. the following benefits: - Sophisticated talent relationship management that helps organizations find the staff they need quickly and maintain longterm relationships - Faster and more efficient hiring processes This functionality accomplishes the following: - Quick import of new-hire the following benefits: - data into human resources Reduced administrative administrative services and operational costs - Integration of job boards through the - Automated, streamlined NetWeaver Exchange processes that make it Infrastructure component to generate easy to outsource specific postings quickly to multiple Web-based recruitment tasks or the external channels entire recruitment function This functionality enables you to identify and track high-potential employees and define key positions to ensure that key positions can be filled quickly after becoming vacant. Succession management enables an organization to safeguard its key positions and to ensure continuity in leadership. An organization can identify specific positions as key and target specific employees as potential successors. This functionality enables integration of services from external service providers, such as the following: - Receiving learning progress information from external content providers - Using synchronous learning events delivered by third-party conferencing and classroom applications to register for and participate in externally hosted online events directly through a learner portal Enterprise learning provides training, the following benefits: - Minimized business disruption through prompt filling of key positions - Better tracking of highpotential employees and their development the following benefits: - More efficient integration of third-party content - Expanded ability to offer educational offerings

6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Human Capital Management HR HR Enterprise learning: content authoring Employee performance management: appraisal management education, and knowledge to employees to ensure that they have the right skills and information necessary to do their jobs effectively. Integration with development plans, individual objectives, and the employee profile ensures that targeted learning can be delivered on the basis of need and strategy and that skills and certifications gained as a result of the learning are captured. This functionality structures, enables you to provide, and tracks the distribution of information, e- learning (self-paced or synchronous), and classroom training, and its knowledge-transfer and collaborativelearning functionalities keep the workforce prepared for the future. This functionality enables authors to maintain metadata for content and perform searches in the knowledge management functionality of the NetWeaver technology platform to find and reuse content easily. In addition, through integration with enterprise portal knowledge management, it is possible to mark outdated content as obsolete. the following benefits: - Greater productivity with targeted authoring processes - Faster development of new course materials - Greater ROI by facilitating the reuse of content the following: - Ability to restrict access to the following benefits: - the appraisal document per criteria Higher quality of feedback group and criterion per participant, in about an employee s order to prevent viewing of areas of the performance appraisal that should not be seen by - Increased efficiency of certain appraisers tracking and monitoring - Facility to write draft notes in an - Increased manager appraisal that cannot be viewed by productivity with the ability other appraisers until released by the to complete employee author reviews while the manager - Facility to enter explanatory notes is away from the office when the status of a document is changed: for example, from review to final - Offline capabilities for objective setting and appraisal document editing - Detailed action log that can display the following information: > Deleted objectives (which objective was deleted when and by whom) > Changes to objectives (which objective was changed when and by whom; what was changed) > Entry of final appraisal (user who entered; date and time) > Changes of final appraisal (user who changed; date and time) > Additions of objectives (which objectives were added when and by whom)

6.0 Human Capital Management HR Enterprise compensation management This functionality is available for only Germany and the United States. This functionality is characterized as follows: - Conversion to Web Dynpro development environment supports full modification of manager self-service planning sheet and approval processes - Team viewer functionality provides users with the ability to limit the selection of specific groups or individual employees for focused processing the following benefits: - Increased customer modification abilities, to drive a lower cost of ownership - Increased process support, raising manager acceptance, satisfaction, and efficiency Compensation management accomplishes the following: 6.0 Human Capital Management HR Standardization of human resources processes and services - It manages innovative reward strategies such as performance- and competency-based pay, variable pay plans, and long-term incentives. - It simplifies the comparative analysis of compensation packages, through the use of internal and external data. - It enables users to set up guidelines for the enterprise's compensation policy according to the overall strategy through the compensation management functionalities of ERP Human Capital Management. - It changes the guidelines easily in response to changes in the organization's policy. - It supports the combination of fixed and variable compensation components: different employees, departments, and units can be covered by different compensation plans. - It provides an extensive range of options through a budgeting functionality that allows the creation of one budget or a budget hierarchy that reflects the organizational structure. - It offers a job-pricing tool that compares internal jobs with external survey data systematically to determine an appropriate range of compensation for each job. This functionality contains the following: - Preconfigured templates for most important human resources processes such as hiring, organizational change, birth of a child, and termination, which can be adapted easily to an organization s individual business practices (as they are based on Adobe Interactive Forms) - Process browser for detailed search on ongoing and closed processes - Portal role for human resources administrator the following benefits: - Increased user productivity as a result of flexible process flows, flexible user interfaces, and preconfigured templates - Simplified, adaptable processes that can be implemented to meet the expectations and goals of the organization and the needs of users - Increased ability to

6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Human Capital Management my 2004 Sales and Service HR HR HR HR HR SD/LES Payroll and legal reporting: distribution of liabilities United States payroll tax reporting Enterprise learning: redesign of correspondence management Enterprise learning: redesign of follow-up process This functionality accomplishes the automate processes, which following: - Cross-role processing, reduces cycle times and approval handling, attachment costs handling, automatic transfer of process data to digital personnel file, and so on - Integration with Employee Self- Service, Manager Self-Service, and employee interaction center functionality This functionality is available for only Germany and the United States. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It allows you to split up liabilities for posting purposes. - Funds and segments can be derived or put into master data and used for distribution in payroll and posting. Previous tax forms output is replaced by Adobe Interactive Forms. This development of request-based correspondence provides improved process coverage of the correspondence process through the use of a work list based approach and state-of-the-art technology. This functionality improves process coverage of the follow-up process. The process steps of the follow-up process (for example, confirm participation, set passed/failed) can be carried out by different roles according to the user interfaces. Enterprise learning: curriculum s s in the curriculum concept such as sequencing of Webbased training, changing a curriculum, and exclusive use of courses for curricula. Resource-related down payments and billing This functionality accomplishes the following: - It supports creation of down-payment requests analogous to the functions offered by resourcerelated billing. - It enables organizations to bill the requesting company code for services provided through a resource-related the following benefits: - It enhances the funds management functionality - It allows the customer to fulfill information software requirements more easily easier creation and modification of standard tax forms, including the W- 2, state unemployment, and all local forms, thereby significantly reducing the need for IT support. the following benefits: - It facilitates communication with learners. - It streamlines and automates administrative processes. - It improves process support. - It entails the use of stateof-the-art technology (also for form templates). the following benefits: - It provides improved process support. - It streamlines and automates administrative processes by distributing process steps to different roles. This functionality enables more efficient use of the curriculum concept. This feature simplifies billing of services between different organizational units.

my 2004 End-User Service Delivery SD/LES Internal sales representative role billing document. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides overview of the actual workload and priority of routine tasks. - It executes corresponding functions such as maintenance of customer master data and additional sales data; preparation and processing of inquiries, quotes, sales orders, and sales contracts; billing process monitoring; and report and analysis preparation. - It enables access to relevant reporting functions. The internal sales representative belongs to a sales team, consisting of a sales manager and several sales representatives. Internal sales representatives support and assist the sales team in all aspects of sales. This includes the maintenance of master data; the creation of quotations, contracts, and orders; and the performance of all kinds of administrative tasks. This new role accomplishes the following: - It improves efficiency and effectiveness through the personalization of the information. - It enables internal sales representatives to selforganize the current workload and collaborate effectively. - It minimizes manual effort. The tasks of the internal sales representative include the following: 6.0 Sales and Service SD/LES E-commerce: quotation and order management - Answering inquiries from customers and prospects to ensure customer satisfaction - Maintaining and updating customer master data and other sales data - Preparing, entering, and maintaining inquiries, quotations, sales orders, and sales contracts - Ensuring successful order management and fulfillment - Providing information about order process, including information about logistics execution - Monitoring billing process - Preparing reports and analyses for the sales manager - Executing general administrative duties This functionality addresses the following issues: - Order creation with reference to a contract that has been displayed - Lock of sales documents to avoid concurrent access during the order change process - Display of bills of material in the shopping basket - Free goods processing - Processing of grid products for the Apparel and Footwear application - One-step business order processing the following benefits: - It reduces errors and offers better data consistency. - It speeds the order creation process. - It encourages use of a profitable sales interaction channel. - It reduces administrative tasks by automating quotations and orders management.

6.0 Sales and Service 6.0 End-User Service Delivery SD/LES SD/LES E-commerce: selling over ebay New user interface for order entry - Selection of multiple transaction types - It improves customer in the shopping basket satisfaction and retention - Credit card support in business-tobusiness (B2B) Web shop information to customers. by delivering accurate - Material number format conversion - Maintenance of delivery priority in the shopping basket (B2B) - Document search for all documents across all sales areas - Interprocess communicationcharacteristic value display in basket and order confirmation Creation and management of product listings on ebay leverages the e- commerce order management and fulfillment capabilities of the application by easily tying existing tax, pricing, shipping, and payment configurations to postauction processing. Enhancements in 2005 are as follows: - You can use the businessto-consumer (B2C) checkout instead of the ebay checkout. With the B2C checkout, you can maximize crossselling and up-selling opportunities by leveraging B2C functionality, and you can determine tax and shipping costs by using the elaborate methods available through condition techniques in. - The winner notification keeps the auction winner updated with the status of the auction and of his or her order - Monitoring through features such as single-activity trace (SAT), heartbeat, and logging is possible. - Creation and publishing of multipleitem auctions and manual retraction of winners is possible. The Web-based user interface for inquiries, quotations, and sales orders is easy to learn, easy to use, and easy to adjust. Employees can enter or update relevant sales order information with direct or indirect customer contact. E-commerce selling over ebay offers organizations integration of their existing applications with the world s largest online marketplace to create and manage listings on ebay. The new feature accomplishes the following: - It increase e-commerce revenues. - It streamlines and leverages existing order management and fulfillment functionalities. This set of s in sales order management improves user productivity by offering better usability, adaptability, and integration into the internal sales representative role. 6.0 End-User Service Delivery SD/LES role: internal sales representative New productivity features are as follows: - Order cockpit for quick access - Flexible and reusable search - Adaptable layouts The internal sales representative role contains all the functions to fulfill the requirements of an internal sales representative. This includes tasks such as answering phone calls from customers and prospective customers, processing incoming inquiries and sales orders, and preparing quotations and sales contracts. the following benefits: - It improves efficiency and effectiveness through the personalization of the information. - It speeds up sales order entry. - It accelerates access to

6.0 End-User Service Delivery role: employee selfservices current workload. - Target group - It accelerates sales The responsibilities of an internal sales analyses. representative (or customer service representative) include the following: > Answering phone calls from customers and prospective customers > Answering product, price, and order status related questions > Processing incoming inquiries and sales orders > Preparing quotations and sales contracts > Taking sales orders and ensuring successful order processing for example, taking care of the completeness of sales documents and releasing delivery-blocked orders > Support for the outside sales force for example, checking on quotations and updating customer master data > Preparing reports and sales analyses for the sales manager and the sales team - Work overview This work center gives you an overview of your daily work and gives you easy access to your most important tasks. - Sales documents This work center allows you to work on all your sales documents. You can create and maintain inquiries, quotations, sales orders, sales contracts, scheduling agreements, and billing documents. - Order fulfillment This work center allows you to monitor order fulfillment. You can display deliveries, back orders, and shipments, and you can check product availability. - Master data This work center enables you to work on all your master data. You can create and maintain business partners, customer agreements, prices and conditions, and products. Using the Employee Self-Service application, employees maintain their personal information and also control many administrative transactions and other processes handled by the human resources staff. The goal is to streamline approval processes and tasks such as viewing vacation time or choosing benefits. This application not only grants better access to personal data but also informs employees of changes in the life and work events by the following benefits: - Adobe Forms integration > This allows for lower form implementation costs. > Familiar form format and printing functionality are available for all users of these forms. - Equipment card > This reduces the

6.0 Human Capital Management HR role: employee selfservices integrating applications with support information. - Target group Employees are the heart of the workforce. Their jobs range from working on an assembly line to knowledge work in the information economy and to management and executive positions. Employees are responsible for ensuring that their data is correct and complete. This is necessary for internal business processes to run smoothly. - Address book You can search for employees by name and find basic information about colleagues and their position in the company. You can maintain personal information and make it available company-wide. - Working time You can record your working times, plan your leave, and display your time data. - Benefits and payment You can display the plans in which you are currently enrolled, enroll in new benefit plans, and download an enrollment form. You can also display your salary statement. - Personal information You can manage your addresses, bank information, and information about family members and dependents. - Career and job You can view and change your own skills profile. You can view a list of open positions in your company and apply for one of these positions. - Purchasing You can create a shopping cart with the goods and services you need. You can check the status of your order and confirm once it is completed. - Work environment You can display and change the asset data assigned to you. - Travel and expenses You can create your travel request and plan travel services for your business trip, including booking flights, hotels, car rentals, and train tickets. You can also record your travel expenses. - Life and work events You are guided through a number of such events, such as the birth of a child and beginning work at a new company. Using the Employee Self-Service application, employees maintain their personal information and they also control many administrative transactions and other processes administrative burden of tracking and maintaining working equipment used by employees. > It provides managers with full transparency of all their employees equipment (and related costs). - Employee bank information > Employees can maintain the International Bank Account Number (IBAN). This decreases the cost of salary transfers to foreign banking organizations. > Better support is provided for international outsourcing models in payroll. - Employee communication and office data > This function reduces the administrative burden of maintaining personnel data. > It ensures greater accuracy of employee information. > It simplifies access to an employee s personal details. the following benefits: - Adobe Forms integration > This allows for lower form implementation costs.

handled by the human resources staff. The goal is to streamline approval processes and tasks such as viewing vacation time or choosing benefits. This application not only grants better access to personal data but also informs employees of changes in life and work events by integrating applications with support information. - Target group Employees are the heart of the workforce. Their jobs range from working on an assembly line to knowledge work in the information economy and to management and executive positions. Employees are responsible for ensuring that their data is correct and complete. This is necessary for internal business processes to run smoothly. - Address book You can search for employees by name and find basic information about colleagues and their position in the company. You can also maintain personal information and make it available company-wide. - Working time You can record your working times, plan your leave, and display your time data. - Benefits and payment You can display the plans in which you are currently enrolled, enroll in new benefit plans, and download an enrollment form. You can also display your salary statement. - Personal information You can manage your addresses, bank information, and information about family members and dependents. - Career and job You can view and change your own skills profile. You can also view a list of open positions in your company and apply for one of these positions. - Purchasing You can create a shopping cart with the goods and services you need. You can also check the status of your order and confirm once it is completed. - Work environment You can display and change the asset data assigned to you. - Travel and expenses You can create your travel request and plan travel services for your business trip, including booking flights, hotels, car rentals, and train tickets. You can also record your travel expenses. - Life and work events > Familiar form format and printing functionality are available for all users of these forms. - Equipment card > This reduces the administrative burden of tracking and maintaining working equipment used by employees. > It provides managers with full transparency of all their employees equipment (and related costs). - Employee bank information > Employees can maintain the International Bank Account Number (IBAN). This decreases the cost of salary transfers to foreign banking organizations. > Better support is provided for international outsourcing models in payroll. - Employee communication and office data > This function reduces the administrative burden of maintaining personnel data. > It ensures greater accuracy of employee information. > It simplifies access to an employee s personal details.

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM role: employee selfservices You are guided through a number of such events, such as the birth of a child and beginning work at a new company. Using the Employee Self-Service application, employees maintain their personal information, and they also control many administrative transactions and other processes handled by the human resources staff. The goal is to streamline approval processes and tasks such as viewing vacation time or choosing benefits. This application not only grants better access to personal data but also informs employees of changes in life and work events by integrating applications with support information. - Target group Employees are the heart of the workforce. Their jobs range from working on an assembly line to knowledge work in the information economy and to managers and executive positions. Employees are responsible for ensuring that their data is correct and complete. This is necessary for internal business processes to run smoothly. - Address book You can search for employees by name and find basic information about colleagues and their position in the company. You can also maintain personal information and make it available company-wide. - Working time You can record your working times, plan your leave, and display your time data. - Benefits and payment You can display the plans in which you are currently enrolled, enroll in new benefit plans, and download an enrollment form. You can also display your salary statement. - Personal information You can manage your addresses, bank information, and information about family members and dependents. - Career and job You can view and change your own skills profile. You can also view a list of open positions in your company and apply for one of these positions. - Purchasing You can create a shopping cart with the goods and services you need. You can also check the status of your order and confirm once it is completed. - Work environment You can display and change the asset the following benefits: - Adobe Forms integration > This allows for lower form implementation costs. > Familiar form format and printing functionality are available for all users of these forms. - Equipment card > This reduces the administrative burden of tracking and maintaining working equipment used by employees. > It provides managers with full transparency of all their employees equipment (and related costs). - Employee bank information > Employees can maintain the International Bank Account Number (IBAN). This decreases the cost of salary transfers to foreign banking organizations. > Better support is provided for international outsourcing models in payroll. - Employee communication and office data > This function reduces the administrative burden of maintaining personnel data. > It ensures more accurate employee information. > It simplifies access to an employee s personal details.

6.0 Product PM Development and Manufacturing role: employee selfservices data assigned to you. - Travel and expenses You can create your travel request and plan travel services for your business trip, including booking flights, hotels, car rentals, and train tickets. You can also record your travel expenses. - Life and work events You are guided through a number of such events, such as the birth of a child and beginning work at a new company. Using the Employee Self-Service application, employees maintain their personal information, and they also control many administrative transactions and other processes handled by the human resources staff. The goal is to streamline approval processes and tasks such as viewing vacation time or choosing benefits. This application not only grants better access to personal data but also informs employees of changes in life and work events by integrating applications with support information. - Target group Employees are the heart of the workforce. Their jobs range from working on an assembly line to knowledge work in the information economy and to management and executive positions. Employees are responsible for ensuring that their data is correct and complete. This is necessary for internal business processes to run smoothly. - Address book You can search for employees by name and find basic information about colleagues and their position in the company. You can also maintain personal information and make it available company-wide. - Working time You can record your working times, plan your leave, and display your time data. - Benefits and payment You can display the plans in which you are currently enrolled, enroll in new benefit plans, and download an enrollment form. You can also display your salary statement. - Personal information You can manage your addresses, bank information, and information about family members and dependents. - Career and job You can view and change your own skills profile. You can also view a list of open positions in your company and the following benefits: - Adobe Forms integration > This allows for lower form implementation costs. > Familiar form format and printing functionality are available for all users of these forms. - Equipment card > This reduces the administrative burden of tracking and maintaining working equipment used by employees. > It provides managers with full transparency of all their employees equipment (and related costs). - Employee bank information > Employees can maintain the International Bank Account Number (IBAN). This decreases the cost of salary transfers to foreign banking organizations. > Better support is provided for international outsourcing models in payroll - Employee communication and office data > This function reduces the administrative burden of maintaining personnel data. > It ensures more accurate employee information. > It simplifies access to an employee s personal details.

6.0 End-User Service Delivery role: manager selfservices apply for one of these positions. - Purchasing You can create a shopping cart with the goods and services you need. You can also check the status of your order and confirm once it is completed. - Work environment You can display and change the asset data assigned to you. - Travel and expenses You can create your travel request and plan travel services for your business trip, including booking flights, hotels, car rentals, and train tickets. You can also record your travel expenses. - Life and work events You are guided through a number of such events, such as the birth of a child and beginning work at a new company. The manager self-services role provides line managers, team leaders, project leaders, and department heads in the company with tools to help them accomplish their goals quickly and easily. Central departments such as controlling or human resources can present personalized information in the user s portal, enabling managers to find their information in their own portal, in the right place at the right time. - Target group Manager Self-Service is the right application for your managers, whether they are line, project, or department managers. You can combine specific information and applications that these types of manager participate in. With the right analytical information for each of your managers, whichever management level they are, Manager Self-Service enables all your managers to effectively and productively contribute to the company s overall strategy and to influence business outcomes. - Work overview This work center allows you to execute work items, such as approvals and planning tasks and to monitor alerts concerning your budget situation and key figures. It provides you with a reminder of dates, showing today's birthdays, jubilees, and other teamrelated information, and an overview of absent employees. It also provides access to a range of key figures and allows you to view trends and set rules for alerts. - Team This work center allows you to see the overall situation in your team and to the following benefits: - New user interface design > This supports managers in their proactive role even more effectively. > It provides managers with better control and transparency on the overall team, project, and budget situation, as well as the staffing process. > It improves productivity and reduces training needs. - Enhanced team viewer > This helps accelerate approval processes significantly. > It lowers administrative costs. > It improves efficiency of managers. - Better integration of analytical data > Structured analytical insights provide manager with content-related information for their decision making. > Different levels of management get the required information. - Express planning > This makes the budgeting and planning process more efficient by including a status overview for planners, such as managers, and for planning

6.0 Analytics FI, CO, AM, FSCM role: manager selfservices perform services for people in your supervisors, such as team, perform your human resources business unit analysts. duties, and initiate requests for new > It increases user staff. productivity through - Budget enhanced planning This work center allows you to see your coordination and overall budget situation and initiate monitoring. service requests about issues relating to your budget. It provides access to monitoring applications that display the profit centers, cost centers, any internal orders for which you are responsible, the fixed assets assigned to your cost centers, and the equipment assigned to your employees. - Projects This work center allows you to see your overall project situation and initiate project-related services, including requesting external staff and monitoring budget consumption. - Planning This work center allows you to access express planning a guided planning process that brings together elements of cost center planning and headcount planning and compensation planning. It also allows you to view your objectives through the Balanced Scorecard application. The manager self-services role provides line managers, team leaders, project leaders, and department heads in the company with tools to help them accomplish their goals quickly and easily. Central departments such as controlling or human resources can present personalized information in the user s portal, enabling managers to find their information in their own portal, in the right place at the right time. - Target group Manager Self-Service is the right application for your managers, whether they are line, project, or department managers. You can combine specific information and applications that these types of manager participate in. With the right analytical information for each of your managers, whichever management level they are, Manager Self-Service enables all your managers to effectively and productively contribute to the company s overall strategy and influence business outcomes. - Work overview This work center allows you to execute work items, such as approvals and planning tasks, and to monitor alerts concerning your budget situation and the following benefits: - New user interface design > This supports managers in their proactive role even more effectively. > It provides managers with better control and transparency on the overall team, project, and budget situation, as well as the staffing process. > It improves productivity and reduces training needs. - Enhanced team viewer > This helps accelerate approval processes significantly. > It lowers administrative costs. > It improves efficiency of managers. - Better integration of analytical data > Structured analytical insights provide manager with content-related information for their decision making.

6.0 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM role: manager selfservices key figures. It provides you with a reminder of dates, showing today's birthdays, jubilees, and other teamrelated information, and an overview of absent employees. It also provides access to a range of key figures and allows you to view trends and set rules for alerts. - Team This work center allows you to see the overall situation in your team and to perform services for people in your team, perform your human resources duties, and initiate requests for new staff. - Budget This work center allows you to see your overall budget situation and initiate service requests about issues relating to your budget. It provides access to monitoring applications that display profit centers, cost centers, any internal orders for which you are responsible, the fixed assets assigned to your cost centers, and the equipment assigned to your employees. - Projects This work center allows you to see your overall project situation and initiate project-related services, including requesting external staff and monitoring budget consumption. - Planning This work center allows you to access express planning a guided planning process that brings together elements of cost center planning and headcount planning and compensation planning. It also allows you to view your objectives through the Balanced Scorecard application. The manager self-services role provides line managers, team leaders, project leaders, and department heads in the company with tools to help them accomplish their goals quickly and easily. Central departments such as controlling or human resources can present personalized information in the user s portal, enabling managers to find their information in their own portal, in the right place at the right time. - Target group Manager Self-Service is the right application for your managers, whether they are line, project, or department managers. You can combine specific information and applications that these types of manager participate in. With the right analytical information for each of your managers, whichever > Different levels of management get the required information. - Express planning > This makes the budgeting and planning process more efficient by including a status overview for planners, such as managers, and for planning supervisors, such as business unit analysts. > It increases user productivity through enhanced planning coordination and monitoring. the following benefits: - New user interface design > This supports managers in their proactive role even more effectively. > It provides managers with better control and transparency on the overall team, project, and budget situation, as well as the staffing process. > It improves productivity and reduces training needs. - Enhanced team viewer > This helps accelerate approval processes significantly. > It lowers administrative

6.0 Human Capital Management HR role: manager selfservices management level they are, Manager Self-Service enables all your managers to effectively and productively contribute to the company s overall strategy and influence business outcomes. - Work overview This work center allows you to execute work items, such as approvals and planning tasks, and to monitor alerts concerning your budget situation and key figures. It provides you with a reminder of dates, showing today's birthdays, jubilees, and other teamrelated information, and an overview of absent employees. It also provides access to a range of key figures and allows you to view trends and set rules for alerts. - Team This work center allows you to see the overall situation in your team and to perform services for people in your team, perform your human resources duties, and initiate requests for new staff. - Budget This work center allows you to see your overall budget situation and initiate service requests about issues relating to your budget. It provides access to monitoring applications that display profit centers, cost centers, any internal orders for which you are responsible, the fixed assets assigned to your cost centers, and the equipment assigned to your employees. - Projects This work center allows you to see your overall project situation and initiate project-related services, including requesting external staff and monitoring budget consumption. - Planning This work center allows you to access express planning a guided planning process that brings together elements of cost center planning and headcount planning and compensation planning. It also allows you to view your objectives through the Balanced Scorecard application. The manager self-services role provides line managers, team leaders, project leaders, and department heads in the company with tools to help them accomplish their goals quickly and easily. Central departments such as controlling or human resources can present personalized information in the user s portal, enabling managers to find their information in their own portal, in costs. > It improves efficiency of managers. - Better integration of analytical data > Structured analytical insights provide manager with content-related information for their decision making. > Different levels of management get the required information. - Express planning > This makes the budgeting and planning process more efficient by including a status overview for planners, such as managers, and for planning supervisors, such as business unit analysts. > It increases user productivity through enhanced planning coordination and monitoring. the following benefits: - New user interface design > This supports managers in their proactive role even more effectively. > It provides managers with better control and transparency on the overall team, project, and budget

the right place at the right time. - Target group Manager Self-Service is the right application for your managers, whether they are line, project, or department managers. You can combine specific information and applications that these types of manager participate in. With the right analytical information for each of your managers, whichever management level they are, Manager Self-Service enables all your managers to effectively and productively contribute to the company s overall strategy and influence business outcomes. - Work overview This work center allows you to execute work items, such as approvals and planning tasks, and to monitor alerts concerning your budget situation and key figures. It provides you with a reminder of dates, showing today's birthdays, jubilees, and other teamrelated information, and an overview of absent employees. It also provides access to a range of key figures and allows you to view trends and set rules for alerts. - Team This work center allows you to see the overall situation in your team and to perform services for people in your team, perform your human resources duties, and initiate requests for new staff. - Budget This work center allows you to see your overall budget situation and initiate service requests about issues relating to your budget. It provides access to monitoring applications that display profit centers, cost centers, any internal orders for which you are responsible, the fixed assets assigned to your cost centers, and the equipment assigned to your employees. - Projects This work center allows you to see your overall project situation and initiate project-related services, including requesting external staff and monitoring budget consumption. - Planning This work center allows you to access express planning a guided planning process that brings together elements of cost center planning and headcount planning and compensation planning. It also allows you to view your objectives through the Balanced situation, as well as the staffing process. > It improves productivity and reduces training needs. - Enhanced team viewer > This helps accelerate approval processes significantly. > It lowers administrative costs. > It improves efficiency of managers. - Better integration of analytical data > Structured analytical insights provide manager with content-related information for their decision making. > Different levels of management get the required information. - Express planning > This makes the budgeting and planning process more efficient by including a status overview for planners, such as managers, and for planning supervisors, such as business unit analysts. > It increases user productivity through enhanced planning coordination and monitoring.

6.0 Corporate Services PS role: manager selfservices only for Collaboration Projects Scorecard application. The manager self-service role applies only to Collaboration Projects (cprojects). The new user interface design provides these benefits: 6.0 End-User Service Delivery 6.0 End-User Service Delivery The Manager Self-Service application provides line managers, team leaders, project leaders, and department heads in the company with tools to help them accomplish their goals quickly and easily. Central departments such as controlling or human resources PP role: plant manager In the plant manager role, the manufacturing intelligence dashboard for the plant manager provides enhanced usability and functionality (regarding key figure monitoring) in comparison to 2004. role: business unit analyst Dashboards have also been created for the new production supervisor, maintenance technician, and quality inspector roles, to leverage this transparency and promote collaboration on the shop floor. The business unit analyst role enables financial analysts and controllers to monitor the situation within their business unit, react to critical situations, organize the planning process, and collaborate effectively with the line managers and project managers within their unit. - Target group Financial analysts and controllers, typically part of the management team, are the target group, with responsibility for ensuring the financial health of the business unit. - Work overview This work center provides the business unit analyst with a list of alerts each morning that show, depending on rules for exception handling set by the analyst, key figures that have exceeded a threshold, cost centers that are over budget, unusual postings, and so on. From here, the business unit analyst can drill down into the details behind the posting and start collaboration services with, for example, the cost center manager responsible for the high variances. In the event of errors or changes in the organization, the analyst can use formbased processes to initiate a correction posting or request a change (for - It supports managers in their proactive role even more effectively. - It provides managers with better control and transparency on overall team, project, and budget situation, as well as the staffing process. - It improves productivity a the following benefits: - Easy access to aggregated data from multiple, heterogeneous software systems - Ability to monitor, measure, control, and improve production performance - Multiple ways to personalize the key figure monitor the following benefits: - It helps analysts ensure the financial health of their unit. - Collaboration services are seamlessly integrated into monitoring applications. - It supports a structured and controlled planning process.

6.0 Analytics FI, CO, AM, FSCM role: business unit analyst example, to a profit center or cost center in his or her area). All formbased processes have been reimplemented to use interactive forms based on Adobe software. - Planning A separate work center focuses solely on the planning process, allowing the analyst to set up a collaborative planning process to organize all tasks associated with planning. This includes ad hoc planning tasks and the guided express planning application that leads the managers through the process of planning headcount, costs, equipment, internal orders, and other costs. As the managers submit their data, the business unit analyst can monitor their responses and check the results both in total and individually, returning the work item to the manager for further work if, for example, the planned travel costs exceed the company guideline. - Master data An additional work center shows the analyst the master data in his or her area of responsibility. As in the work overview, the analyst can use formbased processes to request a change for example, to a profit center or cost center in his or her area. - Analytics A dedicated analytics work center provides access to all the reporting applications that the analyst works with. Besides profit centers, cost centers, and internal orders, this now includes projects as well. The business unit analyst role enables financial analysts and controllers to monitor the situation within their business unit, react to critical situations, organize the planning process, and collaborate effectively with the line managers and project managers within their unit. - Target group Financial analysts and controllers, typically part of the management team, are the target group, with responsibility for ensuring the financial health of the business unit. - Work overview This work center provides the business unit analyst with a list of alerts each morning that show, depending on rules for exception handling set by the analyst, key figures that have exceeded a threshold, cost centers that are over budget, unusual postings, and so on. From here, the business unit the following benefits: - It helps analysts ensure the financial health of their unit. - Collaboration services are seamlessly integrated into monitoring applications. - It supports a structured and controlled planning process.

6.0 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM role: business unit analyst analyst can drill down into the details behind the posting and start collaboration services with, for example, the cost center manager responsible for the high variances. In the event of errors or changes in the organization, the analyst can use formbased processes to initiate a correction posting or request a change (for example, to a profit center or cost center in his or her area). All formbased processes have been reimplemented to use interactive forms based on Adobe software. - Planning A separate work center focuses solely on the planning process, allowing the analyst to set up a collaborative planning process to organize all tasks associated with planning. This includes ad hoc planning tasks and the guided express planning application that leads the managers through the process of planning headcount, costs, equipment, internal orders, and other costs. As the managers submit their data, the business unit analyst can monitor their responses and check the results both in total and individually, returning the work item to the manager for further work if, for example, the planned travel costs exceed the company guideline. - Master data An additional work center shows the analyst the master data in his or her area of responsibility. As in the work overview, the analyst can use formbased processes to request a change for example, to a profit center or cost center in his or her area. - Analytics A dedicated analytics work center provides access to all the reporting applications that the analyst works with. Besides profit centers, cost centers, and internal orders, this now includes projects as well. The business unit analyst role enables financial analysts and controllers to monitor the situation within their business unit, react to critical situations, organize the planning process, and collaborate effectively with the line managers and project managers within their unit. - Target group Financial analysts and controllers, typically part of the management team, are the target group, with responsibility for ensuring the financial health of the business unit. the following benefits: - It helps analysts ensure the financial health of their unit. - Collaboration services are seamlessly integrated into monitoring applications. - It supports a structured and controlled planning process.

6.0 End-User Service Delivery role: human resources administrator - Work overview This work center provides the business unit analyst with a list of alerts each morning that show, depending on rules for exception handling set by the analyst, key figures that have exceeded a threshold, cost centers that are over budget, unusual postings, and so on. From here, the business unit analyst can drill down into the details behind the posting and start collaboration services with, for example, the cost center manager responsible for the high variances. In the event of errors or changes in the organization, the analyst can use formbased processes to initiate a correction posting or request a change (for example, to a profit center or cost center in his or her area). All formbased processes have been reimplemented to use interactive forms based on Adobe software. - Planning A separate work center focuses solely on the planning process, allowing the analyst to set up a collaborative planning process to organize all tasks associated with planning. This includes ad hoc planning tasks and the guided express planning application that leads the managers through the process of planning headcount, costs, equipment, internal orders, and other costs. As the managers submit their data, the business unit analyst can monitor their responses and check the results both in total and individually, returning the work item to the manager for further work if, for example, the planned travel costs exceed the company guideline. - Master data An additional work center shows the analyst the master data in his or her area of responsibility. As in the work overview, the analyst can use formbased processes to request a change for example, to a profit center or cost center in his or her area. - Analytics A dedicated analytics work center provides access to all the reporting applications that the analyst works with. Besides profit centers, cost centers, and internal orders, this now includes projects as well. The human resources (HR) administrator role provides real-time integration for collaboration within the entire organization that is, from the employee to the management. Being responsible for the HR data of the the following benefits: - It provides a central role for the implementation of a shared-service center concept in human

employees, an HR administrator receives work items that are triggered from other roles and processes that have already been defined within the organization. - Target group People in HR administration who need real software integration for collaboration within the entire organization that is, with employees as well as with management are the targeted group. - Work overview Using the universal work list, the HR administrator receives work items that are triggered from other roles and processes that have already been defined within the organization. Work items can be classified according to specific tasks, priorities, time cutoffs, approvals, pending items, or even automatic responses. Data is defined in terms of how it needs to be handled for example, whether approvals are required before the data being saved. Adobe interactive forms can also be used either off-line or as integrated in the entire communications process. Once completed, a form can be saved directly to the employee s file. In fact, the process flows you define are extremely flexible: in some business practices, you may choose to have the data updated as it continues along the process. Once the business roles are defined, you can determine what type of data needs to be handled or collected by a business role, how the information should be communicated through the organization, and what determines the final checkpoint before the data is updated. There are preestablished templates for processes such as hiring and maternity leave that are easily adapted to an organization s individual business practices. - Processes A process browser enables filtering of all processes of a specific type: organizational change, benefit enrollment, or even all items that are late for processing. This type of operative reporting enables organizations to analyze back-office administration in a variety of ways. The HR administrator has become an integral component of the business process, but operative costs and exceptions can now easily be identified for all administrative aspects of an organization. resources (HR). - It facilitates work for HR administrators and makes them much more productive through an improved user interface. - It provides valuable insight into performance and costs of HR processes. - It allows HR administrators to better support occasional roles, such as manager and employee.

6.0 Analytics FI, CO, AM, FSCM role: human resources administrator - Analytics Creating operational efficiencies of administrative processes, analytics are key for group or team leaders who are responsible for the overall workload. Through delivered analytics, workloads can be planned and moved around so that a balanced workload is achieved and critical operations can be quickly addressed. Workload can be planned for all administrators. The human resources (HR) administrator role provides real-time integration for collaboration within the entire organization that is, from the employee to the management. Being responsible for the HR data of the employees, an HR administrator receives work items that are triggered from other roles and processes that have already been defined within the organization. - Target group People in HR administration who need real software integration for collaboration within the entire organization that is, with employees as well as with management are the target group. - Work overview Using the universal work list, the HR administrator receives work items that are triggered from other roles and processes that have already been defined within the organization. Work items can be classified according to specific tasks, priorities, time cutoffs, approvals, pending items, or even automatic responses. Data is defined in terms of how it needs to be handled for example, whether approvals are required before the data being saved. Adobe interactive forms can also be used either off-line or as integrated in the entire communications process. Once completed, a form can be saved directly to the employee s file. In fact, the process flows you define are extremely flexible: in some business practices, you may choose to have the data updated as it continues along the process. Once the business roles are defined, you can determine what type of data needs to be handled or collected by a business role, how the information should be communicated through the organization, and what determines the final checkpoint before the data is updated. There are preestablished templates for processes such as hiring and maternity leave that the following benefits: - It provides a central role for the implementation of a shared-service center concept in human resources (HR). - It facilitates work for HR administrators and makes them much more productive through an improved user interface. - It provides valuable insight into performance and costs of HR processes. - It allows HR administrators to better support occasional roles, such as manager and employee.

6.0 Human Capital Management HR role: human resources administrator are easily adapted to an organization s individual business practices. - Processes A process browser enables filtering of all processes of a specific type: organizational change, benefit enrollment, or even all items that are late for processing. This type of operative reporting enables organizations to analyze back office administration in a variety of ways. The HR administrator has become an integral component of the business process, but operative costs and exceptions can now easily be identified for all administrative aspects of an organization. - Analytics Creating operational efficiencies of administrative processes, analytics are key for group or team leaders who are responsible for the overall workload. Through delivered analytics, workloads can be planned and moved around so that a balanced workload is achieved and critical operations can be quickly addressed. Workload can be planned for all administrators. The human resources (HR) administrator role provides real-time integration for collaboration within the entire organization that is, from the employee to the management. Being responsible for the HR data of the employees, an HR administrator receives work items that are triggered from other roles and processes that have already been defined within the organization. - Target group People in HR administration who need real software integration for collaboration within the entire organization that is, with employees as well as with management are the target group. - Work overview Using the universal work list, the HR administrator receives work items that are triggered from other roles and processes that have already been defined within the organization. Work items can be classified according to specific tasks, priorities, time cutoffs, approvals, pending items, or even automatic responses. Data is defined in terms of how it needs to be handled for example, whether approvals are required before the data being saved. Adobe interactive forms can also be used either off-line or as integrated in the following benefits: - It provides a central role for the implementation of a shared-service center concept in human resources (HR). - It facilitates work for HR administrators and makes them much more productive through an improved user interface. - It provides valuable insight into performance and costs of HR processes. - It allows HR administrators to better support occasional roles, such as manager and employee.

6.0 End-User Service Delivery role: buyer the entire communications process. Once completed, a form can be saved directly to the employee s file. In fact, the process flows you define are extremely flexible: in some business practices, you may choose to have the data updated as it continues along the process. Once the business roles are defined, you can determine what type of data needs to be handled or collected by a business role, how the information should be communicated through the organization, and what determines the final checkpoint before the data is updated. There are preestablished templates for processes such as hiring and maternity leave that are easily adapted to an organization s individual business practices. - Processes A process browser enables filtering of all processes of a specific type: organizational change, benefit enrollment, or even all items that are late for processing. This type of operative reporting enables organizations to analyze back office administration in a variety of ways. The HR administrator has become an integral component of the business process, but operative costs and exceptions can now easily be identified for all administrative aspects of an organization. - Analytics Creating operational efficiencies of administrative processes, analytics are key for group or team leaders who are responsible for the overall workload. Through delivered analytics, workloads can be planned and moved around so that a balanced workload is achieved and critical operations can be quickly addressed. Workload can be planned for all administrators. The buyer role supports buyers in their day-to-day purchases (operational procurement), inasmuch as it provides for both materials and services procurement. - Target group The main target group is operational buyers who are involved mostly in ordering activities (operational procurement), as well as reporting. Targeted purchasers may operate in several industries (cross-industry role) and buy direct materials and maintenance, repair, and overhaul (MRO) services, as well as other services. the following benefits: - Ability to react to questions and problems immediately - Quick access to personalized work lists - Analytical insight

- Work overview You obtain an overview of your daily work. The purchasing work list is the point of entry for the processing of current workflow tasks, such as the release of purchase requisitions and purchase orders or the processing of faulty vendor confirmations. You can obtain information about forwarded workflow tasks and obtain an overview of the tasks you have completed. The purchasing group analysis provides an overview of the workloads of the individual buyers and buyer groups within your company. For this purpose, the software accesses enterprise-wide consolidated data of the former Business Information Warehouse ( BW) component (whose functionality is now part of NetWeaver). The purchasing group analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data. - Transaction processing You obtain an overview of your purchasing documents (such as purchase orders and purchase requisitions). With the aid of queries, you can assemble your transactions to be processed in any number of work lists. You therefore have the opportunity to structure and perform your daily work in accordance with your own needs. The integration of the document storage application Collaboration Folders (cfolders) allows you to display the attachments to your purchase transactions directly in the portal. - Vendor information You obtain an overview of your vendors. You can display the contact data and partner roles of your vendors. You can use a source-of-supply overview to view the assortment of products offered by your vendors. The vendor analysis informs you of the goods supplied and services performed by your vendors. In the process, the software accesses enterprise-wide consolidated data stored in the former BW component. The vendor analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data. - Information on material You obtain an overview of your materials. You can display master data for, and stocks information about, your materials, or you can obtain information on the possible sources of supply of these materials. The material analysis

6.0 Analytics FI, CO, AM, FSCM role: buyer informs you about the materials procured by you. In the process, the software accesses enterprise-wide consolidated data stored in the former BW component. The materials analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data. - Service procurement You can perform all tasks and access all documents involved in the procurement of external services. You can start the sourcing application or process documents of all types. Alternatively, you can open the work lists for different documents, which are based on prespecified selection criteria. If you know the document number, you can also open documents directly. The buyer role supports buyers in their day-to-day purchases (operational procurement), inasmuch as it provides for both materials and services procurement. - Target group The main target group is operational buyers who are involved mostly in ordering activities (operational procurement), as well as reporting. Targeted purchasers may operate in several industries (cross-industry role) and buy direct materials and maintenance, repair, and overhaul (MRO) services, as well as other services. - Work overview You obtain an overview of your daily work. The purchasing work list is the point of entry for the processing of current workflow tasks, such as the release of purchase requisitions and purchase orders or the processing of faulty vendor confirmations. You can obtain information about forwarded workflow tasks and obtain an overview of the tasks you have completed. The purchasing group analysis provides an overview of the workloads of the individual buyers and buyer groups within your company. For this purpose, the software accesses enterprise-wide consolidated data of the former Business Information Warehouse ( BW) component (whose functionality is now part of NetWeaver). The purchasing group analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data. - Transaction processing You obtain an overview of your the following benefits: - Ability to react to questions and problems immediately - Quick access to personalized work lists - Analytical insight

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution purchasing documents (such as purchase orders and purchase requisitions). With the aid of queries, you can assemble your transactions to be processed in any number of work lists. You therefore have the opportunity to structure and perform your daily work in accordance with your own needs. The integration of the document storage application Collaboration Folders (cfolders) allows you to display the attachments to your purchase transactions directly in the portal. - Vendor information You obtain an overview of your vendors. You can display the contact data and partner roles of your vendors. You can use a source-of-supply overview to view the assortment of products offered by your vendors. The vendor analysis informs you of the goods supplied and services performed by your vendors. In the process, the software accesses enterprise-wide consolidated data stored in the former BW component. The vendor analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data. - Information on material You obtain an overview of your materials. You can display master data for, and stocks information about, your materials, or you can obtain information on the possible sources of supply of these materials. The material analysis informs you about the materials procured by you. In the process, the software accesses enterprise-wide consolidated data stored in the former BW component. The materials analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data. - Service procurement You can perform all tasks and access all documents involved in the procurement of external services. You can start the sourcing application or process documents of all types. Alternatively, you can open the work lists for different documents, which are based on prespecified selection criteria. If you know the document number, you can also open documents directly. MM role: buyer The buyer role supports buyers in their day-to-day purchases (operational procurement), inasmuch as it provides for both materials and services procurement. the following benefits: - Ability to react to questions and problems immediately - Quick access to

personalized work lists - Target group - Analytical insight The main target group is operational buyers who are involved mostly in ordering activities (operational procurement), as well as reporting. Targeted purchasers may operate in several industries (cross-industry role) and buy direct materials and maintenance, repair, and overhaul (MRO) services, as well as other services. - Work overview You obtain an overview of your daily work. The purchasing work list is the point of entry for the processing of current workflow tasks, such as the release of purchase requisitions and purchase orders or the processing of faulty vendor confirmations. You can obtain information about forwarded workflow tasks and obtain an overview of the tasks you have completed. The purchasing group analysis provides an overview of the workloads of the individual buyers and buyer groups within your company. For this purpose, the software accesses enterprise-wide consolidated data of the former Business Information Warehouse ( BW) component (whose functionality is now part of NetWeaver). The purchasing group analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data. - Transaction processing You obtain an overview of your purchasing documents (such as purchase orders and purchase requisitions). With the aid of queries, you can assemble your transactions to be processed in any number of work lists. You therefore have the opportunity to structure and perform your daily work in accordance with your own needs. The integration of the document storage application Collaboration Folders (cfolders) allows you to display the attachments to your purchase transactions directly in the portal. - Vendor information You obtain an overview of your vendors. You can display the contact data and partner roles of your vendors. You can use a source-of-supply overview to view the assortment of products offered by your vendors. The vendor analysis informs you of the goods supplied and services performed by your vendors. In the process, the software accesses enterprise-wide

6.0 End-User Service Delivery role: invoicing clerk consolidated data stored in the former BW component. The vendor analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data. - Information on material You obtain an overview of your materials. You can display master data for, and stocks information about, your materials, or you can obtain information on the possible sources of supply of these materials. The material analysis informs you about the materials procured by you. In the process, the software accesses enterprise-wide consolidated data stored in the former BW component. The materials analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data. - Service procurement You can perform all tasks and access all documents involved in the procurement of external services. You can start the sourcing application or process documents of all types. Alternatively, you can open the work lists for different documents, which are based on prespecified selection criteria. If you know the document number, you can also open documents directly. The invoicing clerk role gives access to the invoice management function. The invoice management function allows the processing of incoming electronic invoices (with and without purchase order reference) on an exception basis. The invoicing clerk role contains one work center for invoice processing and monitoring the complete exception handling process. It can be enhanced with additional work centers, especially in companies in which single individuals often have various different jobs. - Target group The main target group is invoicing clerks, who are responsible for incoming invoices in the logistics department. - Work overview You can start all tasks and get access to all documents involved in the invoice management process. You can search for related invoices and invoice exceptions. Alternatively, you can create a document or start the related service without any previous selections. the following benefits: - Streamlining invoice verification by delivering a high degree of process automation - Support of collaboration for resolution of all exceptions

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution - Work center This provides preprocessing of incoming invoices on top of existing invoice verification. If there are no exceptions, the invoices are automatically posted. In the case of exceptions, various workflow and monitoring activities are triggered and tracked, including notification of vendors about exceptions. - Work list This enables the invoicing clerk to monitor the incoming invoices quickly and also shows all invoice exceptions. In the case of exceptions, a variety of workflow and other activities are offered, including informing suppliers and noninvoice specialist users. - Analytics Appropriate reports and queries on every work center support relevant user scenarios with respective business intelligence queries, such as excessive invoice documents or invoice document overview. MM role: invoicing clerk The invoicing clerk role gives access to the invoice management function. The invoice management function allows the processing of incoming electronic invoices (with and without purchase order reference) on an exception basis. The invoicing clerk role contains one work center for invoice processing and monitoring the complete exception handling process. It can be enhanced with additional work centers, especially in companies in which single individuals often have various different jobs. the following benefits: - Streamlining invoice verification by delivering a high degree of process automation - Support of collaboration for resolution of all exceptions - Target group The main target group is invoicing clerks, who are responsible for incoming invoices in the logistics department. - Work overview You can start all tasks and get access to all documents involved in the invoice management process. You can search for related invoices and invoice exceptions. Alternatively, you can create a document or start the related service without any previous selections. - Work center This provides preprocessing of incoming invoices on top of existing invoice verification. If there are no exceptions, the invoices are automatically posted. In the case of exceptions, various workflow and monitoring activities are triggered and tracked, including notification of

6.0 End-User Service Delivery role: supplier vendors about exceptions. - Work list This enables the invoicing clerk to monitor the incoming invoices quickly and also shows all invoice exceptions. In the case of exceptions, a variety of workflow and other activities are offered, including informing suppliers and noninvoice specialist users. - Analytics Appropriate reports and queries on every work center support relevant user scenarios with respective business intelligence queries, such as excessive invoice documents or invoice document overview. The supplier role provides suppliers with a single point of access to data and transactions in the Supplier Self-Service component, therefore integrating self-service capabilities as part of the end-to-end procurement process. Extending the functionalities of ERP to business partners, specifically to a company s supplier base, is one of the next logical steps in the evolution of the application. The introduction of access functionalities for suppliers to information and transactions brings self-service functionalities to that allow companies to further streamline their processes and information exchange and therefore to further capitalize on their investments. Work centers support various activities associated with orders, purchase order responses, and invoices, as well as reporting activities: - Target group The main target group is small suppliers without their own enterprise resource planning (ERP) software. Usually these are small to middle-sized businesses in which individual employees take on a variety of tasks. The employee working with the supplier role accesses data in the customer s software and uses this data to start internal and collaborative processes. - Work overview You can start all tasks and get access to all documents involved in the collaboration process with your customer. You can see a status-related overview of all documents, as well as incoming alerts that need your the following benefits: - It improves supplier collaboration and speeds up procurement processes even if smaller suppliers do not have enterprise resource planning (ERP) software. - It reduces manual processes on the buyer side by directly connecting the suppliers with the software.

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution immediate attention. - Search You can search for information on requests, purchase order responses, or invoices. The document overview provides quick access to documents, such as requests for quotation, purchase orders, shipping notifications, confirmations, goods receipt confirmations, and invoices. - Create You can create shipping notifications, confirmations, or invoices. - Administration You can administer your company s access to the portal by requesting user access rights, and you can administer your own or your company s master data in the portal. - Analytics Appropriate reports and queries on every work center support relevant user scenarios with respective business intelligence queries, such as sales value reporting or evaluations. MM role: supplier The supplier role provides suppliers with a single point of access to data and transactions in the Supplier Self-Service component, therefore integrating self-service capabilities as part of the end-to-end procurement process. Extending the functionalities of ERP to business partners, specifically to a company s supplier base, is one of the next logical steps in the evolution of the application. The introduction of access functionalities for suppliers to information and transactions brings self-service functionalities to that allow companies to further streamline their processes and information exchange and therefore to further capitalize on their investments. the following benefits: - It improves supplier collaboration and speeds up procurement processes even if smaller suppliers do not have enterprise resource planning (ERP) software. - It reduces manual processes on the buyer side by directly connecting the suppliers with the software. Work centers support various activities associated with orders, purchase order responses, and invoices, as well as reporting activities: - Target group The main target group is small suppliers without their own enterprise resource planning (ERP) software. Usually these are small to middle-sized businesses in which individual employees take on a variety of tasks. The employee working with the supplier role accesses data in the customer s software and uses this data

6.0 End-User Service Delivery PP role: production supervisor to start internal and collaborative processes. - Work overview You can start all tasks and get access to all documents involved in the collaboration process with your customer. You can see a status-related overview of all documents, as well as incoming alerts that need your immediate attention. - Search You can search for information on requests, purchase order responses, or invoices. The document overview provides quick access to documents, such as requests for quotation, purchase orders, shipping notifications, confirmations, goods receipt confirmations, and invoices. - Create You can create shipping notifications, confirmations, or invoices. - Administration You can administer your company s access to the portal by requesting user access rights, and you can administer your own or your company s master data in the portal. - Analytics Appropriate reports and queries on every work center support relevant user scenarios with respective business intelligence queries, such as sales value reporting or evaluations. In the production supervisor role, manufacturing intelligence dashboards for the plant manager and production supervisor roles provide configurable entry pages that deliver alerts, key performance indicators (KPIs), manufacturing content, work lists, and production confirmations. They also provide the decision support needed by production personnel to respond to exceptions and unforeseen changes in demand or supply and to deliver superior production performance through greater transparency. Dashboards have also been created for the new maintenance technician and quality inspector roles, to leverage this transparency and promote collaboration on the shop floor. The dashboard for the plant manager has been enhanced. the following benefits: - You can execute production plans on time and within budget. - You can find and resolve production problems quickly and proactively with real-time exception detection and workflows. - You can monitor, measure, control, and improve production performance. - Target group The target group includes people in middle management within shop floor execution and manufacturing, as well as people leading shifts in production that is, production supervisors.

6.0 Analytics FI, CO, AM, FSCM role: production supervisor - Work overview You can view alerts from production, as well as your work list. You can create your own work list, with production orders, and maintenance and quality management notifications. You can print or confirm orders. The stock quantity overview and day's supply are also displayed. - Shift comments You manage comments for a shift as either a text document or a table. You can also view alerts from production, as well as goods receipt quantities. - Confirmation You can create new confirmations for production orders, and you can display or cancel existing confirmations. In the production supervisor role, manufacturing intelligence dashboards for the plant manager and production supervisor roles provide configurable entry pages that deliver alerts, key performance indicators (KPIs), manufacturing content, work lists, and production confirmations. They also provide the decision support needed by production personnel to respond to exceptions and unforeseen changes in demand or supply and to deliver superior production performance through greater transparency. Dashboards have also been created for the new maintenance technician and quality inspector roles, to leverage this transparency and promote collaboration on the shop floor. The dashboard for the plant manager has been enhanced. - Target group The target group includes people in middle management within shop floor execution and manufacturing, as well as people leading shifts in production that is, production supervisors. - Work overview You can view alerts from production, as well as your work list. You can create your own work list, with production orders, and maintenance and quality management notifications. You can print or confirm orders. The stock quantity overview and day's supply are also displayed. - Shift comments You manage comments for a shift as either a text document or a table. You can also view alerts from production, as well as goods receipt quantities. - Confirmation You can create new confirmations for the following benefits: - You can execute production plans on time and within budget. - You can find and resolve production problems quickly and proactively with real-time exception detection and workflows. - You can monitor, measure, control, and improve production performance.

6.0 Product PM Development and Manufacturing 6.0 End-User Service Delivery role: production supervisor role: maintenance technician production orders, and you can display or cancel existing confirmations. In the production supervisor role, manufacturing intelligence dashboards for the plant manager and production supervisor roles provide configurable entry pages that deliver alerts, key performance indicators (KPIs), manufacturing content, work lists, and production confirmations. They also provide the decision support needed by production personnel to respond to exceptions and unforeseen changes in demand or supply and to deliver superior production performance through greater transparency. Dashboards have also been created for the new maintenance technician and quality inspector roles, to leverage this transparency and promote collaboration on the shop floor. The dashboard for the plant manager has been enhanced. - Target group The target group includes people in middle management within shop floor execution and manufacturing, as well as people leading shifts in production that is, production supervisors. - Work overview You can view alerts from production, as well as your work list. You can create your own work list, with production orders, and maintenance and quality management notifications. You can print or confirm orders. The stock quantity overview and day's supply are also displayed. - Shift comments You manage comments for a shift as either a text document or a table. You can also view alerts from production, as well as goods receipt quantities. - Confirmation You can create new confirmations for production orders, and you can display or cancel existing confirmations. The maintenance technician role provides a simple user interface for maintenance execution, request processing, confirmations, and reporting. It also displays the asset structure. - Target group This role is used mainly by maintenance technicians. They need to get an always up-to-date overview of the maintenance work assigned to them, and they also want to check the the following benefits: - You can execute production plans on time and within budget. - You can find and resolve production problems quickly and proactively with real-time exception detection and workflows. - You can monitor, measure, control, and improve production performance. the following benefits: - It reduces time spent on information exchange. - It improves quality of maintenance work. - It leverages transparency to promote collaboration on the shop floor.

6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 End-User Service Delivery PM role: maintenance technician Work Center for development collaboration status of the technical assets for which they are carrying out maintenance work. In addition, they need a tool that facilitates timely confirmations of the work they have done. - Work overview The work overview provides a personalized work list of maintenance and service notifications, and of maintenance and service orders. It allows direct access to the confirmation. You can also create new notifications and orders, or you can call up after-event order recording. - Structure display Maintenance tasks are based on technical objects (pieces of equipment and functional locations) in the system. Pieces of equipment can contain a maintenance assembly (that is, a bill of materials [BOM]) through which the configuration and possible spare parts for the particular object are displayed. You can use the technical structure view to display the structure of technical objects and to dismantle, install, or replace pieces of equipment. The technical structure view also displays the maintenance schedule for a technical object, as well as the number of spare parts that are currently available in the plant for this technical object. The maintenance technician role provides a simple user interface for maintenance execution, request processing, confirmations, and reporting. It also displays the asset structure. - Target group This role is used mainly by maintenance technicans on the shop floor. the following benefits: - It reduces time spent on information exchange. - It improves quality of maintenance work. - It leverages transparency to promote collaboration on the shop floor. The Work Center assessment package for development collaboration the following benefits: - It provides a single point of entry for all improves partner and activities related to collaboration in supplier relationships. product development and design, as - It allows for full well as support for employees transparency and tracking responsible for communication with of the documents external partners and suppliers about exchanged with product development. This support development partners. includes data export and import to the Collaboration Folders (cfolders) application and browsing of the product structure. It also includes an integration of cfolders notifications into the universal work list (UWL) of the software with the NetWeaver Portal. - Target group

6.0 Product Development and Manufacturing Work Center for development collaboration The target group includes every employee involved in activities related to collaboration in product development and design, especially those involved in communicating with external partners and suppliers about product development, including data export and import, and browsing of the product structure. - Work overview This work center provides you with an overview of your daily work and gives you quick access to your most important tasks for development collaboration. You can configure a news feed to keep yourself up to date on the latest news and developments in your area of expertise. You use the work list to process workflow-based tasks and notifications related to your daily work. The integration of back-end services with the cfolders application allows you to cooperate with internal and external partners by using the services that are available to exchange product information with them. - Publishing This group of services allows you to publish product structure information from your enterprise resource planning (ERP) software in the cfolders application. - Importing This group of services allows you to import product structure information from the cfolders application to your ERP software. - Collaboration This service allows you to cooperate with external business partners by using cfolders and Product Lifecycle Management ( PLM) to support your tasks in product development and design. - Product structure This group of services provides you with the tools you need to quickly find and access all your product-related information (for example, bills of material, documents, and computeraided design [CAD] models). The Work Center assessment package for development collaboration provides a single point of entry for all activities related to collaboration in product development and design, as well as support for employees responsible for communication with external partners and suppliers about product development. This support includes data export and import to the Collaboration Folders (cfolders) the following benefits: - It improves partner and supplier relationships. - It allows for full transparency and tracking of the documents exchanged with development partners.

application and browsing of the product structure. It also includes an integration of cfolders notifications into the universal work list (UWL) of the software with the NetWeaver Portal. 6.0 Sales and Service SD/LES role: internal sales representative - Target group The target group includes every employee involved in activities related to collaboration in product development and design, especially those involved in communicating with external partners and suppliers about product development, including data export and import, and browsing of the product structure. - Work overview This work center provides you with an overview of your daily work and gives you quick access to your most important tasks for development collaboration. You can configure a news feed to keep yourself up to date on the latest news and developments in your area of expertise. You use the work list to process workflow-based tasks and notifications related to your daily work. The integration of back-end services with the cfolders application allows you to cooperate with internal and external partners by using the services that are available to exchange product information with them. - Publishing This group of services allows you to publish product structure information from your enterprise resource planning (ERP) software in the cfolders application. - Importing This group of services allows you to import product structure information from the cfolders application to your ERP software. - Collaboration This service allows you to cooperate with external business partners by using cfolders and Product Lifecycle Management ( PLM) to support your tasks in product development and design. - Product structure This group of services provides you with the tools you need to quickly find and access all your product-related information (for example, bills of material, documents, and computeraided design [CAD] models). The internal sales representative role provides all the functions to fulfill the requirements of an internal sales the following benefits: - It improves efficiency and

representative. This includes tasks such as answering phone calls from customers and prospective customers, processing incoming inquiries and sales orders, and preparing quotations and sales contracts. - Target group The responsibilities of an internal sales representative (or customer service representative) include the following: > Answering phone calls from customers and prospective customers > Answering product, price, and order status related questions > Processing incoming inquiries and sales orders > Preparing quotations and sales contracts > Taking sales orders and ensuring successful order processing for example, taking care of the completeness of sales documents, releasing delivery-blocked orders, and so on > Support for the outside sales force for example, checking on quotations, updating customer master data, and so on > Preparing reports and sales analyses for the sales manager and the sales team effectiveness through the personalization of the information. - It accelerates sales order entry. - It accelerates access to current workload. - It accelerates sales analyses. - Work overview This work center gives you an overview of your daily work and gives you easy access to your most important tasks. - Sales documents This work center allows you to work on all your sales documents. You can create and maintain inquiries, quotations, sales orders, sales contracts, scheduling agreements, and billing documents. - Order fulfillment This work center allows you to monitor order fulfillment. You can display deliveries, backorders, and shipments, and you can check product availability. 6.0 End-User Service Delivery PS role: project selfservices only for Collaboration Projects - Master data This work center enables you to work on all your master data. You can create and maintain business partners, customer agreements, prices and conditions, and products. The project self-services role applies only to Collaboration Projects (cprojects). The project self-service role provides the following benefits: - It increases transparency of project performance and

an appealing and intuitive user issues. interface, supporting project leads and - It speeds up project team members in the main administrative work around areas of their daily work. Project selfservice relies on cprojects and is projects. provided as portal content with ERP through a business package. Most frequent cprojects processes in project maintenance, communication, and confirmation are used as selfservices for occasional users. Transparency of project performance is provided with a work list that can even be personalized. - Target group The target group includes project leads and project team members. - Work overview In the overview area, a project work list provides at-a-glance information on relevant project-related key figures based on an evaluation framework that is fed with data from cprojects and Central Component ( ECC). Key figures are displayed, such as budget, planned costs, and actual costs. In addition, my projects, my project tasks, my checklist items, and my issues are displayed. By selecting an object (project, project task, checklist item, or issue), you can start different services or access cprojects directly. - Selfservices The following self-services are offered: > Create project: you create a new project based on a template. > Maintain general task: you create and edit tasks assigned directly to the project definition. > Maintain open issues: for each project, you can create and edit a list of issues. These issues are usually of a general nature and cannot be assigned to phases or tasks in the project. > Create e-mail: you notify other people associated with a task or other project objects about concerns you have with this object. > Assign person to project: you assign one or more individuals to a project, using roles. You also create new roles. > Assign person to tasks: you assign one ore more individuals to a task in a project. > Confirm task: you confirm work done on a task. > Confirm checklist Item: you confirm the result of a checklist item. > Confirm open issue: if assigned to an issue, you enter the text or close the issue. Common to all self-services is that they are based on step-by-step guidance that is very intuitive and easy to follow. - Reporting To support project analytics, a set of evaluations from cprojects (for example, tasks and task assignments,

6.0 Analytics PS role: project selfservices only for Collaboration Projects completed checklist items) and financial reports from the former Business Information Warehouse component (whose functionality is now part of NetWeaver) and ECC are offered. The following can be used as reporting objects: cprojects project definition, project definition, work breakdown structure (WBS) element, and internal order. The project self-services role applies only to Collaboration Projects (cprojects). The project self-service role provides an appealing and intuitive user interface, supporting project leads and project team members in the main areas of their daily work. Project selfservice relies on cprojects and is provided as portal content with ERP through a business package. Most frequent cprojects processes in project maintenance, communication, and confirmation are used as selfservices for occasional users. Transparency of project performance is provided with a work list that can even be personalized. - Target group The target group includes project leads and project team members. - Work overview In the overview area, a project work list provides at-a-glance information on relevant project-related key figures based on an evaluation framework that is fed with data from cprojects and Central Component ( ECC). Key figures are displayed, such as budget, planned costs, and actual costs. In addition, my projects, my project tasks, my checklist items, and my issues are displayed. By selecting an object (project, project task, checklist item, or issue), you can start different services or access cprojects directly. - Selfservices The following self-services are offered: > Create project: you create a new project based on a template. > Maintain general task: you create and edit tasks assigned directly to the project definition. > Maintain open issues: for each project, you can create and edit a list of issues. These issues are usually of a general nature and cannot be assigned to phases or tasks in the project. > Create e-mail: you notify other people associated with a task or other project objects about concerns you have with this object. > Assign person to project: you assign one or more individuals to a project, the following benefits: - It increases transparency of project performance and issues. - It speeds up administrative work around projects.

6.0 Corporate Services PS role: project selfservices only for Collaboration Projects using roles. You also create new roles. > Assign person to tasks: you assign one ore more individuals to a task in a project. > Confirm task: you confirm work done on a task. > Confirm checklist item: you confirm the result of a checklist item. > Confirm open issue: if assigned to an issue, you enter the text or close the issue. Common to all self-services is that they are based on step-by-step guidance that is very intuitive and easy to follow. - Reporting To support project analytics, a set of evaluations from cprojects (for example, tasks and task assignments, completed checklist items) and financial reports from the former Business Information Warehouse component (whose functionality is now part of NetWeaver) and ECC are offered. The following can be used as reporting objects: cprojects project definition, project definition, work breakdown structure (WBS) element, and internal order. The project self-services role applies only to Collaboration Projects (cprojects). The project self-service role provides an appealing and intuitive user interface, supporting project leads and project team members in the main areas of their daily work. Project selfservice relies on cprojects and is provided as portal content with ERP through a business package. Most frequent cprojects processes in project maintenance, communication, and confirmation are used as selfservices for occasional users. Transparency of project performance is provided with a work list that can even be personalized. the following benefits: - It increases transparency of project performance and issues. - It speeds up administrative work around projects. - Target group The target group includes project leads and project team members. - Work overview In the overview area, a project work list provides at-a-glance information on relevant project-related key figures based on an evaluation framework that is fed with data from cprojects and Central Component ( ECC). Key figures are displayed, such as budget, planned costs, and actual costs. In addition, my projects, my project tasks, my checklist items, and my issues are displayed. By selecting an object (project, project task,

checklist item, or issue), you can start different services or access cprojects directly. - Self-services The following self-services are offered: > Create project: you create a new project based on a template. > Maintain general task: you create and edit tasks assigned directly to the project definition. > Maintain open issues: for each project, you can create and edit a list of issues. These issues are usually of a general nature and cannot be assigned to phases or tasks in the project. > Create e-mail: you notify other people associated with a task or other project objects about concerns you have with this object. > Assign person to project: you assign one or more individuals to a project, using roles. You also create new roles. > Assign person to tasks: you assign one ore more individuals to a task in a project. > Confirm task: you confirm work done on a task. > Confirm checklist item: you confirm the result of a checklist item. > Confirm open issue: if assigned to an issue, you enter the text or close the issue. Common to all self-services is that they are based on step-by-step guidance that is very intuitive and easy to follow. 6.0 End-User Service Delivery QM role: quality inspector - Reporting To support project analytics, a set of evaluations from cprojects (for example, tasks and task assignments, completed checklist items) and financial reports from the former business Information Warehouse component (whose functionality is now part of NetWeaver) and ECC are offered. The following can be used as reporting objects: cprojects project definition, project definition, work breakdown structure (WBS) element, and internal order. The quality inspector role addresses quality inspectors, who are usually responsible for tasks such as the following: - Inspection lot processing - Sample drawing - Results and defects recording (values of inspection characteristics, nonconformity data) - Running quality control charts the following benefits: - It minimizes cost of defects and product recalls. - It reduces cost of quality compliance.

6.0 Corporate Services role: quality inspector These tasks are made up of highly repetitive steps with time pressure, necessitating speedy data entry. Personalized work lists for inspection lots, as well as notifications and tasks for exceptions, are expected. The simple user interface of this role fulfills the tasks of a quality inspector. - Target group The target group includes quality inspectors in various industries and processes. - Work overview You can display an overview of your daily work. Depending on your task, you can access inspection lots, notifications and tasks, production orders, or confirmations through the work list. You can also use the work list for inspection lots to record results or defects for the selected inspection lot. Moreover, you can create quality notifications or malfunction reports to record problems and inform interested parties. You can use the work list for orders to confirm times and defects for production directly. - Inspections You can record, change, or display results for your inspection. You can record defects for an operation in an inspection lot. You can also create a quality notification without a reference object if unexpected problems arise. - Confirmation You can create confirmations for materials, times, and defects with reference to production orders. - Additional services There is a selection of other services that quality inspectors need to complete their work. The quality inspector role addresses quality inspectors, who are usually responsible for tasks such as the following: - Inspection lot processing - Sample drawing - Results and defects recording (values of inspection characteristics, nonconformity data) - Running quality control charts These tasks are made up of highly repetitive steps with time pressure, necessitating speedy data entry. Personalized work lists for inspection lots, as well as notifications and tasks for exceptions, are expected. The the following benefits: - It minimizes cost of defects and product recalls. - It reduces cost of quality compliance.

Base Functionality Base Functionality Sales and Service Sales and Service HR HR Configuration of incentive business Management of incentive compensation plans simple user interface of this role fulfills the tasks of a quality inspector. - Target group The target group includes quality inspectors in various industries and processes. - Work overview You can display an overview of your daily work. Depending on your task, you can access inspection lots, notifications and tasks, production orders, or confirmations through the work list. You can also use the work list for inspection lots to record results or defects for the selected inspection lot. Moreover, you can create quality notifications or malfunction reports to record problems and inform interested parties. You can use the work list for orders to confirm times and defects for production directly. - Inspections You can record, change, or display results for your inspection. You can record defects for an operation in an inspection lot. You can also create a quality notification without a reference object if unexpected problems arise. - Confirmation You can create confirmations for materials, times, and defects with reference to production orders. - Additional services There is a selection of other services that quality inspectors need to complete their work. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides design functionalities for the basic business structures. - It includes the identification of the business objects for which commissions are to be paid. - It offers several packages of the Incentive and Commission Management (ICM) application containing the functionality needed. The highly generic design of Incentive and Commission Management is open to all industryand customer-specific parameter values that may influence the construction of this application. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It includes a commission recipient database listing all personnel eligible for commissions. - It provides standard commission contracts in which changes to the the following benefits: - It enables you to include all customer-specific commission and incentive information. - It structures system tables according to customer indications. - It enables you to streamline implementation project and the Incentive and Commission Management application. the following benefits: - It helps ensure consistency in incentive compensation plans throughout the company.

standard contract are automatically updated in individual commission contracts. - It supports modification of individual commission contracts to meet any unique requirements. - It allows you to automatically distinguish the recipient of the respective indirect commission (such as a manager) from the recipient of a direct commission (such as a sales representative) through an organizational hierarchy. - It offers simplified configuration of commission contracts. - It helps reduce administrative burdens for commission analysts when new guidelines are implemented. Base Functionality Sales and Service HR Calculation of variable compensation Each commission recipient is represented by an business partner within the Incentive and Commission Management application. The commission recipient is the holder of a position in the organizational hierarchy with his or her own individual commission contract. The individual commission contract is based on the standard commission contract that serves as a template. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It supports calculation of the following benefits: - It both direct sales commissions and helps reduce burdens for incentive compensation. commission administrators - It provides participation determination, through highly automated which creates incentive calculations for commission processing. multiple recipients within a single - It enables tracking of any calculation process. commission transaction - Through a valuation calculation through the use of highly feature, it supports the alignment of sophisticated versions individual compensation with corporate concept. goals. - It supports better - Through a remuneration calculation alignment of compensation feature, it determines the amount of with corporate goals. individual commissions to be paid. - Through a posting feature, it defines due dates and commission periods. Direct sales commission processing allows customers to run commission calculation, on the basis of, for example, sales activities or financials bookings. Each sales order created or each invoice booked can trigger a commission calculation process. This commission transactional processing on item level is designed to process extremely high transactional volumes. In the case of incentive compensation, the Incentive and Commission Management application allows you to process commission calculations on the basis of aggregated data, such as an overall revenue figure of a sales team for one or more periods.

Base Functionality my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 Sales and Service Sales and Service Sales and Service Sales and Service 6.0 Sales and Service 6.0 Sales and Service HR HR HR HR HR HR Compensation results analysis Configuration of incentive business Management of incentive compensation plans Calculation of variable compensation Configuration of incentive business Management of incentive compensation plans a variety of data analysis tools (including drill-down the following benefits: - reports) that allow employees, their Insight for managers into managers, and commission analysts to the financial impact of perform comprehensive analyses of incentive plans, selected compensation programs and their by product, region, or results. organization - Insight into earned and expected commissions for commission recipients, based on actual and simulated figures - Avoidance of timeconsuming shadow tracking by commission recipients This functionality is characterized as follows: - Incentive and commission management packages for application construction split up new developments into separate packages. - Importing business object categories allows you to import metadata from other components and software. This functionality is characterized as follows: - An encapsulated condition technique includes the introduction of an adapter interface to add a different calculation service. - Ending commission contracts enable the automated ending or deactivating of a commission contract. the following benefits: - It allows you to streamline implementation project and the Incentive and Commission Management application. - It helps you avoid doublemaintenance of business objects. the following benefits: - It allows you to link a customer-specific calculation service for valuation, remuneration, and liabilities. - It frees commission administrators from manual work when sales representatives leave the company. This functionality is characterized as follows: - Settlement schedules enable the following benefits: - It the temporal distribution of commission helps automatically payments. distribute commission - Actual commission allows for payouts on the basis of diversification of payment triggers. customer-defined rules. - Threshold value in settlement may - It enables payouts to be restrict the billing run, depending on linked to preconditions: for predefined thresholds. example, to incoming customer payments. - It avoids expenditures for paying out only small amounts. Further incentive and commission management packages for application construction split up new developments into separate packages. This functionality accomplishes the following: - Target agreements allow you to calculate an individual s progress toward predefined targets. This functionality allows you to streamline implementation projects and the Incentive and Commission Management application. the following benefits: - Improved compliance with an organization s

6.0 Sales and Service 6.0 Sales and Service 6.0 Sales and Service my 2004 End-User Service - Partnerships enable the automated split and distribution of remunerations among partnership members. - The entitlement and liability transfer function facilitates the transfer of open entitlements and liabilities from one executive to another. - The object assignment framework includes a user interface and process definition to facilitate the abovementioned transfers. HR Portfolio management This functionality accomplishes the following: - The portfolio assignments and transfer function enables the storage of the relationships between business objects and executives and the transfer of existing business object assignments from one executive to another. - The object assignment framework includes a user interface and process definition to facilitate these transfers. HR HR Calculation of variable compensation Compensation results analysis This functionality accomplishes the following: - Valuation by copy services offers a simplified procedure for determination and calculation of the valuation. - Retroactive case processing represents a methodology/framework that determines and corrects a chain of commission cases. - Workflow for incentive and commission management cases communicates the workload of commission cases to the right administrators. - Parallelization enables parallel processing during the settlement run. Additional business warehouse extractors for document header, valuation documents, and due date documents are available, as are scheduling items to enhance analytical reporting through the NetWeaver Business Intelligence component. HR Web Dynpro conversion With the release in 2004 and after, employee and manager self- compensation policy and greater employee satisfaction, with more transparency in compensation calculations - Determination of all entitled commission recipients and associated splits - Streamlining of administrative processes: for example, when an executive retires - Support for assignments and reassignments on an ad hoc basis or on the basis of a set of rules the following benefits: - It facilitates controlling and transparency through business segmentation: for example, by regional aspects. - It supports assignments and reassignments on an ad hoc basis or on the basis of a set of rules. the following benefits: - It streamlines the implementation process to define simple valuation rules. - It enables the recalculation of commissions on the basis of changes in the contractor commission case. - It enhances usability through administratorspecific information flow. - It enhances performance through reduced settlement running time. the following benefits: - Improved decision making through insight into the financial impact of incentive plans and their effect on the performance of commission recipients - Better compliance with organizational compensation policies through enhanced analytics the following benefits: -

my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 Delivery End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery HR HR HR HR People-centric user interface Cross-site scripting (XSS) home page framework services functionality have used the Web Dynpro development environment. The Employee Self- Service application (which was based on IT services) and the Manager Self-Service application (which was a Java technology) use the same technology. In the 2004 release, not all of the self-services were converted: mainly employee selfservices were converted, as well as some manager self-services. The new people-centric user interface of the self-services gives the end user more guidance through a service and therefore makes it much easier to use. In the 2004 release of, the focus in the area of self services was mainly on improved user interface and user interaction. All self-services now have the same look and feel. The most important user interface concepts introduced are as follows: - The floor plan manager, a blueprint that enables all self-services to look, feel, and react in the same way - The road map, to guide end users step by step through a service (for example, start, edit, review, and complete) - Context-sensitive assistance, providing relevant data and information to the end user in context of the service executed The home page framework delivers an entry page for all self-services that are offered to managers or employees with flexible functions. It provides an overview on the self-services available and a short description of each. The available services are grouped into functional groups through area group pages and area pages and therefore allow structured access for the end user. From there, the user navigates to the different single services (in the Web Dynpro development environment) that run in the enterprise portal. On the home page, the customer can also add additional content such as external links and documents describing guidelines and policies. Time management leave situations available in request, record working time and Web Dynpro release working time, and time development environment statement functions. New time management function: clock-in/clockout corrections This functionality minimizes the administrative burden for time administrators (for example, secretaries) by allowing employees to Employee Self- Service and Manager Self-Service applications entail use of the same technology. - The user interface is improved, and therefore user productivity is higher. the following benefits: - Intuitive design and navigation allows people to complete their jobs faster. - Occasional users have easy access. - Same look and feel of all self-services helps end users feel more comfortable with using them, which leads to higher acceptance. - Minimal training is needed. the following benefits: - More guidance and easier navigation - A better overview on the services offered - Fewer calls to the human resources service center See description of Web Dynpro conversion. This functionality reduces cycle times.

my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery HR HR HR correct their own time postings and account assignments. Payment functions salary available in Web Dynpro statement, total compensation development environment statement, and employment and salary verification functions. Career functions Skill profile available in Web Dynpro development environment Personal information Personal information includes the functions available in following: Web Dynpro development environment - Address (including emergency address[ IT0006 subtype 004]) - Bank information - Family member/dependent - Personal data Supported countries for this functionality are Germany, United States, Japan, Canada, France, United Kingdom, Switzerland, The Netherlands, Sweden, Austria, Australia, South Africa, Spain, Belgium, Denmark, Portugal, Singapore, Italy, India, South Korea, Finland, Brazil, Norway, Mexico, Malaysia, and New Zealand. With regard to personal IDs, the supported country for this is Singapore. The employee search entails the following features: See description of Web Dynpro conversion. See description of Web Dynpro conversion. See description of Web Dynpro conversion. my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery HR HR HR - Who s who - Changing own data Benefits functions This functionality enables enrollment, available in Web Dynpro participation overview, and offline development environment enrollment (through Adobe PDF file). Country-specific functions This functionality addresses the available in Web Dynpro following issues: - Value of entitlement development environment (Anwartschaften/BAV) (Denmark) - Net calculation of monthly salary (Nettoeinkommen pro Monat) (Denmark) - Semi-retirement Simulation (Altersteilzeitsimulation) (Denmark) - Deferred Compensation (Gehaltsumwandlung) (Denmark) - Tax witholding (W-4) (United States) - W-2 reprint (United States) - IR8A Form (Singapore) - IR8S Form (Singapore) - Personal IDs (Asian countries) - Tax (Australia) - Tax form reprint (Canada) - Tax inquiry (Canada) Further functions This functionality addresses the available in Web Dynpro following issues: - Work environment development environment (financial accounting) See description of Web Dynpro conversion. See description of Web Dynpro conversion. the following benefits: - Improved support of

my 2004 End-User Service Delivery Equipment repair request (specific internal service request), equipment card - Seamless integration of other Web solutions E-recruiting (internal recruiting), Enterprise Buyer (e-procurement) HR Web Dynpro conversion The following manager self-services were converted to Web Dynpro technology: different business processes - Additional advantages: see description of Web Dynpro conversion See description of Web Dynpro conversion my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery 6.0 End-User Service HR Personnel change requests: Adobe Designer integration - Team calendar - Personnel change requests - Recruiting (e-recruiting) - Reporting - Headcount planning This functionality enables integration of interactive forms based on Adobe software in personnel change requests. The forms are created with the Adobe Designer tool. Some example templates are available in the standard software. "Interactive" means that fields can be edited during the process and different users are involved. HR E-recruiting integration This functionality enables managers to initiate a requisition request, either on the basis of a position, a job, or a previous requisition or starting from scratch. The requisition request is routed to the recruiter, who then starts appropriate recruiting actions. The manager who initiated the requisition request can check the status of the requisition on the requisition request overview. The manager has access to the suitable candidates that were selected by the recruiter and can evaluate them with a questionnaire. HR Equipment management This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides information about physical inventory in area of responsibility. - It ensures awareness of equipment assigned to transferred employees. - It provides monitors to track cost centers and internal orders. HR Integration of form-based processes This functionality enables integration of form-based processes, which allows the following benefits: - Enhanced usability and user acceptance - Easier implementation of customer-specific employee change actions - "What you see is what you get" editor the following benefits: - It enables managers to initiate a requisition request either on the basis of a position, a job, a previous requisition or starting from scratch. The requisition request is routed to the recruiter, who then starts appropriate recruiting actions. - The manager who initiated the requisition request can check the status of the requisition on the requisition request overview. - The manager has access to the suitable candidates that were selected by the recruiter and can evaluate them with a questionnaire. the following benefits: - Enhanced control features for the manager - Better manager support in administrative processes - Reduced cycle times the following benefits: -

Delivery 6.0 End-User Service Delivery 6.0 End-User Service Delivery organizations to implement forms more easily and quickly with print forms and interactive forms based on Adobe software. HR User interface technology Most self-services now available are based on Web Dynpro, the development environment. This technology has been enhanced with the following functionality to provide better adaptability for different scenarios and different customer needs: - Modification-free screen adaptations through personalization (for example, hide/unhide fields) - Clickable road maps - Adding of content assistant pattern (CAP) links: for example, policy for leave requests HR Localization Address, bank information, family members/dependents, and personal data services are available for the following countries: - Argentina - China - Hong Kong - Indonesia - Philippines - Taiwan - Thailand - Venezuela Lower form-based process implementation costs - Increased end-user acceptance - Easy adaptability of processes the following benefits: - Easier user interface adaptation at less cost - Further improved usability the following benefits: - Enhanced support for countries - Compliance with local regulations, legal requirements, and guidelines Personal ID service is available for the following countries: - Indonesia - Malaysia - Taiwan - Thailand - Hong Kong Country-specific functions include the following: 6.0 End-User Service Delivery - Superannuation for Australia - Flexible benefits for the United Kingdom HR New functions With regard to life and work events based on guided procedures, employees can navigate step by step through personal, payroll, and benefits information by using guided procedures for the following events: - "My first day" - Birth/adoption - Marriage - Divorce the following benefits: - Employees are led step by step through processes to manage their life or work events. They spend much less time on searching for relevant information and guidelines. When all necessary steps are presented to them, they

6.0 End-User Service Delivery 6.0 End-User Service Delivery 6.0 End-User Service Delivery HR HR Bank information s with the International Bank Account Number Employee communication and office data - Termination of employment - Change in employment status - Benefits (annual enrollment) An example of Adobe interactive form integration is the code of business conduct: monitoring of employee acceptance of corporate guidelines, including data storage. Employee bank information is extended by the International Bank Account Number (IBAN). The IBAN is an International Organization for Standardization (ISO) and European Committee for Banking Standards (ECBS) norm for representing bank code and account number. The goal is easier handling of cross-border transactions. Employees can change their own communication and office data within the who is who service and select a person directly from an organizational chart to get personal details. HR User interface design The Manager Self-Service application has been redesigned to be fully consistent with the role-based control and work center paradigm, providing distinct work centers for team, budget, project, and planning, as well as a work overview to support managers in these areas of responsibility. Manager Self-Service enables more effective resource management. It optimizes human capital and financial management functionalities and improves logistics processes significantly. Reminders, budget items that might become critical, and status information on ongoing processes enable managers to control their work better and are therefore directly brought into the managers' work overview. can complete the process end to end and know that they have not missed anything important. - Employees can much more efficiently manage their life and work events and therefore can concentrate more on valuegenerating tasks. - The human resources department is less involved in administrative processes and can spend more time on strategic topics. the following benefits: - It allows the employee to maintain the International Bank Account Number (IBAN). This decreases the cost of salary transfers to foreign banking organizations. - It provides better support for international outsourcing models in payroll. the following benefits: - It reduces the administrative burden of maintaining personnel data. - It ensures more accurate employee information. - It simplifies access to an employee s personal details. the following benefits: - It helps managers manage their area of responsibility even more proactively. - It provides managers with better control and transparency on overall team, project, and budget situation, as well as the staffing process. - It improves productivity and reduces training needs.

6.0 End-User Service Delivery 6.0 End-User Service Delivery HR HR Manager Self-Service is the right application for managers, whether they act in the role of line managers, project managers, or department managers. Specific information and applications that these types of managers participate in can be combined. With the right analytical information for each manager, at any management level, Manager Self-Service enables managers to effectively and productively contribute to the organization s overall strategy and to influence business outcomes. Functions converted to Examples for additionally converted Web Dynpro functions in Manager Self-Service development environment are as follows: New functions available in Web Dynpro development environment - Compensation planning and approval - Employee position - Organizational unit profile In addition, personnel change requests can now be launched from the external employee information page as related activity. This functionality addresses the following issues: - Time management > Approve time sheet data > Approve time corrections - Career management: edit position requirements profile Employee self-service in the Manager Self-Service application is available for the following scenarios and data: Further business-related applications are available to better support managers in their complete human capital management task portfolio. 6.0 End-User Service Delivery HR Employee and object selection - Changing office and communication data - Recording working time - Clocking in/clocking out - Total compensation statement - Addresses - Bank information - Family members/dependents - Personal data - Skills profile - "My trips and expenses" - "My credit card receipts" - Creating travel request - Creating travel plan - Creating expense report - "My travel profile" The enhanced object and data provider allows managers more flexible employee selection for manager selfservices. The manager has different options to the following benefits: - Improved scalability of employee search within a large number of employees This also allows higher

6.0 End-User Service Delivery 6.0 End-User Service Delivery 6.0 End-User Service Delivery 6.0 End-User Service Delivery HR Active work item presentation select one or multiple employees in his area of responsibility, such as the following personnel: - Directly reporting employees - Employees in an organizational unit (selecting organizational unit from a tree structure) - Employees in an organizational unit (selecting organizational unit from a list) - An individual employee (searching for employee by name, ID, or other criteria) level managers to use manager self-services without any restrictions. - Enhanced customizing options These Allow better adaptability of the user interface to individual needs. - Comfortable search functionalities These allow for quicker and more specific object searches. Work items such as approvals appear Active presentation of work on the overview page in the work list of items in one single point of the Manager Self-Service control allow the manager application as tasks. In addition, alerts to work more efficiently. can be configured as part of the universal work list (UWL) to directly point the manager to areas in which action is required. HR Improved monitoring The key figure monitor give the manager an overview of important data. The manager can select the key figures he or she wants to monitor on a daily basis and can define rules for alerts and traffic light functions. HR Integration of analytical data A manager can manage his or her area of responsibility proactively if he or she can define the most critical key figures and monitor them on an ongoing basis. The manager sees immediately when corrections are needed and can initiate corrective actions. This functionality accomplishes the following: - Managers receive different the following benefits: - reports directly on the entry page. Structured analytical - Content information is provided where insights provide managers it is needed for different applications. with content-related - Report launch pad allows managers information for their to launch human capital management decision making. and financial accounting related - Different levels of reports from one single place. For management get the human capital management, the required information. manager s desktop reporting can be recustomized. HR Express planning This functionality has the following advantages: - A single point of entry for the following benefits: - It planning helps integrate different applications and services and includes a structured presentation of various tasks in a guided procedure. - Users can enter this application directly through e-mail or a work item. - Organizations can integrate their own custom-developed applications and services. makes the budgeting and planning process more efficient by including a status overview for planners, such as managers, and for planning supervisors, such as business unit analysts. - It increases user productivity through enhanced planning coordination and monitoring. - It enables users to work

6.0 End-User Service Delivery HR Employee interaction center This functionality helps employees and human resources (HR) staff interact more efficiently through a central point of contact for HR requests. Employees have access to a single, unified source of contact and information, and employee interaction center (EIC) agents and HR staff can easily access information and tools to deliver consistent, personalized services across multiple communication channels. at their own pace with minimal training effort. - It supports setting up of collaborative planning rounds, and decentralized planning processes. the following benefits: - It increases employee satisfaction. - It reduces human resources costs and increases productivity. - It improves service levels. - It enables out-of-the-box integration to human capital management processes and portal roles. EIC functionality includes the following: - Contact management provides functions that allow HR staff to manage and process all information about employee requests, as well as to track contact history. - Agents and HR staff can record and process each procedural step and follow-up activity for individual employee requests through activity management. - Integration with records management provides knowledge management functionalities to the HR department to improve contact-handling efficiency and expedite resolution of employee requests. - Computer telephony integration (CTI) is enabled with soft-phone features (such as accept call, hold, hang up, and transfer). - Agent inbox is a central work repository to receive incoming work items and to sort, search, or forward to HR contacts for processing. - Workflow management supports escalation and routing rules to help managers define which supervisors, support staff, and departments should receive various incoming requests. - Display and change employee master data function allow the EIC agents to directly access all employee data and make necessary changes. - Authentication call of self-services allows EIC agents to execute selfservice transactions on behalf of employees. - Integration with portal roles ( Employee Self-Service and Manager Self-Service) allows the employees and managers to contact

6.0 End-User Service Delivery 6.0 End-User Service Delivery HR HR Human capital management processes and forms New portal role for human resources administrator the EIC directly from a self service. This functionality enables organizations to streamline their HR service delivery. The EIC connects a broad user base to human capital management services through multiple delivery channels any time and anywhere. In addition, efforts for delivering the same services to different groups within an organization can be consolidated; HR staff, thus relieved of this administrative burden, can focus on their strategic mandate. The EIC is an HR help desk and call center application that provides a costeffective, service-oriented solution. This significantly supports HR in executing its shared services strategy in meeting organizational and employee objectives. The delivered EIC functionality is based on the decoupled interaction center Web client technology for customer relationship management (which in turn is based on BSP Technology software). This functionality accomplishes the following: - It facilitates a processtriggered work style and overview of enables the automation of the following benefits: - It work items. paper-based processes. - It provides form-based processes for - It facilitates multiple end entering and maintaining human capital users to contribute to a management (HCM) data with human resources (HR) interactive forms based on Adobe process. software. - It allows the HR - It allows human resources department to stay in administrators, employees, and control of the process and managers to provide data and the data. collaboratively work on HCM - It facilitates work for HR processes. administrators and makes - It enables collaboration with the entire them much more organization through real integration. productive through an - It includes a universal work list (UWL) improved user interface. with work items classified according to - It supports an HR specific tasks, priorities, approvals, organization to deliver HR pending items, or even automatic services efficiently. responses. - It offers a process design time that enables you to model the process flow and workflow according to customers individual needs and easily adapt processes to changes. This unique, new portal role provides real integration for collaboration within the entire organization and enables you to deliver efficient human resources services. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It facilitates a processtriggered work style and overview of work items. - It provides a central point of access to the following benefits: - It provides central role for the implementation of a shared-service center

my 2004 my 2004 Procurement and Logistics Execution Sales and Service all relevant information and tools that support the administration of employees. - It offers enhanced master data maintenance with faster navigation. - It allows customization of the employee profile screen for professional users, granting access to detailed employee information. - It includes a process browser for detailed searches on closed and ongoing processes. concept in the human resources (HR) department. - It facilitates work for HR administrators and makes them much more productive through an improved user interface. - It supports HR organization to deliver HR services efficiently. MM Self-service requisitioning Support for self-service requisitioning within the application empowers employees throughout the Self-service requisitioning improves procurement speed and responsiveness, company to create and manage routine while freeing the requisitions by themselves, including self-service requisitions for maintenance, repair, and operations material and services. Catalog content purchasing department to focus on strategic tasks by reducing administrative burden. management in helps accelerate ordering for frequently ordered services, projects, and materials and improves compliance with company purchasing rules. SD/LES E-commerce The application provides powerful e-commerce functionalities the following benefits: - that can be expanded in an easy, costeffective Increased revenues manner in line with business The application growth. Organizations can run a enables businesses to use complete sales process on the Internet the Internet as a profitable and provide business-to-business channel for sales and (B2B) and business-to-consumer (B2C) interaction. Web shops can customers with personalized and be easily integrated. interactive online self-services. - Improved customer service provides a convenient, easy-to-use experience, supporting customers with online product configuration, shopping basket features, product availability checks, and secure transactions, as well as order status and tracking. - Simplified sales processes supports a variety of end-to-end sales processes with easy-to-use interactive self-services for customers. - Reduced total cost of ownership E-commerce in is fully integrated with existing processes and systems, which makes it possible to leverage existing

my 2004 my 2004 Sales and Service Product PM Development and Manufacturing SD/LES Mobile sales for handheld devices Computer-aided design integration The application enables sales professionals to access frontand back-office business processes and to manage critical sales activities in the field by using standard personal digital assistants (PDAs) or other handheld devices (including those with bar code scanners). In this area, ERP provides the following functions: - Customer management With, sales professionals may enter, view, and modify detailed customer information and view sales order history for each customer. - Sales order management enables sales staff to take sales orders with the use of bar code scanners; search, create, and modify sales orders; and list or sort sales order partners. - Material management Support for material management for mobile device sales enables staff to view material lists or details for a specific material, search material, and display customer-specific prices. New features allow users to access and edit computer-aided design (CAD) document structures directly in CAD software or from within the application, enabling the inclusion of new product information in business processes at an early stage. CAD integration supports a variety of industry-standard CAD software, including Pro/ENGINEER, CATIA, and Autodesk Inventor. Moreover, because each interface is developed by partners, businesses are assured seamless integration. investments to support e- commerce activities. the following benefits: - Increased data entry accuracy Using bar code and radiofrequency identification technologies instead of keystrokes ensures that data is entered rapidly and without errors. - Simplified and accelerated processes By enabling sales professionals to create orders in the field, the ERP application speeds order entry and fulfillment. - Reduced data maintenance and administrative burden Because data from the field is entered directly in ERP, it is not necessary to reenter field information in back-office or other software. Computer-aided design (CAD) integration supports enterprise-wide collaboration with concurrent engineering and versioning, which makes it easy for multiple users to simultaneously process an assembly and enables the status of several processes to be saved in the software. my 2004 Financials FI-TV Employee Self- Service: for travel and expenses CAD integration provides a single access point to all CAD documents, which makes it easier for all users to access the resources they need, when they need them. Enhanced viewing options include tabbed pages for different views and the ability to view two- and three-dimensional files (such as drawings and CAD models) in a single view. The CAD integration also simplifies routine tasks with automatic bills of material, visual version control, mass check-in/check-out, and checkin/check-out assistant functionalities. As of the 2004 release of, the travel management functionality comes with a fully redesigned suite of the following benefits: - Reduced training efforts,

my 2004 Human Capital Management FI-TV Employee Self- Service: for travel and expenses functions for the self-service user increased user adoption (travelers) and travel arrangers. The rates, and thus higher ROI new functions run on the same of system deployment business logic, but the user interface is - Easy and direct access to based on the Web Dynpro a range of travel services development environment and can be for employees integrated with the NetWeaver - Improved user Portal component. They cover the acceptance following actions: - Minimized training costs - Create travel request and decreased help desk - Create travel plan calls - Create expense report - Reduced administrative - Maintain personal traveler profile costs - Switch to different traveler Programmers are the - View credit card imports "geeks" of the IT fields. - View all personal trip history In addition to the visual and navigation redesign, this functionality accomplishes the following tasks: - It integrates maps to support hotel and airport searches, indicating exact distances to destination addresses - It integrates airline and car rental logos, hotel images, and amenities information in availability searches - It integrates external Web content regarding travel security, health, and visa and immigration information per destination country As of the 2004 release of, the travel management functionality comes with a fully redesigned suite of functions for the self-service user (travelers) and travel arrangers. The new functions run on the same business logic, but the user interface is based on the Web Dynpro development environment and can be integrated with the NetWeaver Portal component. They cover the following actions: - Create travel request - Create travel plan - Create expense report - Maintain personal traveler profile - Switch to different traveler - View credit card imports - View all personal trip history In addition to the visual and navigation redesign, this functionality accomplishes the following tasks: - It integrates maps to support hotel and airport searches, indicating exact distances to destination addresses. - It integrates airline and car rental logos, hotel images, and amenities information in availability searches. - It integrates external Web content regarding travel security, health, and visa and immigration information per destination country. the following benefits: - Reduced training efforts, increased user adoption rates, and thus higher ROI of system deployment - Easy and direct access to a range of travel services for employees - Improved user acceptance - Minimized training costs and decreased help desk calls - Reduced administrative costs

my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 Corporate Services FI-TV Employee Self- Service: for Travel and Expenses Financials FI-TV Travel planning: connection to Sabre Human Capital Management Corporate Services FI-TV FI-TV Travel planning: connection to Sabre Travel planning: connection to Sabre As of the 2004 release of, the travel management functionality the following benefits: - comes with a fully redesigned suite of Reduced training efforts, functions for the self-service user increased user adoption (travelers) and travel arrangers. The rates, and thus higher ROI new functions run on the same of system deployment business logic, but the user interface is - Easy and direct access to based on the Web Dynpro a range of travel services development environment and can be for employees integrated with the NetWeaver - Improved user Portal component. They cover the acceptance following actions: - Create travel - Minimized training costs request and decreased help desk - Create travel plan calls - Create expense report - Reduced administrative - Maintain personal traveler profile costs - Switch to different traveler - View credit card imports - View all personal trip history In addition to the visual and navigation redesign, this functionality accomplishes the following tasks: - It integrates maps to support hotel and airport searches, indicating exact distances to destination addresses. - It integrates airline and car rental logos, hotel images, and amenities information in availability searches. - It integrates external Web content regarding travel security, health, and visa and immigration information per destination country. Travel planning has been enhanced with full connectivity to the Sabre GDS (global distribution system) for online booking of air travel, hotels, and car rentals. Travel planning has been enhanced with full connectivity to the Sabre GDS (global distribution system) for online booking of air travel, hotels, and car rentals. Travel planning has been enhanced with full connectivity to the Sabre GDS (global distribution system) for online booking of air travel, hotels, and car rentals. Travel planning the online booking function of the Travel Management application encourages better compliance with travel policy, increases the use of preferred suppliers, and provides strong reporting facilities for use in supplier negotiations. Travel planning the online booking function of the Travel Management application encourages better compliance with travel policy, increases the use of preferred suppliers, and provides strong reporting facilities for use in supplier negotiations. Travel planning the online booking function of the Travel Management application encourages better compliance with travel policy, increases the use of

6.0 Financials FI-TV Travel planning: low-cost carriers in Internet fares 6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Corporate Services FI-TV FI-TV Travel planning: low-cost carriers in Internet fares Travel planning: low-cost carriers in Internet fares 6.0 Financials FI-TV Hotel reservation software in travel planning preferred suppliers, and provides strong reporting facilities for use in supplier negotiations. In addition to booking low-cost carriers already bookable through global the following benefits: - distribution systems (GDSs), the travel Increased flexibility to use planning function offers a generic different reservation interface, based on the software in the booking NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure process ( NetWeaver XI) component, to - Lower total cost of Internet airfare search engines. ownership (TCO) and Customers can download the interface implementation costs content of certified and other hotel through service provider reservation providers into their specific integration support NetWeaver XI software, thereby flexibly - Lower direct purchasing choosing the provider of their choice costs, because of access and best local fit. to a wider range of lowprice offers In addition to booking low-cost carriers already bookable through global the following benefits: - distribution systems (GDSs), the travel Increased flexibility to use planning function offers a generic different reservation interface, based on the software in the booking NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure process ( NetWeaver XI) component, to - Lower total cost of Internet airfare search engines. ownership (TCO) and Customers can download the interface implementation costs content of certified and other hotel through service provider reservation providers into their specific integration support NetWeaver XI software, thereby flexibly - Lower direct purchasing choosing the provider of their choice costs, because of access and best local fit. to a wider range of lowprice offers In addition to booking low-cost carriers already bookable through global the following benefits: - distribution systems (GDSs), the travel Increased flexibility to use planning function offers a generic different reservation interface, based on the software in the booking NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure process ( NetWeaver XI) component, to - Lower total cost of Internet airfare search engines. ownership (TCO) and Customers can download the interface implementation costs content of certified and other hotel through service provider reservation providers into their specific integration support NetWeaver XI software, thereby flexibly - Lower direct purchasing choosing the provider of their choice costs, because of access and best local fit. to a wider range of lowprice offers This function includes a generic interface, based on the NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure ( NetWeaver XI) component, to computer reservation software for hotels. Customers can download the interface content of certified and other hotel reservation providers into their NetWeaver XI software, thereby flexibly choosing the provider of their choice and best local fit. the following benefits: - Increased flexibility to use different reservation systems in the booking process - Lower total cost of ownership (TCO) and implementation costs through service provider specific integration support - Lower direct purchasing

6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Corporate Services FI-TV FI-TV Hotel reservation software in travel planning Hotel reservation software in travel planning This function includes a generic interface, based on the NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure ( NetWeaver XI) component, to computer reservation software for hotels. Customers can download the interface content of certified and other hotel reservation providers into their NetWeaver XI software, thereby flexibly choosing the provider of their choice and best local fit. This function includes a generic interface, based on the NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure ( NetWeaver XI) component, to computer reservation software for hotels. Customers can download the interface content of certified and other hotel reservation providers into their NetWeaver XI software, thereby flexibly choosing the provider of their choice and best local fit. 6.0 Financials FI-TV Use of Adobe print forms This functionality accomplishes the following: - It prints forms as Adobe PDF documents for travel requests, travel plans, and expense reports. - It facilitates the configuration and adaptation of look and feel (for example, the addition of a corporate logo or image creation of different designs per traveler category). - Forms are easy to print, send, and save locally. - It includes the option to add in bar codes for an automated receipt imaging process. 6.0 Human Capital Management FI-TV Use of Adobe print forms This functionality accomplishes the following: - It prints forms as Adobe PDF documents for travel requests, travel plans, and expense reports. - It facilitates the configuration and adaptation of look and feel (for example, the addition of a corporate logo or image creation of different designs per traveler category). - Forms are easy to print, send, and save locally. - It includes the option to add in bar codes for an automated receipt imaging process. costs, because of access to a wider range of lowprice offers the following benefits: - Increased flexibility to use different reservation systems in the booking process - Lower total cost of ownership (TCO) and implementation costs through service provider specific integration support - Lower direct purchasing costs, because of access to a wider range of lowprice offers the following benefits: - Increased flexibility to use different reservation systems in the booking process - Lower total cost of ownership (TCO) and implementation costs through service provider specific integration support - Lower direct purchasing costs, because of access to a wider range of lowprice offers the following benefits: - Improved usability for online and offline travel management situations - Significantly reduced effort for entering travel and expense data, as well as associated administration efforts, as paper receipts become obsolete - Increased flexibility in importing information the following benefits: - Improved usability for online and offline travel management situations - Significantly reduced effort for entering travel and expense data, as well as associated administration efforts, as paper receipts become obsolete - Increased flexibility in importing information

6.0 Corporate Services FI-TV 6.0 Financials FI-TV Automatic mileage calculation for fraud prevention 6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Corporate Services FI-TV FI-TV Use of Adobe print forms This functionality accomplishes the following: - It prints forms as Adobe PDF documents for travel requests, travel plans, and expense reports. - It facilitates the configuration and adaptation of look and feel (for example, the addition of a corporate logo or image creation of different designs per traveler category). - Forms are easy to print, send, and save locally. - It includes the option to add in bar codes for an automated receipt imaging process. Automatic mileage calculation for fraud prevention Automatic mileage calculation for fraud prevention 6.0 Financials FI-TV Automatic receipt imaging and bar code encryption 6.0 Human Capital Management FI-TV Automatic receipt imaging and bar code encryption the following benefits: - Improved usability for online and offline travel management situations - Significantly reduced effort for entering travel and expense data, as well as associated administration efforts, as paper receipts become obsolete - Increased flexibility in importing information With the integration of geocoding content into the travel expenses the following benefits: - function, users can rely on the software Avoidance of fraud risk to automatically calculate the driven mileage between their travel destinations. - Improvement in compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act With the integration of geocoding content into the travel expenses the following benefits: - function, users can rely on the software Avoidance of fraud risk to automatically calculate the driven - Improvement in mileage between their travel compliance with the destinations. Sarbanes-Oxley Act With the integration of geocoding content into the travel expenses the following benefits: - function, users can rely on the software Avoidance of fraud risk to automatically calculate the driven - Improvement in mileage between their travel compliance with the destinations. Sarbanes-Oxley Act With the inclusion of bar codes in printed expense report forms, customers can now easily implement an automatic receipt imaging process. Self-service users (travelers, travel arrangers) can print the bar coded expense form after having recorded their expense report, and then they can scan or fax it, together with their paper receipts, to a central address. The sent documents are automatically converted into image files and attached to the correct expense report within the software. With the inclusion of bar codes in printed expense report forms, customers can now easily implement an automatic receipt imaging process. Self-service users (travelers, travel arrangers) can print the bar coded expense form after having recorded their expense report, and then they can scan or fax it, together with their paper receipts, to a central address. The sent documents are automatically converted into image files and attached to the correct expense report within the software. the following benefits: - Reduced paper costs and paper shipment costs - Faster receipt audits in the expenses department and shared services center the following benefits: - Reduced paper costs and paper shipment costs - Faster receipt audits in the expenses department and shared services center 6.0 Corporate FI-TV Automatic receipt imaging With the inclusion of bar codes in

Services and bar code encryption printed expense report forms, customers can now easily implement an automatic receipt imaging process. Self-service users (travelers, travel arrangers) can print the bar coded expense form after having recorded their expense report, and then they can scan or fax it, together with their paper receipts, to a central address. The sent documents are automatically converted into image files and attached to the correct expense report within the software. the following benefits: - Reduced paper costs and paper shipment costs - Faster receipt audits in the expenses department and shared services center 6.0 Financials FI-TV Integration with Collaboration Projects 6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Corporate Services FI-TV FI-TV Integration with Collaboration Projects Integration with Collaboration Projects Cost assignments and cost splits in a travel request, travel plan, or expense report can now also be assigned to a project number from the Collaboration Projects (cprojects) application. Cost assignments and cost splits in a travel request, travel plan, or expense report can now also be assigned to a project number from the Collaboration Projects (cprojects) application. Cost assignments and cost splits in a travel request, travel plan, or expense report can now also be assigned to a project number from the Collaboration Projects (cprojects) application. the following benefits: - Clear cost assignment on Collaboration Projects (cprojects) - Improved spend transparency for cprojects customer the following benefits: - Clear cost assignment on Collaboration Projects (cprojects) - Improved spend transparency for cprojects customer the following benefits: - Clear cost assignment on Collaboration Projects (cprojects) - Improved spend transparency for cprojects customer 6.0 Financials FI-TV Access to central address Users can pick widely used addresses database in all processes from pick lists (customer addresses, subsidiary sites, and so on) across the following benefits: - Faster data input for users entire self-services process (submitting - Enhanced reporting travel requests, online booking, options on address levels claiming expenses). 6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Corporate Services FI-TV FI-TV Access to central address database in all processes Access to central address database in all processes 6.0 Financials FI-TV Enhancements in travel planning Users can pick widely used addresses from pick lists (customer addresses, subsidiary sites, and so on) across entire self-services process (submitting travel requests, online booking, claiming expenses). Users can pick widely used addresses from pick lists (customer addresses, subsidiary sites, and so on) across entire self-services process (submitting travel requests, online booking, claiming expenses). the following benefits: - Faster data input for users - Enhanced reporting options on address levels the following benefits: - Faster data input for users - Enhanced reporting options on address levels the This functionality enables following: - Integration of passive travel planning as the segments into passenger name record single access point for - Mixed itineraries, including services online booking, as well as booked online and any customerspecific service requests for booking by shared service center for service requests to a or

6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Financials 6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Financials FI-TV FI-TV FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Enhancements in travel planning Enhancements in travel planning Pretrip budget availability control in funds management Pretrip budget availability control in funds management Enhancements in mobile travel expenses for ERP agency or shared service center agency. - Display of travel agency processing status for more efficient communication between traveler, travel arranger, and travel agency - Negotiated car rental fares per organizational department - Lufthansa PAF and Air France CA enablement the This functionality enables following: - Integration of passive travel planning as the segments into passenger name record single access point for - Mixed itineraries, including services online booking, as well as booked online and any customerspecific service requests for booking by shared service center or for service requests to a agency or shared service center agency. - Display of travel agency processing status for more efficient communication between traveler, travel arranger, and travel agency - Negotiated car rental fares per organizational department - Lufthansa PAF and Air France CA enablement the This functionality enables following: - Integration of passive travel planning as the segments into passenger name record single access point for - Mixed itineraries, including services online booking, as well as booked online and any customerspecific service requests for booking by shared service center or for service requests to a agency or shared service center agency. - Display of travel agency processing status for more efficient communication between traveler, travel arranger, and travel agency - Negotiated car rental fares per organizational department - Lufthansa PAF and Air France CA enablement This functionality enhances availability control of funds management budgets at the stages of travel requests (estimated amounts) and travel plan (exact costs of online booking). This functionality enhances availability control of funds management budgets at the stages of travel requests (estimated amounts) and travel plan (exact costs of online booking). Mobile Time and Travel, when used in conjunction with, accomplishes the following: - It provides redesigned, step-by-step the following benefits: - More accurate availability control before start of a business trip, at the time of pretrip approval - Elimination of manual availability control and paper-based processes the following benefits: - More accurate availability control before start of a business trip, at the time of pretrip approval - Elimination of manual availability control and paper-based processes the following benefits: - Reduced I19costs by eliminating paper-based

6.0 Human Capital Management 6.0 Corporate Services FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Enhancements in mobile travel expenses for ERP Enhancements in mobile travel expenses for ERP guided data user interface, in complete processes and double data alignment with the new online selfservice application. - Speedier billing cycles for entry - It enables offline users to attach credit services rendered increase card receipts directly to expense cash flow reports. - Increased visibility of - It offers receipt itemization functions accounting data to break down complex receipts such as hotel bills. - Travel requests and travel plans that are created in the online application can be brought down to the offline application. - Customization options are available for long-term travel (for example, the 90-days rule). - It can be integrated with Collaboration Projects (cprojects). Mobile Time and Travel, when used in conjunction with, the following benefits: - accomplishes the following: Reduced I19costs by - It provides redesigned, step-by-step eliminating paper-based guided data user interface, in complete processes and double data alignment with the new online selfservice application. - Speedier billing cycles for entry - It enables offline users to attach credit services rendered increase card receipts directly to expense cash flow reports. - Increased visibility of - It offers receipt itemization functions accounting data to break down complex receipts such as hotel bills. - Travel requests and travel plans that are created in the online application can be brought down to the offline application. - Customization options are available for long-term travel (for example, the 90-days rule). - It can be integrated with Collaboration Projects (cprojects). Mobile Time and Travel, when used in conjuction with, the following benefits: - accomplishes the following: Reduced I19costs by - It provides redesigned, step-by-step eliminating paper-based guided data user interface, in complete processes and double data alignment with the new online selfservice application. - Speedier billing cycles for entry - It enables offline users to attach credit services rendered increase card receipts directly to expense cash flow reports. - Increased visibility of - It offers receipt itemization functions accounting data to break down complex receipts such as hotel bills. - Travel requests and travel plans that are created in the online application can be brought down to the offline application. - Customization options are available for long-term travel (for example, the 90-days rule). - It can be integrated with Collaboration

my 2004 my 2004 Financials Human Capital Management 6.0 Financials 6.0 Human Capital Management my 2004 Corporate Services FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Enhancements in mobile travel expenses for ERP Enhancements in mobile travel expenses for ERP Self-service for managers (approvers) and travel arrangers Self-service for managers (approvers) and travel arrangers Travel management functions available as Web-based software (Web Dynpro development environment) Projects (cprojects). Mobile Time and Travel, when used in conjuction with, the following benefits: - accomplishes the following: Reduced I19costs by - It provides a redesigned, step-by-step eliminating paper-based guided data user interface, in complete processes and double data alignment with the new online selfservice application. - Speedier billing cycles for entry - It enables offline users to attach credit services rendered increase card receipts directly to expense cash flow reports. - Increased visibility of - It offers receipt itemization functions accounting data to break down complex receipts such as hotel bills. Mobile Time and Travel, when used in conjuction with, the following benefits: - accomplishes the following: Reduced I19costs by - It provides a redesigned, step-by-step eliminating paper-based guided data user interface, in complete processes and double data alignment with the new online selfservice application. - Speedier billing cycles for entry - It enables offline users to attach credit services rendered increase card receipts directly to expense cash flow reports. - Increased visibility of - It offers receipt itemization functions accounting data to break down complex receipts such as hotel bills. This functionality enhances process support for managers, including the highlighting of policy exceptions, instant access to the most important travel data, details of business trips in summarized Adobe PDF form, and one-click approval function. It also provides personalized access for travel preparers (for example, team assistants) to handle list of employees they are responsible for ( favorites ). This functionality enhances process support for managers, including the highlighting of policy exceptions, instant access to the most important travel data, details of business trips in summarized Adobe PDF form, and one-click approval function. It also provides personalized access for travel preparers (for example, team assistants) to handle list of employees they are responsible for ( favorites ). the following benefits: - Accelerated approval processes and reduced indirect costs - Increased transparency for managers - Faster access to other employees' data for team assistants the following benefits: - Accelerated approval processes and reduced indirect costs - Increased transparency for managers - Faster access to other employees' data for team assistants The Web-based employee self-service software for travel management include the following benefits: - redesigned and easy-to-use functions Improved user adoption for the following: across end-to-end process - Travel requests - Reduced training efforts - Travel plans (online bookings) - Travel expense reports - Non travel-related expense reports - Imports from corporate credit card programs - Traveler profiles In addition, the functions can also be

my 2004 End-User Service Delivery 6.0 Analytics 6.0 Analytics 6.0 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Travel management functions available as Web-based software (Web Dynpro development environment) Legal and management consolidation: proportionate consolidation Legal and management consolidation: capitalization and valuation allowances Collections management: rule-based generation of collection work lists used by travel arrangers and team assistants handling the application on behalf of their team members. The Web-based employee self-service software for travel management include the following benefits: - redesigned and easy-to-use functions Improved user adoption for the following: across end-to-end process - Travel requests - Reduced training efforts - Travel plans (online bookings) - Travel expense reports - Non travel-related expense reports - Imports from corporate credit card programs - Traveler profiles In addition, the functions can also be used by travel arrangers and team assistants handling the application on behalf of their team members. support for Additional functionality for the accounting principle of proportionate consolidation proportionate consolidation: reduces the effort for - Data is portionated automatically manual adjustments. The through the use of reclassification level of automation is tasks. increased during the - The group-dependent approach creation of consolidated supports the use of the same financial statements, along consolidation unit with different with reduced closing times. accounting methods and different proportion shares. - Support is provided for changes of accounting method or proportion share. new In comparison with the functionality for the automatic treatment enterprise controlling of hidden reserves and contingencies, consolidation approach, including the following: the strategic enterprise - Automatic postings for disclosure management (SEM) - Net book value adjustment of hidden business consolidation reserves and contingencies (BCS) approach is easier to handle and more flexible, because it is decoupled from consolidation of investments and can easily be decentralized: - New functionality supports compliance with the International Accounting Standard. - The level of automation is increased during the creation of consolidated financial statements, along with reduced closing times. Collections work lists can be generated on the basis of predefined rules. The rules evaluate the open receivables of a customer and assign a certain priority to them. The result is a prioritized list of customers, called a "work list." The work list is assigned to a collection agent, who processes the work list Unique collection strategies can be defined for specific customer segments. This enables efficient and effective collection of receivables, which reduces the days sales outstanding (DSO).

6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 Financials Financials Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Collections management: processing work lists Collections management: analytics and reporting Credit management: interfacing with external information providers Management of internal controls: deficiency analysis Management of internal controls: validation of control effectiveness testing Management of internal controls: documentation change logging items (customer accounts) according to their priority. The collection agent has a variety of options when processing the collection work list: - Check the customer's situation (open items, payments, promises to pay, dispute cases, past customer contacts, resubmissions) - Call the customer - Create promises to pay - Create a dispute case - Create a resubmission Everything is recorded automatically by the software in an action log. The Collections Management application offers comprehensive analytical features: work lists, customer contacts, promises to pay, and open items can be analyzed. All posssible activities and to-do actions of a collections agent can be done on one screen in a minimum of time. The result can be monitored afterwards. the following benefits: - It measures the performance and productivity of collection agents. - It monitors the effectiveness of collection strategies. The Credit Management Highly automated real-time application offers enhanced integration with external functionalities for interfacing with information providers external credit information providers, guarantees up-to-date including the ability to process updates credit information and from the external information provider therefore improves the through Extensible Markup Language probability of a correct (XML). In addition, search requests can credit decision. be sent to the external information provider through XML, and the hit list of customer records returned can be processed in Credit Management. This functionality allows management to perform an analysis of control weakness severity, as necessary for meeting legal reporting requirements. This functionality supports the results of the review of effectiveness testing for internal controls. This functionality supports the documentation and review of changes to internal control or process documentation. the following benefits: - Reduced effort required to comply with Sarbanes- Oxley Act reporting requirements - Increased transparency into state of internal control structure the following benefits: - It provides an extra level of certainty to ensure testing quality for companies with less experienced testers. - It reduces customization effort needed to change workflow paths to one click. the following benefits: - It records control documentation for audit safety. - It simplifies reporting of changes made to control documentation over time.

6.0 End-User Service Delivery 6.0 Product Development and Manufacturing my 2004 End-User Service Delivery PP role: plant manager In the plant manager role, manufacturing intelligence dashboards for the plant manager provide enhanced usability and functionality (regarding key figure monitoring) in comparison with the 2004 release of. Dashboards have also been created for the new production supervisor, maintenance technician, and quality inspector roles, to leverage this transparency and promote collaboration on the shop floor. PP role: plant manager In the plant manager role, manufacturing intelligence dashboards for the plant manager provide enhanced usability and functionality (regarding key figure monitoring) in comparison with the 2004 release of. Dashboards have also been created for the new production supervisor, maintenance technician, and quality inspector roles, to leverage this transparency and promote collaboration on the shop floor. MM role: plant manager In the plant manager role, manufacturing intelligence dashboards for the plant manager provide configurable entry pages that deliver alerts, key performance indicators (KPIs), and the ability to manage reports in knowledge management. Thus, they also provide the decision support needed by production personnel to respond to exceptions and unforeseen changes in demand or supply and to deliver superior production performance through greater transparency. the following benefits: - Easy access to aggregated data from multiple, heterogeneous software systems - Ability to monitor, measure, control, and improve production performance - Multiple ways to personalize the key figure monitor the following benefits: - Easy access to aggregated data from multiple, heterogeneous software systems - Ability to monitor, measure, control, and improve production performance - Multiple ways to personalize the key figure monitor the following benefits: - Easy access to aggregated data from multiple, heterogeneous software systems - Ability to monitor, measure, control, and improve production performance my 2004 End-User Service Delivery The target group consists of people in upper management positions in shop floor and manufacturing, such as plant managers. PP role: plant manager In the plant manager role, manufacturing intelligence dashboards for the plant manager provide configurable entry pages that deliver alerts, key performance indicators (KPIs), and the ability to manage reports in knowledge management. Thus, they also provide the decision support needed by production personnel to respond to exceptions and unforeseen changes in demand or supply and to deliver superior production performance through greater transparency. the following benefits: - Easy access to aggregated data from multiple, heterogeneous software systems - Ability to monitor, measure, control, and improve production performance

my 2004 Product Development and Manufacturing The target group consists of people in upper management positions in shop floor and manufacturing, such as plant managers. PP role: plant manager In the plant manager role, manufacturing intelligence dashboards for the plant manager provide configurable entry pages that deliver alerts, key performance indicators (KPIs), and the ability to manage reports in knowledge management. Thus, they also provide the decision support needed by production personnel to respond to exceptions and unforeseen changes in demand or supply and to deliver superior production performance through greater transparency. the following benefits: - Easy access to aggregated data from multiple, heterogeneous software systems - Ability to monitor, measure, control, and improve production performance my 2004 my 2004 Financials Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Enterprise controlling consolidation: goodwill in local currency Enterprise controlling consolidation: organizational changes The target group consists of people in upper management positions in shop floor and manufacturing, such as plant managers. Additional financial data contains key figures in the local currency of the investee unit: - If goodwill is incurred during consolidation of investments, that goodwill is calculated in group currency and translated into local currency. - For the periods that follow, the software translates the goodwill from local currency to group currency; differences in the original value are disclosed on separate balance sheet items and subassignments. Enterprise controlling consolidation provides an alternative option for handling changes to the consolidation hierarchy -- the so-called organizational change logic. An organizational change is a reorganization of an investment relationship within a consolidation group, which is disclosed according to management considerations. When transferring the investment in any affiliate between two investors, the following should happen (so-called organizational change logic): - From the point of view of the group that contains both investors, the organizational change should essentially have no effect. - From the point of view of the group that contains the sending investor but not the receiving investor, there should be a divestiture without I/S effects. This means that the divesting investor should not suffer from I/S effects This functionality facilitates compliance with legal requirements from U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (US- GAAP) and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). the following benefits: - Facilitated hierarchy changes for management consolidation - Facilitated compliance with the U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (US-GAAP) requirement "Reorganization Under Common Control"

my 2004 my 2004 Financials Financials 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials my 2004 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM Enterprise controlling consolidation: investment amortizations and writeup Enterprise controlling consolidation: new option for the treatment of goodwill Enterprise controlling consolidation: new posting logic for partial divestiture according to International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) 3 Enterprise controlling consolidation: activation and amortization of hidden contingencies Enterprise controlling consolidation: download of master data for migration to SEM: BCS workshop Enterprise controlling consolidation: enhanced integration with caused by the organizational change. - From the point of view of the group that contains the receiving investor but not the sending investor, the acquisition should create a goodwill that equals the reduction of goodwill divested in the old group. This means that the receiving investor suffers from I/S effects, which occured in the divesting group, when divestitures happen in the future. a separate activity for the amortization or write-up of investment holdings. Note that in the activities that follow (such as divestitures and transfers), no adjustments are made to the investment amortization or write-up postings. With this functionality, "no amortization" can be choosen as a possible treatment of goodwill. two options for handling goodwill in partial divestitures: - Goodwill can be either completely reduced or not reduced at all. - The decision about which option to use can be made seperately for each individual activity. This functionality facilitates treatment of investment amortization and write-up. This functionality facilitates compliance for the treatment of goodwill according to International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) (impairment testing instead of regular amortization). This functionality facilitates compliance with legal requirements of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). an This functionality facilitates in existing functionality treatment of hidden for hidden reserves: contingencies. - The flag "hidden contingencies" in the hidden reserve master data is now input enabled. - The "hidden contingencies" flag is available in the flexible file upload of hidden reserves. - Separate customization of the subitems to be used is allowed in hidden contingencies postings. - Enhanced program logic supports hidden contingencies in first and subsequent consolidations. This functionality enables the download This functionality facilitates of master data and hierarchies into flat migration to the SEM: files: BCS workshop. - Formats are compatible with SEM: BCS flat file upload. - The functionality is available for settings related to chart of accounts and consolidation hierarchies. now provides the following: - The ability to read plan data from the InfoProvider object in the the following benefits: - Closed loop integration

6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver NetWeaver Business Intelligence Enabling enterprise services Running an enterprise portal Enabling user collaboration Business task management Mobilizing business processes NetWeaver Business Intelligence component - Real-time reporting of enterprise controlling consolidation data through remote InfoProvider These features were exclusively available to customers in former releases of R/3. As of the 2004 release of, they are available in enterprise controlling consolidation; SEM-BCS no longer exists. between consolidation in enterprise controlling consolidation and planning in the NetWeaver Business Intelligence component - Real-time reporting of data during the closing process in NetWeaver Business Intelligence, including reporting between data extraction times With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations have a single the following benefits: - It infrastructure for uniform service creates new value from definition, implementation, and usage existing IT assets through based on Web services technology and the use of Web services. - standards. NetWeaver supports It provides greater flexiblity enterprise services for user interaction, for responding quickly to as well as application-to-application business change. - It and business-to-business interactions ensures openness and through synchronous, asynchronous, interoperability between stateful, and stateless communication software systems. models. With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can give their the following benefits: - It users uniform, role-based, and secure improves user productivity. access to any kind of applications, - It increases efficiency services, and information. With the with single sign-on. - It NetWeaver Portal, all members of improves access to the company s value chain relevant applications and employees, customers, partners, and information. suppliers have a single, uniform point of access to the applications, services, and information they need for their daily work. With the NetWeaver technology platform, IT organizations can help the following benefits: - It individuals, teams, and project groups improves user productivity. collaborate more efficiently as they - It fosters teamwork. - It perform their business processes. improves communication NetWeaver makes collaboration and between groups. - It knowledge sharing an integral, natural improves decision making. part of everyday work and enables efficient communication. With the NetWeaver technology platform, IT organizations can get the the following benefits: - It right tasks to the right employees and improves user productivity. give employees the means to complete - It automates tasks for their tasks on time and with the best greater efficiency and results. Organizations can coordinate, reduced errors. - It monitor, and adapt automated process imrpoves business flows across and within business processes. components. With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can extend existing and new business processes into mobile technology. In addition to supporting simple productivity tools, such as e-mail, NetWeaver integrates front-end mobile activities the following benefits: - It improves user productivity of the mobile workforce. - It increases efficiency of the mobile workforce. - It improves business

6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver Enterprise knowledge management Authentication and single sign-on NetWeaver operations Software life-cycle management Developing, Configuring, and Adapting Applications with back-end business processes. With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can plan, build, and operate an integrated work environment for information workers. It provides the framework and the tools to integrate, dissseminate, and work with distributed, unstructured information and put it into business context for information workers. With the NetWeaver technology platform, IT organizations can maintain an appropriate level of security and quality in their intellectual property and information assets without compromising flexibility, user productivity, and collaboration with customers and partners With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can set up an optimal environment for administration and data archiving with NetWeaver. They can centrally manage business processes and centrally monitor the underlying NetWeaver components in a highly effective manner. processes for the mobile workforce. the following benefits: - It improves decision making. - It improves content sharing. - It reduces manual data maintenance. the following benefits: - It increases user productivity with single sign-on. - It reduces support costs of resetting passwords. - It reduces total cost of ownership (TCO) with consolidated access and authentication. the following benefits: - It reduces operational costs. - It improves problem analysis through alerts, traces, and so on. - It reduces administrative costs with central management. - It improves availability of software systems. - It automates processes to increase effiency and reduce errors. - It lowers total cost of ownership (TCO) with increased server utilization and load balancing. With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can manage the following benefits: - software in their system Simplify the landscapes by performing implementation of complex implementation tasks such as planning landscapes - Simplify changes, implementing new systems, software maintenance and copying existing systems, or enabling upgrades the creation and propagation of changes in the landscape. Organizations can also maintain their software by applying support packages and corrections or by upgrading to new software versions. With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can enhance applications or to create complementary custom applications, using a variety of programming models and tools. NetWeaver supports popular development processes for the Java and ABAP programming languages. It also provides modelbased development with the the following benefits: - It improves developer productivity with modelbased tools. - It reduces development efforts with reusable components. - It ensures openness and interoperabilty with other systems.

6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver Enabling platform interoperability Business process management Enabling business-tobusiness processes Enabling application-toapplication processes NetWeaver Visual Composer tool and provides portal and mobile development kits. With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can master the heterogeneity in their landscapes through interoperablity of software systems. NetWeaver integrates employees' work, information, processes, and applications. With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can model, execute, and monitor process models from a central integration server. Organizations can use predefined content to configure business processes and can relate softwareembedded settings to business process models. the following benefits: - It leverages existing investments in technology, products, and skills. - It creates new value from existing IT assets through the use of Web sevices. - It reduces total cost of ownership (TCO) with less maintenance and training. - It ensures secure access through single sign-on. - It improves management of software systems. the following benefits: - It improves business processes. - It reduces costs of process innovation. - It automates business processes for reduced errors. - It simplifies process management. - It increases flexibility for business process improvement. With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can seamlessly the following benefits: - It connect their own business processes improves business process with those of their partners by using between partners through message-based and standards-based the use of industry methods for process integration. standards. - It reduces total NetWeaver supports various cost of ownership (TCO) communication channels, as well as through industry standards process coordination and surveillance. and central control. With the NetWeaver technology platform, and non- software the following benefits: - It can be seamlessly connected within improves business organizations, with the process flow processes. - It executes orchestrated between software through transactions more the use of message-based and smoothly and quickly. - It standards-based methods for process leverages existing integration. With NetWeaver, the investments. - It reduces design, configuration, and execution of integration and all business processes can be maintenance costs. managed within the heterogeneous software landscape of an organization. 6.0 NetWeaver Business planning and analytical services With the NetWeaver technology platform, organziations can collect and transform data. Using NetWeaver tools, organizations simulate business conditions, perform strategic and operational planning,and design analysis processes by using data mining. the following benefits: - It manages business intelligence. - It enables organizations to predict and react quickly to change. - It analyzes processes for improvements. 6.0 Enterprise reporting, With the NetWeaver technology

6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver 6.0 NetWeaver my 2004 NetWeaver query, and analysis platform, organizations can provide all the necessary processes and services to meet the information needs of business users. They can design and provide applications for formatted reporting, ad hoc queries, interactive analyses, information dashboards, and information broadcasting. Enterprise data warehousing Central master data management the following benefits: - It empowers business users to access information. - It improves analysis of data. - It simplifies integration of reports and Web applications. - It simplifies integration of business intelligence data and Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. - It shares information with users through information broadcasts. With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can create and the following benefits: - It operate a data warehouse in an improves analytics and enterprise-wide environment, reporting. - It improves integrating data from heterogeneous data access. - It optimizes software and designing and executing performance of data business intelligence models and search and reporting. - It processes. They can combine strategic ensures security of data. analyses and operational reporting and enable the business to report in real time. With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can support company-wide quality standards by ensuring that central control of master data begins as soon as the data is created. Master data consolidation With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can search for master data across linked software systems, identify identical or similar objects spread across the local software, build consolidated master data, and provide ID mapping for unified, company-wide analytics and reporting. Master data harmonization Enterprise search Financials FI General s within Treasury and Risk Management the following benefits: - It improves data quality with central ownership. - It improves quality with company standards. the following benefits: - It unifies data for single point of truth. - It improves quality of data. - It improves analytics and reporting. With the NetWeaver technology platform, organizations can consolidate the following benefits: - It and harmonize master data. They can unifies data for single point ensure high quality of master data by of truth. - It improves distributing consolidated data that is quality of data. - It globally relevant and can be improves distribution of augmented with locally relevant relevant data. information. With the NetWeaver technology platform, IT organizations can the following benefits: - It implement enterprise search. By using improves search of a central, standard, service-enabled relevant information. - It platform, they can enable indexing, increases search search, and retrieval of documents effectiveness of structured such as Adobe PDF files, and unstructured semistructured data such as responses information. to database queries, and structured business objects such as sales orders. The Treasury and Risk Management application is used to manage financial transactions and the This functionality improves compliance with the International Financial

my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 Financials FI Enhancement in the financial instruments supported by Treasury and Risk Management Financials FI Enhancement in the hedge management function within Treasury and Risk Management Financials FI Enhancement in the market risk function of Treasury and Risk Management Financials FI Enhancement in the credit risk function of Treasury and Risk Management associated financial risk. Common Reporting Standards instruments can be handled within the (IFRS) and financial money market, foreign exchange, accounting standards derivatives, and securities functions, (FAS), including hedge both on the investment and on the accounting, and supports borrowing side. Financial risks can be the Sarbanes-Oxley Act monitored through the use of risk tools, and German regulations. and a range of derivatives can be employed to limit the risk. New products for foreign exchange trading are as follows: - Foreign exchange average rate option - Foreign exchange basket option - Foreign exchange forward volatility agreement - Annuity repayment in interest rate instrument This functionality improves functionality in the following ways: - Greater array of transaction support - Elimination of the need to support a treasury management system separate from finance and accounting This functionality is characterized as This functionality improves follows: - It is possible to create a new compliance with the exposure or plan directly from the deal International Financial entry screen of an option in the hedge Reporting Standards management function (IFRS) and financial - The hypothetical derivative method accounting standards can also be used for options. (FAS). - The effectiveness calculations for the benchmark method has been improved. - Cash flow data can be uploaded from the loans function - It is possible to conduct a prospective effectiveness test. This functionality accomplishes the Market data providers do following: - Calibration of the Hull/White not provide Hull-White volatilities from implicit Black-Scholes volatilities; the calibration volatilities of swaptions or caps/floors enables you to calculate - Master data maintenance in the Hull-White volatilities with results database the normally provided - Enhancements in net present value Black-Scholes volatilities. (NPV) analysis, value-at-risk individual The usability of the analysis, and statistics calculator maintenance for the master data has been improved, and the figure monitor can display the hierarchical and time-dependent order of key figures and evaluation procedures. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It contains s in the settlement risk calculations. - If the end-of-day calculation has errors, it is possible to restart the calculations for a work list instead of each deal individually. - The exchange rate type used in the Canada Revenue Agency is no longer fixed to M, but a different exchange rate type can be defined in customizing. - The derivation rules can be used to determine which business partner's Settlement risk calculations are also possible for money market instruments and Council of Mortgage Lenders (CML) loans. Limit management data can now be loaded into the former Business Information Warehouse ( BW) component (whose functionality is now part of NetWeaver) in order to use the reporting possibilities of BW.

6.0 Financials FI Enhancement in the financial instruments supported by Treasury and Risk Management 6.0 Financials FI Enhancements in the process support function of Treasury and Risk Management data should be used for credit risk analyzer. - There are now extractors for the former Business Information Warehouse component (whose functionality is now part of NetWeaver). This functionality accomplishes the This functionality improves following: - A product category corporate controls by introduced in the transaction manager integrating treasury function reflects investments in assetbacked securities and mortgage- accounting. Its benefits are reporting with finance and backed securities. The accounting as follows: rules engine is enhanced to meet the - Greater array of requirements of international transaction support accounting standards for these - Elimination of the need to instruments. The product is also support a treasury reflected in the market risk analyzer, management system credit risk analyzer, portfolio analyzer, separate from finance and and statutory reporting. accounting. - Another product category introduced in the transaction manager function reflects securities lending transactions from the lender s point of view. Calculation of lending fees and consideration of cash or security collateral are possible. The product is also reflected in the credit risk analyzer and statutory reporting. - Facilities can be classified as syndicated facilities and several business partners can be assigned. A subline with a separate currency can be created within a facility. - Bonds can be issued through the use of the securities function with the advances of having correct position management and accurate accounting for the issued bonds. Emission and buy-back transactions are possible, as are security account and position management and detailed reporting. This functionality accomplishes the following: - The European System of Accounts (ESA) enables connection to market places with automation of download of foreign exchange transactions (foreign exchange spot, foreign exchange forward, and foreign exchange options) made on market places such as FXall, Currenex, or 360T. New interfaces in the BAPI programming interface for foreign exchange spot and foreign exchange forward transactions make it possible to enter all data for the foreign exchange transaction with one interface in BAPI. - Because of currency exposure management, it is possible to bring the exposure into hedge management and This functionality improves the possibilities of straight through processing, as well as the ability to gather data from everywhere and use them as exposures for hedge management.

6.0 Financials Enhancements in the hedge management function of Treasury and Risk Management 6.0 Financials FI Reporting s and menu change in Treasury and Risk Management 6.0 Financials FI Enhancement in the portfolio analyzer of Treasury and Risk Management assign the hedging transactions to the exposure. The exposure is then allowed to do the hedge accounting according to financial accounting standard (FAS) 133 or International Accounting Standard (IAS) 39. This functionality accomplishes the following: - Within hedge management, the caps, floors, and forward rate agreements (FRAs) can be used as hedging instruments. - The BAPI programming interface can be used to load exposures from external sources, such as cash management, Microsoft Excel documents, and accounts receivables. - Reporting is integrated to logical database. - Starting values are added to the net present value (NPV) table automatically. - Effectiveness tests are improved. - Open Catalog Interface (OCI) dissolvement is automatically distributed over a predefined time. - Hedge accounting in more than one accounting area possible: for example, financial accounting standard (FAS) 133 in one accounting area and International Accounting Standard (IAS) 39 in another. The new logical database for transaction management reporting enables the reporting for transactions within the hierarchical structure of the logical database (Level 1 [main data] and Level 2, such as flows, conditions, and interest adjustments). The logical database is a basis for writing reports with different tools and may be used to easily extract data to the former Business Information Warehouse component (whose functionality is now part of NetWeaver). There are some changes to menu functions: a new unified initial transaction for creating and processing financial transactions in the transaction manager and a new menu area for debt management in transaction management; also, the Treasury and Risk Management menu now resides under accounting financial supply chain management. Within the framework of the portfolio analyzer, it is possibele to use single benchmarks, as well as composite benchmarks. Versioning and historization of benchmarks are supported. The analyzer information This functionality improves compliance with the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and financial accounting standards (FAS). This functionality improves the reporting possibilities, as well as providing a single point of entry to create or change deals of all product types. It is now possible to compare your portfolio yields with benchmark yields to analyze the excess return rate.

6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials my 2004 Financials 6.0 Financials Enhancement in the credit risk function of Treasury and Risk Management Enhancement in the market risk function of Treasury and Risk Management Cross-system intercompany reconciliation Depreciation calculation asset accounting function supports benchmark reporting, too. This functionality accomplishes the following: - It connects limit management to the workflow. - It can provide limits of individual deals. For example, one money market deal cannot be for more than $3,000,000. With the limit management, the workflow is automatically started as soon as a limit is breached, to inform the manager, and the limits of individual deals can be provided. This functionality is characterized as The enhanced financial follows: - Financial object integration object integration enables can be activated on the basis of you to include only specific product types. These settings can be product types from one made for all analyzers. area (for example, Council - Market data generator is a new of Mortgage Lenders). For transaction. testing purposes, you can - There is a formula editor. now calculate market data - Book values can be transferred from with the market data treasury and treasury management into generator and store them the results database. in the database for use in - The new instruments asset-backed the analyzers. You are now securities, mortgage-backed securities, enabled to analyze the risk and securities lending can be key figures, as well as reflected in the analyzers. accounting values, together in one report and create further key figures by using the formula editor. The cross-system intercompany reconciliation enables you to reconcile open items of group companies. After collecting the open items from and non- software into a single database, rules are applied to carry out the matching of open items. Open items that cannot be matched automatically are presented to the user for further processing. Reconciliation of general ledger accounts without open item management is also available. This functionality enables fast close improvement through cross-system intercompany reconciliation. Manual effort for intercompany reconciliation is reduced by an automatic assignment of open items. Thus, the user needs only to focus on the mismatch items. The depreciation calculation has been The new period interval changed from a conceptional point of based depreciation view. The calculation logic before the facilitates a more accurate release of is based on calculation of depreciation. calculating depreciation on movements This applies to the (for example, acquisition and distribution of the yearly retirement). For each single movement, depreciation on the periods the depreciation is calculated when the (depreciation of the year is movement is posted. identical), as well as the The new calculation logic is based on calculation of the period intervals. A fiscal year is depreciation of a fiscal year portioned into period intervals. The (depreciation of the year is number of period intervals depends on different). the number of different periods with changes that affect the depreciation calculation (for example, acquisitions, retirements, change of depreciation parameters). An example of new period interval based depreciation is as follows: - The fiscal year is split up into the

6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials Asset master data: time dependency Master data search: search engine defined periods - in this example, 12 periods (= 12 months). - An acquisition of 1.000 is posted in period 1. In period 7, a partial retirement of 400 is posted, and in period 10, another acquisition, of 200, is posted. The fiscal year is portioned into three period intervals as three movements in different periods have been posted. - Intervals for depreciation calculation are determined as follows: > First period interval: period 1 up to period 6 = 6 months (movement in period 1) > Second period interval: period 7 up to period 9 = 3 months (movement in period 7) > Third period interval: period 10 up to period 12 = 3 months (movement in period 10) The depreciation parameters (for example, useful life, depreciation key) in the asset master data can be maintained in a time-dependent manner. Before the release of ERP, changes of the depreciation parameters were effective immediately for all open fiscal years. Changing of depreciation parameters is now effective as of the date specified in the depreciation area. Dependency on time is considered when depreciation is calculated. An example of changed useful life is as follows: - Acquisition value: 10.000 - Acquisition date: 1/1/2005 - Useful life: five years - Depreciation of the year: 2.000 If the useful life has been changed from five years to years years effective on 1/7/2005, the results are as follows: - Acquisition value: 10.000 - Useful life: four years - Depreciation of the year: 2.500 The depreciation of the periods 01 to 06 of the year 2005 remains unchanged. Depreciation of the year 2005 results in the following: - Periods 01 to 06: 2.000 * (6/12) = 1.000 - Periods 07 to 12: 2.500 * (6/12) = 1.250 - Sum = 2.250 As of, the enhanced search functionality is available for a range of Increased user productivity as changes of depreciation parameters can be maintained in advance before they become effective. No manual correction postings are necessary if changes of depreciation parameters become effective during the fiscal year. the following benefits: -

6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials Generic contract accounting (financial accounting contract accounts receivable and payable) Synchronization of customers and vendors with business partners master data, such as assets and vendors. You can use a search term to find the relevant master records that meet the search criteria. A fuzzy logic can be used to find similar terms: for example, typing errors that have been entered in the software, such as this: search term "SEARCH" finds "search" as well as "saerch." As of the release of, the contract accounting function is an integral part of enterprise resource planning solutions. Before the ERP application was available, the function was an add-on to the R/3 software. The contract accounting function provides a powerful subledger for managing accounts receivable and payable specifically for high-volume business. This high-volume contract accounting function helps you manage financial operations efficiently, reduce financial risk, and improve your cash flow through efficient receivables and collections management. Seamless integration of contract accounting with the general ledger, controlling, and cash management functions of ERP enables a fast-closing process and gives you an accurate view of your financial situation. Contract accounting with can process huge volumes of business partner information and transactions. It can handle large volumes because it helps automate business processes. Because your requirements change over time, you need to be flexible. The contract accounting function enables you to adapt your processes quickly and with minimum effort. The open architecture means that it fits seamlessly into your existing landscape, including and non- software. Master data of vendors, customers, and business partners can be synchronized in an automated manner. The functionality synchronizes customers and vendors with business partners and the other way around. The synchronization does not have an effect on your data until you activate this functionality. Increased hit rate when users search for exisiting master records - Increased user productivity, because the process of finding master records is much easier - Fewer duplicates of master records, because the risk of creating new records for already existing master records is reduced the following benefits: - It reduces operational costs by minimizing manual work and increasing automation. - It optimizes cash flow by minimizing financial risk and through better tracking of outstanding receivables. - It provides more accurate financial figures through full integration with the general ledger, controlling, and cash management functionality. - It increases customer loyalty by providing flexible customer service. - It enhances customer relationship management strategy through a consistent view of customer and accounting information. - It is an integral part of the application that can be activated easily through the switch framework. Data of your business partners can be stored separately in vendor, customer, and business partner master records. Nevertheless, your master data is always synchronized independently when or where you change a

my 2004 Financials 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials FI, CO, AM, FSCM Cross-system intercompany reconciliation Depreciation calculation asset accounting Asset master data: time dependency The cross-system intercompany reconciliation enables you to reconcile open items of group companies. After collecting the open items from and non- software into one single database, rules are applied to carry out the matching of open items. Open items that cannot be matched automatically are presented to the user for further processing. Reconciliation of general ledger accounts without open item management is also available. master record. This functionality enables fast close improvement through cross-system intercompany reconciliation. Manual effort for intercompany reconciliation is reduced by an automatic assignment of open items. Thus, the user needs only to focus on the mismatch items. The depreciation calculation has been The new period interval changed from a conceptional point of based depreciation view. The calculation logic before the facilitates a more accurate release of is based on calculation of depreciation. calculating depreciation on This applies to the movements, such as acquisition and distribution of the yearly retirement. For each single movement, depreciation on the periods the depreciation is calculated when the (depreciation of the year is movement is posted. The new identical), as well as the calculation logic is based on period calculation of the intervals. A fiscal year is portioned into depreciation of a fiscal year period intervals. The number of period (depreciation of the year is intervals depends on the number of different). different periods with changes that affect the depreciation calculation (for example, acquisitions, retirements, and change of depreciation parameters). An example of new period interval based depreciation is as follows: - The fiscal year is split up into the defined periods in this example, 12 periods (= 12 months). - An acquisition of 1.000 is posted in period 1. In period 7, a partial retirement of 400 is posted, and in period 10, another acquisition, of 200, is posted. The fiscal year is portioned into three period intervals as three movements in different periods have been posted. - Intervals for depreciation calculation are determined as follows: > First period interval: period 1 up to period 6 = 6 months (movement in period 1) > Second period interval: period 7 up to period 9 = 3 months (movement in period 7) > Third period interval: period 10 up to period 12 = 3 months (movement in period 10) The depreciation parameters (for example, useful life and depreciation key) in the asset master data can be maintained in a time-dependent manner. Before the the release of ERP, changes of the depreciation Increased user productivity as changes of depreciation parameters can be maintained in advance before they become effective. No manual

6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials Master data search: search engine Generic contract accounting (financial accounting contract accounts receivable and payable) parameters were effective immediately for all open fiscal years. Changing of depreciation parameters is now effective as of the date specified in the depreciation area. Dependency on time is considered when depreciation is calculated. An example of changed useful life is as follows: - Acquisition value: 10.000 - Acquisition date: 1/1/2005 - Useful life: five years - Depreciation of the year: 2.000 If the useful life has been changed from five years to four years effective on 1/7/2005, the results are as follows: - Acquisition value: 10.000 - Useful life: four years - Depreciation of the year: 2.500 The depreciation of the periods 01 to 06 of the year 2005 remains unchanged. Depreciation of the year 2005 results in the following: - Periods 01 to 06: 2.000 * (6/12) = 1.000 - Periods 07 to 12: 2.500 * (6/12) = 1.250 - Sum = 2.250 As of the release of, the enhanced search functionality is available for a range of master data such as assets and vendors. You can use a search term to find the relevant master records that meet the search criteria. A fuzzy logic can be used to find similar terms: for example, typing errors that have been entered in the software, such as this: search term "SEARCH" finds "search" as well as "saerch." As of the release of, the contract accounting function is an integral part of enterprise resource planning. Before the application was available, the function was an add-on to the R/3 software. The contract accounting solution provides a powerful subledger for managing accounts receivable and payable specifically for high-volume business. This high-volume contract accounting function helps you manage financial operations efficiently, reduce correction postings are necessary if changes of depreciation parameters become effective during the fiscal year. the following benefits: - Increased hit rate when users search for exisiting master records - Increased user productivity, because the process of finding master records is much easier - Fewer duplicates of master records, because the risk of creating new records for already existing master records is reduced the following benefits: - It reduces operational costs by minimizing manual work and increasing automation. - It optimizes cash flow by minimizing financial risk and through better tracking of outstanding receivables. - It provides more accurate financial figures through full integration with the general ledger, controlling, and cash management functionality.

6.0 Financials 6.0 Sales and Service 6.0 Sales and Service SD/LES Synchronization of customers and vendors with business partners Internet pricing and configurator financial risk, and improve your cash flow through efficient receivables and collections management. Seamless integration of contract accounting with the general ledger, controlling, and cash management functions of ERP enables a fast closing process and gives you an accurate view of your financial situation. Contract accounting with can process huge volumes of business partner information and transactions. It can handle large volumes because it helps automate business processes. Because customer requirements change over time, you need to be flexible. The contract accounting function enables you to adapt your processes quickly and with minimum effort. The open architecture means that it fits seamlessly into your existing landscape, including and non- software. Master data of vendors, customers, and business partners can be synchronized in an automated manner. The software synchronizes customers' and vendors' data with business partners' data and the other way around. The synchronization does not have an effect on your data until you activate this function. The Internet pricing and configurator is enhanced and integrated to allow configuration within the sales documents of the application; existing model data is reused while its improved functionality and advanced user interface within are leveraged. - It increases customer loyalty by providing flexible customer service. - It enhances customer relationship management strategy through a consistent view of customer and accounting information. - It is an integral part of the application that can be activated easily through the switch framework. Data of your business partners can be stored separately in vendor, customer, and business partner master records. Nevertheless, your master data is always synchronized independently when or where you change a master record. One configurator can be used across and Customer Relationship Management ( CRM) applications, including Internet sales scenarios, to allow for improved functionality and an optimized user interface while reducing total cost of ownership. SD/LES Credit management You can integrate sales and distribution This functionality enables credit management with the Credit integration of sales and Management application. With the distribution credit ERP application, you can also use management with Credit Management in Financial Credit Management. Supply Chain Management ( FSCM) set of applications to perform all credit checks and commitment updates for all areas of sales (sales and distribution, business finance, credit management). In Credit Management, you can update the data from multiple software systems. This enables you to execute credit checks with consistent data in

6.0 Sales and Service 6.0 Sales and Service 6.0 Sales and Service 6.0 Sales and Service 6.0 Sales and Service my 2004 my 2004 Sales and Service Sales and Service SD/LES SD/LES SD/LES SD/LES SD/LES E-commerce: user management E-commerce: catalog management Rebate condition records with the use of scales Price catalog (PRICAT): inbound processing (retail) Enterprise services in sales order management distributed software systems, too. Furthermore, you can connect to external credit information providers by Extensible Markup Language (XML) interfaces. Alternatively, you can continue to use sales and distribution credit management (sales and distribution, business finance, credit management). This functionality accomplishes the This functionality improves following: - Web-based user user management. management for business-to-business Internet users - Assignment of authorization roles to users in Web-based user management - Automatic migration of transaction SU05 to transaction SU01 Internet users With the application, you This functionality improves must carry out product catalog catalog management. replication from your enterprise resource planning solution to the Text Retrieval and Information Extraction (TREX) server for use in the Web shop, using the report ISA_CATALOG_REPLICATION. With the application, you can set up rebate agreements so that the scale base value and the rebate scale level are derived from the total sales volume of multiple condition records. You do this by grouping condition records in the rebate agreement. This functionality improves use of scales for rebate agreements. Inbound message processing of price This functionality improves catalog (PRICAT) messages are price catalog (PRICAT) characterized as follows: inbound processing. With Central Component, you can create and change article data automatically or in an interface for mass data handling. The software takes both single and generic articles and bills of material and prices into account. Please check in the Enterprise Services Workplace site which enterprise services are available for sales order management on the Developer Network site (www.sdn.sap.com). SD/LES Archiving objects The most frequently used archiving objects have been reworked so that they now correspond to a uniform standard. SD/LES Beverage functions available for the consumer products With Central Component ( ECC), the following functions from the Business All-in-One for Enterprise services are available for sales order management. This functionality has two main advantages: the archiving objects can be used uniformly in archiving projects, and accessing archived data across different applications has been improved. Beverage functions are available.

industry Food and Beverage Wholesalers solution are available for the consumer products industry: my 2004 my 2004 Corporate Services Corporate Services 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution PS PS MM Catalog interface for services in project system Overall network scheduling with selection option in project system Requirement prioritizations in materials management - ECC, consumer products (EA- CP 500) > Material sorting > Extra charge > Empties management > Part load lift orders > Pendulum list and indirect sales > Sales returns > Excise duty - ECC, supply chain management extension (EA-SCM 500) > Direct store delivery back-end > Master data > Visit control > Transportation planning (including loading units, aggregation categories) > Vehicle space optimization > Output control (including valuated delivery note) > Route accounting (including tour data entry, cash payer, route settlement) - ECC, industry-specific sales s (EA-ISSE 500) Extended rebate processing You can call up an external catalog in a maintenance order or service order, a maintenance task list, or a network and copy services from this catalog into the order or task list or network. You also now have the option of storing multiple catalogs for each of the following criteria: - Order type and planning plant - Task list category and plant - Network type and plant You can restrict the number of networks that you want to schedule when scheduling hierarchical project structures with subnetworks. You can branch directly from the subnetwork monitor to the screens for processing or confirming the selected networks. After activating requirement prioritization in customizing and setting appropriate priorities, you can assign a requirement urgency at item level in your purchasing and reservation documents. You assign each requirement urgency uniquely to a requirement urgency group in customizing. The software determines the relevant requirement priority (overall priority) of a material requisition from the combination of requirement urgency group and organizational The catalog interface for services enables you to integrate external service catalogs in your purchasing process. By using this restriction, you can considerably reduce the time it takes to schedule large subnetwork structures. As of release 6.0 of ERP Central Component, you can use the requirement prioritization function to control the servicing of material requisitions in the supply chain according to their urgency. Requirement prioritization serves to determine a priority for the further processing of requirement items in the

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM MM Business add-in for deductible payables Connection of objects to a search engine priority. In the standard software, logistics process. you define the organizational priority in customizing through plant storage location combinations. In addition, in the purchasing and reservation process and in requirements planning, the new business add-in (BAdI), determination of the organizational priority during requirement prioritization, is available. With this BAdI, you can determine fields at header or item level that are to be evaluated in determining the organizational priority yourself. The subcontracting with chargeable components software comes with a new business add-in (BAdI) for use with the enter deductible payables program. You can use the BAdI to accomplish the following actions: - Change the general ledger accounts on which the program records chargeable components - Instruct the program to post data to profitability analysis - Change which accounting document type the program uses for deductible payables In the quick search, you enter a search You can use enhanced term. An object is found if the word search functionality for a occurs in the object, regardless of range of master data. This which field of the object the word includes a quick search occurs in. The search also includes and an advanced search. texts that are assigned to the object. To implement this, the The advanced search works the same affected objects are way as the quick search, but it offers connected to the text some additional fields (attributes) on retrieval and information the selection screen, which you can extraction (TREX) search use to filter the hit list according to your engine. requirements. The search is not case sensitive. The search term "SEARCH" yields the same hits as the term "search." Both terms also yield "Search" and "SeaRCh." You can activate fuzzy search for both searches. If fuzzy search is active, similar terms are also found: for example, typing errors that have been created in the software. If you enter "Search" and activate fuzzy search, the system also finds the term "Search." You start the search as follows: 1. Call an object for which the search engine service is already active (for example, functional location). 2. On the initial screen, choose the possible entries for the object; then you

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM MM Integration of Web-based catalogs in purchasing see the matchcode selection. 3. When the search engine service is active, you see two new matchcodes in this case, the following: - Quick search of functional location by search engine - Advanced search of functional location by search engine You make the technical settings for You can make use of Webbased catalogs in both uploads and downloads of catalog data in customizing for purchasing. To purchasing through the do so, choose the implementation Open Catalog Interface guide (IMG) activity "Web services: ID (OCI). It is possible to both and description" under environment upload purchasing data data. Here you can specify several from the software into a catalogs. The catalog for which you catalog and download have set the default indicator is used in catalog data into material the transactions. items of purchasing documents (requisitions with ME51N and purchase orders with ME21N). Customer s This functionality addresses the following issues: - Purchasing > Business add-in (BAdI): in archiving scope (MM_EBAN) (ARC_MM_EBAN_WRITE) > BAdI: in archivability check (MM_EBAN) (ARC_MM_EBAN_CHECK) > BAdI: in archiving scope (MM_EINA) (ARC_MM_EINA_WRITE) > BAdI: in archivability check (MM_EINA) (ARC_MM_EINA_CHECK) > BAdI: in archiving scope (MM_EKKO) (ARC_MM_EKKO_WRITE) > BAdI: in archivability check (MM_EKKO) (ARC_MM_EKKO_CHECK) > BAdI: commitment for returns items (ME_COMMITMENT_RETURN) > BAdI: for enjoy purchase requisition interfaces in the BAPI programming interface (ME_BAPI_PR_CUST) > BAdI: in purchasing: BAdI for customers in function groups 2014 & 2013 (MEOUT_BAPI_CUST) > BAdI: for BAPI_PO_CREATE1 and BAPI_PO_CHANGE (ME_BAPI_PO_CUST) > BAdI: processing options for enjoy outline agreement: customer (ME_PROCESS_OUT_CUST) - Customer exit LMEKO002 The following additional fields are available in the customer exit LMEKO002 (enhance communication structure The following business add-ins (BAdIs) are available in purchasing. With these BAdIs, you can extend the archiving scope of certain write and delete programs through additional database tables and enhance the archivability check of certain write programs by adding further checks.

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM MM MM New interfaces in the BAPI programming interface for outline agreements Mass maintenance of outline agreements Commitment plan for purchase contracts KOMP for price determination): > Parameter I_EKKN > Field PS_PSP_PNR (work breakdown structure [WBS] element) > Field VBELN (sales and distribution document number) > Field VBELP (sales and distribution document item) Note: The BAdI ME_PO_PRICING is now also available to populate the communication structures KOMK and KOMP. The following new methods (new interfaces in the BAPI programming interface) are available in purchasing for outline agreements. The names of the functions are shown in parentheses in each case: - Contract (MM-PUR-OA- CON) > PurchasingContract.Create (BAPI_CONTRACT_CREATE): creation of a purchase contract > PurchasingContract.Change (BAPI_CONTRACT_CHANGE): changing of a purchase contract > PurchasingContract.GetDetail (BAPI_CONTRACT_GETDETAIL): displaying of details of a purchase contract - Scheduling agreement (MM- PUR-OA-SCH) > PurchSchedAgreement.Create (BAPI_SAG_CREATE): creation of a scheduling agreement > PurchSchedAgreement.Change (BAPI_SAG_CHANGE): changing of a scheduling agreement > PurchSchedAgreement.GetDetail (BAPI_SAG_GETDETAIL): displaying of details of a purchase scheduling agreement > PurchSchedAgreement.Maintain (BAPI_SCHEDULE_MAINTAIN): mmaintenance of scheduling agreement delivery schedule lines The following two transactions available: - Mass maintenance for contracts: transaction code MEMASSCONTRACT - Mass maintenance for scheduling agreements: transaction code MEMASSSA With the function of the commitment plan for purchase contracts, it is possible to preplan value consumption for a purchase contract. To this end, a commitment plan is generated for each document item of the relevant contract. This commitment plan itself can have any number of items. You can define a value and a validity date for each commitment plan item. This enables you to preplan different values for You can use the mass maintenance functions for outline agreements (contracts and scheduling agreements) in purchasing.

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM MM Availability check in "Enjoy purchase order and requisition" Purchase order: product substitution with available-to-promise (ATP) check for stock transport orders different periods of time. The software generates an earmarked fund document for a defined commitment plan item. This earmarked funds document can in turn contain several different items with different account assignments. The software adopts these account assignments from the item account assignments of the commitment plan. If a purchase requisition or purchase order references this contract, the earmarked funds document is copied into the purchase order, and the account assignment is adopted from that document. Account assignment to a different account assignment object is then no longer allowed. There is a business add-in (BAdl) for commitment plans for contracts. You can use the BAdl ME_COMMITMENT_PLAN (commitment plan for contracts) to change commitment plans for contracts and define your own checks. Display and checking of availability are invokable separately in the "Enjoy purchase order and requisition" function, in line with the software behavior on the sales side. You invoke the display and checking of availability in the "Enjoy purchase order" function (transaction code ME21N) and the "Enjoy purchase requisition" function (transaction code ME51N) as follows: - To display the availability overview, choose the menu path "Environment -> Availability." - To check availability, choose the "Check Availability" icon. Until this release, if you carried out the availability check for an item of a stock transport order, the software adopted confirmations as per the desired date/time only. You can define in customizing how the software reacts if the desired quantity cannot be confirmed for the desired date/time. You have a choice of two settings: - Confirmation as per desired date/time (this is the standard setting and corresponds to previous software behavior) - Delivery proposal - Full confirmation From the technical viewpoint, the requirement is now in the subitems. However, the main item retains the original desired quantities and desired dates/times, so that a renewed availability check is carried out again with the desired quantities and desired dates/times. The follow-on functions (delivery creation, goods issue, goods As of release 6.0 of ERP Central Component and release 5.0 of Supply Chain Management ( SCM), product substitution with the rulesbased available-to-promise (ATP) check of SCM can also be used for the

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM MM MM Purchase order, stock transport orders: specification of a requirement profile External services: putting service items in the purchase order on hold (changed) Changes to service master data receipt) are carried out with reference availability check in stock to the subitems with the substituted transport orders. materials. To enable product The delivery proposals with substitution with rules-based availableto-promise (ATP) check of the supply the ATP check are substitute products from chain management system to be used automatically adopted in for stock transport orders, the following the stock transport order as prerequisites must be satisfied: subitems for the item In the enterprise resource planning checked. If the software (ERP) software, the following settings has generated subitems, it have been made in customizing for sets the main item to purchasing under the menu path statistical. "Purchase Order -> Set Up Stock Transport Order -> Assign Delivery Type and Checking Rule": - Delivery proposal or complete delivery has been set in the rule for adoption of ATP results in purchasing field. - You have maintained a requirement profile in the ATP check. Either profile at requirements level for advanced planning and optimization field or you are using master data for product interchangeability. - In the supply chain management software, the customizing settings and master data for the products involved have been maintained for product substitution with rules-based ATP check Restrictions are as follows: - Location determination is not possible for stock transport orders. - Contract reference and quota arrangement are not possible. In addition to making the customizing settings available hitherto, you can specify a requirement profile for stock transport orders. You can put purchase orders with service items on hold if these items do not contain any errors. Purchase orders with service items can also be put on hold if errors occur only at header level or as a result of the availability check. This functionality contains a business add-in (BAdI) to check service master records before archiving (MMSRV_SM_ARCHIVE). You can use this BAdI to perform your own usage checks for the archiving of service master records. The CHECK_ARCHIVABLE method is performed during the archiving process. If a service master record does not satisfy your self-defined check criteria, the software does not allow it to be archived. With your definition of the check criteria and the use of this

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM MM Business add-ins for purchasing and inventory management Archiving programs for purchasing and inventory management method, you thus also formulate the condition under which service master records are not to be archived. Two new interfaces in BAPI enable you to enter and modify data for the service master. Three new BAdIs, available in conjunction with interfaces BAPI_SERVICE_CREATE and BAPI_SERVICE_CHANGE, enable you to accomplish the following tasks: - Change incoming data with the same effect as if you had also supplied the data in modified form in the interface - Change outgoing data without any effect on the database (for example, for formatting purposes) - Change the data of the standard service catalog - Change customer fields that are contained in "Include CI_ASMDDB" - Inform yourself about changes to service master data This functionality enhances inventory management: - Business add-in (BAdI): Enhancement in archiving scope (MM_INVBEL) (ARC_MM_INVBEL_WRITE) - BAdI: Enhancement in archivability check (MM_INVBEL) (ARC_MM_INVBEL_CHECK) The following reports for the archiving of purchasing information records, purchase requisitions, and physical inventory documents are available in the purchasing function and the inventory management function. - Archiving of purchasing information records: write program (RM06IW47) - Archiving of purchasing information records: delete program (RM06ID47) - Archiving of purchase requisitions: write program (RM06BW47) - Archiving of purchase requisitions: delete program (RM06BD47) - Archiving of physical inventory documents: write program (RM07IARCS) - Archiving of physical inventory documents: delete program (RM07IDELS) MM Assignment test You can use the assignment test in the logistics invoice verification. The assignment text is a process step preceeding the invoice verification in background processing. The software checks cyclically whether an open goods receipt exists for the invoices entered in background processing. The software begins the invoice verification The following business add-ins (BAdIs) are available in inventory management. With these BAdIs, you can extend the archiving scope of certain write and delete programs through additional database tables and enhance the archivability check of certain write programs by adding further checks.

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM MM MM MM Customizing transactions OX18 replaced by view Goods receipt: new movement types in inventory management Functional s in transaction MIGO Variance type as sort criterion for invoice items only when open goods receipts exist for an invoice. Effects on system administration are characterized as follows: the assignment test should be called in background processing before the report for the invoice verification, because the assignment test helps create the worklist for background processing. An assignment test is faster than a complete invoice verification in background processing, inasmuch as the software does not have to process as much data from the database and does not have to execute as many checks and reports. In addition, the software does not execute full assignment of the open goods receipts as in background processing; it executes only basic assignment. The assigned customizing transactions have been replaced by the following view in the following implementation guide activity in customizing for the enterprise structure: Assign plant to company code: transaction OX18 replaced by view V_T001K_Assign. You will find this activity in the implementation guide under the menu path "Enterprise Structure -> Assignment -> Logistics General -> Assign Plant to Company Code." The following new movement types are available in inventory management: - 107: Goods receipt to valuated goods receipt blocked stock - 109: Goods receipt from valuated goods receipt blocked stock Certain functional restrictions from the retail area are removed in the transaction for goods movements, MIGO: - Generic article processing is now possible. - Goods movements with structured materials (structured articles) can now be posted. - Merchandise distribution is now possible. - Supplementary logistics service is now supported. These changes apply to goods receipt, goods issue, and return delivery, as well as stock transfer/transfer posting. Invoice processing at the invoice item level has been enhanced by the addition of the variance type field. The software uses the variance type field to flag possible quantity or price differences in the invoice item in the background. Differences between the You can use these two new movement types for an acceptance at origin (origin acceptance). You can maintain movement types in customizing for inventory management through the activity copy/change movement types.

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution goods receipt and purchase order quantities can represent one possible error type. The software is supplied with this preset error type. Further error types can be implemented on a customer-specific basis by means of business add-ins (BAdIs). You can have the software help you find possible errors in invoice items (for example, in your role as invoice verification clerk) more quickly by sorting faulty items on the basis of the variance type field. The variance type can serve as the starting point for the work of the invoice verification clerk. MM Prepayment of invoices This functionality is characterized as follows: - You can trigger prepayment of vendor invoices in logistics invoice verification. - You use the prepayment function for vendors with whom you have a good, long-standing relationship. - The function enables payment soon after issue of the invoice and full exploitation of the date of required payment and existing cash discounts, by posting the vendor liabilities, taxes, and cash discounts in financial accounting in advance. The software executes the payment of the invoice regardless of the relevant goods receipt and the outcome of the invoice verification check. - Most logistics invoice verification standard functions are not affected by the prepayment function. When the software posts invoices, it continues to execute the standard checks. If the software has already posted the prepayment document, you can make only restricted changes to the header fields of the invoice. To ensure adequate and orderly financial accounting postings, a prepayment clearing account has been added to Central Component. Upon prepayment, the software debits this account and then settles the account again after executing the check. MM Purchasing accounting information to the former Business Information Warehouse With the transfer of the purchasing This development is account information to the former intended to complement Business Information Warehouse the purchasing information component (whose functionality is now that is passed from part of NetWeaver), it is now ERP Central Component to possible to maintain InfoCubes, the former Business reports, and queries that can determine Information Warehouse how and where the costs from component. purchasing documents have been assigned and controlled. As part of the software, a new datasource (2LIS_02_ACC) has been created and the purchasing extraction

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM MM MM New business add-ins in logistics invoice verification New interfaces in the BAPI programming interface in logistics invoice verification The Netherlands: chain liability process extended to cover the account information for purchasing orders, schedule agreements, and contracts. The following new business add-ins (BAdIs) are available in logistics invoice verification: - BAdI to change document header data in evaluated receipt settlement (ERS): MRM_ERS_HDAT_MODIFY - BAdI to change document lines in ERS: MRM_ERS_IDAT_MODIFY - BAdI to change customers' own fields: MRM_ITEM_CUSTFIELDS You maintain these BAdIs in "Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification" under "Maintain Customer-Exits and Business Add-Ins." The following new methods (new interfaces in the BAPI programming interface) are available in logistics invoice verification. The names of the functions are shown in parentheses in each case. - Business object incoming invoice: IncomingInvoice (object type BUS2081) - Post provisional invoice: PreliminaryPostSingle (BAPI_INCOMINGINVOICE_POST) - Delete provisional invoice: DeleteSingle (BAPI_INCOMINGINVOICE_DELETE) - Change provisional invoice: Change (BAPI_INCOMINGINVOICE_CHANGE) To display, choose the menu path "Tools -> Business Framework -> BAPI Explorer." You can use the chain liability software for The Netherlands to determine the income tax and social security contributions of invoiced wages and to post them either directly to the authorities or to your subcontractor's blocked account. The solution is based on an independent concept, consisting of the following new reports, which you can access from the chain-liability area menu WKAMENUE: - Check expiration dates of certificates This report can be used to check the validity of your subcontractor's certificates if you are posting the amounts to a blocked account. - Document flow of purchase order line items This report can be used to check the document flow of purchase order line items for internal controlling purposes. - Change payment block and payment method This report can be used to enforce or remove a payment block or to change the payment method for open vendor items. In addition, the transactions for

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM MM Automatic settlement of planned delivery costs with evaluated receipt settlement Empties management in materials management processing purchase orders and invoices have been enhanced to include a new tab page containing chain liability specific fields. Effects on customizing are characterized as follows: before you use the new chain liability software for The Netherlands, you have to carry out the implementation guide activities and activate the business add-ins in customizing for materials management by choosing the menu path "Logistics Invoice Verification -> Incoming Invoice -> Chain Liability -> Chain Liability for the Netherlands." A new report (RMMR1MDC), available within the logistics invoice verification, can be used to automatically settle planned delivery costs. To invoke the report, from the easy access screen, choose the menu path "Logistics -> Materials Management -> Logistics Invoice Verification -> Automatic Settlement -> Automatic Delivery Cost Settlement" (transaction code MRDC). Functionality for report RMMR1MRS is enhanced. You can use the report RMMR1MRS, "Evaluated receipt settlement with logistics invoice verification (LIV)" (transaction code MRRL), to settle planned delivery costs in addition to goods and service items within logistics invoice verification. To do so, set the relevant indicator on the initial screen of the report. Prerequisite: Extension EA-CP is active. As of release 6.0 of Central Component ( ECC), empties management is also available in materials management. This means that you can now use sales bills of materials in purchasing and sales and add empties items to full product items in purchase orders. You can also process these empties items in invoice verification. The advantages of having tied empties shown in materials management documents are as follows: - Greater degree of transparency and consistency of processes - Simple price determination - Separate valuations for accounting purposes of full products and tied empties - Compatibility with other software in which bills of materials are used (for example, free goods discount) Empties management includes input help to assist you when entering structured empties in the purchase order. - Effects on existing

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM MM Enhancements for Japanese subcontracting with chargeable components software Enhancements for for Retail seasonal procurement: open-to-buy function data This has no effect on your existing data set. - Effects on customizing Use the "Activate ECC extensions process" step to activate the enterprise extension consumer products. Then use the activate empties management process step to activate empties management in materials management. Manual price change programs such as price update, price change, and debit/credit material automatically cover stocks of chargeable components stored at your subcontractors' premises. As of release 6.0 of the retail enterprise extension of Central Component ( ECC), you can use the open-to-buy (OTB) function in seasonal procurement in combination with the NetWeaver Business Intelligence ( NetWeaver BI) component content 7.0.2 add-on. You can use the flexible planning options provided by NetWeaver BI for your budgets, as well as an integrated check in the operational applications. You transfer your planning data from NetWeaver BI to ECC. When a purchase order is created or changed in seasonal procurement, an OTB check is performed automatically. Percentage tolerances can be defined as part of the configuration settings for the check. It provides a good example of how retail planning and operational procurement can be integrated. If sufficient budget is available, the software creates the document and updates the exhausted budget. If the check result is negative, the purchase order is not created, and you can procure the budget that is lacking. The OTB procurement workbench for purchase orders and grouped purchase order documents offers the following options for document changes: - You change the current document or other documents belonging to the same budget and adhere to the planned values from NetWeaver BI. - You can adjust the purchase order quantity and delete items or schedule lines. - You can also move the delivery date, thereby accessing a different budget. The detail data is available in the application functions of the workbench interfaces with special display and change options. The OTB monitor is another workbench application that can help you monitor the current budget

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM Enhancements for for Retail seasonal procurement: procurement monitoring situation. It provides flexible selection options for the worklist: - OTB transfer posting The prerequisite is that you use a scheduled article hierarchy and plan budgets on at least one level of the article hierarchy. As soon as a new budget assignment would result from a changed assignment in the article hierarchy, the software automatically logs OTB-relevant changes in the hierarchy. The OTB transfer posting provides a report that you can schedule as a regular job. The following functions of the report are especially relevant: > Determining the open purchasing items or schedule lines in which the budget assignment has changed, and adjusting the assignment for relevant purchase orders > Determining the contracts with an internal contract apportionment in which the budget assignment has changed, and adjusting the assignment for the relevant purchase orders > Transferring the appropriate budget amounts at the same time as adjusting the budget assignment - Reorganization of OTB budgets There is a report for deleting expired budgets that no longer refer to any documents. - OTB-relevant contracts If you want to take OTB contracts into account when planning your budgets in NetWeaver BI, you can use an OTB reservation in ECC. Because a contract is usually valid over several budget-planning periods, you can use the internal contract apportionment to reserve and distribute the contract's total value to the relevant planning periods and budgets. You can configure the software to exit processing with an error message, and you can choose not to create a contract if the OTB reservation result is negative or to issue a warning with the option of creating the contract. When a purchase order is created with a contract reference (in seasonal procurement), an OTB check is carried out against the reserved budget. You can perform the OTB reservation for contracts either at header or item level. You can use the contract monitor to monitor contracts and their release. You can also check the internal contract apportionment and the OTB reservation. This functionality enhances procurement monitoring. As of release 6.0 of the retail enterprise extension of Central Component, the seasonal procurement processes

provide procurement monitoring, which you can use to monitor procurementrelated dates, purchasing budgets (open-to-buy [OTB]), and contracts for optimized control of your processes. Centralized, automatic scheduling calculates the operational dates (such as the transfer date) and informative dates (for example, the sales sample date). They are monitored in the Event Management application and posted as an event handler for each purchase order item. The software displays the dates for each article item as a dateline in the relevant workbenches for seasonal procurement. For more information about scheduling, see the release note "Seasonal Procurement." There are three parts to procurement monitoring: - Purchase order monitoring This is used to monitor purchase orders and related dates along the process chain, from the purchase order at the external vendors to the goods receipt at the distribution center or store. Monitoring is designed to detect date variances and their impact in plenty of time and to take any necessary measures so that dates are met. The following views are provided for the activities described below: > Reactive purchase order monitor If there are specific date overruns (for example, if a due date such as the transfer date has not been posted or is posted late), you can take the required measures at item level to prevent any potential delays in delivery. You can carry out all activities manually or have the software perform them automatically on the basis of the activity profile created in customizing. > Active purchase order monitor You can get information about current procurement processes along the logistics chain, which is made up of the operational dates in the dateline. If the economic conditions change, you can intervene in the procurement process at this point and, for example, cancel purchase orders. For some purchase orders with long lead times, the seasonal procurement processes especially require this type of active view. - Contract monitoring You can use the contract monitor to monitor contracts and their release. You can also check the internal contract apportionment and the OTB reservation. - OTB monitoring The OTB monitor helps you to monitor the current budget situation. It offers

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM for Retail: seasonal procurement flexible selection options for the worklist and provides detail data in the application functions with special display options. As of release 6.0 of the retail enterprise extension of Central Component ( ECC), you can use seasonal procurement processes. These enable you to process purchase transactions that are adapted to meet the requirements of the seasonal purchasing of trading goods: for example, in the area of fashion. The main target group consists of buyers who procure seasonal articles. Seasonal procurement entails the use of the following workbench applications, each with a uniformly structured user interface, to display and process your data. The workbenches each consist of a work list generated by means of a selection report and selection-dependent follow-on screens, which are represented on the user interface as application functions in grid controls of the ABAP list viewer. You can move directly from any one workbench to any other: - Purchase order manager with access to the following items: > Order list > Grouped purchase order document > Purchase order - Open-to-buy (OTB) procurement of the following types: > OTB procurement: document changes > OTB procurement: special release > OTB monitor > Reactive purchase order monitor > Active purchase order monitor > Contract monitor The central workbench is the purchase order manager, which includes functions for creating and processing order lists and purchase order documents. Because of the long intervals between budgeting, ordering, and delivering the merchandise, the software supports you by providing automatic scheduling (see below). When purchase orders are generated and manually created, purchase order processing in seasonal procurement executes an intergrated OTB check. In addition, seasonal procurement integrates many applications for procurement monitoring. You can use these to monitor dates, budgets, and contracts and to make manual changes if necessary. Seasonal procurement can process planning data located in ECC, for example, such as data from operational assortment planning and control (OAPC) and planned budgets from NetWeaver Business

Intelligence ( NetWeaver BI). This ensures that the planning and operational processes are integrated throughout. However, you can also enter procurement items manually and without a reference to OAPC. The overall process is as follows: 1. In OAPC, you plan which articles should be available in which quantity in the assortment in your store or distribution center on a specific date, and you transfer these items to the order list. 2. Depending on your selection, the software collects potential purchase order items in the order list and thus provides an initial work list of purchase orders to be generated. You can use fast entry to speed up the entry of new items in the order list. It offers benefits similar to those of the copy function, but it empties the variable field values (for example, article, quantity) to enable user-friendly entry. In the order list, you create either grouped purchase order documents or purchase orders. The order list returns the changed processing status of the item to OAPC; then a status confirmation is sent for the grouped purchase order and the purchase order. 3. In the grouped purchase order document, the software bundles the items in accordance with fixed conditions (for example, vendor) and variable conditions (for example, site). You can enhance and choose items manually. The software transfers items with a reference to the order list that you move from the grouped purchase order document deletion back to the order list. You can create a purchase order for each grouped purchase order document if the budget is sufficient. 4. The OTB check verifies whether there is sufficient budget for the entire document or for each item. The OTB check takes place (if activated) each time a purchase order is created or changed. 5. Using OTB procurement, you can procure available budget for a document for which the OTB check returned a negative result. If insufficient budget exists, you cannot create a purchase order. By changing documents that belong to the same budget, for example, you can release a budget and bring about a positive result in the OTB check. If the aforementioned document changes are not possible, the software provides a special release function, whereby you gain approval from a superior to

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM Public sector management: principle of prudence for credit memos in purchasing exceed the budget. 6. If the OTB check determines that there is a sufficient budget, you can generate the purchase order and, after release (if necessary), send it to the vendor. The purchase order returns the status that the planned article was ordered to OAPC. Single-store vendor order seasonal procurement supports a one-level cross-docking procedure with prepicking, in which exactly one external vendor order is generated for each store. Cross-docking facilitates goods movements in the distribution center, while the generation of the single-store vendor orders increases the number of purchase order documents in the software. In addition, the procedure supports single-recipient vendor orders from the allocation table and the collective purchase order. Credit memo processing can be defined in such a way that the credit memo impacts the budget only at the collection point. This necessitates a delay in updating in funds management by the software until the credit memo has been collected or offset against another creditor invoice. The transfer of the commitment from the credit memo back to the purchase order can be delayed so that it does not occur until receipt of payment. For the principle of prudence to be applied to a credit memo, a derivation strategy must be defined in customizing. The principle of prudence can then be used in dependence on the document type of a credit memo, for example. In the process, you can specify whether the budget relevance of the credit memo is delayed from parking until posting or from parking until receipt of payment. Whether the principle of prudence applies to a credit memo can be seen from the purchase order history. The quantity still to be released to the purchase order commitment or delayed, or the value of the credit memo still to be released, can be seen in additional fields (for example, EKBE- MENGE_POP). If a credit memo is not subject to the principle of prudence, these fields are empty. The funds management commitment document (document journal, table FMIOI) shows the value released from the credit memo. At the same time, the funds management document belonging to the credit memo and the financial accounting line item (funds management document, table FMIFIIT)

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM Public sector: servicebased commitments in purchasing shows the not-yet-released value as statistical (not relevant to budget). The funds management transaction of this document is then marked with "POP." The principle of prudence has no effect on cost accounting commitments management. Service-based commitments in purchasing is characterized as follows: the software updates purchase order and requisition commitments per service line. You can display the commitment documents belonging to a purchase order under the menu path "Purchase Order -> Environment -> AC Commitment Documents." - If you use service-based commitments for a purchase order, the software must update the purchase order history per service line. The software therefore sets the indicator for service-based invoice verification automatically in the purchase order. You cannot unset the indicator. - Commitment offsetting after purchase order release is not supported for service-based commitments in purchase requisitions. The commitment in the purchase requisition is offset (reduced, canceled out) when the purchase order is saved. Invoice before goods receipt for services in purchasing is characterized as follows: you can post invoices for services in purchasing before the corresponding goods receipt has been posted. To enable this, you must make specific settings in the item details for the service order: - If you have not yet posted a goods receipt for a purchase order for services, the software suggests the relevant purchase order items in the invoice. - If you post the invoice before the goods receipt and the goods receipt quantity is smaller than or the same as the invoice quantity, the price in the goods receipt document must be derived from the price of the service in the invoice. At the time of service entry or goods receipt, the software automatically calculates the price. This cannot then be changed. MM Accessibility All materials management purchasing and materials management external services customizing transactions have been checked for accessibility and adjusted if necessary. This includes the conversion of ABAP lists to ABAP list viewer grids, adding tool tips to icons and buttons, adding titles to frames etc. With ERP 2005 all accessibility clean-

6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution 6.0 Procurement and Logistics Execution my 2004 Procurement and Logistics Execution up tasks in MM-PUR and MM-SRV are finished. MM Parking service items It is now possible to put service orders without errors or with commitment errors on hold. SRM Supplier The following business scenarios are Relationship released for the Supplier Management application Relationship Management application as add-on in one client to add-on: Central Component MM Enterprise services for procurement - Service procurement (local deployment) - Self-service procurement (classic deployment) - Microsoft Software Update Services in connection with both types of procurement mentioned above - Invoice Management application - Catalog content management The following are also included: - Operational usage of contracts (for example, for the assignment of sources of supply) - Request for proposal, as far as known from the temporary labor scenario Please check in the Enterprise Services Workplace site which enterprise services are available for procurement on the Developer Network site (www.sdn.sap.com). MM Archiving The most frequently used archiving objects have been reworked so that they now correspond to a uniform standard. This has two main advantages: the archiving objects can be used uniformly in archiving projects, and accessing archived data across different applications has been improved. The changes concern the following areas: - Selection screen In the selection screen of the write program, you can specify under processing options whether the program should be performed in the test or production mode. If you select the detail log checkbox, a uniform log detailing which objects were processed is delivered in each write program. For certain archiving objects, such detail logs can also be delivered in other program, such as in the deletion or preparatory program. For more information, see the F1 help documentation. - Progress confirmation A progress message appears every 30 minutes in the job log for programs executed in the background. For program executed in dialogue mode, the progress message appears in the status line every 10 seconds. - Log As of release 6.0, it is possible to deploy Supplier Relationship Management ( SRM) as an add-on in one client to Central Component ( ECC). This new deployment option is suitable for the following types of customers: - Those who desire a simple procurement scenario - Those who do not yet use SRM - Those who are using only one back-end type of software ( ECC) - Those who aim to install SRM with a low total cost of ownership Enterprise services are available for procurement.

With each archiving run, the following information is written to the log (spool list): > Number of table entries, processed archiving objects, archiving files, and so on > Processed business objects (such as orders or billing documents) As described above, you can choose in the selection screen of the write program whether a detail log listing the individual business objects processed is issued instead of the usual compact log. - Interrupting the archiving run To enable you to react appropriately to a given time frame or restricted disk place during archiving, the write phase of an archiving run can be interrupted and then continued at a later point. This function forms part of archive administration (transaction SARA). - Customizing specific-toarchiving objects The technical settings in customizing specific-to-archiving objects have been examined for the processed archiving objects and modified as necessary. You can implement the new parameters by activating the corresponding business configuration (BC) set (transaction SCPR20). The BC set is called "ARCH_." For example, the BC set for archiving object SD_VBAK is ARCH_SD_VBAK. We recommend that you implement the new parameters. - Network graphic The network graphic for the individual archiving objects has been examined, and any necessary adjustments have been made. - Enhanced access of the archive Archive access through the archive information function and the document relationship browser have been enhanced and improved. For some archiving objects, read access from certain application transactions to archived data is now available. The following is true for process and production orders: - With the exception of interrupting the archiving run, these archiving objects were not changed for R/3 Enterprise release 4.70 software. See Note 713545. - No progress confirmation messages are displayed. - Customizing specific-toarchiving objects was not changed. - In general, no other steps are required for the upgrade. In particular, you do not have to create any new variants for write and deletion programs. For more information on the changes implemented, see Note 577847, special features for upgrade from R/3 Enterprise 4.70. The affected

my 2004 Procurement and Logistics Execution archiving objects were in fact already reworked for R/3 Enterprise 4.70 (see Note 577847). For the implemented changes to take effect, however, they had to be activated explicitly. If you have already activated them for R/3 Enterprise 4.70, no further steps are required for this upgrade. Effects on system administration are as follows: As new write and deletion programs have been assigned to the archiving objects, it is generally necessary to check the variants for scheduling the write and deletion programs and to make any necessary adjustments. In particular, it is necessary to enter the new variants for the deletion programs in customizing specific to archiving objects. We recommend using the variants &TEST and &PROD. You can also use the BC sets ARCH_ to enter these variants. BC sets are activated by the transaction SCPR20. Note that these actions are not necessary for any archiving objects that have already been upgraded with Note 577847. MM Purchase requisitions This functionality addresses the following issues: - Reference funds reservation from purchase requisitions/purchase orders going into stock You can now reference a funds reservation from a purchase requisition or a purchase order, even if these documents use account assignment category space, meaning that the order is not for direct consumption but for inventory stock - Field status for purchase requisitions/purchase orders without account assignment categories It is now possible to customize the funds management account assignment elements (and funds reservations) for purchase requisitions and purchase orders with account assignment category space, meaning items that are not ordered for consumption but that go into stock. This feature is supported only in the new transactions (ME2*N and ME5*N). - Effects on customizing If you do not carry out this customizing and funds management is active, all the available fields are displayed as optional. - Redesign of funds management warehouse concept The main changes are as follows: > Warehouse funds center and any other account assignment can be derived through the use of the derivation tool. > The statistical indicator must be triggered

my 2004 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM Purchase orders: order optimization through the use of a statistical commitment item. To make order optimization available As of the 2004 release of for general use, the following changes, you can use were made to the functions that could order optimization even if previously be used only for retail you do not use retail software: - Lifting of plant restrictions software. The aim of order Plants no longer have to be of type optimization is to bundle store or distribution center. In nonretail requirements or generate software, order optimization selects additional requirements to plants of type in the following fulfill order restrictions transactions: automatic load building defined for a vendor and to (WLB13), manual load building minimize the cost of (WLB5), and replenishment workbench transportation. (WOD1). The links from these transactions to maintenance transactions for the site master (WB02) were converted to links to the plant master (OX10). - Determining orderable materials You must determine this list by using the user exit EXIT_LWPOPO_001. - Removing links to promotion transactions Because promotions can be used only in retail software, the options to choose promotion transactions from the menu entries have been removed. - Enhanced order optimization The following changes have been made to the order optimization functions: > Messages changed * When errors occur during automatic load building, the software now creates information messages instead of error messages. This means it can process all error-free load builds. You can recognize the load builds that contain errors and process them manually. * In the flow trace for automatic load building, you can see more clearly which messages belong to a load build. The software now indicates the start of processing and the end of processing of a load build with a message. * The existing messages have been extended to include extra information so that you can make the relevant corrections for example, in the master data. > More detailed control of order optimization In customizing for order optimization, more detailed control of the parameters for load building and investment buying is now possible through the use of profiles for example, maximum range of coverage for order optimization. You can now select a profile from the entries from customizing for order optimization in the selection screen for order optimization. If no profiles have been entered, the software uses the first entry in table TWBO0. This means that the program behavior remains

unchanged after an upgrade, and you do not have to adjust anything. > Possibility of materials without forecast values Automatic load building now also considers materials without forecast values. Purchase requisitions and purchase orders are processed in the same way as materials with forecast values. > Enhanced restriction profile check In customizing for order optimization, you can now define for restriction profiles whether an order request link is valid for the minimum restrictions check. In this case, the minimum restrictions count as being fulfilled when at least one of the minimum restrictions is fulfilled. > Extension of results list for automatic load building extended * In the results list for automatic load building, you can now select and delete rows in blocks or created follow-on documents. This makes faster subsequent processing possible. * All functions that show additional details screens or branch to display transactions have been switched to cursor-sensitive logic. * You can now delete individual rows or several rows from the results list. This reduces the extra manual work required. You can make sure manually that the load builds created by automatic load building fulfill a restriction profile. When you delete rows, the totals of the actual values for a restriction profile are reduced. > Possibility of excluding purchase requisitions from automatic load building You can now exclude purchase requisitions with certain document types from processing in automatic load building. The procurement process for these purchase requisitions then takes place outside of automatic load building. > New follow-on documents possible * If you do not start automatic load building in simulation mode, the software now offers purchase requisitions as possible order documents in addition to purchase orders. You can determine whether the load building creates purchase requisitions always or only when all restrictions defined in a restriction profile are fulfilled. If in the latter case not all the restrictions are fulfilled, the transaction behaves as it would in simulation mode. Purchase requisitions as follow-on documents save you work. You can, for example, delete purchase requisitions or assign them to another vendor. * You can now

my 2004 my 2004 Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution MM MM Purchase orders: funds management Pickup list: batch whereused list display in transaction MB56 have purchase requistions generated for additional quantities from the results list. >Validity of the results list dependent on a plant calendar In customizing for order optimization, you can now set the number of calendar days for which the entries in the results list for automatic load building are valid. You can set a short validity period and the validity period of the entries that were created after a weekend or public holiday gives your material requirements planning (MRP) controllers sufficient time to check and adjust the results. This functionality accomplishes the following: - Reference funds reservation from purchase requisitions/purchase orders going into stock You can now reference a funds reservation from a purchase requisition or a purchase order, even if these documents use account assignment category space, meaning that the order is not for direct consumption, but for inventory stock. - Field status for purchase requisitions/purchase orders without account assignment categories It is now possible to customize the funds management account assignment elements (and funds reservations) for purchase requisitions and purchase orders with account assignment category space, meaning items that are not ordered for consumption but that go into stock. This feature is supported only in the new transactions (ME2*N and ME5*N). - Effects on customizing If you do not carry out this customizing and funds management is active, all the available fields are displayed as optional. - Redesign of funds management warehouse concept The main changes are as follows: > Warehouse funds center and any other account assignment can be derived through the use of of the derivation tool. > The statistical indicator must be triggered through the use of a statistical commitment item. Until this release, the top-down and bottom-up analyses in the function pickup list for batch where-used list (transaction MB5C) were displayed only in the form of simple output lists. As of release 5.00 of Central Component, the function pickup list for batch where-used list branches to the batch where-used list itself (transaction MB56). In addition, you can define how This functionality enables you to address safety issues. In various industries, homogeneous partial quantities of a material or product (batches) are used throughout the logistics quantity and value chain. This is because of the

the data in the batch where-used list is displayed, in the initial screen. You can use all the settings available in the batch where-used list. For example, you can expand transfer posting or display vendor batch. However, it is not possible to limit the selection to valid plants in the initial screen of the pickup list. following conditions: - Legal requirements (for example, the guidelines set out by Good Manufacturing Practices or the European Union Regulation 178/2002) - Regulations on hazardous material - Defect tracing, callback activities, and regression requirement The existing batch whereused list enables you to perform the following tasks: - Determine how a batch is created and used in production through various stages of production - Display the results in a list my 2004 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM Business application programming interfaces for material reservation You can use the batch where-used list to determine the following: - In which other batches a specific batch was used - From which other batches a batch was created This is important in case complaints and questions about product safety arise (if the composition of semifinished and finished products has to be documented across all production levels). In the business object material reservation (object type BUS2093: material reservation), the following new and enhanced interfaces in the BAPI programming interface exist (the names of the corresponding functions are in parentheses): - New interfaces in BAPI > Interface to read reservation items: Get Items 1 (BAPI_RESERVATION_GETITEMS1) This enables you to add the base unit of measure to the returned item data. > Interface to change individual reservations: Change (BAPI_RESERVATION_CHANGE) This enables you to change an existing reservation, including the appending of new items. An optional available-topromise (ATP) check and calendar check corresponding to the functionality provided by the MB21 transaction are also provided for this interface. - Changed interface in BAPI interface to create individual reservations: CreateFromData1

my 2004 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM Usability s for transaction MIGO for the posting of goods movements (BAPI_RESERVATION_CREATE1) With this interface, you can optionally assign an external reservation number. The optional ATP check and calendar check corresponding to the functionality provided by the MB21 transaction are also provided with this interface. For goods movements that refer to purchase orders as reference documents (for example, goods receipt, goods issue, subsequent adjustment), you can specify the ordering plant as an additional selection criterion directly next to the purchase order number and the item number. As standard, the field for the plant is hidden. To show this field, you must set the plant field (field name GODYNPRO-PO_WERKS) to "ready for input" in customizing for inventory management in the implementation guide activity field selection for MIGO. There is a new default value: "copy account assignment fields." When entering other goods receipts, you can copy existing account assignment data from the previous item to use as the default values for a new item. To do this, you set the copy account assignment fields indicator in the default values. You change the default values in the menu path "Settings -> Default Values." It is possible to perform the following actions: - Restrict the selection of purchase order items to those refering to a given plant when a goods movement related to purchase orders is posted - Copy accounting object information from the first item to the following ones when a goods movement is created - Post goods movement related to material docurments, which means to provide a means for taking existing material documents as a template for new goods movements Goods movements is monitored with reference to a material document. When you enter the following goods movements, it is possible to specify a material document, such as the following, as the reference document: - Goods receipt - Goods issue - Transfer posting - Remove from storage my 2004 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM New report: display list of invoice documents Note that these material documents must be documents that have arisen from a goods movement without reference ("Others") and that are not reversal documents. Logistics invoice verification offers you a new report display list of invoice documents (RMMR1MDI), which you can use to display such a list. As an addition to the existing program invoice overview (transaction code MIR6), you have extended selection criteria and display options. For example, on the initial screen you can make selections

my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 my 2004 Procurement and Logistics Execution MM Localization for France and Spain: evaluated receipt settlement invoice numbering Financials FI Enhancement in the financial instruments supported by treasury and risk management Financials FI Enhancement in hedge management within treasury and risk management Financials FI Enhancement in the market risk of treasury and risk management by one-time customers, invoice gross amount, and entry date. You can also show an expert mode, which enables you to select at plant level by financial accounting document, general ledger account posting, and material posting. In the output list, the report shows both posted and held invoices. It does not show invoices without a corresponding financial accounting document; such as invoices planned for verification in the background, or which the software has already verified as containing errors. The software can automatically number each vendor's evaluated receipt settlement invoices consecutively. Companies in France and Spain require this function in order to comply with new laws enacted to implement European Council Directive 2001/115/EC. New products for foreign exchange trading are available: - Foreign exchange average rate option - Foreign exchange basket option - Foreign exchange forward volatility agreement - Annuity repayment in interest rate instrument the following benefits: - Greater array of transaction support - Elimination of need to support separate treasury management from finance and accounting This functionality is characterized as This functionality improves follows: - It is possible to create a new compliance with the exposure or plan directly from the deal international financial entry screen of an option in the hedge reporting standards and management functionality. financial accounting - The hypothetical derivative method standards. can also be used for options. - The effectiveness calculations for the benchmark method has been improved. - It is possible to upload cash flow from loans. - It is possible to conduct a prospective effectiveness test. This functionality accomplishes the Because market data following: - Calibration of the Hull-White providers do not provide volatilities from implicit Black-Scholes Hull-White volatilities, the volatilities of swaptions or caps/floors calibration enables you to - Master data maintenance in the calculate Hull-White results database volatilities with the normally - Enhancements in net present value provided Black-Scholes analysis, value-at-risk individual volatilities. The usability of analysis, and statistics calculator the maintenance for the master data has been improved, and the figure monitor can display the hierarchical and timedependent order of key figures and evaluation procedures. Financials FI Enhancement in the This functionality is characterized as credit risk of treasury and follows: - Enhancements in the Settlement risk calculations are also possible for

risk management 6.0 Financials FI Enhancements in the process support of treasury and risk management 6.0 Financials Enhancements in the hedge management of treasury and risk management settlement risk calculations have been money market instruments made. and consumer and - If the end-of-day calculation has mortgage loans. Limit errors, it is now possible to restart the management data can now calculations for a work list instead of be loaded into the former each deal individually. Business Information - Exchange rate type used by the Warehouse ( BW) Canada Revenue Agency (CRA) is no component (whose longer fixed to M, but a different functionality is now exchange rate type can be defined in included in the customizing. NetWeaver Business - Derivation rules can be used to Intelligence component) in determine which business partner order to use the should be used for credit risk analyzer. comfortable reporting - There are now extractors for the possibilities of the former NetWeaver Business Intelligence BW. component. This functionality addresses the following issues: - Enterprise serviceoriented architecture enables connection to market places with automation of download of forward exchange (FX) transactions (FX spot, FX forward, and FX options) made on marketplaces such as FXall, Currenex, or 360T. New business application programming interfaces for FX spot and FX forward transactions make it possible to enter all data for the FX transaction with one interface in the BAPI programming interfaces. - Currency exposure management software makes it possible to bring the exposure into the hedge management functionality and assign the hedging transactions to the exposure. It is then allowed to do the hedge accounting according to financial accounting standard (FAS) 133 or International Accounting Standards (IAS) 39. This functionality improves the possibilities of straightthrough processing, as well as the ability to gather data from everywhere and use it as exposure for hedge management. This functionality is characterized as This functionality improves follows: - Within hedge management, compliance with the the caps, floors, and forward rate international financial agreements (FRAs) can be used as reporting standards and hedging instruments. - Interfaces in the financial accounting BAPI programming interface can be standards used to load exposures from external sources, such as cash management, Microsoft Excel files, and accounts receivables. - Reporting is integrated in the logical database. - Starting values are added to the net present value table automatically. - Effectiveness tests are improved. - Open catalog interface dissolvement is automatically distributed over a predefined time. - Hedge accounting in more than one accounting area is possible, such as adherence to financial accounting standard (FAS) 133 in one accounting area and to International Accounting

6.0 Financials FI Reporting s and menu change of treasury and risk management 6.0 Financials FI Enhancement in the portfolio analyzer of treasury and risk management 6.0 Financials 6.0 Financials 6.0 Corporate Services FI, CO, AM, FSCM Enhancement in the credit risk of treasury and risk management Enhancement in the market risk of treasury and risk management Standards (IAS) 39 in another. The new logical database for This functionality improves transaction management reporting the reporting possibilities, enables the transactions reporting as well as providing a within the database's hierarchical single point of entry to structure (for example, level 1 being create or change deals of main data and level 2 being flows, all product types. conditions, and interest adjustments). The logical database is a basis for writing reports with different tools and may be used to easily extract data to the NetWeaver Business Intelligence component. There are some changes to menu, such as a new unified initial transaction for creating and processing financial transactions in the transaction manager software and a new menu area for debt management in transaction management software. Also, the Treasury and Risk Management application menu resides now under the accounting financial supply chain management functionality. Within the framework of portfolio Now it is possible to analyzer, it is possible to use single compare your portfolio benchmarks, as well as composite yields with benchmark benchmarks. Versioning and yields to analyze the historization of benchmarks is excess return rate. supported. The analyzer information function supports benchmark reporting, too. This functionality accomplishes the following: - Connection of the Limit Management application to the workflow - Providion of limits of individual deals For example, one money market deal cannot be for more than US$3 billion. With the Limit Management application, the workflow is automatically started to inform the manager as soon as a limit is breached, and the limits of individual deals can be provided. Financial object integration can be The enhanced financial activated on the basis of product types. object integration enables These settings can be made for all you to include only specific analyzers: product types from one - Market data generator (new area (for example, transaction) consumer and mortgage - Formula editor loans). For testing - Transfer of book values from treasury purposes, you can now risk management-transaction manager calculate market data with into the results database the market data generator The new instruments asset-backed and store them in the securities, mortgage-backed securities, database for use in the and securities lending can be analyzers. You are now reflected in the analyzers. enabled to analyze the risk key figures as well as accounting values together in one report and create further key figures by using the formula editor. PM Enhanced list editing This functionality addresses the following issues: - Mass changes of orders and notifications - Mass the following benefits: - It improves user productivity.

6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 Corporate Services 6.0 End-User Service Delivery my 2004 Financials PM PM PM HR FI, CO, AM, FSCM Connection to text retrieval and information extraction (TREX ) search engine Mobile work clearance management New enterprise asset management key performance indicators in the former Business Information Warehouse (whose functionality is now part of NetWeaver) Integration of form-based processes In-house cash cancellation of confirmations - Enhancements structure list Two new searches (quick search and advance search) through the text retrieval and information extraction (TREX) engine are implemented for the following maintenance-related objects: - Functional location - Piece of equipment - Material master - Document - Class - Characteristic mobile work clearance management supports the logout/tagout process by providing the following functionality: - Confirmation of the execution of the activity - Rejection of an activity for switching items only - Confirmation of the completion of the activity four new information providers: DataStore objects and InfoCubes on costs on maintenance orders and measurement points and documents. This functionality also provides nine new queries on the following: - Work management key performance indicators (maintenance order scheduling) - Failures and failure modes of equipment - Measurement points/counters and readings - It speeds up change process. - It improves data entry accuracy. With the new search, the user can enter a value or string, and the software will search through all those fields. With the search options available before the text retrieval and information extraction (TREX) search engine, the user had to know which field to search for a certain value. If the user wasn t sure about the field, the search was rather difficult and time consuming. the following benefits: - It supports the logout/tag-out process. - It replaces the printout of operational lists. - It improves productivity. the following benefits: - Enhanced reporting capabilities - More flexibility - Transparency of maintenance costs Integration of form-based processes enables organizations to implement the following benefits: - It forms more easily and quickly with print allows for lower formbased process forms and interactive forms based on Adobe software. In particular, the implementation costs. - It ERP Human Capital Management increases end-user ( HCM) processes and forms acceptance and provides application (see HCM, better contextual guidance workforce process management, and information. - section in this solution browser content) Processes are easily provides an optimal integration for adaptable. employees, managers, and human resources administrator to fulfill their tasks during the strongly collaborative human resources processes in which they are involved. With regard to business partner categories and standard roles, the new role concept from the business partner functionality is to be used. The previous account holder, authorized drawer, and bank statement recipient roles are now available as role Business partner could be used in a more efficient way.

my 2004 my 2004 Financials Financials 6.0 Financials Human Capital package 1 for Management FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM FI, CO, AM, FSCM HR In-house cash In-house cash In-house cash Employee interaction center categories and standard roles. With regard to processing foreign This functionality reduces currencies, changes have been made complexity of intercompany to how incoming and outgoing netting and payments and payments are processed if the reduces cost of transaction currency differs from the intercompany payments or currency of the corresponding current cross-border settlements. account. The currency conversion is based no longer on payment orders to be generated but rather on payment items. The following new functions are available: - Provisional and final settlement - Flexible determination of the exchange rate type You can define separate rate types for buying and selling rates in order to calculate the credit or debit amounts. - Primary and secondary exchange rates You can differentiate between rates that the inhouse cash center uses on the money market and rates that are used internally. With regard to integration in the cash management functionality, you can accurate current accounts create a financial status for the In- forecasting for cash House Cash application that you can managers. use for the following: - Online display in In-House Cash and the option to download to a Microsoft Excel file - Forward to the components of the cash management functionality The data can be displayed in the liquidity forecast and in the cash position. The In- House Cash financial status contains the following information: - Balances of current accounts based on a value date - Provisionally posted internal turnover - Provisionally posted external turnover This functionality enables electronic This functionality improves payments and online access to account ability to link non- statements for business controllers and software to central inhouse banking center. It in-house cash center. provides the following benefits: - Expanded support for payment formats - Lower cost of operating an in-house cash or banking center - More secure payments through the use of digital signatures Enhancement Package 1 for This functionality improves enables the following improvements for the return on investment in the employee interaction center: - a human resources Usability and design s in shared-services the employee interaction center user environment by monitoring interface - Service level agreements service level agreements, (SLA) monitoring (for example, alerts) - as well as by supplying New analytics and reporting analytics for the employee functionality with specific key interaction center. performance indicators (for example, number of activities, processing time,

Human Capital package 1 for Management Human Capital package 1 for Management Financials package 1 for HR HR FI, CO, AM, FSCM Human resources administrator role Talent development specialist Credit management and SLA violations) - Enablement of concurrent and global employment - Activity s (for example, status handling and follow-up, user interface design, intuitive navigation) - In-box s (for example, automatic routing and rule modeling, automatic acknowledgment/response, and the substitution concept) - Customer feedback survey Enhancement Package 1 for Enhancement Package 1 streamlines processes and forms to improves Human support the following activities in the Capital Management by human resources administrator role: - simplifying the user Company loans - Salary changes - experience for human Change of working time - Bonus resources shared-service payment - Membership fees - Address administrators. and tax changes. In addition, this package contains an improved user interface for managing personnel files, messages and guides for casual users, improvements to the exchange infrastructure for integrating recruiting and organizational management functionality, and improved analytics for shared-service managers and administrators. The talent development specialist is Enhancement Package 1 specialized in personnel development. provides a new role, the He or she works to build and retain a talent development workforce for the future and acts as a specialist, to support the strategic business partner for the development of the human resources manager and the line organization and its manager. The talent development people. This role includes specialist performs tasks in the areas the following functions: - of succession planning, performance Maintaining key positions - management, personnel development, Maintaining job families - and organizational management. He or Creating and developing she monitors and analyzes these qualifications and areas, assesses the talent pool, requirements profiles - identifies key positions in the Executing succession organization, triggers personnel planning - Creating and development processes, and searches developing personnel for suitable successors for key development plans and positions. These tasks are always career paths - Tracking performed in line with the strategic performance feedback goals of the organization. processes - Creating reports in the area of personnel development The Credit Management These new features are of application is improved through the particular interest for availability of enterprise serviceoriented architecture interfaces to the Credit customers who are using external credit information providers. Management application. This availability represents a key They significantly extend in providing the the integration with following: - The ability to search in the external credit information provider s database for business providers and lead to better partners without having to specify a quality credit decisions unique identifier - The ability to select a made by your organization. business partner from the list of

Financials package 1 for Financials package 1 for Product PP Development package 1 for and Manufacturing Product PP Development package 1 for and Manufacturing matches, to choose a unique identifier for the business partner in the Credit Management application - The ability to receive and process monitoring updates of past credit reports FI, CO, AM Collections management The Collections Management Monitoring the collection application is improved with process on the basis of Enhancement Package 1. The comprehensive analytics is following functionalities enable you to key to higher efficiency and improve accounts receivable reduction in the amount of processes: - Analysis of work lists (for outstanding receivables. example, degree of work list Customers who already processing) - Customer contact use the Collections analysis (for example, contact history) - Management application Analysis of promises to pay and can further optimize their invoices (for example, statistics of collection strategies. promises to pay) - Analysis of open items linked with organizational units of in the Collections Management application (for example, due date analysis structured by collection segment, group, and specialist) FI, CO, AM Enhancements for electronic bill presentment and payment Enterprise services package for manufacturing execution functions Enterprise services package for manufacturing work instructions A new enterprise services package These services improve enables electronic bill presentment and the flexibility of electronic payment services for billing agents, as bill and presentment well as authorization and settlement solutions contained within functionality for communication with the Biller Direct credit card processors. This enterprise application. services package helps 6.0 customers accelerate the processing of payments and exceptions, ensure seamless reconciliation and integration with multiple internal and other thirdparty financial applications, and ultimately improve customer relationships through better selfservice. Enhancement Package 1 contains an enterprise services package for manufacturing execution functions to improve automation and efficiency on the shop floor. This enterprise services package improves integration of heterogeneous shop floor functions, reducing manual data input and synchronizing relevant manufacturing master data and transactional data between the application and the manufacturing execution functions. This enterprise services package enables improved integration for real-time visibility of manufacturing data and provides better decision support for plant personnel through accurate, timely information. It supports adaptive manufacturing for predictable and unpredictable changes, with standards based on the ISA-95 enterprisecontrol model. Enhancement Package 1 provide an This enterprise services enterprise services package that package reduces the time connects the executive management to and labor involved in data the shop floor by removing paperbased forms from the manufacturing as in configuring work entry and design, as well process and allowing work instructions instructions. It enables to be created, approved, dispatched, real-time visibility into executed, and archived through manufacturing operations,

Product QM Development package 1 for and Manufacturing Product PP Development package 1 for and Manufacturing Sales and Service package 1 for Industries Industries SD LO-MD, FI, FI-AP, MM- PUR LO-MD, FI, FI-AP, MM- PUR Enterprise services package for quality management functions Enterprise services package for life-cycle data management Enterprise services package for sales and service Article Maintenance - Inclusion of the Article Description for variants when maintaining EANs in the article master Master Data Management - Enhanced storage levels for ERP. Enhancement Package 1 provides an enterprise services package that improves manufacturing efficiency and decision making through an exchange of inspection lot data, inspection results, and notification data between quality management activities performed in and those performed in external quality management software. which helps you perform root cause analysis much faster. This enterprise services package ensures process optimization in the laboratory and production area; compliance with good manufacturing practices, by providing consistent quality data exchange between software systems; and more flexibility with lower costs, by integrating quality data into. Enhancement Package 1 provides an This enterprise services enterprise services package for package helps increase the document management connectivity to accuracy and speed of the facilitate the use of the document development and design management functionality embedded in process by ensuring the the Product Lifecycle integration of documents Management ( PLM) application. from non- software Tthis functionality can be used as a into. In addition, document repository for business it contributes to the processes including non- elimination of redundant software in the area of product data within the company by development and design. With this providing central, secure enterprise services package, document storage. documents can be uploaded to and retrieved from PLM through enterprise services. Enhancement Package 1 provides an enterprise services package for a new customer fact sheet that improves order-to-cash processes. It serves as a real-time information clearinghouse, gathering and organizing data about a customer. This enterprise services package makes customer interaction more efficient and enables customer service representatives, sales managers, and field sales representatives to leverage a single view of master data, transactions, and analyses for any customer. Inclusion of the article description for Simplification in the article variants when maintaining EANs in the master maintenance article master (transactions MM4x): In article master maintenance, a new column was added to the additional data under the tab strip "EAN Maintenance" to display the article descriptions of the variants for the given logon language. The "Article Description" column was inserted after the "VR - Other Vendor Reference" column and can also be moved to suit customer-specific requirements. The column is only visible at generic article level if the EANs of all variants are listed. Enhanced storage levels for transportation chains and staging time: The storage levels for external Improved scheduling possibilities within the procurement controlling.

transportation chain and staging time transportation chains and their staging time were enhanced with the functionality to provide more detailed data retention levels to be able to support more scenarios within the scheduling of the procurement controlling. Besides the existing storage level for vendor master data (General Data) the transportation chain and staging time can be maintained at Purchasing Organization Data level (including alternative data on site and/or vendor subrange level) within vendor master data maintenance (transactions XK0x). Additionally the transportation chain and staging time can also be maintained in the purchasing inforecord maintenance (transaction ME1x) similar to the existing maintenance possibility in the article master data maintenance (MM4x). Industries LO-MDS AllocationImprovements for contract determination within the allocation tableimprovements for scheduling within the allocation table The enhanced reference logic to copy data from a higher data retention level to lower data retention levels and the access logic within the scheduling of the procurement controlling were also changed. To use these s the activation of business function ISR_EARET_PLANNING is required and recommended. More details see documentation of business function ISR_EARET_PLANNING. Retailers often have to centrally distribute merchandise among a large number of recipients (for example, stores). One example would be fashion merchandise or promotional items. Using allocation tables, retailers can plan the distribution of this type of merchandise and then trigger the necessary goods movements.merchandise can be delivered directly from the vendor to the recipient, from the vendor to a distribution center and then to the recipient, or from a distribution center to a recipient. Notifications to coordinate communication between headquarters and the recipients are utilized. After completing the planning stage, the system can automatically create documents for procuring or delivering the goods.the Enhancements for EhP2 comprise smaller improvements in the area of scheduling and contract determination for the allocation table.o Contract Determination within the Allocation The improvements of the contract determination and the scheduling increases the scope of the application "Allocation table" and increases the efficiency of the allocation process.

Industries LO-MDS Forecasting & Replenishment - structural breaks for DC forecast: Determine the number of sites that are supplied by a certain DC with a certain article and transfer that information to F&R Industries LO-MDS Forecasting & Replenishment - Interface for purchase organizations: Transfer definitions of purchase organizations and their assignments to sites to F&R TableUntil now contracts could be assigned manually to an allocation table. If the allocation table was created with reference to a contract this information was then transferred to the purchase order generation and the contract were debited. If no contract was assigned consciously no contract would be determined.with the it is now possible to decide whether a contract determination should be carried out automatically in order to determine the existing contract when generating the external purchase orders out of the allocation table. If a contract exists this contract would be determined automatically when generating the external purchase order.o Scheduling within the Allocation TableAlthough the scheduling out of the allocation table was already developed there were still minor features missing. In order to be consistent with the process of scheduling within the area of seasonal procurement smaller adjustments were done for the scheduling in the process of the creation of the allocation table. Now the scheduling in the allocation table follows the same logic as in the seasonal procurement. Furthermore the date line (the chronological sequence of dates in the procurement process chain that are monitored by order monitoring) is now displayed and changeable within the allocation table (in the previous version the date line couldn't be displayed). With this new it is possible, to prepare and send the number of sites supplied by a distribution center to F&R.The following information is to be taken into consideration: - Listing information for the distribution centers - Internal sources of supply for the sites (supplying site relationships and source list) - Listing information for the stores With this it is possible to supply F&R from the ERPsystem with all purchasing organizations as a new object and with information about the assignments of purchasing organizations to locations. These assignments of purchasing organizations will be evaluated in the source of supply determination Additional Information for the forecast determination in F&R WIth the new information from, F&R is able to determine within the source of supply determination the correct transportation lane (where the purchasing organization is assigned to the target location), for what the source of supply determination shall be

Industries LO-MDS Forecasting & Replenishment - Interface for contract information: Transfer contract documents (outline agreements) to F&R Industries LO-MDS Forecasting & Replenishment - Suppress transfer of unnecessary data Industries LO-MDS Improved ERMA:Enhanced logic of mark-ups and markdowns possible With the new interface it is possible to transfer contract information from ERP to F&R. The outbound interface processing in will guarantee that only quantity contracts are transferred to F&R. Value contracts are not to be transferred to F&R. Also, transmission of contract data only support for F&R replenishment-planning-relevant products. As there are certain processes, where only a part of those data is needed in F&R (e.g. only master data for listing check required but no orders, no movement data), the interface logic is enhanced by further control mechanisms to suppress the transfer of unnecessary data in such processes. Retailers use a variety of inventory valuation methods to calculate the value of inventory and cost of goods sold. Generally, retailers define themselves as using one of two different inventory valuation methods: cost method of accounting (CMA) and retail method of accounting (RMA). However, even within these methods there are different ways of calculating inventory.the traditional or classic RMA is an averaging method where inventory is managed at category or department level and ending inventory at cost is derived by applying a cost percentage to the ending inventory at retail. The extended or hybrid retail method of accounting (ERMA) is similar to RMA, but it is an alternative inventory valuation method that manages inventory at the more detailed level of item/location. ERMA uses moving average as the cost flow, but inventory is also tracked in retail values and markdowns may cause an adjustment to the inventory values at not only retail but cost also.within Retail, ERMA is supported using sales price valuation or valuation at retail. The focus of this development effort is to improve support for ERMA when retail price changes take place by enhancing the revaluation profiles and revaluation program. (This development is also related to the Stock Ledger Analytics project as the stock ledger is fed by results calculated by the revaluation program.) The revaluation profiles are now able to allow different handling for each price extended. Based on the contract information, in F&R the replenishment planner can optimize decisions relating to purchase order quantities and delivery dates that can be changed manually. No transfer of unnecessary data from to F&R => Simplification of the interface data This feature leads to enhanced logic of markups and mark-downs and to improved ERMA

Industries Industries LO-SRS, SD-POS, BW-BCT, MM-IM LO-SRS, SD-POS, BW-BCT, MM-IM change type, i.e., mark-up, permanent mark-down, promotional mark-down and POS mark-down. The profiles are now able to disallow the "maintain margins" treatment for mark-ups. Also, the revaluation program has been enhanced to support the changes to the revaluation profiles. In-store Customer Order - In-store Customer Order Management at the Pointof-Sale and at the Service Management functionality of Management:The Customer Order DeskThe Customer order Management functionality of Retail Store was integrated to Triversity POS GM to enable an easy to use, integrated, and flexible Order Management s - Mobile In-store Inventory Management The new solution for mobile In-store Inventory Management is designed for retail inventory management on mobile devices at the store level. Providing seamless integration with the for Retail solution portfolio, Retail Store was integrated to Triversity POS GM to enable an easy to use, integrated, and flexible order management solution including the different type of tendering at the Pointof-Sale. This enables the user execute order-related business processes such as create, search, display, change, identify, verify, cancel, fulfill, and returns of orders for different order types and scenarios.the order-related payments are entered as a specific kind of retail item that is immediately processed in the ERP backend and posted to financials. The new solution for mobile In-store Inventory Management is designed for retail inventory management on mobile devices at the store level. Providing seamless integration with the for Retail solution portfolio, this mobile solution brings back-office functionality onto the shop floor to save time and increase customer satisfaction by allowing staff to spend more time with customers. The solution streamlines the inventory management process for store clerks who work the shop floor and increases their productivity. At the same time, the software helps ensure that store merchandise is always on the shelf, which maximizes sales and increases customer satisfaction. This online solution runs on handheld devices and connects directly to ERP via a wireless connection.inventory Lookup: Provides different types of stock information such as stock on hand, storage location, special stock in store, other special stock such as consignment stock, and commitment stock. It consolidates the sales transaction from the POS DM with the stock information from ERP to provide accurate and realtime stock information. There will be and Enterprise Service Bundle around the RFCs used for this functionality.o Inventory Adjustment / Store to store transfer o Planned counting / Integrated solutions to close the loops and gaps in the solution offering, respond to market demand, and keep with compatitors. Integrated solutions to close the loops and gaps in the solution offering, respond to market demand. and keep with compatitors.

Industries LO-SRS, SD-POS, BW-BCT, MM-IM - Physical Inventory during the opening hoursthe physical inventory during opening hours makes it possible to conduct counting during the regular store opening hours. This solution is designed for retail stores that operate 24 hours a day and 7 days a we Industries IS-A Vehicle Management SystemSearch engine based interface totrex, which allows activation of TREX search via customizing; Maintenance of multiple end customers Industries IS-A Just-In-Time Inbound Process: Use of Alertframework Industries IS-A Just-In-Time Outbound Process: Use of Alertframework and Integration of Delivery Industries IS-A SD Scheduling AgreementsReport to copy scheduling agreements Unplanned counting o Receiving with and without reference document The physical inventory during opening hours makes it possible to conduct counting during the regular store opening hours. This solution is designed for retail stores that operate 24 hours a day and 7 days a week.by use of this solution, it is possible to count products while the same products are still being sold at the point of sale.the current ERP based Physical Inventory during opening hours was already available since release 470x200. This solution is based on the upload of non-aggregated (i.e. transactional) POS sales that are sent via IDOC through the POS inbound interface to ERP. These sales transactions will be the basis for a calculation of the book inventory at counting time which is the basis for any inventory difference. The new development will extend the current solution in a way that aggregated sales data are sent to ERP (e.g. at the end of a day) and transactional pos data are requested by ERP from POS Data Management. This reduces the data volume on ERP side significantly. Search engine based interface totrex, which allows activation of TREX search via customizing.in Vehicle Management System it is now possible to maintain multiple end customers for a vehicle. JIT-Inbound has been connected to the Alert Framework. JIT-Inbound IDocs and actions raise alerts in the case of errors. JIT-Outbound has been connected to the Alert Framework. JIT-Outbound actions raise alerts in case of errors. Alerts are also raised in case of deviations of deliveries. Creation and change of deliveries for JIT- Outbound Calls can be done using tolerance profiles. Integrated solutions to close the loops and gaps in the solution offering, respond to market demand. and keep with compatitors. Fast vehicle search via configuration Process visibility, especially in error situations and integration between JIT Call and delivery Process visibility, especially in error situations and integration between JIT Call and delivery A new transaction is available to Better handling of high analyze document flow size of SD volume processes Scheduling Agreements. Scheduling Agreements exceeding a certain size can be copied to new Scheduling Agreements in background. This will lead to improved system performance for processing of Scheduling Agreements. Industries Self-Billing Procedure - In the VSB1 Self Billing monitor the Time saving in handling of

Industries Industries Industries Industries Inbound - New dialog screen where the user can perform and save the regrouping of material items currently belonging to an unprocessed header record; Archiving of SBI DB records now possible QM Quality Notification 8D ReportNew form with special layout for Automotive Customers Dealer Portal - Enhanced vehicle search functionalities and creation of sales orders for VMS late order assignment Compatible unit maintenance Construction measure maintenance user is able to regroup material items which are assigned to a certain Delivery/IDoc header to one or even several new headers. - With a new dialog screen the user can perform and save the regrouping of material items currently belonging to an unprocessed VSBHDR record. - All SBI tables which are related to transmission can be archived using the Archiving functionality. Supported are general and EDI partner specific residence times With this development the customer can use an Automotive Industry like template for the QM 8D Report that was only available as consulting solution before - Within the Dealer Portal the customer can now use enhanced search criteria for searching vehicles based on configuration and he can use characteristics in search criteria. - Dealer Portal supports now the scenario of late order assignment where dealer can create sales order without having a vehicle but just specifying his requirements and once vehicle is ready importer can assign it to the sales order created. Create, change, or display compatible units; create compatible units with reference to existing compatible units. Create, change, or display construction measures; create construction measures with reference to existing construction measures. Industries Design maintenance Create, change, or display compatible unit designs. Industries Work order maintenance Create work orders based on compatible units. Change, display, or confirm compatible unit work orders. Schedule the regular creation of compatible unit work orders using a maintenance plan. Generate compatible unit work orders from compatible unit designs. Industries Evaluation of compatible units Evaluate the validity of compatible unit definition with reports in ERP and BI content Industries Operation-Level Costing Transactions supported for operationlevel costing are as follows: Function Transaction CodePM/CS Order IW31, IW32, IW33Purchase Request ME51N, ME52N, ME53NPurchase Order ME21N, ME22N, ME23NContract huge transmissions Collaboration with partners better supported Improved search functionality for Dealer PortalIncreased Process Flexibility in Vehicle Sales and Administration see description above, all features work together as a whole

Financials FIN-FSCM Biller Direct: Buyide, vendors could complete the XML formated vendor invoices and upload into system via Portal and display of open bills & payments. Financials FIN-FSCM Biller Direct: Multiple engagement scenarios with flexible deployment capabilities (single or multiple scenarios against single system) Financials FIN-FSCM Biller Direct: Improved usability and productivity of Biller Direct Industries IS-MP Fast data entry in the Trading Contract ME31K, ME32K, ME33KGoods Receipt MIGO (MIGO_GR)Goods Issue MIGO (MIGO_GI)Goods Reservation MB21Confirmation IW41, IW42Invoice Verification MIROQuotation DP80Billing Request DP90G/L Account Document FB50Vendor Invoice FB60Vendor Credit Memo FB65Recurring Entry FBD1Account Assignment Model FKMTPark G/L Account Document FV50Actual Interest Calculation CJZ1, CJZ2 With this functions, it will be possible to:- Uppload the invoices of XML- Format (optional) in Payer Direct Portal. - Based on configuration in backend paybale system, uploaded invoices could be converted into PO backed invoices or normal financial invoices.- Based on configuration in backend payable system, uploaded invoices could bedirectly posted as the invoices in system or park your invoices, review and then post invoices later.- Review of open bills and payments - Customers could choose B2B and B2C scenarios.- Customers could deploy several scenarios upon single client and switch scenarios by only changing URL address in web browser. - Save mail expense for invoice delivery and reconciliation. - Improve working efficiency of AP accountants and usability of the payable application.- Minimize the manual invoice key-in errors and decrease efforts on reconciliation. - Flexiblely support both PO backed purchase and normal financial invoice backed purchase. - Optimizing the system maintenance and operations costs by deploying multiple scenarios upon single system instance- Improve flexibility by adapting both B2B & B2C scenarios on one single systme, control cost for system logic implemented. With Biller Direct Web users can:- Productivity and flexibility Use a new layout with navigation tree are improved due to on the left side of the screen in addition enhanced displaying and to the existing layout with navigation seaching using tab pages and a header bar. - functionalitiestransparency Keep a clear overview by restricting the is enhanced by allowing number of items shown in the Web more support documment application under Open Items, Paid download Bills, Payments and Credits.- Make working with long lists easier, by filtering items on the tab pages Open Items, Paid Bills, Payments and Credits using various selection parameters.- Download other archived documents, such as expense reports, as a PDF from the optical archive, and not just bills.- Display status information, such as last logon, latest payments and latest master data change. SUMMARY: More efficient data entry for preconfigured materials or material variants in global trade Usability improvement in managing characteristics in trading contractfaster entering and change

process for characteristic DETAILS: values Entering characteristic values (max. 10) in each line item of trading contract. Function "global and local" is copying the characteristic values to related line items. Changes in characteristics can be inherited to the referenced line items. BACKGROUND: Description You can use the fast entry of characteristics in the trading contract to enter item data as well as characteristic value assignments on the Fast Entry tab page in the overview screen. You can use the characteristics display to control which characteristics are available (max. 10). This greatly reduces entry effort, particularly for materials with few characteristics and for preconfigured materials. In addition, you receive information on the status of the configuration. Depending on the contract type, the status of the SD and MM configurations are displayed. Global and Local Items in the Trading Contract Trading contracts often have several items that differ only by a few characteristics. Although most characteristic value assignments for the various items are identical, it is generally necessary to assign values to all characteristics separately. In a trading contract, the characteristic value assignments of the global item can be passed on to the characteristics of the local item with the same name. You define in Customizing how this should be inherited. Inheriting Characteristic Value Assignments When you change the characteristic value assignment of a global item, the changed values can be passed on to the local items of the global item. You define in Customizing how this should be inherited. Preparation Customizing o Definition of the application group for the characteristics display Logistics - General -> Global Trade Management -> Trading Contract -> Fast Entry of Characteristics in the Trading Contract

Industries IS-MP Sales order fulfillment with requirement reduction in pieces -> Define Application Group for Characteristic Display o Definition of the characteristic display for the overview screen Logistics - General -> Global Trade Management -> Trading Contract -> Fast Entry of Characteristics in the Trading Contract -> Define Characteristics Display for Overview Screen o Set up fast entry for characteristics per contract type Logistics - General -> Global Trade Management -> Trading Contract -> Fast Entry of Characteristics in the Trading Contract -> Set Up Fast Entry for Characteristic Values o Define characteristic transfer per item category Logistics - General -> Global Trade Management -> Trading Contract -> Fast Entry of Characteristics in the Trading Contract -> Define Transfer of Characteristics Values Master Data o Create customer and vendor. o Create characteristics and assign characteristics to classes of class type 300 - variants. o Create various materials (configurable, non-configurable, material variant). o Create characteristics for info records (customer info record, material info record, and purchasing info record). o Assign characteristics to classes of class type 052 (customer/material info record) and class type 057 (purchasing info record). o Create configurable materials. o Create customer/material info records and purchasing info records for these materials. o Classify the info records. SUMMARY: Enablement of SD order Enables SD order fulfillment in fulfillment in alternate sales alternative sales unit of measure unit of measure, piece, piece, independently of base unit of independent of base unit of measure measure quantity DETAILS: including DTUC process I Scenario: Fulfillment of sales orders Delivery clerk does not with materials defined in batch-specific need to check open material unit of measure quantities in the base unit Instead of determining the open order of measure quantity in base unit of measure, the sales unit piece defines the order fulfillment logic (e.g. number of delivered batches = 1 piece of length ). Delivery dependent trading unit change (DTUC) now supports

Industries IS-MP Control of batch determination in outbound delivery fulfillment in pieces BACKGROUND: If alternative sales unit of measure in "piece" is used and the material is defined with product unit of measure (usually in pieces), the SD requirement "consumption" is done in "piece". DETAIL: Improvement in control of User can define in sales order, batch selection process in whether the batch determination in delivery More flexibility and outbound delivery use the automatization characteristic values of SD configuration or the SD batch selection criteria. For length-based materials an automatic calculation of intervals based on characteristic values of individual length, minus and plus % tolerance improves the batch selection process. BACKGROUND: Description You can use this function in the sales order to influence how the batch determination is controlled in the delivery. The Mill Indicator: Control of Batch Selection can be defined for each sales order item. In Customizing, you can enter a default setting for each item category. In addition, you can carry out an interval calculation for length-based processes. To do so, you need the example characteristics "individual length", "plus tolerance", and "minus tolerance" from Mill Products. A "length interval" is calculated from the values entered in the variant configuration and transferred to the batch determination class. Preparation Customizing o In Customizing for Sales and Distribution under Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales Document Item -> Define Item Categories, you have made the settings for batch determination. o In Customizing for Logistics - General under Basic Settings for for Mill Products -> Assign Characteristics for for Mill Products you have defined the control for length-based materials. You activate an LPP material by assigning the characteristic "length" to ID '202'. In addition, assign the characteristic "plus tolerance" to ID '204' and the characteristic "minus tolerance" to ID '205'. Caution Never change any entries that have already been made, since this would

Industries IS-MP Changeable characteristic values in returns order Industries IS-MP Alternative Units of Measure in Production effect existing materials. Master Data o Creating customer master data o Assignment of characteristics to class of class type 300 o Assignment of characteristics to class of class type 023 (batch) o Assignment of characteristics to class of class type 023 (batch determination) The prerequisite for this is that the classes of the variant configuration contain the same characteristics as the batch / batch determination. o Creating a material master (configurable material or material variant, each with the batch class) o Creating master data for the batch selection including batch selection class SUMMARY: Change of batch Scenario: Return orders with reference characteristics during entry to billing document of the SD return order User can enter or change the batch improves usability and classification of a returned batch speeds up entry inside the SD return order (=single point of changes). BACKGROUND: Return handling with characteristics Description You can use this Business Scenario to create returns orders with configurable materials. The system transfers the characteristics of the batch that was delivered to the customer to the configuration of the returns order. In addition, you can create a new batch if a characteristic is changed, for example if quality A is converted to B. Preparation Customizing Define Control of Characteristic Transfer to Item Category Level In Customizing for Sales and Distribution under Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales Document Item -> Define Item Categories, set the Ret.w.BatchRef. indicator in the Enhancements for Mill Products section. You can also define a default value for the batch selection. Master Data You have created the following master data: o Customer and vendor o Characteristics and classes Assign the characteristics to the class types 023 (batches) and 300 (variants). o Configurable materials Scenario: planning in APO with materials using co-products without BOM reference Integrated support of alternate production units in production process

In production order all multiple items and components can be created in alternative unit of measure BACKGROUND: Description When creating a multi-item order using SCM via CIF, you can make Customizing settings that control the use of alternative units of measure. The header material and the components of the production order are assigned the alternative unit of measure. You can use this function in the following scenarios with SCM: o Characteristics-Based Planning with Multi-Item Order o Long Products Planning o Multiple Output Planning o Interface for Industry-Specific Optimizer o Planning without a Mill Productsspecific order type, but with a material for characteristics-based planning o Planning without a material for characteristics-based planning Note A production order can contain components that are not listed in the BOM because they were added manually to the production order, for example. The SCM function Long Products Planning (LPP) causes additional components (additional lengths) to be created, depending on the settings in length calculation. Only the first component item (first length) has a reference to the BOM, the other lengths are added by the LPP heuristic as additional items. Only those additional items created by SCM can use the function for the alternative unit of measure (today). Preparation Customizing In Customizing for Production under Shop Floor Control -> Master Data -> Order -> Define Additional Settings for Production Orders, you define whether an alternative production unit of measure can be used when a production order is created for the order item. You have set the Create Order Items in Alternative UoM and the Create Components in Alternative UoM indicators to '1' (production unit of measure). Master Data 1. Use a length-based material (LPP).

Industries IS-MP Make-to-Stock Production for Configurable Materials with External Planning. 2. Create the characteristic 'length' in transaction CT04. 3. In transaction CL02, assign the characteristics to a class of class type 300. 4. In transaction MM01, create a material master for a configurable material or a material variant. Enter an alternative production unit of measure. 5. In transaction CU41, create a configuration profile. 6. Create a bill of material and a routing. 7. Transfer this master data with an integration model to SCM. DETAIL Scenario: Make-to-stock production with configurable materials and batches. MRP planning takes place in an external system (APO or other legacy planning system) In production order you can change the characteristic values of a material variant Replace workaround in note 454033 Description This function makes it possible to change characteristics of a configurable material that is planned by an external planning system (outside of the ERP system) in make-to-stock production. Preparation Classification 1. Create your own characteristics. 2. Create a class in class type 023 and one in class type 300. Master Data 1. Create a configurable material with batch management. The material is planned by an external system but not an SCM system. 2. Create a configuration profile for the material. 3. Create a plant-specific material variant (client-specific material variants are not supported in PP). 4. Create a routing for the configurable material and the material variant or make the appropriate settings in Customizing for Production under Shop Floor Control -> Operations -> Task List Selection -> Define Default Values. Customizing 1. In Customizing for Production under Material Requirements Planning -> Master Data -> Check MRP Types, create a new MRP type and assign planning method 1 (planned by Changeability of production order characteristics if external planning software is used

Industries IS-MP Parallel Picking with DTUC Industries IS-MP Enhancement in 'DTUC Pool' and Printing DTUC Shop Papers external system) to it. 2. In Customizing for Production under Shop Floor Control -> Master Data -> Order -> Define Order Types, create a new order type. In addition, set the CTMS Charctrstcs Changble indicator in the IMG activity Define Additional Settings for Production Orders. 3. In Customizing for Production under Shop Floor Control -> Master Data -> Order -> Fast Entry of Characteristics in Production Order -> Define Characteristics Display for Overview Screen, create a new characteristics display with your characteristic. Notes o The characteristic values in the configuration at header level and in the first item are identical. o If you want to use the reference characteristics in your order type, you cannot change the characteristic values in the configuration of the header. o If you use reference characteristics in your order type and create a production order for the configurable material, you can enter the characteristic values in the configuration of the header but you cannot change them (Independent Item Quantity must be switched off). DTUC status is defined on item level. This enables to carry out picking and packing of delivery items that are not DTUC-relevant or are DTUCcompleted, even though other items of the delivery are still in DTUC processing SUMMARY: It is possible to do mass printing of DTUC shop papers in the background. You do so by using the output control. The system displays a print status (open, printed) in the DTUC pool display An additional DTUC screen displays the WM data DETAILS: Scenario: Delivery dependent trading unit change (DTUC) Mass printing of DTUC shop floor papers in background by using output control functionality Display of print status (open, printed) in DTUC list An additional screen displays WM data (e.g. transfer order, storage bin) within DTUC list BACKGROUNDS: Enhancements in DTUC - Printing Speed up of picking process Mass printing of DTUC papers in background and display WM data improves handling and data quality

IMG settings needed for output determination of DTUC shop papers To implement Output Determination for DTUC shop papers a new output type, i.e. 'DTUC', must be created. Note: In order to allow printer determination field 'Print Parameter' on 'Print' TabStrip has to be maintained. The print parameter allows selecting different criteria according to which the determination of the output device is done. Creation of an output determination procedure, i.e. DTUC, which itself will include the output type DTUC. Finally the output determination procedure has to be assigned to the desired item category of outbound delivery items. Note: The relevant settings in IMG can be found at the following path: Logistics Execution à Shipping à Basic Shipping Functionsà Output Control à Output Determination à Maintain Output Determination for Outbound Deliveries. Printing is triggered: Within transaction /MP/LE_LBA_LIST: Printer and print option are taken from the spool defaults of user profile, i.e. database table USR01. If no spool defaults are maintained, printer and print options are taken from NAST record. Using a report for message mass processing, e.g. RSNAST00, printer and print options are taken always from NAST. Note: Mass processing or processing via background job can be triggered by using the report SD70AV2A (Output from Deliveries, or online via transaction VL71) or the general NAST-message processing report RSNAST00. Enhancements in DTUC - Display of WM information Since the business needs are differing between displaying the DTUC worklist and the display of the corresponding transfer requirements and transfer orders a new ALV Grid will be displayed within transaction /MP/LBA_WORKLIST Enable mass selection: Users who want to check on the WM status of DTUC-related TRs and TOs will use transaction /MP/LE_LBA_WM Following WM fields are displayed:

Document type, i.e. transfer order or transfer requirement Document number Status of the document Number of the associated outbound delivery and the Material Staging/Availability Date Material, plant, storage location Source storage type and bin of the batch Destination storage type Industries IS-MP Classification during Goods Receipt using BAPI The field containing the document number will be a hotspot in order to display the document. According to the document either transaction LB03 (Display TR) or LT21 (Display TO) is displayed. It will also be possible to navigate from the DTUC working list to the list of the related WM documents: After selecting one or several lines on DTUC list and pressing button 'WM documents' (to be created), the corresponding WM documents will be displayed in an ALV grid below the DTUC list. If Warehouse Management System is used as a decentralized WM system, functionality is still available in the decentralized system. In case of Third-Party WM software the functionality is not possible SUMMARY: Technological improvement: A new BAPI enables posting of goods receipt of batches with classification in 1-step. In the past, 2 BAPI's were needed. Simplify the data exchange between ERP systems DETAILS: Finished and semi-finished products in MILL industries are mostly batchmanaged materials and planning often takes place in SCM using Characteristics-Dependent Planning (CDP). Given this, the immediate classification of batches during goods receipts becomes indispensable. When goods receipts are posted using business objects /MP/GMT and /MP/POC using the corresponding IDoc types - without the batches being classified, CDP in SCM would not allocate appropriate batches to requirements from customer, production or stock transfer orders. This shortcoming may result in the automatic creation of unnecessary planned orders. Before ERP 2005 EPack 02 it is not possible to classify batches

Financials FIN-FSCM Bank relationship management Financials FIN-FSCM Dispute case attributes and linked receivable open items Financials FIN-FSCM Work center for dispute managers Financials FIN-FSCM Improved usability and work center simultaneously during goods receipts. An BAPI for GR process during confirmation of production orders is also supported. Details regarding batch attributes which can be valuated in goods movements can be found in note 619913. Look in Business Object Repository (transaction "BAPI"): Business Object /MP/GMC : Object 'Mill Products: Goods Movement and Batch Classification' enables the batch classification at the same time of posting GR. Business Object /MP/PCC: Posting of confirmations of production orders with automatic goods receipt enables the batch classification at the same time of posting GR. Close integration with enterprise application functionality Logical structuring of payments into batches Multiple approval levels for outgoing payments Audit trail for payment approval decisions along with digital signatures for internal audit Analysis of payment status information and full payment-flow transparency as well as status monitoring for bank statements SWIFTNet Integration You can define the relationship between dispute case attributes and the attribution of linked receivable open items in Dispute Management. Change dispute case attributes can affect the linked receivable open line items. For example, you might set the dunning block in dispute case to prevent a dunning letter from being sent out. Dispute Management consolidates all working tasks and information for dispute managers and specialists on one platform It delivers a well-arranged view of dispute cases that is grouped by predefined or personalized selection criteria. You can select user specific tasks and navigate from the case to the detail processing of the individual dispute cases. Credit Management offers an improved log display of score calculations. You can simulate a credit check for business partners. You can define the exposure display

Financials FIN-FSCM Increased flexibility for creating dispute cases take into account for a credit time horizon. You can consolidates user-specific blocked order processing, blocked business partners, processing of credit limit requests, and see an overview of all notifications. You can extend dispute case attributes by adding the extra field Customer disputed amount in dispute case. You can create dispute case identified during document processing, dispute case processing, line item lists, and clearing. You can display customer disputed objects under linked objects. Financials FIN-FSCM Vendor invoicing Upload the invoices of XML format (optional) in payer direct portal. Based on configuration in back-end payable system; uploaded invoices can be converted into PO-backed invoices or normal financial invoices Based on configuration in back-end payables system, uploaded invoices can be directly posted as the invoices in system or park invoices, review them, and then post them later Review of open bills and payments. Financials FIN-FSCM Flexible deployment scenarios Financials FIN-FSCM Improved usability and productivity Financials FIN-FSCM ES Bundle - Bank Relationship Management Customers can choose B2B and B2C scenarios Customers can deploy several scenarios on a single client and switch scenarios by changing the URL address in the Web browser. You can use a new layout with navigation tree on the left side of the screen in addition to the existing layout with navigation using tab pages and a header bar. You can see a clear overview by restricting the number of items shown in the Web application under open items, paid bills, payments, and credits. You can easily work with long lists by filtering items on the tab pages for open items, paid bills, payments, and credits using various selection parameters. You can download archived documents other than bills, such as expense reports, as a PDF file from the optical archive. You can display status information, such as last logon, latest payments, and latest master data change. Enables seamless communication of financial transactions of a company with its house banks over the SWIFT network Provides full payment flow transparency and enables good control of payment transactions Initiate outgoing payments Initiate incoming payments via direct debit Approve, reject, or resubmit payments Receive and process electronic bank statements

Financials FIN-FSCM ES Bundle - External Cash Desk (Service Industries) Financials FIN-FSCM ES Bundle - Electronic Bill Presentment and Payment (EBPP) Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services FI-TV FI-TV FI-TV Sarbanes-Oxley compliance through details of entertainment receipts Advanced Passenger Information System (APIS): Collection of required API before departure Sarbanes-Oxley compliance through declaration of private Target market: any company that initiates payments and receives electronic bank statements from its house banks - especially if they rely on many different house banks Easy-to-use enterprise services to pay invoices at external cash desks in a connected or disconnected mode with regard to the back-end system for contract accounts receivable and payable (FI-CA) Target market: service industries, especially utility and telco companies Supporting payments of external payment collectors - Online processing of payments - Offline mode for collection of payments and sending collected payments as a bundle when online Monitoring and reconciliation of payments collected by external cash desks in the enterprise resource planning ( ERP) back end Enables electronic bill presentment and Supporting credit card payment services for billers and processor interfaces authorization and settlement capabilities for communication with credit card processors. Target market: the EBPP bundle is of value to any company of any size that presents invoices and process payments to customers. It is primarily for direct business-to-consumer interactions that require credit card authorization and payments. Additional information on internal and Reduced costs for external participants of an Sarbanes-Oxley entertainment activity must be reported compliance for Sarbanes-Oxley compliance. To Enhanced audit meet these legal requirements, a new functionality and fraud table is available in which the traveler prevention can enter all participants. For external participants, the user has to fill the following required fields: last name, first name, job title, and company. For internal employees, the user has to enter only the personnel number. Advanced passenger information (API) Simplification and is information currently required by the acceleration of processes U.S. government about passengers at the airport due to earlier prior to travel. All airlines are required data transfer. to collect this information from passengers who are traveling to the U.S. and transmit it to U.S. Customs and Border Protection. Travel Management collects the information within the travel planning process in advance of departure. This approach automates the process, preventing congestion at airports and streamlining preflight check-in. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act has driven customers to deploy automated expense solutions, including the Reduced costs for Sarbanes-Oxley compliance

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services FI-TV FI-TV FI-TV FI-TV FI-TV FI-TV FI-TV FI-TV expenses from credit card utilization of electronic receipts via charges credit card feeds as a conduit to validate that internal controls are in place. Private expenses paid with the credit card can now be deducted and displayed and saved separately. Improvements Travel Request Travel Planning: Multiple s in air pricing Travel Planning: Enhanced display of lowfare availability Travel Planning: New sort options for hotels Travel Planning: Improvements for German Rail bookings Improvements Expense Report Duet: Microsoft Office integration using Duet software Travel Policy Administration: Customizing wizards for travel policy administration Required travel services and traveler preferences are integrated in travel requests. Amadeus Master Pricer can now replace Amadeus Value Pricer for booking flights. Master Pricer provides better performance and better content. Master Pricer checks flight availability and fares at the same time. Available flights are still sorted by price, but different flight combinations for one fare are shown in one box. Queries for available flights are done in Global Distribution Systems and in Low Cost Carrier Consolidators like Travel fusion (direct connection via XI). Travelers can sort available hotels according to various parameters, such as price, star rating, or distance from an address Tickets can be booked for multiple travelers. BahnCard discounts of all travelers are taken into account in price calculation. Travelers can book train tickets, train tickets including a seat reservation, or seat reservations without train tickets if these should be booked centrally Travelers can ask for a BahnTix. They can then pick up their tickets at the automated devices at every train station using their BahnCard, credit card, or reservation number as identification. The software reminds travelers of existing travel requests and travel plans when creating new expense reports. Attachments (e.g. images of receipts or an agenda) can be attached to the expense report. Travelers can create travel requests and approval workflow using Microsoft Office. New wizards simplify the configuration for travel administrators. The following views are available: - Define maximum rates and default values for expense types - Define maximum amounts for hotel accommodation Enhanced audit functionality and fraud prevention

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services FI-TV FI-TV FI-TV POWLs for roles Traveler, Approver and assistant - Edit predefined addresses - Define hotel catalog - Define customer programs - Define agreements between providers on customer programs. o As of Enhancement Pack 2 socalled POWLs (Personal Object Work Lists) are available for the following roles: Traveler Assistant: POWL with data across all travelers in their area of responsibility Approver (+ Substitution): POWL with trips to be approved as alternative to UWL + Workflow o The POWL for Travelers replaces the former All My Trips section. It gives the traveler an overview on all his travel requests, travel plans and expenses reports as well as an access point to add, change or cancel his trips.o The POWL for Assistants includes the same functionalities like the POWL for Travelers. In addition the assistant has the possibility to maintain his travelers, i. e. he can add or remove travelers from his employee list.o The Travel Approval Workcenter (POWL for Approvers) gives the approver an overview on travel request, travel plans and expense reports for approval. o For all POWLs the traveler/company can decide which columns will be displayed and which columns will be hidden. Thus, the traveler/company can quickly see the most important information. Conversion of complete o With the delivery of EhP 2 Webdynpro/Java based there'll be a technological shift in ESS to Webdynpro/ABAP Travel Management - the enhanced ESS will be based on ABAP. ABAP allows to better align maintenance and support stacks compared to JAVA. However, set-up and configuration in the back-end system will not change because ABAP and Java run on the same business logic layer. The customizing will be the same and there will be no additional effort for the customers. Duet: Creation of travel requests & travel plans from Microsoft Outlook o From within the Outlook Calendar, Duet allows users to create a a travel request or a travel itinerary. Duet accesses the system to provide travel options for airlines, hotels and rental cars that are compliant with corporate travel policies.o The employee user can submit a travel request, search for travel options and recreate past travel itineraries.o Using Duet your company can easily achieve higher

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Human Capital Management FI-TV FI-TV FI-TV FI-TV PA-AS, PA- EIC, EP- PCT, CA- ESS, PA- ER Duet: Analytics for Managers within e-mails and/or as workflow support Duet: Approval workflows via MS outlook XI: Generic direct access to corporate rail portals XI: Enhancements for the generic interface for flight bookings to air consolidators and GNEs Integration with the employee interaction center adoption rates since employees can book their trips from within their wellknown desktop applications. Thus, your employees can work more efficiently because they do not have to switch between various programs/applications any longer and they also do not have to go to time-consuming trainings. o The manager can approve or reject travel requests and view travel and budget reports. o The manager can approve or reject travel requests and view travel and budget reports. o As of ERP 2004 offered a connection to Deutsche Bahn via BIBE (Bahn Internet Booking Engine). With Enhancement Pack 2 a generic interface for rail providers was created based on the existing XI-interface to Deutsche Bahn (BIBE). Now connections to railway companies like SNCF, Amtrak, UK rail, Trenitalia, Swedish rail etc. are possible. additional fields where added in the Xiarea to improve mapping possibilities between the different interfaces. Reduced barriers to user acceptance Higher adoption rate Lower costs (reduced user training, fewer calls to help desk/call center, faster time to productivity Employees are more efficient (reduced complexity, less time focused on software, adoptable to user's needs) Automated personnel management EIC agents gain direct processes access to a processsupport tool to help EIC agents can launch and track processes from the EIC. expedite resolution and HR administrators can receive followup activities from EIC agents and call successful process monitor progress toward up activities in their central work lists. execution. They can also start processes and Save time and effort by forward them to agents in the EIC. avoiding multiple data entry Agents no longer need to enter data or with prepopulated log in multiple times. The software employee information and automatically displays employee data direct data updates to the and updates it in the back-end HR back-end HR system software from. Service level compliance and monitoring will improve with business process automation and standardization Productivity and efficiency gains will be realized due to enhanced cross-role collaboration and communication between

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management PA-AS, PA- EIC, EP- PCT, CA- ESS, PA- ER PA-AS, PA- EIC, EP- PCT, CA- ESS, PA- ER HCM Processes and Forms - Integration mit dem Employee Interaction Center (EIC) Ein Employee Interaction Center ist ein wichtiger Baustein eines Shared- Service-Konzeptes. Dabei handelt es sich um ein Organisationsmodell, bei dem bestimmte Dienstleistungen von einer hierfür geschaffenen Organisationseinheit für das gesamte Unternehmen geleistet werden. EIC Agenten, die Serviceanfragen über unterschiedliche Kommunikationskanäle beantworten, benötigen den Zugriff auf Anwendungen, die die Prozesse des Unternehmens optimal unterstützen. Die Integration dieser Business Function mit dem EIC unterstütz diese Anforderung und ermöglicht das automatisieren, ausführen und kontrollieren von HR-Prozessen über den gesamten Prozesslebenszyklus. Für mehr Informationen bezüglich der Integration mit dem EIC wird auf die Business Function Beschreibung der Funktion Employee Interaction Center verwiesen. HCM Processes and HCM Prozesse und Formulare ist ein Forms - Zusätzliche rollenübergreifendes Services für Self-Services Prozessframework welches neben dem Personalsachbearbeiter oder EIC Agenten auch Mitarbeiter und Manager an den Prozessen beteiligt. Mitarbeiter und Manager können HR Prozesse selber starten, und so Datenänderungen an die HR Abteilung weitergeben, oder Datenänderungen direkt im System ändern. Für die Business Packages Manager Self- Service können Sie folgende neue Services über diese Business Function aktivieren. o Prozesse starten o Prozesse Anzeigen o Personalakte AnzeigenDiese Services können in der Manager Rolle über die Portalseiten zu Mitarbeiterinformationen im Bereich zusätzliche Aktivitäten ausgewählt werden.für das Business Package Employee Self-Service können folgende neue Services aktiviert werden:o Prozesse Starteno Prozesse Anzeigen o Personalakte AnzeigenBeachten Sie, dass Sie mit different groups and organizational units for process support Enable the automation of paper-based processes and forms Streamline and standardize HR business processes Help faciliate communication between cross-role processes (e.g. the EIC Agent and the employee) Allow EIC agents to identifiy follow-up expectations, ownership and timelines for process roles, to ensure successful process completion Allow EIC agents to monitor and control process execution directly from the EIC application (based on pre-defined process steps and workflows defined in HCM processes and Forms) Improve business process automation to save time/costs and maximize efficiency and overall productivity for EIC Agents Manage and track the complete process lifecycle from beginning to end Für den Bereich ESS sind die Services über die Rolle in die entsprechend richtigen Worksets intergriert. Die Statusnachverfolgung und auch die Übersicht über bereits durchgeführte Schritte kann über den Prozess Browser nachvollzogen werden.

Human Capital Management PA-EIC Process control and monitoring through integration with HCM Processes and Forms der Business Function HCM Prozesse und Formulare auch die zu Enhancement Package 1 verfügbaren Funktion aktivieren. Im Enhancement Package 1 wurden folgende Erweiterungen zur Verfügung gestellt:o Analytics: Kennzahlen und Queries für den Bereich HCM Prozesse und Formulare und HR Shared Services. Informationen hierzu finden Sie unter LINKo Neue Beispielprozesse o Salary Change Using Annual Salary (International)o Salary Change Using Pay Scale Wage Group and Level (International)o Special Payment (International) o Special Payment Without Personnel Department (International)o Change to Working Time (International)o Change of Address (US)o Company Loan (International)o Membership Fees Sports Club (International)Weitere Informationen zu den Prozessen finden Sie in der Online Hilfe LINKo Neues Business Package für HR Administrator 1.1 basierend auf WebDynpro für ABAP. Weitere Informationen zum Business Package hierzu finden Sie unter LINK und im Hinweis 972322.o Generische Services definieren. (falls es hier noch Informationen in einer Release Note zum EhP1 gibt bitte mit einbinden) Formularkonfiguration Formular- / Prozesskonfiguration Neue Backend Services für Prozess Design Information finden Sie im IMG unter HR Administrative Services o Meldungsübersteuerung Werkzeuge Message Mapper Information finden Sie im IMG unter HR Administrative Services o Process Browser mit Statusübersicht für Manager und Mitarbeiter o Neues Benutzeroberfläche für die Digital Personnel File Employee interaction center ( EIC) Help facilitate agents can monitor and track the communication between progress and status of existing HR cross-role processes ( the processes and they can easily access EIC agent and the the process browser to search for employee) existing processes Allow EIC agents to HR administrators can receive, view, identify follow-up and update the status of follow-up work expectations, ownership, items from the universal work list and timelines for process (UWL). roles to ensure successful process completion Allow EIC agents to monitor and control process execution directly from the EIC software

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management PA-EIC PA-EIC PA-EIC (based on predefined process steps and workflows defined in HCM processes and forms) Manage and track the complete process life cycle, from beginning to end Execute HR processes EIC agents can start and execute Streamline and standardize from a centralized service predefined HR processes, such as new HR business processes center hire and maternity leave, directly from Allow EIC agents to the EIC (activity screen). identify follow-up Using the EIC inbox, agents can open expectations, ownership, and execute workflow items sent by the and timelines for process HR administrator. The software allows roles to ensure successful navigation to Web Dynpro ABAB from process completion the EIC software. Improve business process HR administrators can receive, view, automation to save time and update the status of follow-up work and costs and maximize items (sent by EIC) from the UWL efficiency and overall within the enterprise portal. productivity of EIC agents Facilitate cross-role collaboration and communication between business partners, using workflow technology HR process automation and standardization through HCM Process and Forms integration EIC agents can open and execute Help facilitate workflow items sent by the HR communication between administrator from the EIC inbox. The cross-role processes ( the software allows navigation to Web EIC agent and the Dynpro ABAB from the EIC software. employee) HR administrators can receive, view, Improve business process and update the status of follow-up work automation to save time items from the UWL. and costs and maximize efficiency and overall productivity for EIC agents Manage and track the complete process life cycle, from beginning to end EIC agents can start and execute Streamline and standardize predefined HR processes, such as new HR business processes hire and maternity leave, directly from Improve business process the EIC. automation to save time EIC agents can monitor and track the and costs and maximize progress and status of existing HR efficiency processes initiated via the EIC. Manage and track the EIC agents can open and execute complete process life workflow items, sent by the HR cycle, from beginning to administrator from the EIC inbox, using end the UWL. Help facilitate HR Administrators can receive and communication between view follow-up work items from the cross-role processes ( the UWL and access the process browser EIC agent and the to search for existing processes employee) Allow EIC agents to identify follow-up expectations, ownership, and timelines for process roles to ensure successful process completion Allow EIC agents to monitor and control process execution directly from the EIC Human PE-LSO Support for common e- The Sharable Content Object Support of common

Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management PE-LSO learning standards Web-based access for instructors and tutors Reference Model (SCORM) is a standards like SCORM collection of technical specifications 2004 and AICC and standards that define how Webbased learning content is created and deploying e-learning Enhanced flexibility in provided to learners. Support for content SCORM ensures that learning content Enhanced reporting can be exchanged between different capabilities learning management systems. The Aviation Industry CBT Committee regulates how communication and data are exchanged on Web-based learning platforms in the aviation industry. It contains control and reporting options and enables data exchange between learning programs and between learning administration programs. Web-based access for instructors and tutors on the instructor portal Instructor and tutor work lists include all courses of the responsible instructor, and they provide an overview of the tasks to be completed for better course management PE-LSO Course program You use the course program to make a course offering available to learners. Content is structured into blocks that can be identified as mandatory or optional and may or may not be sequenced. Content is a mixture of curricula and course types that may or may not have scheduled dates and can be booked anytime. The content may or may not be sequenced and can have alternatives (which learners can select from). PE-LSO PE-LSO Integrated virtual learning rooms - - Learning Solution- Enterprise Learning - Rapid E- learning Authoring Tool Course administrators can seamlessly create course dates with virtual learning rooms by assigning an instructor as a course resource, just like for any other course. Learners can access virtual learning rooms in the learning portal to take courses that are led by instructors. Instructors will receive a personal room automatically; they can also create and manage virtual rooms in the instructor portal and assign virtual rooms to courses. A rapid E-Learning authoring tool is provided as part of the Authoring Environment. This rapid E-Learning authoring tool enables users to create AICC, SCORM 1.2 and SCORM 2004 Paper-based processes can be replaced ( handing out the attendance list for signature) Administrative tasks in course administration can be taken over by instructor directly ( replacing participants) Work list of courses eliminates a need for paper-based communication Virtual learning room is part of the solution Instructors can manage their virtual learning rooms or just use their personal default room from their instructor portal Course administrators can set up courses with virtual learning rooms in the familiar process Learners join the virtual learning rooms from the learning portal

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services PA-PA, FI- TV PA-PA, FI- TV PA-PA, FI- TV PA-PA, FI- TV PA-PA, FI- TV ES Bundle - Travel Management Service to create, update and delete/delimit Travel mini master data from non- HR systems Service to read and send traveler profile to Global Distribution System (GDS)/agency system Service to create traveler preferences from GDS/agency system Service to create, update and delete/delimit corporate credit card information from credit card company databases compliant E-Learning content using Microsoft PowerPoint. The content package created by this tool can be published to Enterprise Learning (environment), using the Authoring Environment. Users need the Adobe Flash Plug-In installed in their browser to view the courses created with this tool. HCM services for Travel Import master data from Management provide an option to non- HR systems to upload master data related to business Travel Management travel from non- HR systems, Import traveler profile data reservation systems, e-mail databases, from external reservation and credit card companies. Data can systems into Travel also be transferred from Travel Management Management to reservation systems. Update reservation Target market: all companies using or systems with actual implementing Travel Management traveler profile data from Travel Management Import master data from credit card companies into Travel Management Import data from thirdparty e-mail systems to Travel Management When the Travel management system is set up initially, all existing employee mini master data from the external non- system can be imported to the Travel Management system. For the continuous operating mode, customers are able to import changes in employee master data from the external non- system to the Travel Management system on a regular basis. The traveler profile (employee mini master plus personal travel preferences) can be read in and transferred to an external system (GDS or travel agency profile database). Travelers can store their personnel preferences for business travel and create a personal profile using selfservices. All preference data for Travel Management is held in Travel Management as the master system. Using this inbound operation traveler preferences can initially be imported from the GDS/agency system into the Travel Management system. Credit card numbers change, validity dates change or employees enroll for the corporate card program. Therefore it is helpful for corporations to receive all changes about employees' corporate card numbers and validity dates from the card providers. This service enables you to import credit card information into the Travel Management system.

Corporate Services Industries Industries Industries PA-PA, FI- TV LO-MD, MM-PUR, SD-POS, SD-EDI LO-MD, MM-PUR, SD-POS, SD-EDI LO-MD, MM-PUR, SD-POS, SD-EDI Service to create, update and delete/delimit email addresses from external email databases Global Data Synchronization - Enhancements on the GDS/PRICAT maintenance Article maintenance In order to simplify the initial set-up, customers can take over the email addresses from an external email system such as MS Outlook or Lotus Notes. This inbound operation creates and updates the E-mail addresses of an employee in IT0105 (Subtype 10) for one or more Work Agreements. The development comprises the following s on the GDS/PRICAT maintenance: Show short text in login language on item level Article text on level BOM (bill of material) Show description of characteristic value on base unit and characteristic level; show description of characteristics in characteristics level After changing SATNR Field in w_pricat_maintain and saving this line an update is needed so that the changed line appears with the corresponding other variants. The variant will appear with the new generic material group number which is grouped under the appropriate generic article. PRICAT inbound processing - Assign additional EAN to existing article Inclusion of the article description for variants when maintaining EANs in the article master: in article master maintenance, a new column was added to the additional data under the tab strip "EAN Maintenance" to display the article descriptions of the variants for the given logon language. Master Data Maintenance Enhanced storage levels for transportation chain and staging time: The storage levels for external transportation chains and their staging time were enhanced with the functionality to provide more detailed data retention levels to be able to support more scenarios within the scheduling of the procurement controlling. Department Store / Shop Maintenance: When creating a new shop under a department store, all the sales area segments of the department store are copied to the new shop. When creating a new shop under a department store, all company code segments of the department store are copied to the new shop. Assignment of follow-up/replacement article to original article: In order to map F&R follow-up- and replacement functionality,

Industries Industries Industries LO-MD, MM-PUR, SD-POS, SD-EDI LO-MD, MM-PUR, SD-POS, SD-EDI LO-MD, MM-PUR, SD-POS, SD-EDI Operational Assortment Planning and Control (OAPC) Layout Workbench Assortment list and POSoutbound processing s are made in the master data maintenance in ERP Enhanced article hierarchy maintenance: Retail customers use the article hierarchy to plan their assortment structure and to represent any number of hierarchical groupings of articles, particularly the CDT (consumer decision tree), as it is used in category management. The following s are available: - Consistency Check Report - New User Interface for the Simulation Function - New User Interface for the Copy Function With Operational Assortment Planning and Control (OAPC), retailers can specify the materials and quantities to order, both for delivery to the stores and put-away quantities for the distribution center. To do this, a purchasing list is created and materials added to it. The materials can already exist in the ERP system, be PRICAT materials received from vendors via IDocs, or brand new materials for which no information exists yet. For new materials, additional colors or sizes can be specified. These s for the application of the OAPC comprise: - Display of Assortments - Use of Structured Articles - Third-Party Order Processing - Filtering of Purchasing List items at Characteristic Level Check whether the planned presentation date of the article for a store lies within the validity period of the layout version to which the article is assigned. Indicator to transfer an article from the layout module to the purchasing list (OAPC). The new indicator allows articles to be transferred to purchasing list for stock replenishment only. Price reference articles in the High Performance Retailing (HPR) assortment list Mass reorganization in POS outbound and assortment list area Consideration of conditions flagged for deletion BAdI s for HPR assortment list: authorization check Industries Article Substitution Replace an article with a different article (follow-up or replacement article) because the article is out of stock, discontinued, and so on. Assignments of the substitute article Substitute articles during creation of internal deliveries and in forecasting and replenishment provides

Industries Improved Extended Retail Method of Accounting can be maintained by the customer. The assignments will be considered when creating deliveries. During the creation of a delivery for a stock transfer order, substitute article assignments are evaluated and, depending on certain events and the related master data, the original article in the delivery can be substituted. The substitute article will be delivered instead of the original article (from the stock transfer order). Extended retail method of accounting ( ERMA) is an alternate inventory valuation method (instead of RMA) that manages inventory at the item and location level. It uses moving average price for the cost flow. Inventory is also tracked in retail values. Markdowns may cause an adjustment to the inventory values and costs. The revaluation profiles can now allow different handling for each pricechange type, such as mark-up or permanent mark-down. The profiles can now disallow the maintain-margins treatment for mark-ups. The system provides a series of retail and cost stock-ledger reports, or historical comparison reports. The reports will collect and present inventory-related transactions and calculate key ratios under the cost or extended retail methods of inventory accounting. Industries Stock Ledger Reporting This development effort is to provide a series of retail and cost stock ledger reports, including, period reports, period-to-date reports, and historical comparison reports. These reports will collect and present inventory-related transactions and calculate key ratios under either the cost or extended retail methods of inventory accounting. Users shall be able to initially select data for display and then be able to drilldown into more detailed layers and be able to filter the results. In order to properly support these reports in BW, some technical s in ERP were also required. Industries Forecasting and Replenishment*: Characteristics-based determination of references for articles The new function will enhance the automatic assignment of references to an article-site combination in the ERP system. It is possible to (automatically) assign articles that have certain, predefined article attributes in common to an article-site combination as references. Industries Forecasting and During a promotion period the space flexibility in the replenishment process Lost sales in the store can be avoided This feature leads to enhanced logic for markups and mark-downs and to improved ERMA. New stock ledger reporting leads to enhanced logic for mark-ups and mark-downs and to improved ERMA.

Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries Replenishment*: Promotional Planning Forecasting and Replenishment*: Structural breaks for DC forecast allocated to goods storage for an article during standard periods (outside of promotions) is to be increased. It should also be possible to order and deliver more frequently during the promotion and use more frequent replenishment options to provide a better response to the actual quantity sold and to provide improved availability of promotional merchandize goods than during standard periods. The solution was enhanced with the following functionalities: Maintain alternative minimum and maximum stock levels Maintain alternative order and delivery dates for promotions Transfer Time-Dependent Minimum and Maximum Stock Levels to F&R Transfer Time-Dependent Procurement Cycles to F&R. Determine the number of sites that are supplied by a certain DC with a certain article and transfer that information to F&R ). The following information is to be taken into consideration: Listing information for the distribution centers Internal sources of supply for the sites (supplying site relationships and source list) Listing information for the stores Forecasting and Transfer definitions of purchase Replenishment*: Interface organizations and their assignments to for purchase sites to F&R organizations Forecasting and Transfer contract documents (outline Replenishment*: Interface agreements) to F&R for contract information Forecasting and Replenishment*: Suppress transfer of unnecessary data Industries LO-AB Integration of Credit Management As there are certain processes, where only a part of those data is needed in F&R (e.g. only master data for listing check required but no orders, no movement data), the interface logic is enhanced by further control mechanisms to suppress the transfer of unnecessary data in such processes. Allocation: improvements Contract Determination within the for contract determination Allocation Table and scheduling Enhanced scheduling within the Allocation Table Real-time and comprehensive credit limit checks ensure timely information about customers and prevent financial risks. Users can benefit from the whole scope of 's Credit Management. Industries LO-AB Integration of the Variant The Variant Configuration is a

Configuration completely new business process variant to handle special products. Industries LO-AB Collection invoices Creation of independent collection invoices towards suppliers and customers Industries LO-GT Fully integrated, scalable, end-to-end solution for sourcing, selling, trading and logistic processing of commodities of any kind Industries LO-GT Transparency and control over all aspects of your commodities Industries LO-GT ES Bundle - Trade & Commodity Management Industries LO-GT - Compensation management - Bereitstellung von B2B esoa Services im Bereich des Konditionskontraktes als auch Bereitstellung der Mappings für die EDI Nachricht EDI845 Enables end-to-end commodity management scenarios (buying, trading, and selling of commodities) in connection with Commodity SL of EBS partner Triple Point Technology A commodity is a product thattrades on a commodity exchange: agricultural products, metals, oil, gas, electricity coal, emissions, and weather It is important for all companies that manage commodities in procurement, sell commodities, or trade commodities as such. Integration of data from deal capture (partner system) down to financials Commodity Management comprises the activities of purchasing, selling, trading, logistic and financial planning and execution of commodities. The necessary elements for a commodity management solution that need to reflect in the application system can be depicted as follows: The yellow background symbolized the core of the commodity management. Most of the activities lie in the "front office" part. In the integrated solution the front office part is covered by a partner solution, the business function here covers the enablement of the partner software to the backbone.the front office (partner application) comprises those activities that interface to the outside word, in our case the activities carried out by the dealer, the normal trading activities. The upper box "situation analysis, Integrated trading system into to manage procurement, selling, and trading of commodities - including commodity risk management World-class front-officetrading delivered by EBS partner, Triple point Technology Full transparency along the supply chain Commodity trading platform as the basis for commodity accounting compliance Create physical deal including estimated costs in trading system Replicate physical deal as Trading Order in ERP Add unplanned costs to trading order Create planned and actual movements, transfer information to trading system to update P/L reporting Create invoices and settle expenses. Transfer actual costs to trading system for inclusion in P/L reporting

decision support and future simulation" is the cockpit a trader needs to get a view of the internal and external world, to simulate possible future scenarios and come to a decision. In comprises information as:- External market information (commodity prices, company news, etc)- Internal demand and supply information (How much of a certain commodity is needed/ do we have for production supply?)- Position Reporting (Overview over the open buying and selling positions (physical and paper) in quantity and value)- Value at Risk reporting (How big is the risk of loss?) including calculations based on mathematical models - Exposure Management and hedge accounting: How big is the trader's risk, his "exposure". Which part of this exposure is hedged and is that hedge sufficient effective?the two boxes "physical dealing" and "paper dealing" stand for the handling of physical and paper contracts. Physical and paper contracts influence each other, because every opening of a physical contract (position) creates an "exposure" (risk exposure). The trader can decide to hedge this risk completely, partially or not at all. Every opening of a paper contract without an underlying physical deal exposure creates off course an exposure as well.typically, there are four possible categories of exposure risk:- Commodity price risk- Currency risk (if the contract is in a foreign currency the rate may change)- Credit risk (the creditor might not pay his bill)- Freight risk (all future around the world quote FOB prices. Therefore, if a trade is settled for delivery 12 months later with the CIF price as a reference, the seller needs to hedge the position against changes in the shipping cost as well.)the following building elements are in the mid- and back office, handled by :- Logistic planning and execution: Beside of non-material commodities as electricity all goods have to be transported and shipped. Customers have to be invoiced and bills have to be paid. Although this can be said of any kind of selling or purchasing process, there are certain "specialties" that need special care and therefore attention of a commodity management solution: o Transportation: Vessel reservation and organization Transport optimization Fluid handling (e.g.

Industries LO-GT - Compensation Management - Erweiterte Geschäftsprozesslogik und Flexibilität bei der Erstellung von Vergütungsabrechnungen (Funktionale Erweiterung) temperature dependence) Expense Handlingo Invoicing: Delta invoice handling: Often, an invoice is send to a customer before the price is finally fixed. By the time of fixing, the price based on the underlying index a delta invoice is needed therefore that takes the invoices already send into account.- Margin processing and settlement: For exchange-traded derivatives, the handling of the initial and the variation margin has to be carried out. For all derivatives, broker and similar fees must be handled. Finally, the contracts have to be matched and settled. - The exposure management and hedge accounting is a very important topic on the financial side. Strict rules exist here under which financial derivatives can be kept from the profit and loss sheetalthough very special handling requirements exist depended on the commodity, the above-described elements are the necessary basis for any commodity management solution. The necessary elements for a commodity management solution that need to reflect in the application system can be depicted as follows: The yellow background symbolized the core of the commodity management. Most of the activities lie in the "front office" part. In the integrated solution the front office part is covered by a partner solution, the business function here covers the enablement of the partner software to the backbone.the front office (partner application) comprises those activities that interface to the outside word, in our case the activities carried out by the dealer, the normal trading activities. The upper box "situation analysis, decision support and future simulation" is the cockpit a trader needs to get a view of the internal and external world, to simulate possible future scenarios and come to a decision. In comprises information as:- External market information (commodity prices, company news, etc)- Internal demand and supply information (How much of a certain commodity is needed/ do we have for production supply?)- Position Reporting (Overview over the open buying and selling positions (physical and paper) in quantity and value)- Value at Risk reporting (How big is the risk of loss?) including calculations based on mathematical models - Exposure Management and hedge

accounting: How big is the trader's risk, his "exposure". Which part of this exposure is hedged and is that hedge sufficient effective?the two boxes "physical dealing" and "paper dealing" stand for the handling of physical and paper contracts. Physical and paper contracts influence each other, because every opening of a physical contract (position) creates an "exposure" (risk exposure). The trader can decide to hedge this risk completely, partially or not at all. Every opening of a paper contract without an underlying physical deal exposure creates off course an exposure as well.typically, there are four possible categories of exposure risk:- Commodity price risk- Currency risk (if the contract is in a foreign currency the rate may change)- Credit risk (the creditor might not pay his bill)- Freight risk (all future around the world quote FOB prices. Therefore, if a trade is settled for delivery 12 months later with the CIF price as a reference, the seller needs to hedge the position against changes in the shipping cost as well.)the following building elements are in the mid- and back office, handled by :- Logistic planning and execution: Beside of non-material commodities as electricity all goods have to be transported and shipped. Customers have to be invoiced and bills have to be paid. Although this can be said of any kind of selling or purchasing process, there are certain "specialties" that need special care and therefore attention of a commodity management solution: o Transportation: Vessel reservation and organization Transport optimization Fluid handling (e.g. temperature dependence) Expense Handlingo Invoicing: Delta invoice handling: Often, an invoice is send to a customer before the price is finally fixed. By the time of fixing, the price based on the underlying index a delta invoice is needed therefore that takes the invoices already send into account.- Margin processing and settlement: For exchange-traded derivatives, the handling of the initial and the variation margin has to be carried out. For all derivatives, broker and similar fees must be handled. Finally, the contracts have to be matched and settled. - The exposure management and hedge accounting is a very important topic on the financial

Industries Industries Industries MM-PUR, Integration of GRC MM-IV, SD- Global Trade Services FT MM-PUR, Goods Receipt Capacity MM-IV, SD- Check FT MM-PUR, Invoice Reduction MM-IV, SD- FT Industries IS-U Utilities Customer Care: Retail view of the deregulated energy market Industries IS-U Service Oriented Process Support (AMI Services) Industries IS-U Collections Management in Contract Accounts Receivables and Payables side. Strict rules exist here under which financial derivatives can be kept from the profit and loss sheetalthough very special handling requirements exist depended on the commodity, the above-described elements are the necessary basis for any commodity management solution. GRC Global Trade Services is an application to support important business processes like import and export control, restitution, and tradepreference handling The new developments help to improve the connection GRC Global Trade Services to for Retail. The buyer will be informed when the Connection of the process capacity at the warehouse is of purchase order creation insufficient for a particular date and the and the capacity (for amount of merchandise insufficient for processing merchandise) the particular goods receipt area. at the goods receipt area The buyer can decide to move the Improvement in receipt to another time slot or to transparency for the buyer another goods receipt area if the in terms of making qualified capacity is insufficient. In the event of a decisions about the time capacity bottleneck, the buyer will slot in which certain receive an overview of the capacity at merchandise is ordered the goods receipt area during Optimization of workload generation of the purchase order. (capacity) at the goods receipt area With this feature, an interface is available for electronically providing information about the reduction of the invoice. A new field, reason for invoice reduction, is available. Simplified business processes for call center agents in an intuitive, browserbased work environment Target market: for energy retailers in deregulated markets and for customer service-centric utilities in general Seamless integration and automation of the processes for disconnection and reconnection of a meter and upload and download of profile values Target market: any utility in a regulated and liberalized market Collection activities can be determined and executed based on customers' collection strategies Create and manage lists of collections work items; track progress of the work Improvement of data interchange by electronically providing information about the reduction of the invoice The efficiency of invoice management improves because of this feature Simplified, easy-to-learn, and easy-to-use call center processes Extended contract management, including utilities-specific product proposal and bill simulation through seamless integration of commercial and technical processes Reduction of operational costs due to process automation Less integration effort through state-of-the-art native connectivity to partner product Reduction of custom code requirements Improve collections process Better organization of

Industries IS-U Enhancement of deregulation infrastructure Industries IS-U Enhancements in Customer Financials Management Industries IS-U Localization of strategic countries (e.g. China) Complete view of all work lists that items are assigned to and the current progress of the work Work items are displayed by priority, showing all relevant information for a collector and allowing drill-down into further details The collector adds notes, updates the status, resubmits, or forwards a work item to another agent. Target market: utilities with a large number of customers Possibility to implement several deregulated divisions together (by defining division-specific switch processes for electricity and gas) Enhancement of the framework for the EDM-calculation workbench Enhancing the formula profile calculation by using flexible input parameters (variables) Create variants for the account balance display via customizing Direct debit limit in the payment run Deactivation of an installment plan affects creditworthiness Example for localization: the possibility to administrate transformer as devices in the system. Industries IS-U Customer Feedback Depending on the individual customer requirement Industries IS-U Waste Management Cockpit Industries IS-U Collections Management in Contract Accounts Receivables and Payables collection activities Improve cash flow Increase working capital Efficient collections Better review capability for collection managers Central transaction for confirmation of Improved usability of order waste disposal orders (WDOs) processing Optimized and simplified handling Increased speed of order reduces processing time of WDOs processing Integration of business process Flexibility of confirmation exception management ( BPEM) settings for different enables monitoring of mass creation of process scenarios of a WDOs waste disposal company Central transaction for management of Increased routeprofitability view operational and logistics costs Granular route and item cost-allocation capabilities Determination and execution of collection activities based on collection strategies Managing Collections Worklists and processing of Collections Work Items Processing Promises to Pay Display additional financial information such as the last payment of a customer Payments at external cash desk (new Enterprise Services for integration with cash systems) Delta-Update extraction of business partner items and dunning history into BI

Industries IS-U Enhancements waste disposal processing Industries IS-U Enhancements in Customer Financials Management Industries IS-U Neue und erweiterte Waageschnellerfassung mit zusätzlichen Funktionen und Prozessen Functional s for weighing and sales order processing Create variants for the account balance display via customizing Direct debit limit in the payment run Deactivation of an installment plan affects creditworthiness Besonders übersichtliche und benutzerfreundliche Gestaltung durch neuen Bildaufbau. Zusätzliche Kontrollmöglichkeiten über die Felder Abfallbehandlung, Vorgangsart, Entsorgungsanlagenauftragsart und das Kennzeichen für externe Anlieferung. Einfache Belegung der Entsorgungsanlagenauftragsart über Drucktaste Steuerung. Benutzerspezifische Voreinstellungen für die Zuordnung von Profilgruppen und Entsorgungsanlagen zur Waage Speichern von Favoriten - z. B. als Vorlagen für andere Arbeitsabläufe Neuer allgemeiner Objektservice für das Anfügen von Notizen oder Dateien (z. B. Fotos) zu einem Wiegebeleg Zuordnung mehrerer Wiegedatensätze zu einer Entsorgungsauftragsposition Automatisches Splitting des Materials bei Wareneingang Relevanz für Warenbewegung und Abrechnung über Waageprozessarten wie Eigenverwiegung oder Kontrollverwiegung definierbar Preissimulation für externe Verwiegung Eingabe von Schichtdatum und -zeit Abbilden des Materials über Chargen Manuelle Eingabe des Taragewichts Definition zusätzlicher Angaben für das Taragewicht wie Personen, Schneeketten usw. Eingabe mehrer Behälter mit Behältertyp oder Equipmentnummer Gewichtsprüfung hinsichtlich vereinbarter Mengen bzw. deren Überschreitung Storno eines Wiegebelegs, bei der die Buchung aus der Materialwirtschaft ebenfalls storniert wird Neuer Data Identifier für die Datenfindung für folgende Szenarien:1. Datenfindung über Kfz- Kennzeichnen2. Datenfindung über Vertrag und/oder Geschäftspartner3. Datenfindung über Favoriten- Identifikationsnummer4. Datenfindung über Entsorgungsauftrag und Positiono Erweiterte Stammdatenverwaltung Bearbeiten des Ansprechpartners in der Standplatzverwaltung Neues Serviceintervall Tagesfrequenz

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services IS-AD Maintenance event builder Hinterlegen einer Abrechnungsrelevanz für Hinweise Bearbeiten von Behälteranteilen für SD-Verträge Neue entsorgungsspezifische Stammdatenvorlagentypen NEWCUSTWASTE_SD und NEWCUSTWASTE_ISU The maintenance event builder is an Usability is increased intuitive, easy-to-use work bench to Planning is streamlined plan maintenance events Planning is somewhat The maintenance event builder automated handles the following activities: - Revision: describes an opportunity to perform maintenance on assets and allows maintenance planner to group a set of maintenance requests that can be performed during that opportunity - Notifications: work requirements are listed so that planner can view, select and assign outstanding maintenance notifications to a maintenance opportunity - Orders: planner can create plant maintenance or customer service orders from the task lists and task list hierarchies in the notifications. - Project: planner can use a project network so that orders can be sequenced for optimized execution - Planning: the planning board displays all planned events for given technical objects and maintenance events. IS-AD Hierarchical task list Maintenance of complex technical objects includes many tasks that are Hierarchical task list allows organization of structured hierarchically. Hierarchy task maintenance package in a lists can reference other hierarchy task lists or task lists, so users can build a hierarchy of maintenance tasks to be completed. clear block of steps Hierarchical task list allows the creation of master data centrally for multiple plants Hierarchical task list simplifies variant configuration implementation and allows the usage of a task list for a large number of similar pieces of equipment and assets IS-AD ES Bundle - Asset Configuration The management of the configuration for complex systems like ships, vehicles or aircraft can be done by the asset user alone, by a contractor or manufacturer alone and on every point in between. This ES bundle supports the processes to create new reference structures for assets as well as the maintenance (change/update) of these reference structures on dependence of the contract, in the customer and/or in Creation and establishment of initial structure to exchange asset related data and information. Creation of reference structures for complex system structures. Maintenance and change management for complex structures. Creation and maintenance of allowed structures.

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services IS-AD IS-AD PM, CS, EP-PCT, PCT-MAN PM, CS, EP-PCT, ES Bundle - Maintenance Processing ES Bundle - Maintenance Service Collaboration New pool role 'Basic Maintenance Processing' New role 'Maintenance Planner' the service provider system. The Version 2 completes the already defined and presented ES Bundle Asset Configuration (EhP2) This ES bundle provides enterprise services for the exchange of date related to maintenance planning, asset configuration, and notification data between the enterprise asset management (EAM) software in ERP and other EAM applications or systems. The enterprise services can be consumed by external, third-party systems or composite applications (reliability-centered maintenance and optimization: RCMO) to integrate external EAM systems with the EAM software from. Version 2 completes the ES bundle for maintenance processing (EhP2) The maintenance activities for complex systems like ships, vehicles or aircraft can be done by the asset user alone, by a contractor or manufacturer alone and on every point in between. This ES bundle supports the keeping the as maintained structure of the complex system uptodate when a contractor performs repair and overhaul on dependence of the contract, in the customer and/or in the service provider system. The Version 2 completes the already defined and presented ES Bundle Maintenance Service Collaboration (EhP2) Basic maintenance processing is a generic role with a new simplified user interface. It supports an end-to-end approach for non-professional users to handle maintenance, including defect logging, message processing, and work confirmation. Process steps such as create order,create purchase requisition, and create confirmation are hidden in the background. Basic maintenance processing is an easy-to-implement, predefined, and preconfigured system. For large maintenance organizations that have implemented software Creation and changes of maintenance requirements for complex structures Gives maintenance personnel an easy way to handle service bulletins provided by OEMs and put the bulletins into action. Alert maintenance supervisors when warranties for specific pieces of equipment are nearing the end of their lives Compile all data needed for a maintenance supervisor to decide whether it is more costefficient to repair or replace a certain part or piece of equipment Provide a user-friendly, end-to-end solution for handling maintenance orders Initiate maintenance activity Plan maintenance Execute maintenance Update data Close maintenance activity Streamline the overall process of defect handling in the company. Give all employees an option to log defects on broken equipment easily. Transparency of maintenance effort and associated costs. Ready-to-use, preconfigured roles for a basic maintenance process. Transparency of maintenance status and details on maintenance notifications. Simplification of system access.

Corporate Services Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution PCT-MAN PM, CS, EP-PCT, PCT-MAN MM New role 'Maintenance Supervisor' Description field for inventory documents for plant maintenance, the new Increasing the maintenance planner role provides a effectiveness and Web-based user interface for efficiency of maintenance maintenance planning. planning work. The predefined work centers enable Accessibility of all maintenance planners to access and maintenance-relevant manage maintenance-related data, information through perform analytics, and accelerate predefined personal work maintenance planning processes. areas. Flexible data The maintenance planner role focuses representation in a on collaboration, new features for work business context. processing and structure display, and enhanced analytics to support a planner in planning, coordinating, and scheduling maintenance work in a organization. For large maintenance organizations Simplification of system that have implemented software access. for plant maintenance, the new Optimize resource usage maintenance supervisor role provides a of maintenance work Web-based user interface for centers. monitoring maintenance activities. Accessibility of all The predefined work centers enable maintenance-relevant maintenance planners to access and information through predefined personal work manage maintenance-related data, conduct analytics, and optimize and areas. monitor resource usage within a Flexible data supervisor's area of responsibility. representation in a The maintenance supervisor role business context. focuses on collaboration, new features for work processing, structure display, and enhanced analytics to support the daily work of an supervisor in a maintenance organization. Within the inventory document there is an additional text field which can be used to have a more detailed description of the inventory, e.g. "Inventory for men shirts MM Invoice verification For invoice documents there is a new field "complaints reason" on item level (transaction MIRO, MIR6,MIR7). This field can be switched. This allows for better analysis and efficiency improvements of the complains process. In addition a new BAPI method COMPLIANT and a corresponding Idoc is available. This allows to handle information about invoice reduction automatically within the ERP system. Until now it was only possible to handle this information paper based. MM Capacity check for unloading points for goods receipt During creation of purchase orders a purchaser can check if the unloading point for the goods has enough capacity for the planned delivery date. If there is not enough capacity at the unloading point, the purchase order can be changed accordingly by shifting to different unloading points or

changing the delivery data. Analytics PP Kanban The new tabular representation of the kanban board facilitates kanban evaluation and provides even more flexible control. Users have intuitive and extensive options for personalization. The business add-ins for kanban enable you to adjust the representation to the additional requirements of your business processes with a minimum of effort. You can create a replenishment strategy with reporting points. You can invoke delayed replenishment elements. The new BAPIs for kanban help you realize your own scenarios and interfaces for managing control cycles and kanbans. Analytics PP Production smoothing and sequencing in repetitive manufacturing Analytics PP New features in evaluations for MRP and long-term planning Analytics PP Neuerungen in den Auswertungen der Bedarfsplanung und der Langfristplanung Product PP-PI Development and Manufacturing Process management using an enhanced execution steps (XStep) repository A new procedure for production smoothing (leveling) is available for sequencing in repetitive manufacturing using the heijunka process. You can change the sequence schedule interactively. You can change the visualization profile. With the business add-in for sequencing, you can specify your own scheduling sequence for planned orders. Enhanced transparency and planning functionality in manufacturing requirements planning Planning and integration with Advanced Planning & Optimization ( APO) has been improved with material requirements planning (MRP) based on. Sie können neben der klassischen Einzelmaterialsicht die integrierte Planungssituation mehrerer Materialien als Materialgruppierung in der Bedarfsund Bestandsliste nutzen. Für die Auswahl einer Materialgruppierung haben Sie dabei folgende Möglichkeiten: Produktgruppen Werksübergreifende Materialgruppierung APO- Ersetzungsketten Kundenspezifisch definierte Materialgruppierung Siehe Darstellung Materialgruppierungen Better accessibility Better visibility into production processes Better integration with non- systems Convert uneven customer pulls into an even and predictable manufacturing schedule Stabilize the material and value flows Decrease production lead times and inventories Increase production flexibility and delivery reliability Environments with mandatory Reduction of time for approvals: the software provides an maintenance of process approval procedure for standard instructions XSteps that includes controlled status Flexible change management and a digital signature for management certain statuses. Where-used list: at the level of the

Product PP-PI Development and Manufacturing Product PP-PI Development and Manufacturing Product PP-PI Development and Manufacturing Product PP-PI Development Campaign weighing using a template in the xapp Manufacturing Integration and Intelligence ( xmii) composite application standard XStep, you can perform the where-used function using the context menu. The where-used function checks whether the standard XStep is referenced in process orders, recipes, and the repository. Export and import of standard XStep objects: you can transfer standard XStep objects to another repository using XML-based export and import functions. Automatic number assignment and automatic calculation of the validity period for new versions. Process industries use campaign weighing to weigh materials for multiple process orders at the same time. The campaign weighing feature updates the process orders for materials that have already been weighed. Once the materials are weighed for a process order, they cannot be weighed again. Processing multiple process orders Enable the operator to manage weighing of the same material effectively Support optimization of resources like rooms and scales Maximize use of standard functionality within the software ES Bundle - Batch This ES bundle addresses the tracking Triggers batch traceability Traceability and Analytics of batches and lots of material through a process, continuous, or discrete based on a customer complaint, batch number, production environment. Batch tracking or handling unit number information is coordinated with plant inventory, laboratory analyses, and inventory movement information to Cross-company batch traceability End-to-end batch provide powerful lot genealogy reports. traceability to cover the This information can also be combined with appropriate data on equipment from real-time data systems. With the help of this bundle, batch tracing can also be performed beyond company boundaries. complete view of the supply chain In-depth analysis by integrating relevant shop floor automation systems with Recall defective product if the batch is defective Inform supplier if raw material batch is defective ES Bundle - Integration of Manufacturing Execution Systems ES Bundle - Technical Document Management Increases automation and efficiency on the shop floor by integrating heterogeneous shop floor systems, reducing manual data input, and synchronizing manufacturing relevant master data and transactional data between 2005 and manufacturing execution systems. Target market: manufacturers in any industry that performs production planning and quality management in an existing environment with manufacturing execution systems on the plant floor. Especially relevant to discrete, process, and repetitive manufacturing industries. Facilitates the usage of the document management system in PLM as a Production planner and supervisor complete a process beginning with receipt of a production order defining what is to be produced, at which location, and how much capacity is required Plant manager oversees multiple manufacturing operations in disparate locations Viewer integration: thirdparty viewer

and Manufacturing Product PP-PI Development and Manufacturing Connectivity ES Bundle - Integration of Quality Management Systems Analytics SD-BIL Enhancements of complaints handling Analytics SD-BIL Improved Down Payments document repository for business processes, including non- applications, in the area of product development and design. Allows the upload of documents to PLM and the retrieval of documents from PLM through enterprise services. Target market: customers and partners who want to integrate additional functionality into the PLM application; focus on consumer products and discrete industries Improves manufacturing efficiency and decision making through the exchange of inspection lot data, inspection results, and notification data between quality management functionality in and external quality management systems Target market: Any manufacturing industry Real-time design collaboration tool integration Computer aided engineering software integration Integration of niche CAD systems Partner composites facilitating copying from documents in a non- system to the document management system and the use of the documents in processes Exchange quality-related information between ERP and composite applications ( xmii), external QM systems, or test devices Record inspection results or defects and decide on product quality Create and update quality notifications Create new inspection lots or physical samples Leverage multiple user interface technologies to consume the enterprise services ( xmii or other composite applications from partners, Web Dynpro, Adobe forms, and NetWeaver Visual composer) Complaints processing is based on New dialog to create billing documents about which a complaints with reference complaint has been made. to one billing document The stock transfer order is handled via New dialog to create portable data capture devices. The complaints with reference retailer receives a printout of the billing to several billing document together with the documents merchandise. When a retailer detects a These two new features deviation within goods receipt support the user in processing (wrong merchandise, wrong handling the mass volume quantity, wrong price, or merchandise of complaints is damaged), the supplied site reports the discrepancy or complaint by phone or fax, referring to the billing number, line item number, and the reason for the complaint. You can create one complaint referencing multiple invoice documents Down payment for customers now possible in the sales order during sales process (previously possible only with billing plans and order-related billing) The value of the down payment is taken as statistical condition in the Down payment for customers now possible with delivery-related billing Down payments are automatically cleared from the billing document and

Analytics SD-BIL ES Bundle - Customer Fact Sheet Analytics SD-BIL ES Bundle - Customer Service Execution Analytics SD-BIL ES Bundle - Order to Cash Industries Industries FI-CA, IS-M Determination and execution of collection activities based on collection strategies FI-CA, IS-M Managing Collections Work Lists sales order and taken over into the transferred to financial billing document accounting From the billing document, the down payment is cleared to financial accounting Possible for order and delivery-related billing. Real-time customer information Sales associate field call clearinghouse that gathers and Customer service organizes information about a representative phone call customer and enables more efficient Customer service customer interactions representative escalation Gives customer service call representatives, sales managers, and Sales manager analysis field sales representatives the ability to Sales manager incoming leverage a single view of master data, order analysis transactions, and analyses for any customer Target market: any industry that is doing order management in an existing environment -especially larger business-to-business companies in manufacturing, technology, and consumer products This bundle provides a collection of Rapid and easy creation of enterprise services enabling scenarios service requests using for the after-market service life cycle remote monitoring systems (technical field service management). or Adobe forms Facilitates and extends the use of Connect remote workers Service and Asset Management as the to service management solution for processing service business processes via requests, service orders, service voice-enabled mobility contracts, and installed base solutions information. Seamless collaboration with third-party resource planning and optimization solutions Streamlined and userfriendly way to handle service management business object via partner composites The ES bundle order-to-cash enables customers enables and partners to build individual composite applications for order-to-cash processes (A2X integration). Flexible design of customer self-service order management scenarios Integration of foreign sales organizations through sales order management cockpits Build individual order management cockpits for internal users in sales and customer service Collection activities can be determined Reduction of custom code and executed in a flexible and dynamic requirements way based on each customers own Now standard within collection strategies - Added flexibility solution Create and manage lists collections workitems, track progress of work Improve collections process Better organization of the collection activities

Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries FI-CA, IS-M Processing Collections Work Items FI-CA, IS-M Processing Promises to Pay FI-CA, IS-M Display addition financial information such as the last payment of a customer FI-CA, IS-M Payments at external cash desk (new Enterprise Services for integration with cash systems) Improve cash flow Increase working capital Collectors get a complete view of all Efficient collections work lists that they are assigned to and Better review capability for their current progress of work. collection managers Work items from a list are displayed by priority, showing all relevant information for a collector and allowing for drill-down into further details where needed. When selecting a work item for processing, all necessary functions for the collections process are made available for the collector. The collector can add notes, update the status, re-submit or forward a work item to another agent The Interaction Center agent can accept a commitment from a business partner to pay selected receivables on one or more specified days. A promise to pay has a link to those receivables which are promised to be paid and stores relevant details of a given promise to pay. Additionally it provides the possibility to keep Tracking promises and available evaluations which show to which degree a customer adhered to his promises. Display addition financial information such as the last payment of a customer Greater flexibility to link to non- cash control systems FI-CA, IS-M Extract business partner Extract business partner items and items and dunning history dunning history into BI using Deltainto BI using Delta- Update Update FI-CA, IS-M Create variants for the account balance display via customizing FI-CA, IS-M Direct debit limit in the payment run FI-CA, IS-M Deactivation of an installment plan affects creditworthiness Industries IS-M Business partner processing Additionally to the existing sums in the account balance you can customize own balance variants In the Financial Customer Care Interaction Center functionality of CRM can now additional information of a customer be displayed (for instance last payment of the customer). When an installment plan is deactivated, the credit worthiness of the business partner can be updated Manage business partners in the roles Wholesaler and Point of Sale using the Business Partner functions. Efficient collections Better linking and record keeping of promises to pay from customers Single view of promise to pay and AR record Expanded collection routines using external cash systems Easy posting and clearing of AR balances using cashdesk routine Delta extraction is a significant performance gain Dunning history can be analyzed

Industries IS-M Sales Planning Manage forecasts of sales and surcharge quantities. You can specify constant service quantities and minimum and maximum quantities for customer groups that request the same delivery quantity each day (for example, hotels or airlines). Industries IS-M Purchase Planning Automate planning of purchase orders by calculating and distributing quantities based on historical order data. Industries IS-M Customer Interaction Center The Customer Interaction Center contains functions for entering and processing quantity planning, subsequent deliveries, complaints, and returns when dealing with customers and vendors. Industries IS-M Goods Receipt Entering goods receipts, creating quality notifications, and generating purchase orders for inbound deliveries. Industries IS-M Returns Manage recalls and customer returns. Generate a goods receipt document for full-copy returns and post it to stocks. Based on the returns reported and the goods receipts entered, you can plan returns to the publisher. Report return quantities that are relevant for credit memos and those relevant for delivery to the publisher and generate return purchase orders for them. Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services RE-FX RE-FX RE-FX Long-Term Seating Arrangements and Move Planning Real Estate Room Reservation Managing Contracts in Real Estate Management Within Corporate Real Estate Management you can manage longterm seating arrangements and move planning. You can specify that rooms or other real estate objects can be continuously occupied, and record which employees occupy these objects. Furthermore you can plan internal moves of employees from one object to another. Within Real Estate Room Reservation you can manage and optimize the organization of meetings and rooms. The functionality allows you to reserve rooms. In addition, you can book services for the rooms, such as lunch or additional chairs, and also request equipment. You can bill for all of these. Within Managing Contracts in RE we deliver s in the following areas: Increased space utilization and reduced operating costs Improved investment decisions through comprehensive analysis of space demand and offer Full transparency and allocation of costs & revenues to departments Easier and faster creation of room reservations for meetings. Single source of record. Simplified and optimized organization of meetings. Improved cost awareness. Better utilization of meeting rooms. Increased transparency and better cost control. Reduced TCO and implementation costs. Reduced processing costs. Optimized contract management. Improved business partner

Conditions in Foreign Currency Condition Split (Multiple Vendors). One time conditions. Cash Management and Forecast. Display results of sales based rent agreements in cashflow. Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services RE-FX Enhanced Service Charge Settlement Within Service Charge Settlement we deliver s in the following areas: Accrual/Defferal of Service Charges Differing Posting Term Optimizes UI for the settlement of service charges RE-FX Graphical Integration If you activate this subfunction, a standard tab page is available in master data processing on which a graphic (CAD/GIS) can be displayed for the object. So that a graphic can be displayed on this tab page, you need to have implemented and activated a graphic system by creating the appropriate classes (see the technical documentation). Set the indicator if you want to display graphical data in this way. RE-FX Accrual/Deferral of Service Charges RE-FX Integration with Cash Management and Forecast If you activate this subfunction, you can use the integration with cash management and forecast. Set the indicator if you want to use this subfunction. You also have to make the necessary settings in Customizing and you have to create the necessary cash management data (see Note 156239). RE-FX Other Enhancements If you activate this subfunction, you can use the following s: You can assign multiple objects for contracts and for the cost efficiency analysis using different groups (see the release note for multiple assignment). If you do not set the indicator, this function is not available on the interface. If you made the appropriate settings in Customizing in the master data area, management. Compliance with local requirement (US). Cash management provides a liquidity forecast based on the receivables and liabilities arising from real estate contracts. Integrate the very important area of property management into the overall processes such as Controlling, Reporting and Financials. Compliance with local legal requirement Cash management provides a liquidity forecast based on the receivables and liabilities arising from real estate contracts. This forecast shows the planned items resulting from the cash flow. These items are transferred to cash management when you perform periodic posting in RE-FX.

Corporate Services Sales and Service RE-FX CA Automatically Active Functions Integration of the Supply Chain Management ( SCM) and applications the following additional fields are available: The Function field for business entity, building, land The fields for processing the hierarchical location for land If you want to have conditions on contracts, rental objects, or contract offers that are in a currency that differs from the local currency of the company code, then you can activate this function in the Make Basic Settings in Company Code IMG activity. Set the Differing Condition Currency indicator. (See the release note for conditions in foreign currency). For one-time conditions, you can manually enter a valid-to date and a due date that differs from that in the frequency term (see the release note for conditions). If you want to copy proposed conditions to the contract, then you can also copy the adjustment terms that are assigned to the conditions. Therefore, when this subapplication is active, there is a new indicator, Transfer Adjustment Terms, in the dialog box for the transfer of conditions. This indicator is automatically set as standard (see the release note for conditions). In the sales-based rent agreement, you can specify that the results of the sales-based settlement are posted using periodic posting (transaction: RERAPP). For more information see the release note on sales-based settlement The following functions are automatically available if the business function is switched on: - Accrual/Deferral of Tax Amounts - COA: Statement of Reserve Fund - Information System: Item Overview for Multiple Contracts - Country Specifics for Austria: VAT Calculation for COA Data sources have been extended to produce a history from for spare parts planning in SCM. provides the following additional data over the position level in SCM: - Relevant for goods movement - Customer-facing location - Types of customer-facing location - First stock-holding location - Types of first stock-holding location - Reason for cancellation of offers and orders

Sales and Service CA ES Bundle - Inventory Lookup Analytics SD Optimized Sales Order Management Analytics SD Enhanced Internal Representative Role For Improved User Productivity - Cancellation reason code - Abnormal demand - Restrictions of the search for location - Super ordinate position with parts list structures - Counter of the quotient for quantity unit conversion - Denominator for the conversion of the quantities required - Base unit of measure - Counter (factor) for conversion sales unit in stores unit - Denominator (divisor) for conversion sales unit in stores unit - Goods issue date/time - Higher-level schedule line Never say no: prevent lost sales and Inventory lookup in sales, customer and employee dissatisfaction service, and operational in out-of-stock situations by providing business processes store associates with real-time and Inventory lookup current in-store inventory information integrated in other in-store across neighboring stores business processes such Get informed and keep up with as customer order competitors: perform inventory lookup management any where at any time to make Inventory lookup on instore business decisions. kiosk Optimized material search with creation and integrated supplier catalog search in sales order Detail material view with cross, up, and down-selling; availability and price information; and order history for sales order items Optimized search for sales and billing documents with advanced search engine from New PDF-based print forms for contacts/activities, mailing/campaigns, customer fact sheet, sales documents, billing documents, and invoice list Work Center Views for "Customers", "Sales", "Order Fulfillment", "Billing / Complaints" and "Prices". Powerful work lists for process and access simplification, e.g. Order Status Tracking, Delivery Due Orders, Call Off Situation of Contracts, Monitoring Individual Purchasing. Customer Cockpit which provides a holistic customer view and centralized sales transactions. Price and Availability Information with customer specific prices and ATP quantities (Available To Promise) in Improved sales order entry makes searches for materials more efficient and intuitive. Search engine from simplifies complex searches. On-the-fly creation of new materials based on supplier catalog searches allows flexible reactions to customer demand and reduces master data maintenance costs. Precise product information and a detailed history of a customer's previous orders and prices allows maintenance of a stable margin and sustains customer satisfaction. Support internal sales staff on real-time reaction to customer inquiries and complaints with centralized customer and order status information and simplified sales processes. Improved user productivity through an easy-to-use and intuitive user interface as well as quick access to personalized work lists. Improve customer satisfaction with better and

Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries IS-UT, IS-T Determination and execution of collection activities based on collection strategies IS-UT, IS-T Managing Collections Worklists IS-UT, IS-T Processing Collections Work Items IS-UT, IS-T Processing Promises to Pay IS-UT, IS-T Display addition financial information such as the last payment of a customer IS-UT, IS-T Payments at external cash desk (new Enterprise Services for integration with cash systems) different plants on one screen. faster customer service. Collection activities can be determined Reduction of custom code and executed in a flexible and dynamic requirements way based on each customer's Now standard within collection strategies for added flexibility solution Create and manage lists collections work items; track progress of work Improve collections process Better organization of the collection activities Improve cash flow Increase working capital Complete view of all work lists that Efficient collections work items are assigned to and the Better review capability for current progress of the work. collection managers Work items from a list are displayed by priority, showing all relevant information for a collector and allowing drill-down into further details when needed. The collector can add notes, update the status, resubmit, or forward a work item to another agent. The interaction center agent can Efficient collections accept a commitment from a business Better linking and record partner to pay selected receivables on keeping of promises to pay one or more specified days. from customers A promise to pay has a link to the Single view of promise to receivables that are promised to be pay and AR record paid and stores relevant details on a given promise to pay. It also provides an option to keep track of such promises and to provide evaluations that show how well a customer adhered to the promises. Target market: utilities with a large number of customers. Display addition financial information such as the last payment of a customer Greater flexibility to link to non- cash control systems IS-UT, IS-T Extract business partner Extract business partner items and items and dunning history dunning history into BI using Deltainto BI using Delta- Update Update IS-UT, IS-T Create variants for the account balance display via customizing IS-UT, IS-T Direct debit limit in the payment run Additionally to the existing sums in the account balance you can customize own balance variants In the Financial Customer Care Interaction Center functionality of CRM can now additional information of a customer be displayed (for instance last payment of the customer). Industries IS-UT, IS-T Deactivation of an When an installment plan is Expanded collection routines using outside cash systems Easy posting and clearing of AR balances using cashdesk routine

Industries installment plan affects creditworthiness IS-UT, IS-T Adjust and release cash security deposits deactivated, the credit worthiness of the business partner can be updated Release cash security deposit credits for clearing and payment Adjust cash security deposit amounts (for instance according to the consumption pattern of the customer) Industries IS-UT, IS-T Transfer open items Transfer open items from any contract accounts to the contract account to be invoiced. The posting items created from the transfer can be processed subsequently during invoicing. Industries IS-UT, IS-T Generate and process clarification cases You can create clarification cases manually or automatically in various processes of Invoicing. Contract account checks and error messages in the invoicing process can trigger the creation of a clarification case. In mass creation, the clarification case is created automatically; in individual creation, you can decide in dialog whether to create a clarification case. Clarification cases can be clarified automatically during the invoicing process. You can use clarification processing in dialog to process and complete clarification cases. A clarification worklist supports the individual selection and processing of clarification cases. Industries IS-UT, IS-T Validation check When billing documents are transferred from external billing systems using a BAPI or IDoc-interface, billing documents can be checked, identified as implausible and clarification cases can be created. During the analysis of invoicing orders, source documents can be checked and clarification cases can be created. Industries Industries IS-UT, IS-T Import billing accounts from external systems IS-UT, IS-T Import Event Detail Records from external systems Extract business partner items in Delta mode Extract dunning history in delta mode Bi content based on business partner items and dunning history Efficient import of billing accounts Integration with CRM system Import EDRs that are created in a Fast and efficient import rating system and storage of EDRs Process EDRs according to various Integration with rating categories system Comprehensive concept supports the definition of projectspecific EDR categories Use of a BAPI Industries IS-UT, IS-T Create Billing Orders Billing cycles, such as monthly on the 15th day of the month, can be used Billing orders are generated and processed by the billing process Fast and efficient creation of billing orders to enable grouping and aggregation of EDRs

Industries Industries Industries Industries IS-UT, IS-T Creation of Billing Documents IS-UT, IS-T Portal for Network Operation Manager When a billing account is billed, a Effective processing of billing period is created, which defines bills which EDRs are to be billed Integration of non-edrbased invoice components Billing in FI-CA also supports the billing of non-edr-based invoice Standard interface to component invoicing process Billing documents are forwarded to the invoicing process When a billing account is billed, a billing period is created, which defines which EDRs are to be billed. Billing in FI-CA also supports the billing of non-edr-based invoice components, such as a basic charge of a service charge Billing documents are forwarded to the invoicing process You can integrate an external system Integrated third-party to monitor telecommunications network monitoring system networks using predefined interfaces à reduced IT costs through Generation of emergency repair orders standardized interfaces for network alarms reported by the Accelerated, more efficient external network monitoring system creation and dispatching of with an automatic transfer of emergency repair orders information Improved network Rule-based dispatching of emergency availability through shorter repair orders to site technicians time to repair End-to-end business process integration Higher transparency of the overall process IS-UT, IS-T Portal for Site Technician Work list with emergency repair orders, Accelerated, more efficient scheduled maintenance orders, or processing of emergency other type of orders repair orders Processing functions for orders ( order Reduced carrying costs acceptance, rejection, deferral, change, and stranded assets and so on) Improved network GANTT chart to support order availability through shorter scheduling time to repair Easy way to confirm planned work and End-to-end business to enter or confirm unplanned work process integration (after-event recording) Higher transparency of the Access to additional functions (display overall process stock overview, check spare part availability, and request material) You can integrate an external network inventory system using predefined interfaces IS-UT, IS-T Portal for Workforce Manager Overview of the site technician team Lower operational (attendance overview, team calendar, expenditures (OpEx) by a and reminder of dates) higher degree of efficiency Key figure monitor and alert work list and productivity can be personalized Improved network Work list with open orders for the availability through shorter workforce manager team that violate time to repair defined rules (such as order rejected End-to-end business by site technician, order will violate process integration internal service level agreement within Higher transparency for a defined period, and order assigned to the overall process absent site technician) Access to personnel development of

Industries employees (appraisals, profile matchup, training, and so on) IS-UT, IS-T Integration of 3rd party Predefined interfaces within the portals systems for an easy integration of 3rd party tools and platforms (for example a network monitoring system or a network inventory system) Industries IS-UT, IS-T Telco specific BI content Emergency / maintenance orders per region, work center, employee, etc. Orders violating internal service level agreements Malfunctions by material / functional location, MTTR / MTBR for technical objects Damage and cause analysis per material, functional location, region, etc. Mean-time to repairs / Mean-time between repairs Equipments which are installed but not in-service Industries IS-UT, IS-T Network Operations - Telco specific BI content Financials FI-CAX Determination and execution of collection activities based upon collection strategies Financials FI-CAX Management of collections work lists Financials FI-CAX Processing of collections work items Financials FI-CAX Processing of promises to pay Telco specific BI content, for example: - Emergency / maintenance orders per region- Orders violating internal service level agreements- Malfunctions by material / functional location - Damage analysis per material, functional location, region, etc. ( PM)- Meantime to repairs / Mean-time between repairs ( PM)- Equipments which are installed but not in-service Collection activities can be determined and executed in a flexible and dynamic way based on each customers own collection strategies - Added flexibilty. Create and manage lists collections work items, track progress of work. Complete view of all work lists that the work items are assigned to and the current progress of the work. Work items from a list are displayed by priority, showing all relevant information for a collector and allowing drilldown into further details. The collector can add notes, update the status, resubmit, or forward a work item to another agent. The interaction center agent can accept a commitment from a business partner to pay selected receivables on one or more specified days. A promise to pay has a link to the receivables that are promised to be paid and stores relevant details of a given promise to pay. It also provides an option to keep track More detailed business insights Better business planning and decision making Improved business intelligence Reduction of custom code requirements Now standard within solution Improve collections process Better organization of collection activities Improve cash flow Increase working capital Efficient collections Better review capability for collection managers Efficient collections Better linking and record keeping for promises to pay from customers Single view of promise-topay and accounts receivable (AR) record

Financials FI-CAX Display of addition financial information, such as the last payment of a customer Financials FI-CAX Payments at External Cash Desk of such promises and to have evaluations available that show the degree to which a given customer adhered to promises. The software displays addition financial information, such as the last payment of a customer. Greater flexibility to link to non- cash control systems. Financials FI-CAX Data transfer Extract business partner items in delta mode Extract dunning history in delta mode NetWeaver Business Intelligence ( NetWeaver BI) content based on business partner items and dunning history Financials FI-CAX Create variants for the account balance display via customizing Financials FI-CAX Direct debit limit in the payment run Financials FI-CAX Deactivation of an installment plan affects creditworthiness Expanded collection routines using outside cash systems Easy posting and clearing of AR balances using cash desk routine Delta extraction is a huge performance gain Dunning history can be analyzed now You can customize your own balance A amount limit to be payed variants in addition to the existing sums by direct debit can be set in the account balance. Additional customer information, such as the last customer payment, can be shown in the financial customer care interaction center of CRM. You can update the creditworthiness of a business partner when you deactivate an installment plan. Financials FIN-SEM Multiperiod Consolidation Execute task groups and tasks for a time interval that includes multiple periods in one step: Execute task groups in the remaining periods of a consolidation cycle Block, unblock or reset tasks groups and individual tasks in the remaining periods Navigate between periods of a consolidation cycle using buttons within the consolidation monitor Financials FIN-SEM Workflow for approval for changing the task status Business Workflow is now integrated with the consolidation monitor - If the user of the consolidation monitor decides to lock a task, the task status changes to "locked - to be approved" - Approver receives a note in the inbox of the business workplace - Once approved, the status changes to "locked" - Workflow can be activated per individual task Financials FIN-SEM Restatement Adjustment of data in past periods without changing original data records and monitor status Significant reduction of time and costs for plan consolidation Reduced costs of compliance Increased transparency and documented sign-off procedure for the reported financial data of subsidiaries

Delta logic provides an efficient approach without unnecessary multiplication of data volume - For each restatement reason, you define technically independent data slices that represent the delta between actual and restated data - Data of all posting levels can be loaded or entered into such a data slice with automatic and manual data transfer procedures - Further processing in validations, currency translation, balance carry forward, and customer-defined tasks Financials FIN-SEM Web Dynpro consolidation monitor Financials FIN-SEM Reporting of the consolidation monitor status Web Dynpro-based version of the Reduced total cost of consolidation monitor. Compared with ownership ( TCO) for GUI it provides additional connecting subsidiaries features: with Web Dynpro without - Creation of automatic tasks in new local installations window Significantly facilitated - Any number of monitor layouts per handling of the system user targeting the occasional - Improved search and personalization user functions; favorites - Clear display of fixed characteristics in an individual screen area Define NetWeaver BI queries to Easy access to monitor report on the status of the consolidation status information on a monitor statistical level without Statistical reports of status: expert skills percentage of subsidiaries with status Flexible adjustment to of "error" individual needs on the Use of standard NetWeaver BI basis of NetWeaver component to create queries, reports, BI reporting and Web applications Link to NetWeaver Use in dashboards based on Portal provides an NetWeaver Visual Composer overview of the consolidation process within the daily work environment Financials FIN-SEM Automatic data transfer You can load documents with posting levels 02, 12, 20, 22 and 30 into the consolidation system so consolidation groups can now transfer and copy data. You can copy data from other consolidation areas even if the source and target consolidation area use different data models. The software now automatically transfers automatically created goodwill entries, consolidated assets, and the sequence and sorting of activities so you can use a complete set of financial data. Financials FIN-SEM Manual postings Parked documents and sample documents for manual postings - You can park documents (save them as drafts), then later reopen, finalize, and post the document. The software deletes the parked document when the

final document is posted - You can create a sample document (a template for a manual document) for frequent postings with the same line item structure. The sample document remains defined when you post a document based on the sample document. Workflow for approving manually entered documents - You can activate workflow approval by document type. You define the condition that triggers the workflow in customizing using a validation rule. - If you post a document with activated workflow, the document is set to For approval status instead of posting. The status triggers the workflow. - Each person responsible for approving documents receives a notification and can approve or reject the document, as well as add comments. Approved documents are posted. If a document is rejected, the person who entered it is notified and can either delete the document or edit it and restart the approval workflow. Financials FIN-SEM Deferred taxes The posting of deferred taxes has been simplified and enhanced: - You can choose posting items and sub items of deferred taxes in the balance sheet based on the line items and sub items in the original document - You can trigger deferred taxes with triggering items in the balance sheet, even if there is no net effect on net income. - New customizing settings are timeand version dependent, as well as global and valid for all document types. - You can suppress posting of deferred taxes even if it is activated on the document type - You can reverse debit and credit decisions made by the software Financials FIN-SEM Interunit elimination of profit in inventory Financials FIN-FSCM Dispute case attributes and linked receivable open items You can now read inventory data from the totals data base as well as from the additional financial data area. Change dispute case attributes can affect the linked receivable open line items. For example, the dunning block might be set in a dispute case to prevent the dunning letter from being sent. Reduce manual efforts in managing receivable line items and improve efficiency in collection and dispute resolution. Prevent conflict information (dunning for payment and billing disputing communication) against the same open line item from sending to customers Improve working accuracy

Financials FIN-FSCM Work center for dispute managers Financials FIN-FSCM Improved usability and work center Financials FIN-FSCM Increased flexibility for creating dispute cases Financials Corporate Services Corporate Services FIN-FSCM RE-FX Rent Adjustment Based on Cost Efficiency Analysis RE-FX Condition Split There are two views: in both bill disputing and receivable system Minimize unnecessary write-offs Consolidate all working tasks and Provides information for information for the dispute manager daily processing of dispute and specialists on one platform cases including all disputes Deliver a well-arranged view of a of a customer and crosscustomer evaluations dispute case, grouped by predefined or personalized selection criteria Increases flexibility and Select user-specific tasks and productivity by quickly navigate from the case to detailed locating tasks and processing of individual dispute cases. information by Improved log display of score customizable grouping calculation criteria You could directly initiate a simulation Improve work efficiency by of credit check for a business partner in focusing on the userspecific information and Credit Management The exposure display take into tasks and delivering account credit time horizon if defined relevant reports in real time Work center for Credit Management consolidates user specific blocked order processing, blocked business partners, processing of credit limit request, overview of all kinds of notification Credit Management offers an improved log display of score calculations. You can simulate a credit check for business partners. You can define the exposure display take into account for a credit time horizon. You can consolidates user-specific blocked order processing, blocked business partners, processing of credit limit requests, and see an overview of all notifications. You can extend dispute case attributes by adding the extra field Customer disputed amount in dispute case. You can create dispute case identified during document processing, dispute case processing, line item lists, and clearing. You can display customer disputed objects under linked objects. Within adjustment of Conditions we Compliance with local deliver a new adjustment method: Cost requirement (Germany). Efficiency Analysis (Please note: released for Germany only). Vendor view: The payment for a condition is made to several business partners with vendor accounts.

Product Development and Manufacturing Exchange of MPN between ECC and cfolders Customer view: The payment for a condition is made by several business partners with customer accounts. You define the distribution in contract processing for the Postings term on the Posting Parameters tab page. If multiple partners are assigned to the contract, then you can activate processing for the condition split by choosing Multiple Partners (Condition Split) in the Partner field. A table appears where you can enter different payment data for the different partners, such as, house bank, partner bank, payment method, dunning block. You then assign these posting terms to different conditions and activate the contracts. It is not possible to distribute conditions of the following objects: Conditions of internal contracts Conditions of rental objects Conditions of contracts in company codes where withholding tax is active Conditions of contracts that are integrated with PSCD In addition, fields that are relevant for follow-up posting are locked when a change to a field would result in followup postings. The locked fields can be processed at the request of the user. Fields that are relevant for follow-up posting are: Fields of the posting term: Partner Tax Type Tax Group Gross (indicator) Tax Jurisdiction Fields of the frequency term: Frequency Frequency In Frequency Start User-Defined Start Prorated Amount Reference Differences Calculation Method Fixed Periods Fields of the organizational assignment term: Tax Jurisdiction Fields of the condition: All fields except the term fields which do not result in follow-up postings By checking the Include Manufacturing Part Numbers checkbox in transations CFE02 and CFI02, MPNs are considered when exchanging BOMs between ECC and cfolders. Being able to publish all the information necessary for contract manufacturers (document, material, BOM, and MPN) to cfolders

Financials FI-GL Parallel accounting: ledger-group-specific posting and clearing Financials FIN-FB-XR Support for XBRL specificaton 2.1 enables the customer to set up efficient collaboration with contract manufacturers. You use this function to perform More transparency and posting and clearing in specific ledger efficiency when monitoring groups using a new transaction, which individual business is similar to existing transaction F-03 transactions. (clearing G/L account), so that no More transparency and additional training to handle the efficiency during closing. transaction is necessary. Only G/L No need to post to accounts with the corresponding flag at additional accounts to the company-code-level will allow such cover multi-gaap processing. An example for use of this requirements. transaction would be the posting of provisions (lawsuits, closing costs, and so on) at period end. With the new transaction, you can post to the same documents that are open-itemmanaged and specific to G/L account ledger (groups) with different values and amounts according to various accounting principles. Support for features of XBRL specification 2.1 Financials FI-GL Planning: cumulative You can perform manual planning for display and new interface profit centers using a cumulative for uploading plan data. display for balance sheet accounts. CO plan data (also secondary cost elements) is transferred to the new G/L. You can use a new BAPI to upload plan data into the new G/L from an external data source. Financials FIN-FB-XR Dimensional taxonomies Support of dimensional taxonomies and mapping of XBRL dimensions to fields in NetWeaver Financials FIN-FB-XR Periodic scheduling of report creation Financials FI-GL Reporting: new profit center (PC) reports and migration of classic PC reports. Definition of variants for periodic scheduling of the creation of several XBRL reports Create XBRL reports that comply with specification 2.1 More business-oriented display of the planning values. More planning flexibility and consistency. More flexibility and considerable time-savings when uploading plan data from an external file. Risk reporting of banks according to Basel II in XBRL format Automatic periodic creation of several XBRL reports In drill-down reports, you can select More transparency in terms profit center groups without any of information on profit restriction on the number of single centers and more time for values within the group. The profit decision making. Less time center group selection will be used for needed to define your own data selection and for drill-down reports because of better navigation in the selected data. standard reporting for profit Migration of classic PC reports: the centers migration tool allows selecting a source library or reports and a target library. The system analyzes which of the selected reports can be migrated (from a technical point of view) and allows migrating a set of reports, including dependent objects, such as sets, variables, and key figures. The result of the migration is logged in a persistent log.

Corporate Services Industries Industries Industries Industries Financials FI-GL Profit center: When the user wants to post a authorization check (post, document, the transaction will be clear, and display successful only if authorization is given documents). for all the profit centers involved. An additional selection criterion is offered during clearing, allowing the user to concentrate on the profit centers to be cleared. During document change and display, the system offers only the line items of the authorized profit centers. During reporting, the authorization check for profit center applies to the standard hierarchy and all alternate hierarchies. Industries Product Development and Manufacturing RE-FX Integration of RE-FX Contract with Funds Management IS-HER-CM Functional Enhancements of Student Lifecycle Management PSM-GM- GTR PSM-GM- GTR PSM-GM- GTR PSM-GM- GTR Support Funding from Multiple Sources Creation and Change of Precommitments and Forecast of Revenue Documents Creation and Change of Commitments and Forecast of Revenue Documents Support Funding from Multiple Sources PP-PI-PMA- Improvement for Users PMC Entering Data or Downloading Data from a PI Sheet Industries LO-MDS Cross-Docking Interface to External, Non- Warehouse Management System Better option for performing basic transactions in a decentralized environment. - Lease-in contracts: funds Seamless integration of management commitment can be real estate contract with created. - Lease-out contract: funds funds management for reservation can be created. - Follow-on earmarked funds process of periodic posting reduces the documents. amount of the earmarked funds document. - New functionality is embedded in an approval process that can trigger workflow. The functionality is intended to support actual implementation projects for Student Lifecycle Management Allows the grantor manager or clerk to define various funding sources that define the percentage distribution and the relevant account assignments. The functionality contained in this business function makes implementation much easier and fast, to a degree that fully satisfies end-user expectations in a typical university environment Automatically assign the requested payments and repayments to the correct budget bucket(s). Grant payments and repayments are The defined grant budget created as budget precommitments for a program is not and forecasts of revenue in funds exceeded during the management for each application. This application phase optional process is defined on a program level. Grant payments and repayments are The defined grant budget created as budget commitments and for a program is not forecasts of revenue in funds exceeded during the management for each agreement. This agreement phase optional process is defined on a program level. Allows the grantor manager or clerk to define various funding sources to define the percentage distribution and the relevant account assignments. Automatically assigns the requested payments and repayments to the correct budget bucket(s). - New printing feature - Ease of use during manufacturing execution Extends the existing interface to external, non- warehouse management systems based on BAPI and IDoc technology to support the retail-specific cross-docking process. Merchandise distribution processes are supported in case the customer has a decentralized warehouse management system

Industries Industries PSM-GM- GTR PSM-GM- GTR Industries Product PP-MRP Development and PE, PP- SFC-IS Manufacturing PSM-GM- GTR Product PP-MRP Development and PE, PP- SFC-IS Manufacturing Product PP-MRP Development and PE, PP- SFC-IS Manufacturing Automatic Creation of Funded Program Based on a CRM Program Creation and Change of Open Items in PSCD Enhancements in the Evaluations for Material Requirements Planning (PP-MRP-PE) Notification of Cleared Item and Open Item Creation from PSCD to CRM Mass Extraction of Planning Data Enhancements in the Order Information System and Mass Processing Once a grantor program is released in CRM, a corresponding funded program is automatically created in funds management. This optional process depends on the program settings. architecture. Automation of processes This is the core of grantor integration Seamless integration of between CRM and. The contractal processing with contractual obligations of the grant financial execution. agreement are defined in CRM; the final repayment and payments are created in collection and disbursement in Public for Sector as open items. The integration also provides deltahandling. If an agreement is amended, adjustment postings will be created. Adds new selection options on the Optimizes evaluation and collective display of the initial stock analysis of the supply and screen. demand situation Offers a new tab to enable the targeted selection of materials with critical ranges of coverage. Displays customer-specific selection options. Provides initial screen for collective display of MRP lists. Improves statistical evaluations in header details. Evaluates range of coverage based on material-specific limit values for stock and receipt of days' supplies. Calculates and displays the delay of sales orders on a multilevel basis. Once an open or cleared item is created or changed in PSCD, the information is sent to CRM and is available for display in the agreement and claim. Makes new report available for the extraction of planning data -- Speeds the extraction of mass data from material requirements planning -- Optimizes transfers to database tables or customer-specific applications Defines representation of detail lists in the order information system and in mass processing -- Changes list types and columns in the output lists -- Makes fields ready to accept input -- Offers new lists such ad production list and material/production version -- Enhances confirmation in mass processing -- Confirms real actual quantities in the confirmation process -- Offers order operation-related status information for the predecessor & successor operation --Provides new mass-processing functions for planned The program clerk can better understand the financial status of the contract agreement and must refer a grantee applicant to the accounting department less often. Offers better integration with non- applications Offers higher flexibility and better transparency in the order information system and in the evaluation of production processes

Industries ICM Editiing of standard contract in portal instead of customizing of ICM. Industries ICM Reading commission cases from archive Industries ICM Qualifying authorization for remuneration agreements Industries ICM additional analyse mode for determination process in ICM Industries ICM Portal Role Sales Representative Industries ICM Local Currency Conversion in ICM Sales and Service _APPL Improved Integration of Archived Bills with Business Transactions order Netweaver Portal enables you to create, change, and delete standard contracts in the consolidation system and in the productive environment. -- Portal services also allows you to work on the assignment of agreements and rules. Provides a central approach via Workcenter in NetWeaver Portal -- Speeds time-to-market for compensation plan changes -- Streamlines usage via guided procedures -- Offers high transparency for standard contract maintenance Allows user to read a specific Offers data consistency for commission case or document from the business object valuation archive during run time -- Enables info structure to index the archive file -- Easily finds the archive key and offset - - Facilitates fetching the exact commission case or document from the archive file. Facilitates authorization checks on users before any activity on performance-related agreements Enhanced determination enables: - Flexible and configurable determination process -Improved visualization of entered data structures -Thorough testing of determination settings -Simplified determination configuration -Improved visualization of result presentation New design for the Workcenter with three iview items allows sales representatives to: Mittels der grafischen Darstellung Ihrer Vergütungs- und Zahlungsansprüche erhalten Sie schnell einen Überblick über Ihre aktuellen Zahlen In der der Zielerreichungsauskunft haben Sie die Möglichkeit sich elementare und komplexe Ziele sowie deren Zielereichungsgrade anzuzeigen. Mit Hilfe der Geschäftsobjektsuche können Sie sich Ihre getätigten Abschlüsse im Einzelnen detaillierter anzeigen lassen. Offers local currency changeover framework to convert ICM currency Provides standard LCC conversion package - Creation of credit or debit memo requests on archived billing documents: when creating a sales document in reference to a billing document (transaction VA01), users can now enter an archived bill. The Improves security standards for changes on compensation plan elements Speeds configuration determination Grants high transparency of processes Supports auditibilty standards Allows sales representatives to enter the portal with only a browser Facilitates access to information -- such as personal KPI figures Complies with all legal requirements for countryspecific, currency conversion Billing documents can be archived faster because they are now accessible in business transactions

Sales and Service _APPL User Exits for Rebate- Handling Industries FS-CM Integration with external claims investigation systems Financials Financials FIN-FSCM- TRM FIN-FSCM- TRM Hedge management functionalities Amortization for Money Market instruments system searches first first in the database and then in the archive. - Improved display of billing documents: in the transaction to display billing documents (VF03), users can now display archived bills as well. The system searches first in the database and then in the archive. (The behavior is now identical to that of the transaction to display sales orders (VA03). The use of campaigns, target groups, Better handling of or product segments with CRM campaigns, target groups, causes problems within rebate or product segments in determination in for rebate processing for customers with large data volumes. customers with large data Campaigns, target groups, or product volumes. segments lead to multiple value fields and a great number of combinations for rebate determination. Technically, table VBOX, which is used in retroactive rebate agreements to find all possible relevant invoices for a rebate condition, would grow too large. The user exits in ERP rebate handling allow customers to implement a special logic for these kinds of fields and to better manage and suppress writing of the VBOX. Extends functionality and services for seamless integration with external claims investigation systems: -Identifies fraudulent claims -Sends claim data to external systems -Retrieves search results -Evaluates returned hits for fraud -Communicates based on ACORD industry standards Enables the creation of hedge relationships "Net Investment in a Foreign Subsidiary" using money market instruments as hedge instruments Allows customers to produce necessary hedge documentation Provides two additional fields to work with hedge plans: Grouping and Program Enables the choice of existing exposures from FX deal Keeps a detailed log of the Effectiveness Test Makes market data available for all hedging relationships Allows customers to add notes manually to hedge items & relationships as freetext Whenever the nominal amount of a money market transaction differs from -Speeds up claims handling via fully automatic fraud detection -Provides seamless integration with third-party fraud databases (e.g. ISO ClaimSearch, UNIWAGNIS, CUE) -Reduces claims costs by correctly identifying fraudulent claims Streamlines hedge documentation to ensure compliance Ensures availability of different prduct types to accomplish net investment hedges Allows the grouping of customer-definable fields Enables customer to add additional information to their hedge relationships Handles the amortization of money market transactions

Financials Financials Financials Industries Industries Industries Industries FIN-FSCM- TRM FIN-FSCM- TRM FIN-FSCM- TRM IS-CWM, FIN-BAC- INV IS-CWM, FIN-BAC- INV IS-CWM, FIN-BAC- INV IS-CWM, FIN-BAC- INV New product group for Commodity paper deals Relative limits New key figure modified duration is available More functions in the Inventory Display Report BAPI for materialmaster in CWM is now available Mass maintenance of Material Master supported Activity-based GR/IR clearing the payment amount (premium or in TRM discount) there may be the need of the Enables treasury amortization of the premium or department to generate discount. This functionality is correct figures for automated with this. amortization automatically Enables tracking of commodity paper Allows treasury department deals such as futures, traded options, to track, post, and evaluate and commodity forwards in treasury commodity paper deals and risk management within TRM Automates accounting for deals such Enables integration of as margin processing physical and paper Market Risk Analyzer to calculate Net commodity position via Present Values of commodity futures, partnership with TPT forwards, and options Automates accounting Via the partnership with Triple Point as entries as well as margin a front office system, customers have a processing integrated view of the physical position Calculates NPV for and paper deal side commodity paper deals with the Market Risk Analyzer Calculates Value at Risk of commodity Futures, Forwards and Options New functionality has been introduced to define and evaluate the relative limits of a portfolio. This functionality enables corporations to define limits flexibly and insurance companies to comply with regulatory processes in investment management. New key figures such as modified duration and yield to maturity have been added to the Market Risk Analyzer to analyze sensitivity of interest-rate instruments in a portfolio. - Quick branches from inventory display to reservations and other requirements - Display of fixed-bin information within inventory display A material master within a CWM system can now be maintained by means of a BAPI. Mass maintenance of Material Master in a CWM system now supports CWMspecific material master fields. Sets up limits on a relative basis for key figures in portfolios Added new key figures to calculate yield to maturity and modified duration in securities or portfolios Immediate acces to necessary information for shop-floor employees Customer do not have to develop workarounds when importing and maintaining Material Master. Mass maintenance of CWM-specific fields in Material Master is now possible. GR/IR (Goods Receipt / Invoice There is a more timely Receipt) clearing can be triggered calculation of new automatically by respective goods inventory price for movements or invoice receipts materials valuated with Reduced need to run the GR/IR valuaton procedure clearing regularly as a batch report "Moving-average Price" The posting date for GR/IR clearing when using activity-based transaction FAIP04 and respective GR/IR clearing. reports for batch runs is now More accurate determined based on the documents to determination of posting be settled, instead of on manual entry. date and period of the GR/IR clearing posting is

Industries IS-CWM, FIN-BAC- INV Dynamic Price Release Industries IS-R Services for Integration of a Partner Solution for In- Store Food Production Industries IS-R Product Lookup: Customer Ordering Process at the POS and Service Desk Analytics FIN-BA Batch Processing for Calculation Analytics FIN-BA Enhanced Copy As Behavior New price for a material is automatically released with a goods movement during the price validity period of the price. Store fresh item management (FIM) offers comprehensive management of a fresh department's data and tools to improve productivity, reduce shrink, and increase profitability. Store FIM provides scale managment, management of fresh department inventory (including perpetual inventory), shrink management tools, item forecasting and replenishment, receipe management, in-store production planning, support for meat cutting, and markdown management. The new function for product lookup can use a TREX search to find and verify a product based on different search criteria. Batch process for calculation: a user can schedule the calculation of costing structures as a background job. 1. Opportunity and project node can be copied 2. Object type (P)CE(M) can be changed while copying Analytics FIN-BA Where-Used List The where-used list allows a user to find all uses of a chosen object across different working environments. Uses of the object in structures without a working environment are also found. Human Capital Management Analytics FIN-BA Overjump Status The new functionality, status overjump, allows a status change from one status to another freely, without any limitation of the status sequence. The permitted status change is determined by the predefined status overjump table. When a status overjump is performed, proper status inheritance and status propagation follows. PY-AU-CE; PY-AT; PY- AT-PS; PY- PT-PS; PY- Australia : Retrofit of Concurrent Employment Add-On into standard Customer can manage employees with more than one contract at the same point in time in master data and time management. -- Customer can execute realized. More accurate valuation of goods movements - by making sure that available prices are taken into account. Jobs for price release are less time critical. Solving the store fresh item management challenges improves and optimizes: sales margins, inventory costs, and total bottom-line profitability Enable store associates to find and verify a product based on a short description during the customer order management business process or during other service-oriented, customerfacing business processes. Performance, background processing, and updating data automatically and periodically. 1. Opportunity and project node can be copied 2. Object type can be changed while copying (P)CE(M) The where-used list allows a user to find all uses of a chosen object across different working environments. Uses of the object in structures without a working environment are also found. The ability to change the status regardless of the sequence without loosing the status inheritance functionality in a hierachy. Status inheritance logic can be customized indirectly with status relationship customizing. Allows the management of employees with more than one contract at the same point in time in masterdata

Human Capital Management Corporate Services Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital RU; PY- NPO PY-AU-CE; PY-AT; PY- AT-PS; PY- PT-PS; PY- RU; PY- NPO _APPL; EA_APPL PY-AU-CE; PY-AT; PY- AT-PS; PY- PT-PS; PY- RU; PY- NPO PY-AU-CE; PY-AT; PY- AT-PS; PY- PT-PS; PY- RU; PY- NPO PY-AU-CE; PY-AT; PY- Austria: Retrofit of Public Sector Add-On for Austria and Pensionsreform Austria Pool Asset Managment Portugal : New HCM Public Sector solution for Portugal Russia : Introduced offcycle processes in payroll NPO : Retrofit of NPO Add-On into payroll for these employees. -- Customer can create statutory reporting for these employees. 1) "Pensionsreform": New pension calculation for pensions in public sector 2) Family allowance-calculation for orphans: This functionality was missing in the payroll for Austria 3) Subway tax: New version of subway tax calculation and better integration in payroll 4) Pension statements: A statement is sent via electronic data turn table (ELDA) in the month of retirement for pensioner. 5) Special calculation rules for garnishment: In public sector, there are special kinds of calculation necessary for garnishment 6) Tax calculation acc. 67(3) EStG for special situations like inactive periods. A virtual tax base is evaluated according to Austrian tax law. and time management -- Enables the execution of payroll for these employees -- Speeds the creation of statutory reporting for these employees Improves user experience by offering better default values in master data -- especially for payroll relevant infotypes Implements functionality for more exeptional situations in payroll calculation This new functionality supports the Supportf or this single process of managing general-purpose process of requesting assets (example: pool vehicles). A user assets. The greatest can request such a pool asset: a benefit is integration with dispatcher assigns the available assets other areas, such as to the request, sets the reservation, maintenance and financials and informs the requester. The in. The assets functionality also covers the issue and are objects in return of this assest. At the end of this that can be maintenained process, cost allocation for usage of in parallel (example: plant the asset is performed. maintenance). Customer can manage HCM public sector Portugal organizationspecific data in organizational management -- Customer can manage specific master data for public sector employees in family allowances or seniority as well as time management data. -- Customer can execute payroll for these employees including calculations for special day rates, basic salary for public sector, depending on their category, etc. -- Customer can create statutory reporting such as the public sector database, the social balance, ADSE Healthexpenses, etc. Customer can run advance payment in the middle of the month. Customer can manage non-profit organization specific data in Allows the management of HCM public sector Portugal organizationspecific data in organizational management -- Enables the management of specific master data for public sector employees -- Speeds the execution of payroll for these employees including specific features -- Enables the creation of statutory reporting Allows the running of advance payment in the middle of the month without workaround solutions. Allows the management of Non Profit Organization-

Management AT-PS; PY- PT-PS; PY- RU; PY- NPO Industries Product PP-SFC Development EXE-CON and Manufacturing Product PP-SFC Development EXE-CON and Manufacturing Product PP-SFC Development EXE-CON and Manufacturing End-User Service Delivery standard organizational management -- Customer can manage employees for NPOs in master data and time management -- Customer can execute payroll for these employees. -- Customer can create statutory reporting for these employees. ECC-DIMP FFFC for product data replication Confirmation Transactions Enable Entering and Report the Shift Inserting and Collecting Customer-Specific Data with Confirmation Transactions Splitting Quantity Fields into Subdivided Quantity Fields multiple Roles in All-in-One application components specific data in organizational management -- Enables the management of employees for NPOs -- Speeds the execution of payroll for these employees -- Enables the creation of statutory reporting for these employees PDR framework easily replicates data Optimizes data quality -- in the deployed system landscape -- Enhances business Functionality includes Form Fit and processes -- Offers better Function classes -- Ensures distribution support of processes of all material numbers in an FFFC are relevant in deployed ERP system The new feature lets you indicate the shift in which a specific confirmation was issued. Additional data can be defined in customizing; the data is displayed in the corresponding confirmation transactions. With the help of these fields, you can report the exact information related to a confirmation that you want. With customizing, you can split the quantity fields (yield, rework, and scrap) in confirmation transactions into several subdivided quantity fields. For example: instead of the single field scrap, you can define several fields for scrap. If customized accordingly, a QM notification is created automatically if a predefined subfield is filled. With the help of this information, you can track which quantities have been produced in which shifts, see which shift created the most scrap, and perform customer-specific calculations. Customers can collect additional data based on their individual needs to perform additional analytics (like calculation of overall equipment efficiency). Confirmed quantities can be differentiated. Analysis of produced quantities can be performed in detail. Faster reaction from QM personnel due to automatic creation of QM notification. The business function contains objects With this business function, that allow for simplified access to users in small and midsize existing ERP functionality: 1. Roles companies have a modern maintained in the profile generator user interface that allows (transaction PFCG). The roles offer more efficient processing access to functions and processes in of daily tasks in financials, controlling, materials accounting, controlling, management, production planning, and materials management, sales and distribution. Technically, production planning, and each area can include multiple roles sales and distribution. with different authorizations (for professional users, power users, and managers). 2. Work lists in the form of POWER lists in : POWER lists are based on the Web Dynpro development environment. POWER is an acronym for personal object work entity repository. POWER lists display objects that are assigned to a user in a role. The user can execute different

Industries Industries Industries Industries PSM-GM- GTR PSM-GM- GTR PSM-GM- GTR PSM-GM- GTR Creation or Change of Preccommitments or Forecast of Revenue Documents Creation or Change of Open Items in AP/AR Automatic Creation of a Funded Program Based on a CRM Program Notification of Creation of a Cleared Item or Open Item in AP/AR to CRM Industries PSM-FM Generation of Funds Management Master Data tasks for each object in the list. 3. Reports that are created with POWER list technology: The reports usually simpler navigation to further objects than work lists do. Grant payments and repayments are created as budget precommitments or forecast of revenue for each application in funds management. This optional process is defined on a program level. This is the core of grantor integration between CRM and. While in CRM, the contractual obligations to the grant agreement are defined and the final repayment and payments are created in AP/AR as open items. Integration also provides delta-handling. If an agreement is amended, adjustment postings will be created. Once a grantor program is released in CRM, a funded program is automatically created in funds management. This optional process depends on the program settings. Once an open item is created or changed, or a cleared item is created or changed in AP/AR, the information is sent back to CRM and is available for display in the agreement or claim. You can use the automatic creation of FM master data (RFFMMD_AUTOCREATION) report to create funds management master data (commitment item, funds center, and funded program) from FI or CO account assignment elements or change existing FM account assignments. You can use the following source data: For commitment items: G/L accounts or cost elements For funds centers: cost centers, internal orders, or WBS elements For funded programs: internal orders or WBS elements The defined grant budget for a program is not exceeded during the application phase. Seamless integration from contractal processing with financial execution. Automation of processes The program clerk can better understand the financial status of the contract agreement and must refer a grantee applicant to the accounting department less often. Supports automatic creation or changing of master data in funds management. The business function helps keep account assignments from other components (FI, CO, and project system) synchronized with funds management. Industries PSM-FM Enhanced Features of FM Derivation Tool FMDERIVE The report derives the name of the target object using the FM derivation tool based on the source object. You can use the funds management Reduced TCO because derivation tool FMDERIVE to define several users can work in derivation strategies for which groups FMDERIVE in parallel. (sets) of cost centers, cost elements, internal orders, and WBS elements are permitted as source parameters. You can use the update FM derivation rules in accordance with group change report

(RFFM_ENH_DERIVATION_TOOL) to reconstruct the rules for the derivation strategies in which groups occur as source parameters that use your values if the values of the groups have changed. Several users can now work on the same step (derivation rule) for the same derivation strategy at the same time. As a prerequisite, the various data intervals of the same rule must differ in at least one of the values of the source account assignment. Industries PSM-FM Budgeting - Allows more fields on budget documents to be changed before and after posting a document and records the changes in a change history log. - Streamlined processes: ALV functions added to the budgeting workbench; an ability to hide and display lines that are automatically generated for a budget document; improved layout for budgeting workbench sender and receiver transactions; and introduction of budget type groups for maintaining budget process configuration. Industries PSM-FM Integrate Material Reservations with FM Industries PSM-FM Plan Data Transfer to Budget and Control System Industries PSM-FM Rule-Based Account Assignment Distribution Analytics FIN-SEM- BCS Sign-off Task The new functionality will create a funds reservation document in funds management in the background when the material reservation is posted. The funds reservation will check and reserve budget. If no budget is available, standard availability control will issue a message to the user. The existing plan data transfer to the budget and control system has been enhanced to include selections for real estate sbjects. Before posting: the need to reenter preposted documents when changing their data is reduced. Layout: input can be reduced for BCS budgeting transactions. Budget type groups: several configurations take less time because of grouping budget types. Customers can now check budget when they request inventory out of stock. This function helps many public sector customers who need to check and reserve budget at the earliest possible stage. With this new functionality, budget checks can be performed on the material reservation rather than waiting until the material has been issued.. Manual processes can be eliminated. You can now use the existing rulebased account assignment tool to interventions and manual Requires fewer user generate a rule-based distribution of calculations. account assignments with the transfer of time recording to project system and controlling. You define rules that stipulate the distribution of the account assignment (COBL object) originally entered on the receiver object in time recording for the transfer. As a result, you can generate several lines with different account assignments. - Sign-off Task can be executed in the Automates the preparation, Consolidation Monitor, on consolidation review, and sign-off units or groups -- blocking all of the process with Sign-off Task previous tasks automatically, and -- Streamlines steps and triggering sign-off process. roles with Business

Industries IS-R Valuation and Collection of Retail Price Changes Analytics Analytics Financials Financials FIN-SEM- BCS FIN-SEM- BCS XX-CSC- CN; RE-FX- LC-PT Flexible upload with document approval process More compliant comment function in approval process China: interfacing with the Golden Tax System (government-owned system) XX-CSC- Portugal: flexible real CN; RE-FX- estate management LC-PT - Financial reports (in format of BW Workflow capability -- Query, plain texts, or files like Word, Block tasks in PowerPoint, Excel, PDF) can be consolidation monitor and attached for next review. -Sign-off Task triggers sign-off process -- can be finished for the consolidation Prepares financial reports unit(s) or group(s); and the task is for reviewing, commenting, blocked in the Consolidation Monitor and sign-off -- Ensures compliance through approval process The system collects and valuates all The collection of price relevant, in-scope inventory-related changes into buckets and transactions throughout the defined the usage for calculation of period by type with key information. RMA values smoothes out Key price-change transaction types margins over a season or are: markups, markup cancellations; period. For financials, markdowns (permanent, promotional, involvement of price and POS); and markdown changes effect a more cancellations. The reference point is conservative and lower the original price when the item is valuation of stock. introduced. How pricing transactions are classified in these four types affects key ratios for cumulative margin and markup percentage and gross margin percentage. In RMA, the cumulative margin and markup percentage is used to back into ending inventory and COGS at the end of the period. - Flexible upload of document function Enables same approval can trigger document approval process process for flexible upload just like manual posting function of documents as manual - Function is only enabled when flexible posting upload method is in update mode: "Do Not Modify" or "Overwrite", and Input Type "Periodic" - Comment function is enabled for status change with workflow function - Editing of saved comment in approval process is forbidden The function enables customers to create an outbound file of all VAT invoices that can then be uploaded to the external GTS system. The inbound file from the GTS system is read and the GTI number is updated back to software. More compliant approval processes. Interfacing with the Golden Tax Systems allows printing VAT invoices with no need for third-party software. The Municipal Property Tax (IMI) Comprehensive master objects are represented as parcels data for property tax from the Land Use Management (LUM) objects representing the functionality. A special IMI Data screen cadastral entries of a for the parcels displays all the relevant company. parameters of the municipal property Transparent administration tax object for every calendar year. All of property tax objects of a property tax objects of a company are company in one list. allocated to a special type of real Full chain of posting estate contract (Property Tax type) activities. whose business partner is the Ministry Handling of mass property of Finance. An IMI cockpit tool allows tax data. the generation of cash flow items for accruals and installments. Monthly accruals and the one-time or two-time

installments are posted by the Property Tax contract periodically. Industries IS-R Initial Setup of Inventory The new report ensures that all the tasks that the Legacy System Migration Workbench tool cannot cover are actually performed to provide a consistent and complete data transfer. A new report to import the original retail price from a legacy system into the software with a data file is provided. The main functionality of this report is to read the data form the file, carry out validity checks, and store the data in table WRF_ORGPRICE. Industries EA-DFPS Organizational Flexibility Enhances concept for handling operations and exercises -- Provides extra functionality for manning suggestions and assignments -- Assigns technical objects to force elements -- Handles infrastructure objects in conjunction with force elements and processes for armed forces -- Provides additional and enhanced functions to create, copy, or maintain objects or assignments in the system -- Offers additional functions for annual exercise and deployment planning Industries EA-DFPS Accounting Enhances system support via predefinition when defining cost and profit centers Integrates permit processes for profic center activation Enhances handling of accounting objects Industries IS-R Post RMA Calculation Results to General Ledger The system can now import all relevant data for switching from a legacy system to software to use the new RMA functionality, no matter what level was used for valuation in the legacy system. MBEW can be filled automatically even when there is no item cost value in the legacy system. Interacts with numerous decentralized ERP systems -- Supports autarchy processes optimally -- Improves robustness and scalability of landscapes -- Supports cross system processes better -- Streamlines integration of infrastructure Enables interaction of numerous decentralized ERP systems Offers better support of autarchy processes Improves robustness and scalability of landscapes Optimizes support of crosssystem processes Streamlines integration of infrastructures Agency business documents post the - RMA is considered a results of the RMA calculation to the more conservative G/L ending inventory at cost and at valuation (markdowns cost of goods sold. Other related FI show an affect on accounts reflect the results of the RMA valuation) calculation in NetWeaver BI. - Compliant with U.S. The location is the lowest level for GAAP and the Sarbanesposting to G/L accounts. The profit Oxley Act center concept is supported for this - Accounting clerk doesn t level. have to switch systems to Postings to financials can be carried see stock values out at the company code, distribution - Advantages of the BF chain, and site level. The system o Easy to switch from RMA monitors to ensure that postings are to cost and vice versa successful and alerts users to failures. o Advantages of RMA can Postings to the G/L can be displayed at be derived (tracking and the company code, distribution chain, calculating inventory site, and valuation level for a selected information that drives period. Double posting or counting is margins, reporting, buying, prohibited. Postings can be reversed pricing, and other and reprocessed. merchandising decisions) with or without posting to

Industries EA-DFPS Materials Management Provides autarchy capable warehouse management Supplies a deployment monitor Enhances distributed-materials management in multi-system landscapes Industries EA-DFPS Plant Maintenance and Unit (Line) Maintenance Enhances transfer of technical objects Enables short-term transfer of modifying rights for objects Creates structure documentation for maintenance purposes, in PDF format Adds flexibility to account assignment changes by maintaining accounting rules Industries EA-DFPS System architecture Provides s in user administration (role manager) Optimizes system administration for data distribution Streamlines data distribution (serveral new objects) Facilitates better archiving Financials AC New web application to select and monitor close tasklists Financials AC Tree view containing close tasks by organizational unit. Financials AC Calendar view that visualizes the close schedule, task dependencies, and status. Financials AC Logs, comments, and documentation assigned Provides the supervisor and the processor of a close task with a list of the relevant close task lists. Details of the task can be accessed from the list. Presents all close tasks in a tree structure organized by organizational unit. The individual folders can represent a controlling area, one or more company codes, or a phase or folder. Displays the status, responsible persons, and duration of each close task. Visualizes the close schedule with respect to calendar days, enabling stakeholders to see which tasks are to be performed and when, the relative duration of the tasks, dependencies between tasks, and the status of each task. Selection of tasks by phases (a new entity in close). Provides access to all system logs, error logs, documentation, and the G/L Enables interaction of numerous decentralized ERP systems Provides better support of autarchy processes Improves robustness and scalability of landscapes Optimizes support of crosssystem processes Enables interaction of numerous decentralized ERP systems Optimizes support of autarchy processes Provides better support of cross-system processes Streamlines integration of infrastructures Enables interaction of numerous decentralized ERP systems Optimizes support of autarchy processes Improves robustness and scalability of landscapes Provides better support of cross-system processes Facilitates integration of infrastructures Fast close: moves control of process from Excel workbooks and e-mails to the system, making the tasks to be performed and the progress transparent to all stakeholders (including those not actively involved in the close). Clear definition of responsibilities and visualization of progress across business units Visualization of close tasks as a calendar allows the business user to see dependencies between tasks and to identify bottlenecks. Visualization of status information allows business user to initiate remediation actions. The ultimate result is a faster close. Compliant process: internal and external auditors have

Financials AC Central Process Scheduler initiates close tasks in remote systems Industries IS-R New Selection Screen for Price Catalog Industries IS-R Full GDS Support for Retail including Sample Implementation of a Data Pool Industries IS-R Enhancements Rule Engine Financials AC Task scheduling based on factory calendar to close tasks comments relating to a close. access to all related documents. Usability: improved access to process-relevant information. Allows inclusion of remote tasks that have been created in Central Process Scheduler in the task list for the local close in ECC. Central Process Scheduler used to manage cross-system dependencies, event-based scheduling, and parallel processing. Allows central monitoring of completion of remote tasks in ECC. - The path to the maintenance screen is now reduced from three to two screens. - New entry transaction: w_sync. This transaction works in parallel with the w_pricat_maintain (old) transaction. - The selection screen includes selection possibilities on top, a folder structure at the lower left, and the details of the selected catalog at the lower right. - The maintenance groups can be assigned and changed more flexibly.. - Complete GDSN item synchronization is supported for entire message orchestration. - The GDS functionality is available for the Agentrics data pool as a sample implementation. - Subscription and notification functionality of GDS message orchestration are adjusted. - Predelivered rules in VE-Processor (Validation and Enrichment Processor). - New User Interface for the data selection including also Workflow capabilities. - Rule engine (EV processor) has an enhanced refactoring function. - Rule engine (EV processor) is enhanced with a work-list function. - A service is provided to retrieve the usage list for each element. Expedites a core business process by minimizing the wait time between close tasks. - Simplification of the user interface - More intuitive user interface - Customers can also select in a folder structure, which is more familiar to them - This functionality enables better organization because it gives better visibility and transparency - Fewer user interfaces: now only a selection and maintenance screen (formerly three) - Multiple search capability options - Good visibility of the entire process. - Efficient starting point for a GDS strategy. - Detailed business content for the integration of a GDSN-certified data pool. - Faster definition of new rules. - Better insight into the rules used. - Easier reuse of existing rules. When the task list is created for a Ensures that tasks are not specific close, the tasks are assigned scheduled at a time when to calendar days based on the key date no one will be available to and the offsets (example: payroll on support the tasks. key date -1; allocations on key date +1). This function takes account of the factory calendar to ensure that the tasks are scheduled only for working

days. Industries LE-DSD Truck Stock Visibility Truck Stock Visibility and Material Movements: - Differentiate between stock loaded on vehicles from warehouse stock - Provide inventory management for goods loaded on vehicles for tracking stock - Reflect loading, reloading, and unloading activities - Manage status of goods -- indicating "Loaded", "On Route", and so on - Track stock remaining on vehicles after unloading - Provide detailed (truck level) and aggregated (warehouse level) view of loaded goods Industries LE-DSD Loading Confirmation - A warehouse checker can count and record the loaded goods and quantities right after loading -- thus validating the match between planned and actual load. - In case of missmatches, a warehouse checker can take corrective action -- such as reloading or confirming its status. - A warehouse clerk can confirm corrective action after execution. - A Warehouse checker can seal the loaded truck and record the seal numbers as part of loading confirmation. - Counting and recording can be executed on individual material or counting group level. - Loading confirmation results are tallied during check-out and difference determination. Industries LE-DSD Lean Messages for drivers Analytics CO-OM-IS, FI-GL-IS, FI-AR-IS, FI-AP-IS, CO-PC-IS Simplified Reporting for new General Ledger - Gives material requirements planning (MRP) controllers a complete view of the inventory located in the warehouse as opposed to goods being loaded and on the way to the customer - Allows MRP controllers to view and track all goods loaded on each single vehicle at time of loading or departure and settlement - Give transportation planners overview of processing status - such as deliveries loaded or deliveries already on route Warehouse checkers easily confirm loading to ensure vehicles carry correct load. This ensures goods are delivered to customers complete and on time -- as ordered and planned. - Scheduler clerk can use messages to -Messages from Scheduler provide relevant information to drivers. Clerk are used to support - Clerk can assign messages relevant driver by providing specific to a longer period of visit plans. - tour or customer-related Messages are carried over to each visit information. - Clerks are list created from the specific visit plan. also able to guide and - One-time messages can be steer driver with adequate maintained by the scheduler clerk for advice and tasks. the visit list. - Messages can be related to a visit plan/list in general or for a specific visit. - Customer related texts can be linked to visit plans or visit lists by text determination. - Messages can be printed out as part of tour information. Simplifies reporting for new general ledger Provides ease of use -- Ensures minimal learning curve -- Supplies a consistent UI

Analytics Analytics Analytics Analytics Analytics CO-OM-IS, FI-GL-IS, FI-AR-IS, FI-AP-IS, CO-PC-IS CO-OM-IS, FI-GL-IS, FI-AR-IS, FI-AP-IS, CO-PC-IS CO-OM-IS, FI-GL-IS, FI-AR-IS, FI-AP-IS, CO-PC-IS CO-OM-IS, FI-GL-IS, FI-AR-IS, FI-AP-IS, CO-PC-IS CO-OM-IS, FI-GL-IS, FI-AR-IS, FI-AP-IS, CO-PC-IS Simplified Reporting for Accounts Payable Simplified Reporting for Accounts Receivable Simplified Reporting for Cost Center and Order Accounting Simplified Reporting for Product Costing in Maketo-Stock Environment Simplified Reporting for Product Cost Planning Industries LO-GT Condition Record Copy Within Condition Contract Industries LE-DSD Counting Groups for check-out, check-in and loading confirmation Industries LE-DSD More route accounting capabilities in Tour Data Entry Simplifies and streamlines reporting for accounts payable Simplifies and streamlines reporting for accounts receivable Simplifies and streamlines reporting for cost center and order accounting Simplifies reporting for product costing in make-to-stock environment Simplifies and streamlines reporting for product cost planning Provide copy function for a condition record within a condition contract Provides ease of use -- Ensures low learning curve -- Drives consistency Ensures ease of use -- Minimizes learning time -- Drives consistency Ensures ease of use -- Provides easy-to-learn procedures -- Drives consistency Ensures ease of use even for non-professionals Ensures ease of use Facilitated maintenance - Counting groups can be used to Checkers, warehouse group different materials according to checkers, and DSD drivers their packaging unit. can execute check-out, - The checker or driver can record the check-in or loading counting results during check-out and confirmation much faster check-in -- on a counting group or and easier. material level. - The warehouse checker can record the counting results during during loading confirmation -- on a counting group or material level. - Materials can be assigned to counting groups in the Material Master. - Settlement clerks entering the tour data manually can execute difference determination in tour data entry repeatedly before the tour gets released. Industries LE-DSD Visit Control Interfaces - It provides BAPI interfaces that connect DSD visit control to route optimization tools. - Visit plans and vist lists can be read, created, and changed. - A Scheduler Clerk can drag and drop multiple customers from one vist plan or list to another. Industries LE-DSD Improved Settlement Cockpit functionality - Settlement clerks working with the settlement cockpit can execute difference determination repeatedly before the tour gets released. - Settlement clerks need to use only one tour data entry -- no need to switch to another dialog - Enables fast and easy tour processing. It combines DSD processes with a more dynamic visit-control approach by integrating third party route optimization. Optimizes support of a settlement clerk's daily tasks.

Industries LE-DSD More flexibility and automation of Final Settlement Run Human Capital Management Human Capital Management - Settlement clerks can cancel deliveries in the settlement cockpit. - Settlement clerks can delete empty visits in the settlement cockpit. - Sales order generation can occur - Flexibly adapts settlement decoupled from the final settlement run process to support -- after the tour data is available. customer-specific - The final settlement run can be processes regarding executed as a background job -- no handling of payments and interaction from the settlement clerk. differences - Ranges for acceptable materials and - Fast processing and less payment differences are defined using need for settlement clerks tolerance groups -- that decide charges to interact in non-critical and ensure the automated settlement cases -- leading to reduced run is not interrupted. process costs and higher - Interim accounts can be defined and efficiency used to achieve separate booking logic for the various payment types, and different logic is used to charge diverse differences. - Separate methods for handling payment postings can be defined in payment type level such as credit card payments. Industries LE-DSD Tour Status Management - It provides holistic status management covering the life-cycle of a tour. - Administrators can control overall tour processing across various components -- such as loading confirmation or settlement. - Administrators can use tour status reporting to identify causes for errors during processing and take corrective action. - Can be used by settlement clerks to select tours in the settlement cockpit and for tour data entry. EP-PCT- MGR-HR EP-PCT- MGR-HR Requisition Request Form Requisition Request and Activity Monitor Through creation and maintenance of requisition requests with one or more pre-defined forms, a manager can initiate the recruitment process - Starting with necessary position and vacancy data - Through easy navigation and selection functionalities -- Including multilevel approval workflow based on organizational management -- With automated notification to the recruiting department after approval of the request Easy and quick overview of the status of a manager's requisition request: Follow-up activities like the necessary approvals, posting, and publication information The most important statistical information regarding the status of the overall recruitment cycle (like the number of incoming applications, number of rejected - Adapts tour processing logic across the various components involved - Provides first-entry-point error resolution for an administrator - Gives settlement clerks easier access to tours via tour status Manager Self-Service as a single point of entry for all HR tasks, including recruitment tasks, that managers have to perform. The user interface is easy to use and offers an option to track the most important information managers need during a recruitment cycle. Easy and quick overview of the status of a manager's requisition request: Follow-up activities like the necessary approvals, posting, and publication information The most important statistical information regarding the

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management EP-PCT- MGR-HR EP-PCT- MGR-HR Delegation and Substitution Scenario Candidate and Application Assessment (Activity Management) Industries PSM-FG Upward and Downward Adjustments Industries PSM-FG BCS Legal Enhancements: New Federal-Specific Fields Added to the BCS Header Industries Industries Industries IS-AD-MPN Uniqueness of MPN-MRP Sets IS-AD-MPN Material exchange in PO with reference to a Contract IS-AD-MPN 'BADI_ADPIC_IC_MATS - for additional applications, and so on) An option to rate and rank a candidate with regard to the available talent pool and to an existing position that a candidate has applied for Managers can define a delegate or substitute for their recruiting tasks in the event of a known absence. Easy option for hiring managers to classify a candidate in terms of the company's talent pool A quick and easy and fast option for managers to classify a candidate's application for an existing position (initiated by a manager's requisition request) A quick option to provide detailed feedback on a candidate's application to the HR department (recruitment department) Option for adjustments calculated at the document level, rather than rhe accounting line level, for net posting at the overall fund level. Added transfer agency, transfer account, and trading partner to the budgeting workbench header. If two FFF classes are merged, and they both contain MPN-MRP sets with the same name, an error message is displayed. status of the overall recruitment cycle (like the number of incoming applications, number of rejected applications, and so on) An option to rate and rank a candidate with regard to the available talent pool and to an existing position that a candidate has applied for Delegation and substitution should guarantee that a recruitment process flows without any interruption or delay because of an absent (hiring) manager. Improved efficiency and effectiveness in the overall recruiting process: *Manager can enter feedback on proposed candidates and applicants *Recruiter has immediate access to a manager's feedback and can continue the recruiting process *No media breaks in the overall process Based on configuration, the flexibility to determine the level for adjustments and the netting of adjustments could significantly reduce the number of PY adjustments reported to treasury. Users can enter these fields directly into the budget transaction without updating the derivation rules first. (Rules can still be used if desired.) Helps facilitate consitent master data. A PO-item (Purchase Order Item) is Offers consistency created with reference to a contract. If between purchase orders material exchange is carried out, and and contracts the sub items do not refer to the original contract anymore, a message is displayed to warn users that the original contract is not being referred to and updated anymore. The message is of the type: (Error, Warning, Information) and is customizable. It defines materials as interchangeable if they do not belong to an FFF class, a Optimizes flexibility in MPN functionality.

Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries interchangeable material super session chain, or a restricted interchangeability relationship. This is realized through the use of a BAdI and, when implemented, additional materials are defined as interchangeable in the implementation. It also checks whether those materials are being considered throughout the interchangeability process. IS-AD-MPN Material exchange in PM orders by ATP-Check IS-AD-MPN Material exchange in PP orders by ATP Check IS-AD-MPN Material exchange in PS orders IS-AD-MPN Material exchange in MIGO - Generic Goods Issue IS-AD-MPN Archiving of documents with a MPN link -Maintenance orders allow exchange of Allows automated material interchangeable MPN materials exchange -A screen shows those materials and (proposal/suggestion) in triggers material exchange maintenance orders. - User selects material due and fills in quantity until status is set --New component items appear for the selected materials -PP orders allow exchange of interchangeable MPN materials -A screen shows those materials and triggers material exchange - User selects material due and fills in quantity until status is set --New component items appear for the selected materials -PS orders allow exchange of interchangeable MPN materials -A screen shows those materials and triggers material exchange - User selects material due and fills in quantity until status is set --New component items appear for the selected materials Allows automated material exchange (proposal/suggestion) in PP orders. It allows automated material exchange (proposal/suggestion) in PS orders. The functionality of goods issue posting It automates material has been enhanced to allow the exchange exchange of interchangeable MPN (proposal/suggestion) in materials -- for example, when refering goods issue posting. to a PM order, STO, PP order, manually created reservation, and so on. Functionality has been enhanced to It optimizes master data prevent the archiving of documents still consistency. assigned to a restricted interchangeability relationship. IS-AD-MPN Archiving of FFF classes Functionality has been enhanced to prevent the archiving of FFF classes with members still assigned. IS-AD-MPN Archiving of Functionality has been enhanced to interchangeable materials prevent the archiving of interchangeable materials in an FFF class, restricted interchangeability relationship, or a super session chain. Offers master data consistency Offers master data consistency Industries PSM-FG Document Chain The document chain report allows entry Streamlined audit process of a document number within the orderto-cash or procure-to-pay process, and because of the document chain transaction, both related predecessor and successor documents can be displayed. Various views are available,

Industries PSM-FG Cancelled Funds: Asset Transfer Industries IS-R Inventory Lookup: Customer Ordering Process at the POS and Service Desk Human Capital Management Financials Financials PA-ER FIN-FSCM- TRM FIN-FSCM- TRM Search Using Additional Search Criteria and Operators New key figures for Portfolio Benchmarking Analytics PA-ER-SP NetWeaver BI Business Content for Succession Planning including funds management view and ledger view. The document chain feature can be accessed as a standalone transaction or can be called from the transaction register report. Extended customizing to allow Enhances the use of asset maintenance of distinct transfer-in and management and transfer-out accounts. Adjusted eliminates manual interface for intercompany transfer in adjustment postings. asset management of financial accounting to accommodate separation of accounts. The impovement can be used to transfer cancelled funds. The COM business process was enhanced with flexible and sophisticated functionality for product lookup. This functional supports starting a COM process with a product lookup, or starting a product lookup within the order entry screen. It provides users with real-time and current inventory information and available-to-promise (ATP) information for their own store and for neighboring stores. The inventory information on unrestricted use is a consolidation of the stock information from with the sales information from POS Data Management. Real-time access to the current inventory information across neighboring stores during order processing and customer service. -Recruiters are able to use all Boolean Simplifies and expedites operators, such as AND, OR, NOT and the process of finding NEAR when performing searches. candidates for positions -They can also use range operators such as GREATER THAN, >=GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO, <= LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO, or <>NOT EQUAL TO. -They can also search for candidates by the dates they last updated their profiles, the person who last updated their profiles, their IDs, and by using assigned requisition information. New key figures in the area of portfolio benchmarking have been added -- such as Jensen Ratio, Sharpe Ratio, and so on to better analyze return on portfolios via benchmarks and performance ratios. New accounting Prepares elimination of gains and functionalities for financial losses for intra-group transactions instruments Enhances the impairment process Provides valuation in monetary value for sale positions in foreign currency Customers get better insight into investment ratios like Jensen Ratio, Sharpe Ratio Meets auditing requirements Manages risk and compliance Provides fast close Provides reporting on key positions and Optimizes the quality of on successors orincumbents succession planning and respectively talent management within Monitors the number of key positions a company with or without successors according to readiness Compares key position successors and incumbents using all relevant factors

Analytics PA-ER-SP BI Business Content for Performance Management Financials Corporate Services FIN-FSCM- TRM Enhancement of listed options IS-ADEC- Service-Enabling of LBK, IS- Existing Logbook in ADEC-MEB ERP - Guarantees performance tracking and Managers and talent feedback processes within the specialists can analyze or organization compare the potential and - Optimizes comparison of potential performance of selected and performance for selected employees via tables and employees graphics - Displays the data for potential and performance in a 'Calibration Grid' - Compares any other two selected criteria groups within performance management using query functionality Supports life cycle of exchange traded options (normal style): open,close, partial close, expiration, and accounting Calculates NPV in Market Risk Analyzer The following processes are serviceenabled: Create, change, and read log entry details Complete log entry Link and unlink measurement documents to a log entry Link and unlink maintenance request to a log entry Maintain maintenance request deferral information Find log entry by technical object Industries IS-PS-CA Registering Taxpayer This feature supports single-view registration of the taxpayer. The registration can be established through multiple channels, including batch upload. The process can set up taxpayer accounts for mulitple tax types and create the filing freqency and filing obligations. Coupon books can be triggered from the registration. Industries IS-PS-CA Form-Based Tax Return Processing Allows insurance asset management department or treasury department to track, post, and evaluate listed options Logbook objects are fully service-enabled for automatic change of related objects Leverage a single, unique taxpayer identifier to lower taxpayer service costs and complexity and provide consistent service via multiple, 24x7 channels Tax agencies can use this feature to Collect money faster, validate tax return data, satisfy taxfiling obligations, and check against complexity, and lower reduce tax administration received payments. A rules engine operating costs with broad raises exceptions can calculate the tax enterprise tax and revenue liability, additional interest, and penalty. management. Tax returns with exceptions are routed Reduce TCO for creating to the appropriate tax officer. The tax forms based on system allows you to submit various Interactive Forms software types of tax returns, such as amended by Adobe, the business or joint returns. Tax liability is rules framework, and calculated by using the business rules Business Workflow. framework. Tax returns with exceptions are routed to the universal work list and assigned to a tax officer. Within the work center, the tax officer processes the tax return, resolves exceptions, and has access to taxpayer details and account balances. Industries IS-PS-CA Tax Object Processing Tax agencies can use this feature to calculate the tax liability for tax objects (vehicles and property). The business rules framework can be used to set up the calculation based on the attributes Reduced TCO for creating business rules based on the business rules framework. Support for multiple tax

of the tax object. Industries IS-PS-CA Managing Collections This process is tuned to handle highvolumes of outstanding tax liabilites and tax filing obligations. Taxpayer accounts are evaluated based on the collection strategy assigned to the taxpayer or to one or more accounts of the taxpayer. Based on taxpayer attributes and information about the outstanding debts, the collection run determines the most effective collection activity to be performed. Collection activities can be automatic tasks such as dunning letters, transfers to collection agencies, and manual tasks of collection agents. The rules used for determining collection activities can be maintained in a flexible decision tree. All taxpayer attributes and contextual information about the taxpayer can be considered. Industries IS-PS-CA Managing Collection Work Items Industries LO-GT Commodity Management: Enabling of A2A Enterprise SOA Services Industries LO-GT Commodity Management: Triple Point Technology Inc., Integration with TSW For certain taxpayer accounts, automatic reminder letters are insufficient. For those cases, the collection run can create work items, which are part of collection work lists. Collection work items may be used for outbound collection calls or handling more intensive tasks such as garnishments or bank seizures. Work lists provide collectors with a single point of access to their daily tasks. -Streamlines outbound trading-expense messages for capturing actual expense data in front-office trading system -New synchronous update service Integrates the trading and schedulers workbench (TSW) with the (GTM) trading contract -- enabling setup of commodity trading scenarios for oil and gas, including Commodity SL of partner Triple Point Technology and revenue types across the government enterprise with a standardized and configurable system. Collections management becomes more effective, relieving employees of unproductive routine activities and empowering them to take care of critical accounts personally. Uncollected debts and overdue tax filing obligations are reduced and voluntary compliance is increased. This process allows collection managers and supervisors to administer and manage daily work lists. Workload management is improved by the functionality provided with collection work lists (seasonal requirements or the need to substitute collection agents temporarily due to vacation). The determination of collectors, collection units, and collection managers can be set up flexibly, based on taxpayer attributes. The workload of the collection agent can be handled more efficiently. Triple Point and software enable visibility across the enterprise and ensure transparency for optimal portfolio management -- reducing risk, increasing financial execution, and enabling compliance for all transactions. Triple Point and software enable visibility across the enterprise and ensure transparency for optimal portfolio management -- reducing

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Procurement and Logistics Execution QM-PT, EP- Tool for Failure Mode and PCT-MAN- Effect Analysis (FMEA) QI, QM-IM, QM-QN QM-PT, EP- Control Plan PCT-MAN- QI, QM-IM, QM-QN QM-PT, EP- PCT-MAN- QI, QM-IM, QM-QN LE-IEW* Digital Signature for Lots, Samples, and Notifications Goods Issue for Direct Sales and Account Assignments Failure mode and effect analysis (FMEA): this new tool enables process and design FMEAs. It includes maintenance of functions, failure, and structure networks, actions for the prevention and detection of failures, risk priority number (RPN) calculation, FMEA forms according to VDA96 and QS9000, and online reporting and archiving. The ability to create and maintain a control plan enables closed-loop inspection planning integrated with. The control plan offers integration into the FMEA tool, QM inspection plans, and other related business objects used in the product development process. It helps customers comply with the ISO TS 16949 standard, which requires implementation of advanced product quality planning (APQP) methodology. Digital signature for quality notifications: with this new functionality, you can provide digital signatures on status changes and when performing distinct activities at the header or task level of a quality notification. Extended functions for the digital signature for inspection lots and physical samples: the latest digital signature tool has been applied to physical samples and inspection lots to allow signature strategies, multilevel signatures, more detailed documentation, and printing signature information. Allows for the creation of outbound deliveries initiated in EWM to perform direct sales and issues to a cost center without first creating documents in. risk, increasing financial execution, and enabling compliance for all transactions - Integrated solution: no data redundancy - Easy to use - Customers can decide how to structure the set of FMEAs for a process or product (where to start). - Data available for the control plan (reuse) - Reuse of existing objects and components such as failure codes and so on - Function allows customer-specific rules for calculation and so on - Integrated tool for closedloop inspection planning - Reuse of existing master and operational data such as inspection characteristics, notifications (complaints) - Flexibility of the tool - Reuse of control plan data in further inspection planning and processes - Data visibility and consistency Regulatory compliance Independence for warehouse processing while still maintaining integration to back-end functions in. Industries PSM Extension of SD Services Enterprise services for sales orders Helps facilitate a crosscomponent with Public Sector Dimensions now include public sector master data elements, like a funds management funds center. Public sector customers and cross- system sales order process, simplifes sales can use the services to build composite order processing for nonexpert applications to support the sales order process. users, and makes sales order processing more efficient and flexiible. Industries LE-DSD Enablement of further - Electronic images of handwritten Enables the storage of

Procurement and Logistics Execution LE-IEW* processes on mobile devices Expected Goods Receipts signatures related to sales orders, non-legally-binding deliveries, and invoices can be signatures with their uploaded from a mobile device. A sales related documents and representative can later display and visualizes or prints them, in print them with the respective case any issues come up. document. - Electronic images of handwritten signatures related to check-out, and check-in information can be uploaded from a mobile device. Settlement clerk can later display them in the settlement cockpit. - Unique customer identifiers like GLN can be printed as a barcode and prepared for download to a mobile device. Scanning this customer identifier can be used to initiate visit time capturing on a mobile device. - The settlement Clerk can display visit times in the settlement cockpit Goods receipt processing in EWM Flexibility. Ease of use. is based on inbound delivery documents provided by. The inbound deliveries usually represent the advanced shipping notifications (ASNs) provided by a supplier to announce that a goods issue has been performed at that supplier's warehouse, and to indicate that the goods are on the way to the receiving warehouse. Human Capital Management Human Capital Management PA-ER PA-ER Enhancements to the Search Results Screen Quick Assignment of Candidates to Talent Groups To support the EWM goods receipt functions with data on expected goods receipts, required documents are generated based on open purchase orders, scheduling agreements, and production orders. This feature provides additional Simplifies and expedites columns and functions from the search the evaluation of results screen. It enables recruiters to candidates quickly preview a candidate s resume Saves time for the more from the search result screen as well strategic aspects of as to view an excerpt of a candidate s recruiting top talent document with the matched search terms highlighted. The hit list will also include a link to the attachment to which the excerpt belongs. The results list contains a new column for candidate ID so that recruiters can quickly differentiate between candidates who may have the same first and last names. It will also allow recruiters to search for other relevant requisitions to which candidates can be assigned directly from the search results screen. This feature enables users to assign candidates to a talent group directly from the search results screen when performing general searches in the talent pool or searches within the Enables recruiters to quickly assign candidates to the appropriate talent groups and give them individualized attention

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services QM-PT, EP- Dual-Control Principle PCT-MAN- QI, QM-IM, QM-QN QM-PT, EP- Exponential Display of PCT-MAN- Specifications QI, QM-IM, QM-QN QM-PT, EP- TREX Search for PCT-MAN- Notifications QI, QM-IM, QM-QN QM-PT, EP- Quality Inspector Portal PCT-MAN- Role QI, QM-IM, QM-QN QM-PT, EP- QM Evaluation Cockpit PCT-MAN- QI, QM-IM, QM-QN Industries IS-R Enhancement of Assortment Plan Inbound Messaging, Purchasing List Industries IS-R Automatic Document Adjustement for Agency context of a talent group. Use of the dual-control principle for results recording: a result that has been recorded by one user must be processed by at least one other user for valuation and closing. Exponential display of specifications: for large numbers, the exponential display of specification limits in the results recording transaction is helpful for comparing the entered results with the specification. The TREX tool enables searching for structured data, including full text and attribute search, uses search and classification technology, and can now be applied to notifications. Adjustments for the portal role of quality inspector: the role was enhanced with new graphic types for the display of inspection results. All types of test equipment can now be displayed for an operation. Major improvements in usability and layout. Extension: enables evaluation of defects, notification tasks via flexible selection of quality notification data, flexible aggregation of data, correlation diagrams, and scatter plot and allows multilevel batch analysis. - Allows purchasing list to receive the assortment plan on an article; article and color; or article, color, and size level to start follow-on processes - Provides purchasing list with all required master data selections and purchasing list with all necessary information from Merchandise and Assortment Planning to create prepacks - Further s of purchasing list: Mass confirmation for the release of multiple articles from purchasing list. Ability to add short text for purchasing list. Option to make the purchasing list item date the goods receipt date instead of the presentation date. Integrated solution to comply with regulations. Integrated approach. Direct access to the required information. Highly improved search capabilities for notifications and all related data, which is often important for complaint management (CAPA) or general problem management. Data is no longer burried in graveyards. - Increased visibility of QM information - Process simplification - Enhanced navigation support - Flexible setup of layout and selection criteria - Data aggregation as requested - Different types of graphical views - Evaluation of archived QM data - Combined approach for lot and defects - Batch data from the entire process chain Allows assortment planner to plan targets on the assortment and on a more detailed level before releasing the plan to ERP. Depending on the process, the planner has an option to plan on the article; article and color; or article, color, and size level and then to release to planning to the purchasing list and add further information to the purchasing list for later processes (allocation and purchase order). New condition records must be taken Simplification through into account if condition master records mass maintenance

Business Documents Industries IS-R Mass Handling for NetWeaver BI Upload were changed, created, or deleted after creation of documents. The dispatcher implements parallel Process optimization jobs for NetWeaver BI recompilation for agency documents (report RMCENEUB, using transaction OLIABW). Process optimization Industries IS-R Mass Reversal In agency business, mass processing of documents is quite common. The need to schedule several jobs for a mass reversal is evident. Industries IS-R Document to Implement a Central Bank Statement Industries IS-R Mass Handling of Price Changes in Agency Business Documents Human Capital Management Human Capital Management PA-ER PA-ER In enterprises with a decentral organization and multiple subsystems, a collection of all relevant items for a central bank statement is required. Agency business provides the document to collect all positions. The pricing data can be changed after the agency business documents are created. In this case, repricing is necessary for the entire document. Process optimization Simplification New Candidate Services New candidate services: Hot Jobs, - Helps companies actively Tell-a-Friend, and Job Agents promote jobs to candidates - Hot Jobs proactively promotes - Encourages candidates to positions at a company by displaying return to a company s company jobs considered important. career site to search and - Tell-a-Friend allows external apply for jobs candidates to email third parties a link - Allows companies to to a job posting along with the job reach more candidates by description as an attachment. This is enabling the emailing of job done from the search results screen, postings the publication overview, and list of - Supports employer favorite jobs. branding - Job Agents allows candidates to set up recurring automated alerts for when positions matching their criteria become available. Candidates can define how often they wish to be informed of matching jobs and can easily opt out of receiving notifications. Support Team Enhancements - Unifies the existing user list and user - Simplifies the group concepts into one standard maintenance of support support group -- used for requisitions, teams application groups, talent groups, - Speeds system dashboards, applications, and performance agencies - Optimizes end-user - Makes it possible to add user groups satisfaction as well as individual users to support teams -- thus easing maintenance for end users and reducing the number of entries on the support team infotype - Provides a mechanism for the central administration of support groups through the administrator role - Introduces a Business Add In (BADI) and sample implementation that enables managers to more easily select a support group when creating a requisition request Human PA-ER Creating Invitation and This feature enables recruiters to - This feature enables

Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Sales and Service PA-ER PA-ER PA-ER SD-SLS Reference Activities in Mass Processing Defaulting of Job Posting Descriptions New Dashboard for Questionnaires Web Services for Resume Parsing and Background Checking Funding Data and Contract Limits create invitation activities and their corresponding reference activities for multiple candidates in one step. This function enables companies to define what information they would like to default in for job posting description texts published to internal and external job seekers. The data that is defaulted to can be pulled from texts defined in their HCM systems using a new Business Add In (BAdI). This function introduces a new dashboard for managers and recruiters. The dashboard shows new questionnaires that still need to be completed or questionnaires that have already been completed. The user can complete questionnaires directly from the dashboard itself. recruiters to quickly create invitation and reference activities en masse -- thus improving usability and end-user satisfaction. - Standardize job posting descriptions - Speed the creation of job posting descriptions with less manual intervention - Ensure protection from legal issues - Reduces time to complete questionaires - Speeds processing of questionnaires - Ensures better end-user satisfaction The resume parsing function allows - Improves candidate data candidates to easily build their profiles - Reduces candidate dropoff rates by uploading a resume which can then be parsed to fill in the profile fields with - Offers less manual the resume information. -- Resume intervention and parsing is realized using activities management of which are created in the background background check when parsing is initiated. -- A BADI requests determines the corresponding activity - Standardizes processing type. -- A service provider (default of background check vendor) is attached to the activity via requests and their customizing to establish the connection responses using NetWeaver XI. -- The background check functionality enables a recruiter to send background check requests for one or more candidates to a third-party vendor and to check on their status with a new dashboard. - Customer departments often maintain - Meet customer demands separate budgets, and contractors may and compliance be required to distribute costs requirements regarding accordingly. In advanced order allocation and processing, funding IDs are used to documentation of funding represent and allocate the budgets of sources for billable costs, individual customer departments reducing penalties for noncompliance and increasing - Basic building block to set up contracts according to the Accounting undisputed customer Classification Reference Number payments (ACRN) standard - Ability to process ACRNs - The funding information is considered will allow automated EDI during every resource-related billing processes, reducing run so that the billed amount stays invoice errors and labor for within budget manual processing - Allows definition of contract-specific - Integrated support of capping rules (limits) using standard contract limits enables pricing conditions that will also be automated validation of considered during every resourcerelated billing run. invoice errors and billable amounts, reducing - Limits can be defined on contract providing transparency into header and item level budget consumption

Industries Corporate Services SD-BIL-IV- SM EHS* User-Friendly Billing Process OH: Report Listing Health Surveillance Protocols with Overdue Control Dates Industries PSM-GPR Commitment on SRM Shopping Cart The simplification provides a guided Process simplification procedure to facilitate WIP selection, because no hand-off accrual creation, pricing decisions, and between the front office bill layout definition for resource-related and the back office is debit memo requests. required. This report provides a direct overview of employees with health surveillance protocols that have an overdue control date. Based on the results, the reponsible persons can check and initiate the necessary tasks. Example: inviting employees to the health center adhere to the health surveillance protocols. This feature records a commitment in funds management when the shopping cart in SRM is approved. Corporate PTU ERP xmam: Server- Support of automatic distribution rules Services OPS Driven Synch and Automatic Creation of Distribution Rules with customizing by DOE Industries LE-DSD Further data and flexibility - Historic sales information can be for for data exchange with extracted from Business mobile devices. Information Warehouse and prepared for download to a mobile device. - Customer and material group-based listings/exclusions can be extracted and prepared for download to a mobile device. - One xmdsd connector instance can prepare language dependent texts for download to separate mobile devices in different languages. - More flexibility in uploading data from a mobile device through improved BADI-based mapping capabilities. Industries PSM-FG Treasury Payments and Collections This report makes it easy to identify employees whose legal or companyspecific required health surveillance protocols were not followed. This feature supports compliance with public sector accounting procedures like FSIO in the United States. Improved performance and scalability Prepares and provides the required data for download to a mobile device IPAC legal changes: adjustment files Streamlined process and zero-dollar files now provided. greatly simplifies IPAC s: procedures to configuration, training utilize standard payment program and aspects, and daily payment payment medium workbench to and collection procedures. generate file formats. IPAC adjustments and Payment File Format Legal Changes: zero-dollar transaction are Enhancements for revisions to now supported. IPACed Treasury formats derivations and Consolidate US Federal Payments and generations for unmatched Collections: Procedures to utilize items is now available. standard Payment Program and Payment Workbench. Consolidated all Treasury related payments and collections (RFC payments, IPAC, and SF-1080 / SF-1081) under one standard FI payment process. Updated file formats for SPS payments. Updated IPAC formats for latest TAS and BETC reporting requirements. Industries PSM-FG Invoice Status Reporting Report to track and maintain status of vendor invoices. Both FI and LIV can be tracked in various stages. Streamlined information access.

Industries PSM-FG Enhancements to Promt Payment Act Functionality Industries PSM-FG Enhancements to Invoice Release Report Industries PSM-FG 9,999 Line Invoices in Logistic Invoice Verification Industries PSM-FG Central Contractor Registration Industries EA-PS Reimbursable Improvements Procurement and Logistics Execution LE-IEW* Batch Management Enhancements Enhancements to add new fields at the line-item level to exclude an item from PPA and to identify fast-pay items; s to invoice release report (MRBR); options for factory calendar; retention of PPA log data; and s to improper invoice functionality. The invoice release program can now analyze multiple blocked invoices against multiple goods receipts, identify which invoices are fully received, and remove the payment block. Previously, all open invoices had to be fully received before any invoices were released. Ability to post an invoice with 9,999 lines. Enhancements to the communication method and data upload tools for the central contractor register (CCR). The CCR includes the folllowing features: 1.Real-time XML/XI feature 2.Real-time point-to-point XML feature 3. Updated programs popuate new CCR tables in by using a method call Enhanced status management in sales and distribution to include funds management updates; enhanced message-handling for verification of customer down payments; and enhanced FMDERIVE for sales order commitment item. Continuous improvements to PPA functionality expand the application to ensure that payments are based on all aspects of PPA guidance: payment terms and due dates, improper invoices, interest and penalties, and so on. Allows use of the MRBR program and supports the timely payments that are required by the Prompt Payment Act. Previously valid invoices remained blocked -- resulting in assessing late penalties to federal agencies. The FI invoice still has a limitation of 999 lines, but the limitation will be transparent to the user. The system automatically creates multiple FI invoices from the LIV invoice. Continuous improvements to CCR communication tools to ensure that vendor data is accurate and up to date. A sales order approval process and workflow is now possible before updates to funds management, and the process is more consistent with the materials management update process. New messagehandling for down payments simplifies configuration and expands flexibility. Commitment item derivation improvements simplify FMDERIVE configuration. Replication of batch selection criteria Ability of warehouse Instead of running a batch personnel to work in determination in, users can EWM without having to log now replicate batch selection criteria to in to to classify EWM, where batch search and maintain batches. functionality is provided, and which is Ability to select appropriate capable of taking the warehouse layout batches closer to the actual into account. time of picking. Support of the documentary batch

Procurement and Logistics Execution LE-IEW* Goods Receipt Tolerances functionality together with EWM This function enables use of documentary batches in an integrated way with EWM. can receive documentary batches from EWM during goods receipt from external procurement and goods issue for customers for materials managed using documentary batches. In the new release, the tolerance check no longer takes place during posting in, but in EWM during goods receipt at the gate. The tolerance check in is purchasing-document based. To support a similar check in EWM, the purchasing data (purchasing quantity, tolerance data) is transferred to this system. More information transparency. Ability to reject excessive overdeliveries at time of receipt. Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution For long-term purchasing scenarios (schedule agreements), the tolerance check - based on purchasing quantity - leads to less helpful results for the latest schedules. Therefore, for scheduling agreements, the tolerance check is more appropriate at delivery level. LE-IEW* SPM Returns You can now create a return material authorization (RMA) for a return delivery. This function enables integration with Suppply Network Collaboration, which provides a Web interface for customers to pack and ship approved returns. LE-IEW* Stock Transfer Enhancements Allows adding additional items or packaging items to stock transport deliveries from within EWM. The information is then reflected in the ERP stock transport order and in the corresponding inbound delivery at the receiving warehouse. LE-IEW* Goods Issue Time Enables maintenance and visibility of the actual GI time in the outbound delivery LE-IEW* Goods Receipt from Production Initiated in EWM Inbound deliveries are created in ERP at the time manufacturing order confirmation and distributed to EWM. These inbound deliveries reflect the actual produced quantities and are used directly for putaway. Flexibility Flexiblity. Ease-of-use. Flexibility. Ease-of-use. Ease-of-use. Inbound deliveries are not created synchronously to production. Instead, a scheduled report selects relevant manufacturing orders for which planned inbound deliveries should be created. These planned inbound deliveries are only persisted in

Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution LE-IEW* LE-IEW* Support for Catchweight with EWM Enhancements for Serial Number Handling EWM, where they are used primarily for inbound delivery creation and secondarily for workload preview purposes. Only inbound deliveries can be used for warehouse processing - putaway and goods receipt posting - whereas expected goods receipts are excluded. In without catchweight Use of standard EWM management, inventory management for food industries. uses only the base unit of measure. Quantities in other units of measure are calculated using fixed conversion factors. To reduce or avoid incorrect entries completely, you can use the definition of a tolerance group to check whether the values entered by a user for the logistic quantity and parallel quantity are valid. Enhanced integration of serial number handling between and EWM: Greater flexibility for serial number handling. For the inbound process, traceability of serial numbers is enabled. With each partial goods receipt, the actual serial numbers are transferred from EWM to. For the outbound process, the handling of predetermined serial numbers is supported. The same applies in the case of a delivery split. LE-IEW* Kit to Stock The kit-to-stock process enables you to Lower inventory. Flexibility have a lean assembly process in a in use of inventory assets. decentralized warehouse managed by Improved customer EWM. This process can either be service. driven by automatic planning in ERP or APO or manual planning in EWM. Depending on where the process will be started, the integration with will be realized differently: If the process is driven by planning in or APO, production orders are used in as a basis for creating inbound and outbound deliveries. These deliveries are then distributed to EWM, where a value-added service order is created. If the process is started manually in EWM by the creation of a valueadded service order, the inbound and outbound deliveries will be replicated to. LE-IEW* Invoice Before Goods Issue This process enables you to create invoices before the actual goods issue posting is done. There are two options: Direct billing Increased flexibility in deployment.

Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Triggered from EWM, a bill is created and printed in together with GTS information Wait for billing request You can create billing documents for multiple outbound deliveries in one run and print them along with customs documents LE-IEW* Kit to Order You can use a specific sales bill of Increased flexibility in materials (BOM) type or kit in a system application deployment landscape where is connected to EWM. The kit-to-order process using a sales bill of materials in supports only part of the scope that is developed for the kit-to-order process in the full service parts management (SPM) system landscape ( CRM, ERP, EWM, and APO). LE-IEW* LE-IEW* Integration with Auto-ID Infrastructure for RFID The following processes are supported: Receive advanced shipping notification (ASN) for inbound delivery (EPCs only at handling-unit (HU) and item level) Replicate inbound delivery with EPC at HU header and item level To support RFID enabling within EWM for HUs, the incoming data must be distributed to EWM Receive EPC from EWM during goods issue (EPCs only at HU header level) To support sending the ASN, the EPC information is sent from EWM to and copied to the IDoc. The data for the outbound delivery has to be stored. Process of stock transport order (EPCs only at HU header level during goods issue) Create inbound delivery from outbound delivery including EPC data at HU header level Direct Outbound Delivery Direct outbound deliveries support Flexibility unplanned outbound deliveries and direct sales in the warehouse. You can create these deliveries for external and internal goods recipients directly in the warehouse, without having to record a sales order or stock transport order first. In EWM, you can also create packaging materials as additional items in outbound deliveries, enabling you to update the stocks of these materials using the goods issue posting of the delivery. Industries PSM-FG Period of Performance Enhanced functionality to determine and control business partners' performance dates. Developed unique Improved data flow. Transparency of inventory and load statuses. Unified and streamlined approach to control the validity of invoiced activity.

period-of-performance date fields, checking logic, and s of various document line items, such as purchase order (including service lines), sales order, earmarked funds, and expense lines on invoices. Subsequent validations ensure that actual activity occurred within the time frame. Industries PSM-FG Debt Management The new fee-schedule program allows automated calculation and posting of interest and of penalty and administrative fees. Application of payment ensures that incoming payments are applied to principal and fees according to federal regulations. Itemized bill combines the principal document and all related fees within one correspondence letter to the customer. Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services PM-EQM- SF-EM PM-EQM- SF-EM EHS* Search for Equipment or Functional Location Using Environmental Compl. Data Display and Edit Environmental Compliance Data in Plant Maintenance IHS: Flexible Assignment of Functional Location in Incident/Accident Log This feature improves integration between plant maintenance of ERP and the Environmental Compliance application. On new tab pages in the search help of equipment and functional location in plant maintenance, the user can enter environmental compliance data to be used to search for equipment or functional locations. The system then searches for facilities in the Environmental Compliance application that fulfill the search criteria and determines the equipment or functional location that has been assigned to the facility in the Environmental Compliance application. This equipment or functional location then is the search result in plant maintenance. This feature improves integration between plant maintenance of ERP and the Environmental Compliance application. The plant maintenance transactions to change and display equipment and functional locations contain a new tab page that shows important data of the facility that has been assigned to the equipment or functional location in the Environmental Compliance application. From the tab page, the user can open the facility iview of Environmental Compliance to display and change all data of the facility directly and therefore the compliance data of the equipment or functional location, because the facility contains all the compliance data of the assigned object. The Functional Location Plant field allows you to assign a functional location to an incident/accident log Streamlined process with less user intervention. Reduces the number of user errors because of missing system controls. This feature improves integration between plant maintenance of and Environmental Compliance, resulting in bidirectional integration of two applications that can leverage data for enterprise wide functions and reporting. Plant maintenance users can now use compliance and safety data to search for equipment and functional locations directly, which makes their daily work more productive and increases safety in the company. This feature improves integration between plant maintenance of and Environmental Compliance, resulting in bidirectional integration of two applications that can leverage data for enterprise wide functions and reporting. Plant maintenance users can now display and edit the assets compliance and safety data directly in their application, which makes their daily work more productive and increases safety in the company. Flexible assignment of functional locations and equipment in the

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Corporate Services PY-AU-CE; PY-AT; PY- AT-PS; PY- PT-PS; PY- RU; PY- NPO PY-AU-CE; PY-AT; PY- AT-PS; PY- PT-PS; PY- RU; PY- NPO EHS* Russia : New ESS Scenarios Russia : New Legal Reports IHS: Easier Assignment of Documents to Industrial Hygiene and Safety Objects Industries LO-MD IUID (item unique identification) support in logistical processes in ERP. Industries LO-MD IUID (item unique identification) support in purchasing and inbound logistics. Industries LO-MD IUID (item unique identification) support in sales and outbound entry regardless of the assigned work area and plant. Employees can maintain their address, personal data, bank, and familiy member information with Employee Self-Service. Allows the processing and printing of different legal forms. In addition to the functionality already available to attach documents in DMS, you can now check in new documents with DMS without leaving the current transaction. incident/accident log, independent of the work area assignment. Allows employees to maintain their address, personal data, bank information and familiy member information with Employee Self- Service. Processes and reports Awards & Disciplinary Measures -- Allows the printing of form T-54a. -- Enables the processing and printing of employee contracts -- Speeds the printing of payslips using HR Forms technology Attaching documents to work areas, risk assessments, and incident and accident log objects without leaving the current transaction and automatically triggering assignment in DVS. Defines the process steps and the Enables accuracy -- specific handling of serial numbers and Speeds tracability -- Lends UIIs (unique item identifiers) -- Includes speed and transparacy to the capability of generating UIIs -- logistics for globallyunique, identifiable items Creates a range of material/serial numbers inclusively related to UIIs -- Maintains logistical process steps -- UIIs can be defined to be either optional or mandatory in the process steps-- Decisions taken by the system are based on customizing settings and master data Meets the requirements of providing the customer with UIIs from the supplier (item unique identifiers) when the items are delivered -- Defines embedded items for which UIIS are required from the supplier -- BOM (bill of materials) can be used to automatically determine embedded items -- EDI message for the purchase order carries the information that UIIs are required. -- Provides an ASN (advanced shipping notification) inbound processing that supports UIIs. Stores information in the inbound delivery automatically during inbound processing of the message -- UII information of the inbound delivery is then used during goods receipt processing Creates a sales order at suppliers when customers require UIIs -- Supports integration with sales orders - Enables specific action for every purchased item -- Defines the need to receive UIIs from suppliers -- Offers integrated UII requirements and message-based UII handling, from purchasing to goods receipt Integrates IUID processinng with the sales process -- Includes EDI

logistics. - Creates a main item which is flagged messaging support to be IUID relevant -- Creates sub items to reflect embedded items -- Orders which carry that information can also be created manually -- Checks the material master data for IUID processing during order entry -- Relevant items are integrated into an outbound delivery -- Assigns UII (unique item identifiers) to the delivery items and to the packaging information -- ASN (advanced shipping notification) includes the UII information for main items and subitems and sends it to the supplier. Industries IS-AD-MPN Check components of a PM order against equipment configuration Industries Industries Corporate Services End-User Service Delivery Corporate Services Corporate Services IS-AD-MPN SCM maintained I&S data used in configuration check and parts installation IS-AD-MPN Automatic advice code entry for the reservation of a component of a PM order EHS* PA-ESS- XX-CE EHS* EHS* IHS: Status Check by Assignment of Work Areas Single log-on to CE/GE enabled ESS with one Portal User IHS: New Evaluation Reports IHS: Additional Selection Criteria and Output Data -Can check components of plant maintenance orders (e.g. if they are allowed to use or allowed to install superior equipment) -Evaluates material interchangeability data maintained in or SCM The configuration check in the CCM2 transcation and the permissibility check during parts installation in IE4N evalutates the parts interchangeability data maintained in SCM. When reserving a component of a PM order, an advice code can automatically be entered after rulesbased ATP (when accepting the ATP results, caused a material exchange in the component record). Enhances spare-parts management in plant maintenance orders Helps material planners check the correctness of components maintained in PM orders -Enables customers who use the SCM gatp and/or Rules-based ATP check to use I&S data in configuration and permissibility check -Allows customers use of identical I&S data maintained in SCM Provides automatic advice code entry for the reservation of a component, thus avoiding further material exchanges and processing When you assign a work area to a risk Avoidance of data assessment, an injury and illness log, inconsistencies or an incident and accident log, you can now use the status of the work area as additional selection criteria. The system issues a message for work areas that have a status of historical. Reduces administrative effort for user management Increases data transparency for multiple personnel assignements Increases data transparency The risk assessment report calculates The evaluation reports the number of risk assessments with a provide lists with detailed specific criterion, or risk assessments information, allowing you to with an overdue assessment date. The make specific evaluations IHS safety measures report displays and analyses. the safety measures with exeeded end dates. The incident and accident log report calculates the number of incidents and accidents in a specific period. You can now search by more detailed criteria to find only the relevant data: Better overview of safety measures

Corporate Services Corporate Services End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery EHS* EHS* PA-ESS- XX-CE PA-ESS- XSS of the Safety Measures Report IHS: New BAPIs in Incident and Accident Logs IHS: Functional Location Plant Manage simultaneously all aspects of several personnel assignment Enable employees to maintain foreign address data in ESS - Reference object (example: incident and accident log entry) - Safety measures category (example: technical) - Safety measures type (example: technical changes) - Priority (example: high) - Costs - Currency - Protection goal (example: avoid accident and health risks) - Planned start and end date - Execution (date) - Checks (date) - Person responsible (person) - Administrator (person) - Responsible for checks (person) - Effectiveness (example: successful) In the incident and accident log Customers can use the business object, BAPIs have been BAPIS in the incident and developed for parts of the existing accident log to build their APIs. That means that creating, own business process changing, deleting, and saving incident logic. and accident log entries have the same interface functions as BAPIs. The functional location plant field Flexible assignment of allows you to assign a functional functional locations to location to an incident and accident log incident and accident entry regardless of the assigned work area and plant. You must, therefore, populate the field for existing incident and accident log entries: use report RCBIH_X_IAL_FLPLANT_UPD. The report allows you to populate the field for all incident and accident log entries for which a functional location has been assigned, using the plant of the assigned work area. Employees can maintain their own data -Eliminates double data -- Enterprises keep consistent entry individual assignments through one -Increases data accuracy service -- Employees can maintain data -Optimizes all aspects of per personnel assignment such as to personnel assignments record work time -- Employees can -Reduces administrative maintain inactive personnel effort assignments -- Employees can access -Saves time and resources combined data through one service for strategic HR initiatives such as payroll information -- Employees can access various service offerings per personnel assignment -- Simple recognition whether one single service has been launched for one personnel assignment Enhances all current localized address -Promotes well-informed scenarios -- Allows employees to employee decisions maintain their foreign addresses -- -Eliminates routine, timeconsuming, and expensive Offers a new international address scenario based on an international administrative tasks address screen -- Helps employees -Saves time and resources maintain foreign addresses in countries for strategic HR initiatives where prior application did not support -Keeps accurate employee

End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services PA-ESS- XSS PA-ESS- XSS EHS* EHS* EHS* Customizing for Personal Information Overview screen Enhancement of ESS Personal information screens for US and Germany BD&T: Faster Secondary Data Determination; Better Performance of EH&S Expert BD&T: Improved Content Update with Open Content Connector BD&T: Lower TCO from Display of WWI Reports Without Local WWI Installation a localized solution Enhances use-case customizing for Employee Self-Service personal information screens -- Customers can decide which data to allow as retroactive and on future data maintenance -- Enhances customizing for Bizcard (brief data summary) on personal information overview screens -- Enables customers to set-up the fields they would like to display on Bizcard according to their business processes Enhances screen views for all US and DE specific personal information scenarios -- Includes additional country-specific fields for customers to view by using the NetWeaver personalization tool records -Guarantees a higher ROI -Promotes well-informed employee decisions -Eliminates routine, timeconsuming, and expensive administrative tasks -Saves time and resources for strategic HR initiatives -Keeps accurate employee records -Guarantees a higher ROI Reduces administrative tasks for maintenance of additional country-specific HR data Promotes accurate employee records Performance of expert in EH&S - Less time for secondary during secondary data determination data determination by has been improved by not saving expert in EH&S; specification data locally on the expert higher productivity of the server and by improving the processing users involved algorithms. - Less powerful hardware needed; lower hardware cost The update of EH&S content is improved by the following new open content connector features: - The substance-group concept enables content providers to group substances that have identical properties into substance groups, which results in an improved data structure that improves performance and the amount of memory space that is required during data update. - The simulation of a data update contrasts the current dataset with the dataset after an update. It is displayed in a table view. - Faster content update due to improved performance - Less powerful hardware needed; lower hardware cost - Better control of update due to an ability to simulate the update and to compare current data with updated data WWI reports can be displayed without - Because WWI having to install WWI locally on the installations are no longer front end. If WWI is not installed locally, needed on front ends to WWI reports are generated on the display WWI reports, fewer WWI server and displayed on the front WWI installations have to end using Microsoft Word. be updated after a correction in a support package or with the release of a new WWI version, resulting in lower total cost of ownership (TCO). - End users who want to display only WWI reports no longer have to worry about WWI installation on their front ends. Corporate EHS* BD&T: Inheritance - After creating an inheritance Inherited data is now

Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Direct Data Transfer and Better Visibility in Property Tree relationship or after changing source visible at the target data, the data is now visible at the immediately, so that the target immediately. The system target now displays and performs inheritance as a background uses all and only up-todate data, which increases job only if large volumes of data justify doing so. The minimum number of the reliability of the data. dependent specifications to run inheritance as a background job can be specified in customizing. New symbols on the property tree indicate whether a property contains only passed-on value assignment instances, only inherited value assignment instances, or both inherited and passed-on value assignment instances. EHS* PS: Notification Check The notification check checks to see if a product is marketable in a country according to regulations and therefore helps ensure that products and their components are not sold in countries where regulations prohibit them from being imported. To do so, the notification status is checked for positive or negative entries. The notification check is executed when saving a sales order, delivery order, and stock transfer. No quantitydependent regulatory check is carried out. EHS* EHS* EHS* PS: Support for TSCA 12B GLM: Optional Usage of Spool Management to Print Labels Using the substance volume tracking job, the system sets the TSCA 12B status for each substance. Depending on the status, a subsequent process can be started. The system displays the TSCA 12B status in the monitoring list in substance volume tracking. Global label management (GLM) now offers an option to use spool management or the GLM print process to print labels. The notification check ensures compliance with various regulations and therefore reduces the risks of fines and damage to the reputation of the company. Because the checks are carried out automatically in the logistics processes of sales, shipping, and stock transfer, processes are simplified and efforts and costs are reduced. The support for TSCA 12B ensures compliance with this regulation and therefore reduces the risks of fines and damage to the reputation of the company. Because the checks are carried out automatically in the logistics processes of sales, shipping, and stock transfer, processes are simplified and efforts and costs are reduced. With the option of using spool management to print labels in GLM, local printer installations are avoided, which reduces printer administration effort and increases return on investment (ROI). Furthermore, spool management makes label printing easier and safer, because the system can automatically determine the right printer, and the user can use spool management functions to save spooled documents. GLM: Label Preview with In global label management (GLM), the With the integration of Microsoft Word Integrated user can view labels only when Microsoft Word into the

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services EHS* EHS* EHS* EHS* into GUI GLM: Logging of Label Data Changes, User Activities, and Printing GLM: Direct Access to GLM from Logistics System GLM: Increased Accuracy and Safety in Labeling Scenarios GLM: Greater Flexibility in Labeling Scenarios Microsoft Word is integrated into GUI. The document is protected and the Word menu is disabled. This approach ensures that labels cannot be manipulated or printed. Within global label management (GLM), the system logs all changes that are made in the label data screen on the material master and all user activities and printing activities. Users can call global label management (GLM) from a second system and do not notice that they have moved to the EH&S instance on which GLM runs. In detail, the user calls the label printing transaction (CBGL_MP01) in the second system, which is usually a logistics system. The system then sends the request to EH&S and GLM runs there. The logistic data is automatically read from the calling system so, that the user does not recognize that different systems are working together. In global label management (GLM), the results of label determination can be narrowed according to the labeling scenario being used, so that a production scenario no longer shows shipment labels, for example. For manual label-data entry on scenario and label-tree screens, you can implement a list of values, check functions, and formatting functions to make sure that users enter the right values and use the correct format for the values. The assignment of a scenario group to a scenario in customizing links the scenario to its logical background and enables better reuse the logic of delivered scenarios in copies of these scenarios or in your own scenarios. Business add-ins influence the GUI as a control, users can no longer manipulate or print labels in the preview function. The requirements of the pharmaceutical industry are now met. By logging all changes of the label data on the material master, all authorized and unauthorized changes to the label definition can be tracked, leading to increased data security. The monitoring of the GLM user and print actions helps for example meet the requirements of the pharmaceutical industry for tracking of all actions in the packaging process. Users can access GLM directly from their logistics system without noticing that they have moved to the central EH&S instance. This approach improves and simplifies processes, and customerspecific developments are no longer necessary to read the logistics data from the correct logistics system. The ability to restrict the results of label determination by labeling scenario improves the contents of the label tree and prevents users from choosing the wrong labels. The ability to define a list of values, check functions, and formatting functions for label data entry improves data accuracy and prevents users from entering the wrong data. Both functions increase the safety of the labeling process. The ability to link a scenario to its logical background helps reuse the delivered scenarios better, and the customer has no need to develop proprietary logic. This

Industries program logic at the following locations: ability saves time and pre and post label determination, pre money and simplifies and post printing, and serial number implementation of GLM. definition. With the new business add-ins, customers can adapt GLM to their needs better and can implement a solution for electronic signatures during label printing. IS-AD-MPN Rules-based ATP in -A rules-based ATP check can be SCM for availability check performed for a component of a PM of components of a PM order. order -The proposal results of the RBA can be taken into the component list. -In case of material exchange or location substitution, new component records are entered and the original component record is eventually removed. Financials AC Local reconciliation Consolidates three ICR reports and transactions into one. The consolidation works only for data that needs to be reconciled within one system. Financials AC Upload and download of ICR contact data Industries Sales and Service IS-CWM, FIN-BAC- INV SD-SLS Revaluaton of Costs of Goods Sold Maintenance of Additional Contract Data and Enhanced Modification Management ICR contact database can be maintained by loading data automatically. A central contact data file can be used to fill the ICR contact database without entering the data manually. -Allows use of the SCM gatp and/or Rulesbased ATP check for PM- Orders -Enables complete functionality & features for interchangeability and supersession -Provides global ATP functionality, which uses rules-based ATP Accelerates activities within closing and preparation for consolidation provided all relevant data is in one system. Reduces manual effort. Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) in FI and Improved margin reporting, CO-PA are revaluated based on a price Cost of Goods sold are available in inventory accounting -- with reported more accurately. criteria such as material or posting date used to select the postings to be revaluated. The postings can also be applied to additional accounts in such a way that it does not affect the original postings. - Contract managers can document - Ability to meet FAR additional key attributes (pricing- and contract and billing funding-related information) that are regulations, specifically required for some contracts, regarding modification particularly government contracts. tracking and integrated - Advanced order processing allows documentation of contract contract managers to maintain details additional contract data at the header - Reduced penalties for and item levels. non-compliance - Contracts are modified on a regular - Improved operational basis. The enhanced modification efficiency. Fewer manual management function is used to track processes allow more time selected billing-relevant data, thus for analyzing invoices and ensuring compliance and auditability. contract performance Information that may be subject to (focus on customer's core modification management includes business) prices, rates, funding data, - Simplified data entry and administrative data, schedules, and maintenance with one specification data. integrated transaction results in improved data

Sales and Service Sales and Service Corporate Services Corporate Services SD-SLS SD-SLS EHS* EHS* Enhanced Resource- Related Billing Alternative Billing Structures DG: Integrating Dangerous Goods with Handling Units DG: Dynamic Classification of Dangerous Goods - Standard resource-related billing (RRB) has been enhanced so that now all the costs accrued from the start date of the contract to the billing date are priced using the latest rates, including costs that have already been billed. This is referred to as inception-to-date (ITD) billing. - The values that have already been billed (ITD billed values) are subtracted from the total, and the difference is billed to the customer. - The RRB application will be able to store and read billed amounts from previous calculations (ITD costs) on various levels of detail, including cumulated ITD. - Additional reporting capabilities in and NetWeaver BI to display billed ITD amounts at the SD document level. quality and fewer errors - Ability to meet FAR contract and billing regulations, reducing penalties for noncompliance. - Ability to use retroactive and ITD billing methodology. - High confidence of billing due to direct integration. - Speeds invoice creation and customer payment, no delay in resource expenditure to billing, and improved cash flow. - Number of invoice errors reduced, resulting in more undisputed customer payments. - The standard software uses the same - Implementing the nonwork breakdown structure (WBS) for CLIN based WBS solution project planning and billing. With the allows flexibility for contract advanced order processing application, managers to structure however, you can create an alternative projects in line with their structure for billing by assigning WBS operational management elements to multiple contract line items objectives. on a percentage basis. This alternative - Implementing the nonbilling structure is called the document CLIN based WBS solution billing structure (DBS). increases the number of - Billing WBS assignments across contracts that can be contracts and project definitions is supported by software possible. and reduces the number of - Assignments are used during RRB for legacy systems needed to the cost determination process. The maintain the contracts. alternative WBS structure decides which ratio of actual costs allocated should be pulled into the debit memo request for specific WBS elements. Master packaging data can be defined in UN listed substances or in dangerous goods. The system uses this data together with the packaging status and code that have been defined in the material master to propose the allowed dangerous goods packagings. The packagings are proposed when the user defines the packaging for materials using the handling unit functions in delivery. Packaging and mixed packing checks are also provided. Classification alternatives can be defined as dangerous goods master data. One replacing material can be defined per classification alternative, and for each replacing material, the dangerous goods master can automatically be created based on the The integration of dangerous goods functions in the processing of handling units ensures compliance with the corresponding dangerous goods regulations and therefore reduces the risk of fines and damage to the reputation of the company. The packaging process is simplified and efforts and costs are reduced. The dynamic classification provides additional flexibility in the classification of dangerous goods. Now dangerous goods can be classified after the packaging

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services EHS* EHS* EHS* DG: Support for Exceptions to Dangerous Goods Regulations data of the classification alternative. In the processing of handling units, classification alternatives can be chosen. The system then exchanges the current material with the replacement material in the dangerous goods checks and the dangerous goods documents and EDI and uses the dangerous goods data of the replacement material in these places. Dangerous goods exceptions can be defined for real substances, dangerous goods classifications, dangerous goods master records, handling unit headers, and handling unit items. Dangerous goods exceptions are evaluated at dangerous goods checks and override the check results. You can also define texts to be printed on delivery notes in case of a dangerous goods exception or complete documents that will be printed in addition to the delivery note. DG: Text Pattern Profiles Text pattern profiles and text patterns can be used to control how dangerous goods information appears on documents, depending on the regulations and the type of the document. In detail: for one regulation, several text patterns can be defined and assigned to different text pattern profiles. The text pattern profiles control which output type uses the assigned text pattern. WA: Greater Flexibility and Accuracy in Waste Quantity Update The following functions provide greater flexibility and accuracy in waste quantity updates: - In waste approvals containing additional period-based quantities, updates of these quantities and corresponding quantity checks are possible. Both can be activated to control the allowed yearly amounts of waste quantities in waste disposals. - In a disposal document, you can select a waste item that is relevant for the quantity update on the waste approval. For the quantity update, the system uses the selected waste items and the sort sequence of waste codes process and after measurements have been taken. This approach ensures compliance with the corresponding dangerous goods regulations and therefore reduces the risks of fines and damage to the reputation of the company. The packaging process is simplified and efforts and costs are reduced. The ability to define dangerous goods exceptions provides greater flexibility in the classification of dangerous goods and makes it easy to handle exceptions to dangerous goods regulations in the system. This approach ensures compliance with the corresponding dangerous goods regulations and therefore reduces the risks of fines and damage to the reputation of the company. Furthermore, processes in dangerous goods management are simplified and efforts and costs are reduced. With the ability to define several text patterns and to assign them to different text pattern profiles, different text patterns can be output on different types of documents for one regulation. This ability improves flexibility and helps meet legal requirements better. The additional periodbased quantity update and the corresponding checks improve flexibility and help meet legal requirements better. The definition of a waste item that is relevant for the quantity update makes the quantity update at the waste approval unambiguous and increases data accuracy and reliability.

Industries FS-CM External Reporting to Authorities and Organizations Industries FS-CM Integration to Document Vendor Systems on the waste approval. This approach makes the quantity update unambiguous. -Provides services for seamless external insurance reporting to authorities, directly or via intermediaries -Sends claims data to authorities (e.g. state insurance commissioner) or insurance industry organizations (e.g. NCCI, ISO) -Provides services for seamless integration of third-party document vendor solutions -Retrieves and chooses forms templates -Creates forms on vendor systems and publishes them -Archives published documents back into claims Industries FS-CM Print Claim File -Prints all or parts of electronic claims files -Based on configurable Adobe forms -Offers modes: prints one file or multiple files in one step Industries FS-CM Enhancements Role Based Performer -Improves quality, efficiency, and accuracy of state reporting -Provides flexibility when working with legal changes (e.g. frequency of reports) -Ensures high quality of data even for multiple reporting parties -Allows integrated, comfortable error handling -Improves quality, efficiency, and accuracy of customer communications -Ensures legal compliance of documents and reduces ongoing document update efforts at the carrier -Increases control over claims correspondence content -Eliminates printing costs with online viewing -Ensures having accurate and most recent data at hand in all situations -Reduces preparation time for external events (e.g. court dates) -Simplifies adjustments -Calculates org-units & persons as -Ensures faster role-based performers, based on implementation projects Organizational Change Management -Provides high flexibility for -Assigns unit members by strategies business changes automatically (e.g. workload balancing, -Allows clear and easy round robin, every member in parallel) responsibility tracking (e.g. -Ensures workload calculation for each for audit trails) member of unit -Allows reuse of Org. -Provides one-stop maintenance for Chng. Mgmt. content claims-assignment information, assignment history, and performer history Industries FS-CM New Financial Overview -Keeps all financial claims info in one place (Payments, Annuities, Reserves, Recoveries, Subrogation, Salvage) -Allows preconfigured views for overview and detailed view -Ensures simplified navigation -Accords simulation of future payment effects (resulting from annuities) on payments & reserves Industries FS-CM Portal Role for Claim Handler and Claim Center Agent -Increases accuracy of reserving -Makes informed decisions based on real-time information -Simplifies claims auditing -Provides "Insurance Claims Handler" Enables claims handlers or business package for portal role, claims center agents to including claims specific UWL organize work and track -Delivers personal object list for "my performance key figures claims" and key figure monitor based easily on analytic services, which provide real time information concerning work &

Corporate Services EHS* HSM: Flexible Hazardous Substance Check at Put- Away of Hazardous Substances Industries PSM-FM Business Process in Activity-Based Costing as Statistical Cost Object performance analysis In the flexible hazardous substance check, the system checks if the planned put-away of a hazardous substance is allowed in warehouse management. For this purpose, the system evaluates the defined check methods, other customizing data, and the hazardous substance master data. You can now specify a statistical business processes just like you can specify internal orders and work breakdown structure elements as statistical. When posting a document with CO integration, a statistical business process (CO Value type 11) can be posted in parallel to the real cost object (CO Value Type 04). Industries FS-CM Payment Improvements - Checks for duplicate payment items during payment creation - Reverses checks that have been created manually for a payment - Captures a service period for a payment - Creates a loss payment despite a coverage referral Corporate Services EHS* HSM: Ability to Display and Edit Hazardous Substance Master Data Industries FS-CM Single and Collective Invoice Improvements It is possible to display and edit hazardous substance data. The corresponding screen is mainly used to display data that is distributed to or filled in the hazardous substance master. The flexible hazardous substance check increases safety in the storage of hazardous substances and helps comply with the corresponding regulations. Extends the use of activitybased costing. Improves claims payment handling With an option to display and edit hazardous substance master data, the data can be checked and changed better, if necessary. This ability improves data accuracy. Provides for single invoice: Guarantees no double -Checks across multiple claims for payments resulting from duplicate invoice items duplicate invoice items Provides for collective invoice: - Payout and reversal of single invoices in batch processing - Loss and expenses payments - Performance improvements Industries FS-CM Recovery Improvements - Distributes a payment to receivable items - Provides detailed input help for subclaim, coverage type, and benefit type in processing of subrogation/recovery Corporate Services EHS* BD&T: New Functions to Adapt the Specification Workbench to Users' Needs Better With the following functions, the specification workbench can be better adapted to users' needs: - You can define a default search screen that the system automatically opens when the specification workbench is opened. The default setting depends on the user and transaction. - You can define a default value assignment type that the system automatically opens when a specification is selected. For every Automates distribution of incoming payments to receivable items, easing workload for claims handlers The functions to adapt the specification workbench to users' needs improve productivity of users.

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services EHS* EHS* EHS* BD&T: Usability Improvements in the Specification Workbench PS: New Evaluation Reports for Report Generation and Shipping PS: New Functions for Report Generation and Shipping Industries FS-CM Upload of benefit calculation rules from service provider specification type, one default value assignment type can be defined. - The layout of the hit list can be saved. The following functions improve the The improvements of the usability of the specification usability of the specification workbench: workbench improve - During the assignment of a document productivity of the users. using user-defined texts and documents functions, you can directly upload the document into the document management system. - Copy-and-paste for value assignment instances now behaves like spreadsheet software. - There is a new button to define the key date and change number. - You can search for specifications with exception values. - For numeric characteristics, there is a value help available for the unit of measurement that shows the text of the unit of measurement. The following new reports show if there are any problems in report generation or shipping: - Available and failed generation servers (in percent) - Number of reports in the generation queue - Number of report requests - Number of generated reports with errors - Number of rejected reports for shipping orders With the new reports, responsible persons can check for problems in report generation or shipping and react faster. This ability makes generation and shipping processes safer. The following functions improve report - Due to the enhanced generation and shipping: display of change marks, - In the display of change marks on the system now can mark reports, the system takes into account all relevant changes on the exact time of a data modification. It reports. Report recipients can also take into account data can now identify all changes that are inherited or changes on a report, such referenced. The relevant indicator can as a safety data sheet, be set for a reference or inheritance immediately. relationship. - The improvements in - You can start several actions after report generation and generation of a report and generate, shipping provide more preview, and print a report using a tool flexibility in the other than WWI. corresponding functions - In report shipping, e-mail bodies and and processes and headers can be configured using therefore increase return phrases. on investment (ROI). Uploads new or updated calculation Keeps rules for workers rules of a service provider into the compensation benefit claims management system as a basis calculation up to date with for the benefit calculation process, for less manual effort, by using line of business workers' compensation the only solution on the market which allows automatic upload of calculation rules (e.g. Workerscomp.com) Industries FS-CM Other new or extended - Performs checks with ongoing care Streamlines claim-handling

functionality Industries FS-CM Postprocessing First Report of Injury (FROI) Analytics End-User Service Delivery FIN-SEM- BCS CA-TS SEM-BCS Workflow Inbox in Webdynpro Update cprojects Detail Fields from CATS classic Industries IS-H Mandatory fields for the inpatient process Product PLM-RM Development and Manufacturing Check Compliance of Product Formulation with Defined Constraints benefits before care insurance benefit decisions are approved - Manages second injury fund benefits (US specifics) - Offers new fields for country and region of jurisdiction in the claims overview - Defines special rights in a claim influencing the payment process Correspondence: - Deactivates printing from print preview - Suppresses copy of document to agent - Triggers document template via task creation - Handles BRF value requests for all claim data - Offers performance improvements in required field check process for different lines of business If automatic claim creation via the claim Enables insurance carriers creation enterprise service runs into an to receive and process loss exceptional case (e.g. there is no clear and injury information mapping to one business partner or an electronically existing policy), the post-processing FROI scenario enables the claim center agent to handle this exception and create the claim. - A Web-based SEM-BCS workflow inbox can be navigated from notification email. - It allows various workflow instances to be triggered from within SEM-BCS: document approval workflow, monitor status change approval workflow, signoff workflow. With a pop-up in CATS, the user can update the following cprojects fields: actual start date, actual finish date, planned work, remaining work, percentage of completion, and notes. - New fields in the main transaction Clinical Process Builder for the Italian inpatient process are provided, for example "Italian Tax Number", "Local Health Ageny", "ISTAT Code", "Region" - New IMG activities are provided to support the Italian inpatient process - The new compliance check (CC) function in Recipe Management uses the compliance checking capability of EH&S to ensure that recipes, formulas, and specifications are developed in compliance with constraints. - Constraints are defined to allow checking any number of criteria. - Recipe Management compliance checks (RM CCs) will ensure that the product formulation does not exceed the limits defined by government Allows just the use of an internet browser to accomplish approval process tasks Users can enter all their time and labor data in one UI. For example, the Italian tax number can be stored as a patient attribute and can be automatically generated 1. Contribute to shortening the time-to-market for new and reformulated products by dramatically reducing the amount of time required to perform compliance checks and approve new products. 2. Reduce the number of resources required to ensure product compliance. 3. Ensure the accuracy of

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management PA-ER PA-ER PA-ER PA-ER Search for Jobs Using Time Periods Instead of Calendar Dates (WebDynpro) Saving Search Results When Searching Within a Requisition Business Add-In for Duplication Check Flexibilization of the Requisition Tab "Organizational Data" Industries LO-MD Ability to use UII as reference object during maintenance processes agencies regarding content of compliance-check results. controlled substances. 4. Automate and improve - RM CCs will also be used to ensure the effectiveness of that a product meets necessary goals substantiating claims made for nutritional content or religious about a product's restrictions. performance or benefits. - RM CCs include a capability to define and substantiate claims made for a product concerning its chemical, nutritional, or dietary composition. This feature enables candidates to - Simplifies search screen select values instead of using the used by candidates looking calendar date selection when for jobs searching for jobs using the Web - Reduces candidate dropoff rates Dynpro candidate pages. -- The 'Employment start date' and 'Publication date' fields are rendered as dropdown lists instead of date selection. -- Lists contain values such as "Yesterday", "Last week", "Last Month" and so on for the publication date. -- For the employee start date, values such as "Next week", Next Month" and so on occur. A new Business Add-In (BAdI) has been provided to make it possible to log the list candidates found when searching through a requisition. -- The list of candidates found is only logged if the recruiter assigns at least one candidate on the hit list to the selected requisition. -- As the list of candidates found may become very long, the default BAdI implementation only considers the first fifty candidates on the hit list. Allows companies to store search data properly in case of legal audit Ensures legal compliance This feature introduces a Enables duplicate checking BusinessAddIn (BAdI) that allows through a BADI and gives companies to define which criteria they companies the flexibility wish to use to determine whether a they need to define what candidate has a duplicate application in constitutes a duplicate the database. This check is only candidate. performed on non-registered external candidates. The fallback mechanism to check for duplicates is first name, last name, and e-mail address. This feature enables customers to hide the "Positions", "Organizational Unit and Job", and "Account Assignment" tabstrips in the"organizational Data" container item through flexibilization customizing. Enables use of UII during processing of maintenance -- Allows engineers to identify parts by scanning the UII barcode Simplifies maintenance of the requisition Ensures better data on the requistion Minimizes the number of errors during data capture in maintenance processing -- Ensures a close connection between physical parts and associated data -- Handles association even beyond the life-time of the part --

Industries Industries LO-MD Register IUIDs in the U.S. Department of Defense IUID Registry IS-AD-MPN Material exchange using SCM maintained I&S data in MIGO Industries FS-CD New Informationscontainer Industries FS-CD Broker Report Processing with Web Applications Industries FS-CD Integration with Business Intelligence Easily extracts IUID information -- Sends information in accordance with U.S. DoD Registry. Includes main item UIIs and embedded items hierarchy. The material exchange function in MIGO uses material interchangeability data maintained in SCM. It is thus available for posting goods issue for orders, for stock transport orders, for reservations, and for posting goods receipts for purchase orders -- but not for stock transport orders. Optimizes quality control Streamlines extracting information directly out of enhanced systems -- Automates the gathering of IUID data -- Ensures high accuracy of data Allows material exchange function in MIGO to use the same I&S data as SCM uses in rules-based ATP -- for stock transport orders or for plant maintenance ECC 6.0, Industry Extension Enables information for Insurance, Enhancement Package 3, surrounding solutions which includes a follow-up framework regarding exceptions within for the information container in FS-CD Collections and Disbursements, has the following advantages: -It easily deals with mass data and enables the sending of message bundles -The new framework also optimizes information on a customer-specific and modification-free basis -It speeds the development of company-specific information Broker and insurance processors can now also process broker reports with web applications.the system now employs an easy-to-use confirmation principle. After receiving correspondence from an insurance company about the creation of a new broker report, the broker can use a portal to log on to the Web Dynpro applications for broker report processing. Extraction of Business Partner Items: Customers can now extract all business items, both real and statistical, for evaluation in NetWeaver Business Intelligence. The extraction can be run as a full update, delta initialization, or delta update. Extraction of Dunning History and Dunning Activities: Customers can also extract all dunning headers, dunning items, and dunning activities for the evaluation of dunning notices in NetWeaver BI. The extraction takes place with the dunning run and can be run as a full update, delta initialization, or delta update. Industries FS-CD Archiving New Archiving Objects include: Promise to Pay, External Payment Information, Totals Records for External Payment Information, Provides Web access for brokers and agents to reduce paperwork and increase efficiency -Provides business intelligence content for business partner items and dunning history -Reduces performance upload when providing business information about insurance customers Improves archiving performance

Collection Work list, Collection Work Item, and Information Container. Enhancements for Archiving include: Business Partner Archiving, Archiving of Dunning History, Document Archiving, Insurance Object, Payment Plan, and Broker Report. Industries FS-CD Benefit-Free Periods Speeds sending of information about benefit-free periods with the service interface -- Provides insurance contract benefit-free period through insurance contract ID and claim period -- Ensures that query response insurance benefitfree periods can occur for an insurance contract if open items with a due date in the past are dunned, and dunning levels are defined in customizing Industries FS-CD Provisional Premium Receivables Suitable for Clearing Enables integration with calculating systems and external solutions Automatically clears provisional Increases flexibility and premium receivables with FS-CD -- success in provisional Handles complicated insurance premium receivables policies, where it is not possible to directly calculate the premium amount, by having customer pay an estimated amount -- Can also estimate the premium amount more than once and have the more recent estimate replace the older one -- Automatically clears down payments that have already been made with the current estimate -- Correctly calculates the premium amount so the system delivers a corresponding G/L-relevant premium receivable to collections and disbursements -- Replaces the provisional estimates and any down payments that may have been made and then clears them automatically with the premium receivable Industries FS-CD Concluding Operations Foreign Currency Valuation: Customers can assign a ledger group to a valuation area -- Adjustment documents created are assigned to a ledger group as far as possible -- Where there is a 1:1 assignment between valuation area and ledger group, you no longer have to define separate adjustment accounts per valuation area -- The Ledger Group importing parameter has been added to the interface of event 0580 -- Transaction FPW2 for displaying the log records also displays the ledger group (see menu: Periodic Processing -> Closing Preparations -> Foreign Currency Valuation) Industries FS-CD Dunning in FS-CD -Streamlines dunning by using optimal collection strategy for insurance companies -Dunning procedures remain open to further strategy Increase flexibility in concluding operations Increases flexibility and success in dunning procedures Industries FS-CD Coinsurance Includes main transactions and sub- Increases flexibility in

Enhancements Industries FS-CD Integration with Customer Relationship Management Industries FS-CD Tax Calculation for Interest Revenue from Deposit Contracts Industries FS-CD Enhancement Payment Plan transactions in the reporting function coinsurance procedures for coinsurance using the debit procedure -- When a coinsurancerelevant document contains at least one business partner item with appropriately-defined company code and main & sub transactions, the system deals with the document using the debit procedure and overwrites the credit procedure defined for the corresponding coinsurance key -- When handling coinsurance-relevant statistical items coinsurance reporting is able to process shares for statistical items from category 'G' (other statistical charges) that are delivered by the payment plan interface Displays information in Financial -Increases flexibility Customer Care, such as last customer -Reduces business payment -- Information is displayed process costs using function modules registered in -Increases customer customizing -- Determines the satisfaction necessary data in FI-CA through function module assigned to CRM profiles Includes the withholding tax module Easily fulfills all legal (CYT) for the taxation of capital requirements revenue in balance interest calculation for FS-CD -- Balances interest calculation for FS-CD, including the calculation of interest revenue for deposits -- Handles legal conditions and tax laws internationally -- Checks exemption applications for the recipient business partner and perform an update in FS-CD by deducting the capital yield tax if the exemption is exceeded -- Provides integration with the withholding tax module, enabling such tasks to be performed Payment plan interface now includes Ensures integration with ledger group and value date fields and operational system and passes these on to the G/L item for the New Gl documents produced -- It also includes reference transaction, reference key, and logical system fields for original document and passes them on to the document header to identify reference transactions in operational systems -- Payment plan interface can now be used to enter coinsurance supplements that belong to a payment plan item -- System now generates appropriate general ledger items for the coinsurance data during document creation Industries ICM Portfolio Assignment Handles in-force business for all insurance contracts and customers -- Splits work into various segments according to relevant criteria -- Includes applied criteria for region, product/line Allows administration of information in portfolio assignment for any given object Facilitates independent hosting for

of business, customer group, and so on lifecycle of objects --Assigns relevant work to an agent -- Facilitates new assignments or transfers when agents leave the company or new agents join Industries FS-CD Quotation Monitoring Informs external systems whether a customer has accepted a quotation for an amount change -- Levies a specific amount or percentage rate on the premium within defined periods -- Allows customer to accept or refuse quotation -- Arranges payment terms for the quotation upon acceptance -- Handles time limit on payments Industries FS-CD Promise to pay Handles promise to pay from a business partner -- Ensures promise to pay definitions and dates -- Streamlines payments in the form of debit memos or direct debits -- Takes care of adding any charges and interest on late payments Industries ICM Credentialing Enables all types of credentials to be defined -- Streamlines processing and checking of credential assignment information for business partners -- Provides services to support exchange of assignment information from or to officials -- Speeds checking of credential assignment information during runtime of other processes Industries ICM Additiional Improvements Advanced functionality improvements include: -Actual commissions -Periods, closing, settlement -Guarantees -Reserves -Main menu for roles -ICM package concept -Statistical tool for admins -Correspondence in PDF format -Run administration - Credential checks in ICM - Liability - Clear test data Industries Industries ICM List of features A complete list of improvements can be found in the BF: EA_ICM_CRD_CORE_01 EA_ICM_PFO_CORE_01 EA_ICM_ICM_CORE_01 Procurement and Logistics IS-HER-CM IAP Functional Enhancements of Student Lifecycle Management LE-IEW* Change Delivery Based on Changes to SD Easily handles business request for integration of policy processes and FS- CD -Reduces business process costs -Increases customer satisfaction -Enables financial customer care scenarios -Speeds customer interaction via self-services Provides needed services in credentialing -- Streamlines complying with legal requirements -- Guarantees high quality standards -- Ensures best results for process outputs Better support of business processes through advanced functionality A complete list of benefits can be found in the BF: EA_ICM_CRD_CORE_01 EA_ICM_PFO_CORE_01 EA_ICM_ICM_CORE_01 UI role for student academic advisor is The functionality contained provided. It allows users to monitor the in this business function students assigned to them as advisees. makes implementation much easier and faster, to a degree that fully satisfies end-user expectations in a typical university environment For an (SD) sales order item, one or more deliveries may be created and Improved customer service. Reduction of

Execution Document distributed to EWM for further manual processing processing. The order quantity remains (example: phone calls). open for changes. If the order item quantity falls below the delivery quantity, a change request is sent to the processing warehouse system ( EWM). The warehouse system may accept the change with a confirmation to update the delivery quantity in. However, if the delivery update is rejected by EWM, a workflow item can be triggered in for a manual conflict resolution for the sales order. Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Industries Industries Industries LE-IEW* LE-IEW* MM-PUR, MM-IV, MM-IM, MM-SRV MM-PUR, MM-IV, MM-IM, MM-SRV MM-PUR, MM-IV, MM-IM, MM-SRV Goods Receipt Without Reference in EWM GI with Account Assignment Support Replication of PPS POs with Hierarchical Structures to the PO in Display PO with Hierarchical Line Item Structure Allow Entry of a GR Referring to the Hierarchical Line Item Number For delivery items sent from an Flexibility. Improved data external warehouse where the integrity. reference document is missing, purchase orders will be created by the system in the background. There is a new authority check available for this functionality. If the creation is permitted and activated, a new purchase order for all items of this delivery with a missing predecessor document will be created, except for packaging material items. Accounting information from Swifter processing. Better can be transferred to EWM, which financial data on internal uses the information in the context of consumption. goods issue, direct sales, and warehouse-internal consumption to read the standard account assignment categories (AACs) of cost center, order, and WBS element. In addition to the standard AACs in, customers can add their own AACs. In the extended classic scenario, the PO is replicated from SRM to ERP. The BAPI that creates the PO in is now capable of handling the hierarchical structure that is maintained in the PO in SRM. That includes replication of functional and informational line items, material and service line items, the hierarchical line item number, and the position of a line item within the hierarchy. The BAPI creates an appropriate line item in the PO in for each line or subline item. The capability of supporting complex procurement documents within. Transaction ME21N can display a The customer can view replicated PO with hierarchical line item and utilize a complex PO structure. The hierarchical line item from PPS with heirarchical number is visible and the line items are items for follow-on displayed in the correct hierarchical processes in extended sequence. Navigation allows use of the classic mode. hierarchical line item number. The hierarchical line item number can be used as reference when entering a goods receipt in transaction MIGO. The ability to enter a goods receipt for complex item heirarchies.

Industries Industries MM-PUR, MM-IV, MM-IM, MM-SRV MM-PUR, MM-IV, MM-IM, MM-SRV Entry of a Service Entry Sheet Referring to the Hierarchical Line Item Number Allow Entry of an IR Refering to the Hierarchical Line Item Number In transaction ML81N, the hierarchical line item number can be used as reference when entering a service entry sheet. In transaction MIRO, the hierarchical line item number can be used as reference when entering an invoice. Industries PSM-GPR Period of Performance This functionality allows the user to enter a period of performance (PEROP) on an procurement document in SRM. The PEROP can be used with back-end processing of a goods receipt and an invoice receipt. System messages are configured as warnings or errors if GR and IR are posted outside of the PEROP dates for the PO line item. Industries PSM-GPR Prompt Pay Acceptance Period Industries PSM-GPR Prompt Pay Enhancements Industries Analytics Analytics PSM-GPR, MM-PUR, MM-IV, MM-IM FIN-SEM- BCS FIN-SEM- BCS Follow-On Processes for Complex Pricing Arrangements Portal content for Local and Corporate Accountant Monitors Include XBRL functions supporting standard 2.1 Industries PSM-EC Retroactive Assignment of Expenses to Funding Buckets This functionality allows acceptance of the PO line item to occur within the specified period for the active validations. This functionality allows a user to identify a PPS procurement document line item as fast pay and have the fast pay capabilities of funds managementthat handle follow-up for the PO. This features enables the customer to create service entry sheets for complex item heirarchies. The customer can create an invoice for complex item heirarchies. This features alllows a customer to implement stringent controls in receiving and invoicing processes. This features enables customers to comply with the acceptance period requirements of the Prompt Payment Act. Compliance with fast pay regulations This feature enables receipts (via a Customers who write service entry sheet) and invoices complex contractual against complex pricing arrangements. arrangements (not just The pricing arrangements may cosist of fixed-priced items) may an estimated cost, base, incentive, and use the extended classic an award fee. This feature also scenario of PPS for followon document processing. provides validation checks against maximum fees and ceiling amounts identified in the PPS purchase order. Provides worksets and iviews for local accountant monitor and corporate accountant monitor Includes the new XBRL functions supporting standard 2.1 directly in the SEM-BCS workbench - Allows local accountant monitor and corporate accountant monitor to be added to NetWeaver Portal as worksets - Enables their use in NetWeaver Business Client Supports new XBRL functions using standard 2.1 that can be accessed from the SEM-BCS workbench Derivation of financing source and Enhancement to, assignment of expenditure line where account items.the original account assignments must be assignments in the expenditure made during posting. document will not be changed, but the expense will be mapped to one or more funding options. Accounting standards and period-end closing operations are not harmed. Industries PSM-EC Automatic Evaluation of For each project (operation), the Automatic instead of

Available and Preferred Funding Industries PSM-EC Calculation of Eligible Expenditure Amounts with Taxes and Other Funding Industries PSM-EC Different Methods for Calculation of Sponsor's Contribution Industries PSM-EC Rework of Proposed Expenditure Certification Industries Industries Industries PSM-GM- GTE PSM-GM- GTE PSM-GM- GTE GM Budget Splitting Rule Enhancement Subtractive Cost-Sharing Method IDC Calculation from and to Grantee's Contribution system reads a list of preferred funding manual evaluation and checks the availability of the funds. The system applies different methods of deducting the non-eligible portion of the expense line item and allocates it to the financing source. It also considers whether a part of the expense has already been assigned to the same or different funding. It also evaluates the eligibility of tax amounts. Reduce manual workload Consider cofunding Option to split expenses across several sponsors and funding options Evaluate tax handling The system calculates the contribution Many automated checks from a financing source as a and a variety of calculation percentage of the eligible expenditure. algorithms reduce the If a financing source is exhausted or manual workload. not applicable, the system tries to find a different source. In a cofunding situation, the system evaluates how the different financing sources relate to one another. Some complement each other, others are used in addition or simply pay for the uncovered expenses. The system also prevents the calculated contribution from exceeding the allowed limit. The system proposes a list of expense line items along with the given financing source and the calculated contribution. The proposal list is optimized in the sense that the algorithm has found available and bestpossible funding. The user can directly accept this proposal or, if desired, make manual changes, such as excluding a line item. A trace functionality about the calculation of the eligible amount and access to the original line item is also provided. Before saving the expenditure statement in a final version, a separation-of-duties approval process can be launched. The new function automatically creates budget validity periods for yearly time slices. The first time slice starts with the grant valid-from date and ends after 12 months. The next time slice starts at the grant valid-from date plus one year. This cost-sharing method relates to how cost sharing is calculated in the budgeting workbench and considers how cost sharing relates to the total budget (external and internal funds) instead of only external funds. IDC expense and recovery posting is based on IDC-relevant postings to the grant s postings to external and internal funds (total expenses). This IDC method is used in conjunction with the subtractive cost-sharing method. IDC caps are still used to determine the Optimized system proposal along with the flexibility of manual corrections. Traceability of funding assignment. Automatic split Quick update if grant start date changes Correct cost-sharing calculation European customers can calculate cost sharing and IDC correctly.

Industries Industries Industries Procurement and Logistics Execution PSM-GM- GTE PSM-GM- GTE PSM-GM- GTE Accrual and Deferral Calculation and Posting GM Revaluation and Currency Conversion Enhancement Archiving Industries FS-SR Integration BAPI: Master Data BaFin to CFM Portfolio Master Data IS-A-RL Product PLM-RM Development and Manufacturing Corporate Services PM-EQM- THO Returnable Packaging Logistics in ECC Formula Explosion Modeling Single User Interface for about 20 Transactions maximum reimbursement by the sponsor. Evaluates the grant s billable and revenue postings to determine whether an accrued or deferred revenue posting is needed based the grant s financial disposition. The calculation can be based on resource-related billing accrual or cash-based billing methods. Processing and tracing of deferred and accrued revenue Compliance with legal requirements New business add-in, Synchronization with FI GM_CURRENCY_CONVERSION, exchange rates. provided to allow additional flexibility to revalue GM postings based upon the sponsor s currency. Archiving strategies introduced for grants management master data and budgeting documents. This function is a precondition for automatic generation of statutory reporting master data at the CFM position indicator object. The function allows automatic generation of master data for all statutory reporting variants in parallel when the CFM position indicator is created. Reduced number of grants and budget documents Automatic generation of statutory reporting master data to CFM position indicator object This functionality enables customers to Returnable packaging handle goods movements of returnable logistics is now also packaging in. Returnable available for customers of packaging (RP) accounts reproduce ECC. the exchange status of returnable packaging between two business partners. The goods movement of empty or full returnable packaging is tracked in these accounts. The exchange balance per business partner can be monitored at any time with the account balance. You can carry out account matching between linked accounts with account statements that you have received via EDI. You can also create and send account statements to your returnable packaging exchange partner, with or without the use of EDI. This function allows the user to Automated formula simulate different explosion paths for a explosion modeling saves formula containing items produced by a time and effort in number of other possible formulas. The performing and evaluating result of the modeled formula explosion different formula can then be viewed and analyzed. calculation alternatives. Customers can more easily account for the various explosion paths, ensuring that a product formulation achieves the desired design criteria. The takeover and handover workbench combines the functionality of about 20 different transactions that would have The function streamlines the complex and tedious task of collecting and

Product PLM-RM Development and Manufacturing Product Development and Manufacturing Product Development and Manufacturing Product PLM-RM Development and Manufacturing New and Improved Search Functions to be executed individually to facilitate taking or handing over a complex technical asset. Improves multilevel search and incorporate the search engine service (SES) to: - Improve performance of formula and recipe search for the most common searches within Recipe Management - Enhance search capabilities to support dietary and nutritional evaluation within the context of the formula and recipe - Support more powerful recipe searching with F4 help PLM-RM Usability Improvements - Simplifies navigation directly into formulas (without requiring access via recipes) - Simplifies creation and use of streams (the flow of material between process steps) PLM-RM Initial Data Load Provides an automated method of migrating recipes from a legacy system into PLM Recipe Management. Derived Nutrients and Energy Values Industries IS-OIL for Oil and Gas & Sap for Utilities -- activates relevant repository objects Industries IS-OIL Basis part of for O & G and for Utilities activates repository objects Determine the nutrient content of the product itself, in addition to calculating it from input materials. The derived nutritional content, calculated from the nutrient content of the product itself, may differ from the nutritional content that is calculated from input materials. Business function is only created for technical reasons. Contained objects have been shipped earlier as part of IS- OIL. Allows IS-OIL and IS-U to run on one system or client, if you select business function set " Oil and Gas with Utilities" instead of " Oil and Gas". capturing all required information on the configuration and maintenance history of complex equipment when it is handed over to a subcontractor or being received from a refurbishment or repair contractor or from the original OEM in case of an initial takeover. Reduced wait times when performing some of the more basic recipe and formula searches. Reduced need for developing custom searches. Time saved when working with formulas and streams Reduced effort for loading recipe data from a legacy system into the RM functionality of PLM. Improved data quality from semiautomatic loading of data and reduction of errors introduced by rekeying data. Reduces the need to develop custom programs to perform these calculations Reduces the need to perform manual calculations Reduces the possibility of errors being introduced when nutrient calculations are performed manually Business function is only created for technical reasons. Contained objects have been shipped earlier as part of IS-OIL. Reduces TCO for system landscape and integration, if you select business function set " Oil and Gas with Utilities" instead of " Oil and Gas".

Corporate Services Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution ECC 6.0 PS MM-PUR MM-PUR MM-PUR Easy Cost Planning: Cost Planning for Network Activity and Activity Elements Shelf-Life Integration Subcontracting Interchangeability Work Center for Purchasing Documents Work Center for Goods Receipt Documents Work Center for Service Entry Sheet Processing Easy cost planning enables you to calculate planned costs quickly in the software. With this, you can use this tool to plan costs for network activities and activity elements. Quick planning and ease of use. Complex calculations and relationships can be defined in models and hidden from users Integration of shelf-life data, - Consistent data model propagation of shelf life, and allerting of - Consideration of shelf-life shelf-life violation information Option to integrate and plan with multiple production versions Integration of interchangeability master data Better capacity planning Consistent data model - Purchasers can start and trigger all - Provides personalization core purchasing-related activities, such of work lists to cover userspecific needs as processing of purchase requisitions, purchase orders, contracts, scheduling - Improves user agreements, and requests for productivity with a better quotation. overview and fast access - Users can monitor and track the to all necessary events progress and status of all activities. -Time-critical events, such as expiring contracts, can be monitored and appropriated, and follow on activities can be triggered. - Exceptional events, such as blocked purchase orders or overdue deliveries, can be monitored and appropriated, and follow on activities can be triggered. - Users can start and trigger all - Provides personalization activities for goods receipt processing. of work lists to cover userspecific needs - From a list of purchase orders with expected goods receipt, users can - Improves user directly trigger the creation of goods productivity with a better receipt documents. overview and fast access - From a list of goods receipt to all necessary events documents, the user can trigger followon activities, such as posting of return delivery, subsequent deliveries, or invoices. - Users can monitor and track the progress and status of all activities. - Users can start and trigger all activities for service entry sheet (SES) processing. - From a list of purchase orders with expected service entry, users can directly trigger the creation of SES documents. - From a list of service entry sheet documents the user can trigger follow on activities such as posting of invoices. - Users can monitor and track the progress and status of all activities. - Provides personalization of work lists to cover userspecific needs - Improves user productivity with a better overview and fast access to all necessary events

Sales and Service Procurement and Logistics Execution Sales and Service Procurement and Logistics Execution Sales and Service SD-BF- CPE;MM- PUR-GF- CPE MM-PUR SD-BF- CPE;MM- PUR-GF- CPE MM-PUR SD-BF- CPE;MM- PUR-GF- CPE Use Flexible Pricing Rules in Selling, Purchasing, or Trading Commodities Work Center for Invoice Documents Stock Market Data Work Center for Processing Vendor Master Data Formula Evaluation Can Be Simulated Without Creating a Document -Defines reference commodity Meets all requirements for (examples: Arabian light crude or the selling, purchasing, and copper from the London Metal trading of commodities Exchange) -Provides averaging over the periods of quotations (example: last month) -Allows rules for dynamic period determination -Provides rules for currency conversion (examples: daily or average) -Offers rules for quantity conversion -Calculates surcharge (example: margin on top of the stock price) -Provides rules for rounding steps -Ensures high accuracy of intermediate calculation steps (example in oil: n x 100 million US$ are bought or sold) -Analyzes intermediate calculation steps -Offers evaluation of complex rule (formula) results in price and value -Provides integration into net price calculation (surcharges, taxes, and so on) - Users can start and trigger all activities for invoice processing. - From a list of purchasing documents to be invoiced, users can directly trigger the creation of invoice documents. - From a list of invoice documents, users can trigger follow-on activities, like release of invoices. - Users can monitor and track the progress and status of all activities. Price quotation data (stock market price) is date and time-specific Versioning of price quotation data provides for handling of mistakes in price quotations (provided by data agencies) - Personalization of work lists to cover user-specific needs - Improved user productivity with a better overview and fast access to all necessary events Provides easier way to handle mistakes in price quotation data from data agencies - Users can start and trigger all - Personalization of work activities for processing vendor master lists to cover user-specific data. needs - From a list of vendors, the user can - Improved user view a list of all sources of supply, start productivity with a better creation of new vendor master records, overview and fast access and change or create new info records. to all necessary information - Via integrated analytics, all activities with vendors (spend volume within the last three weeks or the number of open purchase orders) can be monitored and tracked. -Provides additional tables to keep Increases pricing currency exchange rates and price consistency and reduces quotations to test the configured the number of price formulas disagreements Provides a -Simulates and reproduces historic faster resolution of price evaluations (example: using versions of disagreement between business rules valid at a specific customer and sales evaluation date) departments or vendor and

Procurement and Logistics Execution Sales and Service Procurement and Logistics Execution Sales and Service Procurement and Logistics Execution MM-PUR SD-BF- CPE;MM- PUR-GF- CPE MM-PUR SD-BF- CPE;MM- PUR-GF- CPE MM-PUR Work Center for Processing Material Master Data Formula Evaluation Features Work Center for Processing Service Master Data Detailed Analysis and Trace Functionality New Function for Creation of Purchase Requisitions purchasing departments - Users can start and trigger all - Personalization of work activities for processing material lists to cover user-specific master data. needs - From a list of materials, users can - Improved user view a list of all sources of supply, productivity trough a better display stock and stock requirements, overview and fast access start creation of new material master to all necessary information records, and change or create new info records - Via integrated analytics, open order value per product or price trends for materials can be analyzed. Offers an unlimited number of terms Meets requirement for Handles fixed prices on formula and on sales, purchasing, and term level trading of commodities Allows users to overwrite the evaluated price manually Provides operators between terms -- not limited to adding Allows calendar for stock market to be configured Provides rules to handle floor and ceiling pricing Supports percentage surcharges Allows calculation to be based on single quotation type (example: Arabian Light) or a quotation type group (examples: average of Arabic Light, Brent, and WTI) Allows the calculation of prices with reference to prices in other documents Converts and rounds off rates or prices during calculation of commodity price - Users can start and trigger all - Personalization of work activities for processing service master lists to cover user-specific data. needs - From a list of services, users can view - Improved user a list of all sources of supply and start productivity from a better creation of new service master records, overview and fast access model service specifications, and to all necessary information standard service catalogs. - Via integrated analytics, open order value per service or price trends for services can be analyzed. Provides detailed analysis and trace functionality of the CPE formula assembly and evaluation process - Creation of purchase requisitions for materials. - Purchase requisitions can be saved as templates and templates can be used for faster creation of extensive purchase requisitions without the need of manual data entry. Increases pricing consistence and reduces the number of price disagreements Provides faster resolution of price disagreement between customer and sales departments or vendor and purchasing departments - Personalization of user interface to cover userspecific needs - Improved user productivity from use of templates

Sales and Service Corporate Services Corporate Services Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution SD-BF- CPE;MM- PUR-GF- CPE ECC 6.0 PS ECC 6.0 PS MM-PUR MM-PUR MM-PUR Commodity Pricing in Sales and Purchasing Documents Access Control List Functions for PS Objects Enhance Authorization Capabilities Proman Enhancements New Function for Collective Processing of Purchase Requisitions New Function for Document Tracing New Function for Creation and Change of Schedule Lines - Fast maintenance of account assignment with template functionality. - Personalization of user interface based on Web Dynpro. Configurable interface to pass data from document to formula assembly and evaluation: - Field catalog - Specific mapping or conversion of field values possible Determination of default formulas on header and on item level Determination of formula parts on item level Saving of formulas - Changes in document DB table - Unchanged documents: results and reference to customizing Users can maintain authorizations for their own objects. By using access control lists (ACLs), users can manage permission for a specific group to read, change or delete information for the object. Additional customer tab strip is available, drag-and-drop of material components operative as long as no purchase orders are created, and progress-tracking information for material components is visible -Offers strategically differentiating pricing with a customer-specific of commodity pricing and saves IT costs Improved authorization control in projects - Customer flexibility by providing capabilities. - Consolidation of information from the procurement process in a structured project view - Source of supply assignment for - Improved user multiple purchase requisition items. productivity - Supplier comparison if more than one - Less training effort for source of supply is available. end users - Send purchase requisition item to - Personalization of user external sourcing engine, like the interface to cover userspecific needs bidding engine in SRM or thirdparty tool. - Quick change of quantities and delivery dates. - Bundle purchase requisition items and create purchase orders. - Personalization of user interface based on Web Dynpro functionality. - Users can start the function from any - Overview of the entire step in a procure-to-pay process cycle, business process from within goods receipt processing, - Improved user for example productivity - All predecessor and follow-on documents of a selected document are shown in an overview - From the overview, users can navigate to the document and can start processing (change, update, delete, and so on) documents if necessary. - Display and maintain schedule lines for a scheduling agreement item - Change schedule lines and add new schedule lines for a given period - Display pricing conditions for a - Improved user productivity - Less training effort for end users - Personalization of user

Procurement and Logistics Execution MM-PUR Enterprise Search for Purchasing Documents Industries LO-MD Creation of UIIs (Unique Item Identifiers) during production processes Industries Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services IS-CWM, FIN-BAC- INV PM-EQM- THO PM-EQM- THO PM-EQM- THO Generation of Project structures within a sales order item Efficient Data Setup Process for Single Objects and Complex Structures Clear Visibility in the Progress and Status of a Takeover at any Time Data Preprocessing Stage Before Final Posting in scheduling agreement item - Personalization of user interface based on Web Dynpro functionality interface to cover userspecific needs - A quick and an advanced Enterprise - Improved user Search is provided. For the quick productivity with intuitive search, the user can search using a and easy-to-use search text string. The system also searches functionality for documents with similar names. For the advanced search, the user can search using a text string and additional fields. - The Enterprise Search is available for purchase requests, purchase orders, scheduling agreement, contracts, requests for quotation, and supplier quotes. Enables creation of new UIIs (Unique Item Identifiers) during production process. The PDC interface allows to export UIIs which are related to a PP order. Integrates IUID into sales, procurement and production processes -- Ensures that newly produced parts have UIIs -- Meets IUID requirements defined in sales orders It is now possible, in a CWM system, to No modifications if project generate a project structure out of a structures related to sales sales order item -- depending on the order items needed. right requirement type. The generated project structure can then be used to control milestones. Any follow-up functions, such as inventory creation or creation of PP-orders, are not enabled. Sales order items which are connected to a project structure cannot be delivered. This feature applies to both takeover The function streamlines and handover. In case of takeover, it the process by supporting involves preparing all the data required the import of electronic by the contractor to carry out and data, data consistency and document the overhaul or repair work. comleteness checks, and In case of a handover, it involves determination of processing all the maintenance outstanding work. execution and configuration change information that comes back from the contractor. In case of an initial takeover, all the required equipment information (including configuration details like maintenance cycles) is prepared. The takeover and handover functionality provides you with a clear status control concept for the processed assets. This function provides visibility and consistency checks to ensure the accuracy and completeness of all equipement-related configuration and maintenance information. Before posting configuration changes By staging the information and mainteance history in, that was received from the the data is staged for further plausibility OEM or contractor, the checks by qualified technicians. technicians or engineers can check the consistency

Corporate Services Corporate Services End-User Service Delivery Corporate Services Corporate Services PM-EQM- THO ECC 6.0 PS CA-TS ECC 6.0 PS ECC 6.0 PS Efficient Data Exchange Between Business Partners with XML Network Costing BADIs for Actvity Type Rate and Version Adjustment Update cprojects Detail Fields Project Builder Enhancements Progress and Forecast Enhancements Data exchange between the partners (the OEM and the operator or maintenance organization) is handled electronically in a structured format. In networks, you plan internally processed work and the required resources in network activities. The system then calculates the plan costs and takes the dates into account. Cost determination is based on the quantities and prices stored in the system. A new business add-in allows customers to change the defined rate for a cost center and activity type combination within the BADI. A new BADI allows customers to change the coversion that will store network costing. With a link from within the CATS user interface (UI), the user can update the following cprojects fields: actual start date, actual finish date, planned work, remaining work, percentage of completion, and notes. and completeness of the information in a structured manner (instead of browsing through vendorspecific formats) before posting the information. By transmitting the information in a structured manner, the risk of erroneous or missed entries is eliminated. The electronic file forms a bundle that captures all the revelant infomration. The software supports the export and import of XMLbased data, which enables automation of the process to a large extent. More accurate planning - Project-specific rates can be defined and used in network costing - Impact simulation of rate changes - Multiple network costing versions can be created and compared Employees can enter all their time and labor data in a single UI. Archived projects can be view within Improved usability, the project builder. In terms of the flexibility and working handling of a project within the project efficiency by providing builder revised data can be now saved single point of entry for without leaving the project opened in work and quantity the project builder. Planning of information, Better statistical key figures within the project transparency and visibility builder for WBS elements and network in international projects, activities. Multi Language Support of Improved usability and short text for project definition, WBS processing time savings elements, network, network activity and network activity elements. Progress Tracking for Network Single view of progress activities and WBS elements, New RFC information, Improved Functions for Progress Determination usability, flexibility and (provides measurement method and working efficiency by POC values (plan/actual) for a project providing multiple project and mass POC update for a project. objects update Forecast Workbench for cost, work and simultaneously, Improved statistical key figure forecast. In the integration capabilities with Progress Analysis Workbench the non- systems, project structure can now also the Accurate Forecasting

Industries IS-OIL-DS Multi-Material View in SPW Industries Open line item display for cost objects Industries IS-OIL Enhancement of Vehicle Master Data Industries IS-OIL Enhancement of Business Location Master Data for Remote Locations display as a tree besides the grid display. In the TSW SPW you are now able to view and maintain several materials side-by-side on one single screen. The report provides the JVA-user with information about open line items, that carry to a specific cost object, in JV is settled/cleared before the user close/block a cost object. The report contains information about Company, year, FI document number, document currency, FI line item number, account, amount ( in all currencies), and FI cost object (grouped by JV cost object). The report can be started via transaction GJOI or menu path Joint venture accounting -> information system -> documents -> Open line item display for cost objects You can store the following data in the vehicle master, which you need for the supply process of remote locations: the average speed, the unit of measure of the average speed, the arrival buffer, and the departure buffer. rescue equipment, the telephone number and e-mail address You can enter the geographical coordinates of a business location (longitude and latitude). Industries IS-OIL VMIS Overview Screen Overview screen provided with the following voyages information: Industries IS-OIL Simplified Voyage Processing Industries IS-OIL Simplified Execution of Remote Logistics Management (RLM) Functions Status of voyage (such as open) Vehicle used for the voyage Voyage type (such as sea) Variances Status of business locations Base location and remote locations From the VMIS overview screen, you can create new voyages, display existing voyages, and display shipments that belong to a voyage. You have simplified access to important functions in the Remote Logistics Management (RLM) component from a voyage via pushbuttons. embedded in a structured process and one single view for cost, work and quantities This is a great usability improvement. Users can view and maintain several material pinventory projections at the same time. Open line item report shows whether a cost object(s) is used in a line item that has not been cleared/settled. Geo coordinates from business location and speed from vehicle will allow distance and travel time calculations Geo coordinates from business location and speed from vehicle will allow distance and travel time calculations Voyage information easy accessible Voyage creation can be done in a much easier and intuitive way using a drag and drop approach.. Overview screen provided to execute follow-up steps of voyage in RLM transactions. User is guided through transactions and

Industries Industries Source account detail on cutback accounts. JVA master data validation neccessary information is transferred between transactions. This functionality allows to trace the Source account detail on original account during cutback, cutback account allows to although the cutback posting is done trace the original account with the cutback account. The handling during cutback, although will be activated via flag 'keep org. the cutback posting is done account' in customizing transactions with the cutback account. GJ25, ( cutback account mapping table ) and GJ26 (cutback intercompany account mapping). When the flag is activated, the created documents will be inflated, because a new document line will be created for each original account. The posting will still be done to the cutback mapping account, but each document line will contain the original account information in the text field. An Identifier 'C$O$A' at offset 35 followed by the original account number will be stored in field SGTXT of FI line item table BSEG. The flag can be set or removed any time, but the consequences for the audit objectives have to be considered. When venture information should be changed on a cost-object, the system will now check, If there are costs in the current period or in suspense exist, and eventually issues a warning or error message. The following messages will be issued: GJV_PM 200: Billable records exist in open JV periods -> venture can not be changed GJV_PM 201: Un-cutbacked records exist in open JV periods -> venture can not be changed GJV_PM 202 Suspense records exist - > venture can not be changed. The user can customize these messages via transaction OBA5 and define (entry of a message number) the kind of message (E, W, info or no message). Industries IS-OIL-DS Nomination Subitems The TSW Nomination sub-items enable the scheduler to enter more detailed scheduling information below the nomination item. This is necessary if you need to divide up your scheduled quantity into smaller portions, like e.g. railcars, piles, batches, compartments, etc. Industries IS-OIL-DS Hatch / Stow Plan in Nomination Industries IS-OIL-DS BI Content for TSW (Nomination, SPW, Enable the scheduler to enter a more detailed loading plan into the nomination. This is important for the loading of ships. New BI data extractors are provided in the areas of TSW Nomination, SPW, The validation should be checked with a warning (W) if venture data is changed on a cost object once there are costs of any sort booked against that cost object (inception to date). If there are costs in the current period or in suspense, an error (E) message will appear Ability to divide the scheduled quantity of a TSW Nomination item into smaller portions. Ability to enter a load sequence when scheduling a marine nomination in TSW. Better decision support through BI content for

Ticket) Industries IS-OIL-DS Railcar s to TSW Industries IS-OIL-DS TSW Enhancements to Pipeline Cycle Industries IS-OIL-DS TSW Security Enhancements and Ticket. This enables the real-time extraction of TSW information into BI. Schedule railcars in the Nomination Event management per railcar Railcar pegging Railcar clipboard Generation of railcars in the nomination from a load rail ticket The pipeline cycle field is added to the nomination item and the SPW what-if pop-up. Additional authorization checks in the TSW Nomination and TSW TIcket transactions Industries IS-OIL-DS Natural Gas Allocation This functionality fulfills the requirement of the Gas Pipeline industry related to adjustment and allocation of quantity differences which occur during gas transportation. Industries IS-OIL-DS Integration of GTM and TSW Procurement and Logistics Execution LE-WM Work Center for Inbound Deliveries The GTM contract includes addtitional TSW screens and fields, incl. TSW events. The TSW Nomination includes the GTM contract number. The TSW Events are copied from the GTM contract into the TSW Nomination, mainly to support event based pricing. Work center "Inbound Deliveries displays a list of inbound deliveries regarding the following: - Overdue Inbound Deliveries ( Monitoring of time critical deliveries / Delivery date and time of delivery as important document parameters) - Today s Inbound Deliveries ( Managing the daily workload / Number of packages/picks and picking status as important document parameters) - Upcoming Inbound Deliveries (Plan upcoming tasks / deliveries with according number of workers). TSW. Use the TSW Nomination to schedule whole train loads Nomination as the central communication & tracking application for Scheduling & Execution across various MoT s Use the Event Handler to automatically update railcar status into the Nomination Integrate Planning & Scheduling for different MoT s (e.g. Marine AND Rail!) Enable the customer to build additional custom specific logic on this small to enable pipeline cycle reconciliation. More security for users in TSW. Flexible nomination and balancing process for Natural Gas. This is the foundation for the integration of Oil&Gas TSW and an external Commodity Trading front-office software. GTM is the interface between the TSW scheduling (operations) application and the trader's front-office. - Inbound Deliveries can be monitored more precisly by setting flexible parameters - The user is able to better plan the daily workload - Improvement in efficiency by assigning workers to the workload - There is no need to search documents in a system; the system provides the user with the proper workload - Easy to tailor list results to warehouse process The display of the deliveries bases on

Procurement and Logistics Execution Procurement and Logistics Execution LE-WM LE-WM Product PP-SFC, Development and PP-BD- RTG Manufacturing Human Capital Management Analytics Work Center For Outbound Deliveries Work center for Physical Inventory Monitor Flexible and dynamic Execution of the Production Process FI-AA, IM- Simplified reporting for FA, CO-PA, asset accounting CO-OM- CCA, CO- OM-OPA, so called "Queries" which means the user (or the administrator) can create search queries in order to look for inbound deliveries. The outbound process typically is the - The outbound material sub-sequent sub-process and does not has to be picked at the need more than one category All for various storage locations all respective documents normally. as stated on the outbound Here the Warehouse Operation delivery documents. Manager mainly plans the upcoming - Discrepancies occurring tasks / deliveries in conjunction with his during picking (quantity to sub-ordinates. be picked is not equal to the quantity actually picked) need to be recorded and the subsequent physical inventory count process triggered to verify the stock numbers. - At the end of the shift there should be no open outbound deliveries (Sales Orders, Vendor Returns, Stock Transport Orders) left In regular intervals a Physical Inventory - Set-up physical inventory Count needs to be executed. That and monitoring the count means that the entire stock is counted - Re-count of materials if in all locations in a regular interval. You required distinguish between the regular count - Review of outbound ( Cycle Count ) and irregular counts discrepancies (e.g. in case of negative stock). - Review of difference list - Check the transit stock Execution Steps provide reusable Reduced workload and methods and parameters and allow you maintenance effort to create event-driven Electronic Work Higher flexibility in the Instruction Sheets with conditional production process logic. definition With electronic work instructions the Higher transparency in operator can document and confirm the monitoring the data production. exchange between ERP They provide a personalized work and Shop Floor Systems environment for fast and convenient access to different applications and services for plant personal (e.g. Operators). "Jump Start" with working examples - Building Blocks (SXS) in the XStep Repository are available in the system. A large sample library is available on http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/bpxmanufacturing. Provides modern easy-to-use reports for the following areas: asset history sheet, asset balances, asset transactions, planned depreciation, posted depreciation, comparison of Simplifies and streamlines reporting process for asset accounting

Analytics Analytics Analytics FI-GL FI-AA, IM- Simplified reporting for FA, CO-PA, closing CO-OM- CCA, CO- OM-OPA, FI-GL FI-AA, IM- Simplified reporting for FA, CO-PA, investment management CO-OM- CCA, CO- OM-OPA, FI-GL FI-AA, IM- Simplified reporting for FA, CO-PA, profitability analysis CO-OM- CCA, CO- OM-OPA, FI-GL Analytics FIN-BA Batch import for PDCE objects depreciation, depreciation forecast, inventory list, and assets not posted. The reports provide status information The local close is a timecritical for each close task in the task list and process where an overview of the progress of the task multiple stakeholders work list with respect to schedule. Users can interactively to close the create alerts that notify them if close books on time. The new tasks are delayed or taking longer than reporting functions provide planned. The new reports also show parties other than the the close status per business unit. This accountants executing the is particularly important in a shared close with information service environment, where one unit concerning the status and might perform a close task for multiple progress of the close. That business units, but each business unit allows them to initiate needs to have status information corrective action if delays concerning the degree of completion in are expected, especially if its unit. they would affect the global close (consolidation). Reports cover all stages of the investment management life cycle from planning and budgeting to availability control and replanning, and address all objects associated with investment management (investment programs, items, appropriation requests, orders and work breakdown structure elements). Provides sample reports based on operating concern S_GO that display net sales, contribution margins, operating profit, and target turnover in an easy-to-use interface It is now possible to schedule and manage data packages to select and import data from legacy systems in batch mode Analytics FIN-BA BOM import It is now possible to import BOMs with missing key information (a design BOM, a BOM using materials without a plant, and so on). Incomplete objects are created as preliminary materials in PDCE. Analytics FIN-BA Capture a master of copied objects and enable mass change If an object is copied, its master can be referenced. A later change to the master can be automated to change the copy accordingly. Simplifies and streamlines reporting process for investment management Simplifies and streamlines the reporting process for profitability analysis Time-consuming mass imports can be set to run during low system load time. Automatic updates can be scheduled. Automation of manual tasks. Improved data integrity and real-time update and synchronization between systems involved in the business process. Better support of the product design and definition process providing partlially incomplete data If an object is copied, its master can be referenced. A later change to the master can be automated to change the copy accordingly. Changes in the structure can be followed up more easily between versions.

Analytics FIN-BA Content s: 1PDCE Analytics FIN-BA Editable messages sent according to customer formulas Analytics FIN-BA Enhanced price selection conditions for valuation customizing The -delivered PDCE business content was improved to ease s and include additional requirements. Users can enable their own formulas to send editable messages according to their customizing settings Valuation and price selection can be customized with greater sophistication by using different dimensions to evaluate data selection Analytics FIN-BA Enhanced where-used list The where-used wizard allows use of cross-object key filters (examples: project and version). The searched assignment of an object can therefore be analyzed independently of other object keys (example: find component 4711 in all projects and versions filtered). The same applies to the definition and filter of the result list (found parents). Analytics FIN-BA Formula parameter for fixed value: support for multiple values and intervals Fixed values used in formulas as parameters can now be set to multiple single values and intervals Analytics FIN-BA Inheritance mechanism Customers can define inheritance behavior on attribute fields and trigger inheritance manually or via a formula up or down in the structure Analytics FIN-BA Object categories supported Objects can now be grouped using common object categories, which greatly simplifies buliding formulas Scrap can now easily be included into the calculation logic, target costs are enabled on leaves, transaction currency from selected prices is provided for splits directly, and so on. Users can enable their own formulas to send editable messages according to their customizing settings. The end user can be guided according to the results of the calculation. Valuation and price selection can be customized with greater sophistication by using different dimensions and tables to evaluate data selection. Up to five customer-specific table types can now be considered. Price type intervals, table priority, and value (most recent, highest, or lowest) can be combined to set up valuation rules. The where-used wizard allows use of cross-object key filters (examples: project and version). The searched assignment of an object can therefore be analyzed independently of other object keys (example: find component 4711 in all projects and versions filtered). The same applies to the definition and filter of the result list (found parents). Fixed values used in formulas as parameters can now be set to multiple single values and intervals Customers can define inheritance behavior on attribute fields and trigger inheritance manually or via a formula up or down in the structure Objects can now be grouped using common object categories, which greatly simplifies buliding formulas. The complexity of formulas is reduced.

Analytics Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services FIN-SEM- BCS IS-REA PM Automated adjustment of This functionality automates Primary business benefits deferred taxes on change identification of tax rate changes within are greater accuracy and in effective tax rates the system; identifies the specific records that need to be adjusted at the entity, account, document type, and posting level; calculates the necessary adjustments; and then automatically posts the result based on the posting rules defined within configuration. timeliness and reduced costs related to adjusting deferred tax balances when effective rates of tax change in jurisdictions where the corporation operates. Environmental fee calculation and reporting Planning and execution of inspection rounds IS-ADEC- Enhanced electronic MEB / -LBK logbook / -PRM-TL PM Enhanced time zone management for maintenance processing Recycling Administration helps enterprises meet regulatory requirements from environmental directives regarding packaging, batteries, or waste electric and electronic equipment (WEEE). It helps them monitor, calculate, and settle corresponding recycling fees with recycling partners or compliance schemes. It accurately verifies quantity flows from SD and MM. It generates required, exact environmental declarations cross-country and helps reduce costs and provide transparency due to accounting precision and comprehensive cost analysis functionality. It automatically generates condition records for price calculation in SD and accruals for financial accounting in FI. It tracks regulatory amendments and supports audits. Up to now, there has been no way to plan and process routes for operatorbased maintenance or inspection rounds in an easy way. Enhanced features can support possibilities to define routes for operator-based maintenance and streamline execution of the routes. The logbook is an application that is used to record and track the discrepancies, readings taken, and events that occur during line maintenance operations. This tool provides the staff operating the assets with the functions to log defects and enter operational data. It provides maintenance personnel, such as maintenance engineers and technicians, with functions that ensure the timely and reliable execution of their maintenance tasks. Time zone support supports two different system or business constellations: 1. Distributed system landscape where all systems are working with the same time zone 2. Central system landscape (only one Ensure regulatory compliance with countryspecific requirements. Increased efficiency thanks to automated and integrated processes (people and know-how) and central master data storage. Accuracy and savings through higher transparency in quantityflow tracking of products, devices, and batteries due to improved data quality and extensive reporting options. Audit trail. Ensure meeting additionally other product-related standards (example: retail packaging sustainability). Standard inspection rounds solution allows definition of a task list that can used to plan and execute inspection or operator rounds. Technical objects that need an inspection and measurement point that are used to record actual inspection results are linked together to prepare inspection rounds. The enhanced electronic logbook improves visibility of details in logbook transactions. Decisions can be made quickly when unnecessary data can be hidden Enhanced time zone management ensures that each maintenance document can be consistently managed independently of the

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services IS-ADEC- MEB / -LBK / -PRM-TL PM PM PM PM Enhancements in maintenance event builder Improved maintenance reports Improved material planning integration with maintenance order system) where users from various time location of a technical zones are working in the central object and the location of a system "Time Zone Support" supports user's workplace two system or business constellations: 1. Distributed system landscape where every system is working with the same time zone. 2. Central system landscape (only one system) where users from various time zones are working on this central system. It improves the authorization aspects of the information displayed by using the maintenance event builder. It also populates the WBS element on the location tab of maintenance and service orders. Maintenance event builder improves data and information security. Maintenance event builder can be assigned to a WBS element, ensuring consistent data usage in the maintenance order. Proper reporting can drastically change Improved framework of the way that people can make business simplified reporting allows decisions. The following reports usage of transactional data support maintenance planners and along with extracted supervisors in making informed information. That enables decisions. 1. POWER list for near-real-time reporting maintenance plans 2. POWER list for with a large volume of service and maintenance orders 3. data. Simplified reports for maintenance cost and maintenance backlog It is possible for maintenance planner to indicate when the vendor should deliver a part Improvement in fleet Basic order view has been enhanced maintenance functionality with fields for fleet maintenance. To enable better reporting for fleet maintenance, NetWeaver BI content has been improved for better reporting features required for maintaining a fleet of vehicles. Improvements in automatic release of orders IS-AD-WTY Integration of warranty claims with maintenance and service processing PM List report for maintenance plan items It is now possible to define whether the preventive maintenance order will be released automatically Integration between warranty claim process with maintenance and service processing allows better visibility regarding claimable work performed by the maintenance team and improves collection of claims Multilevel list reports are enhanced to select and view maintenance plan More accurate material planning reduces disruption of maintenance work Maintenance planners can make knowledge-based decisions with improved reports and simplified transactions With these s, the planner can review the planning cycle after setting up the new maintenance plans. Once the order created by maintenance plans are stable, the planner can set the feature of automatic release of order. Improved communication between maintenance team and warranty processing team Reduced errors in claims Reduced time to collect and approve the claims Improved return parts process Easy reporting along a multilevel list improves the

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services PM PM PM IS_ADEC- ROT/-SUB IS_ADEC- ROT/-SUB IS_ADEC- ROT/-SUB Power list for Maintenance Plan Power List for Service and Maintainance Orders View document attached using generic object services Enhanced stock determination for maintenance and service processing Enhancements in refurbishment order Enhancements in subcontracting items information presented to maintenance planners, thereby improving the productivity of maintenance planners The new POWL Maintenance Plan is Improve procuctivity and used as a worklist to get an overview of effectivity of an Service the maintenance plan. It contains Delivery Manager and/or information on all call off objects Maintenence Planner (documents), which are created through a maintenance plan. - Display of contracts - Display of service orders - Display of notifications - Display of purchase orders - Display and Change of maintenance plan You can use this new worklist to get an overview of the maintenance and service orders with all related follow-up documents for the service delivery. - Display and Change of service and maintenance orders - Display of equipments - Display of customers - Display of SD documents - Display of notifications Improved productivity of an Service Delivery Manager or Maintanance Planner It is possible to attach documents to New development will technical objects directly using generic reduce time and effort to object services. These documents can view documents be viewed during transaction processing. Most of the transactions of maintenance processing are enhanced to show the availability of documents Stock determination simplifies the stock determination process. It uses predeternimed rules to issue parts for orders so that the planner does not need to define the stock type during an early stage. Improved rule-based reservation reduces unplanned consumption and improves the material planning processes Refurbishment orders are used to 1.These s repair or overhaul a serialized or ensure proper planning of nonserialized spare part for equipment. refurbishment work Refurbishment orders have been 2.Better visibility of parts enhanced in the following areas: 1. being repaired or Refurbishment order has been refurbished 3.Streamlined enhanced to manage material upgrade internal repair process 2. Refurbishment orders can be 4.Option to upgrade parts assigned with one or more notifications after repair or 3. Conversion of planned order into refurbishment refurbishment order from the MRP list These s ensure proper planning of refurbishment work and better visibility of parts being repaired or refurbished When performing maintenance or providing maintenance services to customers, serialized or nonserialized parts can be sent to a vendor. Enhancement in subcontracting process allows integration between the maintenance process and the procurement processes. The subcontracting solution allows 1. Improved visibility of parts that are under repairs or refurbishment by subcontractors; reduces inventory needed to maintain an asset. 2. Better information flow between maintenance and procurement team reduces

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services PM-EQM- CC PM PM PS Enhancements for configuration control Improvements to maintain and use task list Improved work clearance management with line-up Master data changes of large project structures integrated management of maintenance or service order processing with procurement processes to purchase services from an external vendor. It also ensures visibility of parts throughout the time when it is outside the organization, enabling the planner to concentrate on reducing operation costs at reduced inventory. turn-around time to repair a part 3. Reduced turnaround time improves service level and reduces cost because of inventories Configuration control application can Better integration between be used by maintenance or service engineering and organizations to manage technical maintenance ensures a objects that have a high risk because safe and efficient process of safety, environment, or production. It to manage a technical has two components: 1. Master parts object. Flexible modeling of list that manages the engineering master parts list allows a information. Master parts list depicts all more realistic depiction of the possible valid combinations of parts engineering information for that can be installed at different the technical object. locations. 2. Configuration control check transaction identifies whether the actual technical structure has valid parts as described in the master parts list. It is now possible to record change pointers for maintenance task list. This new feature allows tracking changes that may occur for a maintenance task list. Task lists maintenance is enhanced so that fields like unloading point and recipient can be maintained in a task list, and the details are copied to orders if the task list is used to create the order. Complex assets require functionality to view and verify current and normal operational conditions for a group of logically related technical objects. The line-up functionality provides a mechanism by which planners can update the current operational conditions for a group of logically related technical objects en masse. Improved productivity and efficiency for maintenance planners Improved productivity of planner and technician in the field - The project editor allows users to - Allows users to work on work on subsets of master data of large subsets of project master projects in a high-performance manner data, such as - A more flexible locking concept allows organizational data, control users to work in parallel on project data, user and customer master data if required or save project data, and so on, improving master data changes as drafts - A new the performance of data draft workbench can be used to edit maintenance - Master data drafts or compare drafts before saving changes can be performed the project master data changes - The without locking objects if project editor can be accessed directly required or using a user specific project work list (based on ACL authorization) - A cache upload can be used to yield additional performance improvements of master data maintenance in the project editor Corporate QM-QN Enhanced e-mail process The enables an Improved communication

Services for notifications improved e-mail process for notifications in terms of: - Sending the notification as PDF documents - Attaching documents assigned to the notification and others - Using the assigned partners (task-responsible employees) - Using distribution lists based on assigned partners - Documenting the transmission information in notification tasks Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services QM-QN QM-QN RE-FX RE-FX Improved partner selection capability and list output for notification reports Multiple assignments of objects at notification item level Cost efficiency analysis: mass change of current expense items and reporting Long-term seating arrangement and move planning The provides an extended partner selection for quality notifications: notifications and tasks can now be selected via several partner roles and multiple partners. In addition, a business add-in allows adjustment of the list output for quality notifications in terms of adding further columns such as text fields for customer or vendor name. With the functionality, employees can assign multiple objects of the same type, such as several batches, serial numbers, inspection lots, and so on to one particular notification at the item level. between related partners during a CAPA process via: - Enhanced usability of the e-mail process - Automatic proposal of assigned partners - Guidance through the sending procedure - Flexible selection of additional recipients and documents - Clear documentation of transmission information and status of the notification data - Prevention from forgetting to inform people - Automatic proposal of attached documents Improved reporting capabilities for quality notifications - Reduced number of runs for the same investigation for different partners - Extended visibility of information - Flexible adjustment capability of reports - Improved corrective and preventive actions (CAPA) process. - Reduced number of notifications for recording issues and complaints for several given objects - example: one notification for 10 batches instead of 10 separate notifications. - Reduced effort for maintaining the data. - Increased visibility due to clearer structures. - Simplified analysis during a CAPA process. - Allowing mass changes of current - Gaining efficiency thanks expense items along with periodic to mass change process - changes, such as changes in flat fees Gaining insight and for administration and maintenance transparency costs - Hanging expense items depending on the age of an object; maintenance costs terminating expense items - Reporting of all data for one or more cost efficiency analysis - Reporting cross-references for current expenses and financing types - Definition of different degrees of occupancy, so that various quotes of workplaces can be assigned to an occupant (1/2, 1, 2, and so on) - Reports on vacancy and degrees of - Increased space utilization and reduced operating costs - Improved investment decisions through comprehensive

Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services RE-FX-LC- PT RE-FX-LC- PT RE-FX RE-FX RE-FX occupancy on a given a period or key date - Reversal of postings for reservation and continuous occupancy and improved posting run - Optimized handling of different move dates analysis of space demand and offer - Full transparency and allocation of costs and revenues to departments (move-in or move-out) within one single move plan Rent adjustment The standard rent adjustment reports Automatic adjustment (for example: REAJPR) shall be used enabling and legal to calculate the new rent adjustment for compliance the current contracts. This solution could be done via a BADI implementation of interface IF_EX_REAJ_ADJUSTMENT. The BADI checks customizing to see which type of condition or reason could be used for a single contract. Stamp tax The stamp tax has two bases: 1. Calculation Periodicity Stamp on documents (of specific Single-time tax: it is applied operations) 2. Stamp on operations, only once with the public purchases and sales, rentals, credit deed of the contract utilizations, and so on In the context of Taxable base - Property real estate context, it is a one-time tax taxable value in case of based on the original conditions of the acquisition contracts - Total contracts or on the differences from of conditions in rent adjustments, specifically on rental and agreement - Difference in property transfer contracts. The tax to conditions when the apply is determined by the official condition rises Tax rates In stamp tax table. Calculation depends case of - Acquisition on a condition that varies in percentage contracts: 0.8% - Leaseout and is based on the amount of another contracts: 1.0% - Rise condition. of conditions in lease-out contracts: 0.0% Postings Payment Reporting o Month o Annual Considering requested notice date in real estate search Extended functionality through various s Improved land management and extended analytics The setting of a requested notice date - Better consideration of allows the real estate search to offer an customers' requests - object according to that date, although Higher flexibility of real the contractual notice date goes into estate search and contract effect at a later time offer - Report of option rate ratios for real - Increased usability - More estate objects - New selection criteria, flexibility and individual condition type and condition purpose, adaptability - Better insight for periodic postings - Editable time-slot and transparency filter within report - Reports for salesbased settlement were changed technically to the RE reporting framework - Copy architectural and usage objects in RE navigator via dragand-drop - Simplified handling of parcel number - More flexibility in the (freely definable in one single field or handling of land master automatic assignment) - Additional and data - Improved options for freely definable classification due to comprehensive analytics - new function field in the general data Better insight into and tab - New infosystem reports: land transparency of existing registers, parcel objects, area analysis data of possession areas, classifications in real estate cadastre, and usage of parcels Corporate RE-FX Increased insight: Optimized NetWeaver BI content - Improved options for

Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services Corporate Services RE-FX FI-TV FI-TV s in NetWeaver Business Intelligence Taking possession dates for straight-lining according to FASB 13 into account ES bundle: integration of Travel Management and Event Management Employee self-services of travel management for public sector for real estate management: - Time comprehensive analytics - dependency for master data attribute Better insight and (where missing) - Assignment of transparency in existing business partners - Evaluating reasons data - Improved for notice and vacancy, as well as performance fluctuation - New report for architectural view - Delta updates - MultiCube for conditions and measurements - The possession dates (start and end dates) represent the period in which a lessee obtains control of the leased property. - According to FASB 13, this is the period that is relevant for straight-line calculations. - New possession dates fields in the real estate contract make this possible. The ES bundle integrates the different process steps of travel and event management (partner solutions) into one complete process. From the creation, approval, operational handling, online travel booking, and expense reporting of employees up to the analytics part the complete data can be captured on an cost object. That will be the container for all event-related costs. The new self-service applications of create travel request and create expense report are especially designed for the needs of public sector organizations: explicit approval of means of transportation and accommodation, detailed estimated costs for precise budget encumbrance and cost transparency for managers, standard travel authorization for specific travel activities, expense report with full compliance with German statutory requirements on a federal level and state (Bundesland) level. However, the s can also be used by other industries and countries. FI-TV Express expense sheet The express expense sheet allows fast entry of expense reports per week, - Meeting entirely new legal requirements according to FASB 13. Strategic meeting programs give companies the option to leverage transient travel volume when negotiating with service providers. Integration of such tools with Travel Management and the ERP landscape can save companies up to 5% of their costs. Covering the complete process from approval to analytics allows customers to get a complete picture of their spend for meetings and events and enable them to save based on better vendor negotiation and elimination of manual process steps. Travelers in public sector organizations can now: get online approval for planned business trip and send reservation request to travel agent (if approved), complete prepopulated expense reports in an intuitive Web application. Managers can now preview the estimated costs, explicitly approve customizable travel categories, and review expense reports online. Travel experts can now concentrate on real fulfillment tasks such as search for cost efficient transportation and exception checks. Process automation for expense management,

Corporate Services Cross ERP Cross ERP Cross ERP Cross ERP FI-TV All All All All Travel planning with airfare matrix and mixed air/rail availability Flexibility to continue usage of selected write lists instead of new lists Large number of new PDF print forms delivered in addition to the existing forms New user interface for existing write lists Search-enablement of key business objects in month, or custom period. Especially for reduced process costs countries with per-diem based (indirect travel expenses), reimbursement rules for travel accelerated reimbursement expenses, the solution now offers a processes, controlled fast and efficient way to capture compliance with travel expenses in a single user interface. policy, and reduced Standard travel management features approval items for like receipt imaging, credit card managers. clearing, simulation, and mass print are also supported. Customers can benefit from great flexibility of configuration of user interface content, so the mass entry really meets the needs of staff that travels a great deal. The air availability in travel planning All new features will further now offers the following help companies reduce s: interactive airfare direct travel costs, because matrix for easy comparison and travelers and travel selection of available flights and fares, arrangers can make better premium economy class, search at decisions on the lowest multiple airports, and comparison of air available fare and means and rail connections in a mixed display. of transportation that still meets the traveler's requirements for flexibility, rebooking, and meeting schedule. The functionality is offered to decide (mostly on a report level) whether the new user interface or one of the previously delivered write lists will be used. By default, the new user interface is being used after switching on the business function, but the customer can select to use the user interface of the previously delivered write list instead. - Large number of new PDF-based forms delivered in addition to the existing forms - PDF-based forms allow standard output on printers and on screeen in the de facto standard PDF format, the option of archiving documents, and sending a PDF document via e-mail - All common business cases for printing forms can now be covered with PDF-based forms (restrictions may apply to some country versions). Several of the previously delivered write lists provide highly individual graphical display and interaction capabilities. With the new user interface, these capabilities are harmonized and unified. Makes key business objects (mainly Operations) available for Customers can decide on the report level whether they want to use the new user interface -Customers will appreciate the low TCO paired with compelling appearance and usability. - Easy creation and maintenance of PDF-based forms using Adobe Lifecycle Designer compared to remarkably greater effort when working with Script or SmartForms. - Professional look of customer facing documents crated in System. - Possibility to include digital signatures (if respective application supports them) With the new user interface, list display and end-user interaction is harmonized and unified Fast, simple, search-driven information access Secure,

Cross ERP Cross ERP End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery End-User Service Delivery CA CA PY-RU PY-RU Operations Incremental load of material master data Parallel load of PDS objects Support for New Scenarios with Employee Self-Service New off-cycle processes in payroll EA-HR 604 Enhanced data security and authorization for activity-handling EA-HR 604 Enhanced print capabilities with the activity print function Embedded Search. Examples include generic search access to material, customer, vendor, sales business information order, purchase order, quality notifications, document info record, and so on. The enables users to load material master data from ERP into SCM in increments. In case of an error, the CIF reports the error but continues loading the master data that is error-free. That is called a partial load. After completion, the user can check the results and correct the erroneous data. After correction, the user had to load only the remaining master data increment, which saves time and capacity. PDS objects can now be loaded via CIF from into SCM in parallel mode. This feature enhances performance when a high number of PDS are selected for transfer. The number of objects per thread and number of parallel threads is customizable in the CIF. Now this feature is enabled for PDS objects. Employees can maintain their travel passport of RF citizen and education information with Employee Self- Service Customer can run off-cycle payroll calculations including vacation calculation, reconciliation by finish of labor contract, off-cycle bonus payment, and calculation only on retirement date. This functionality introduces a new concept for security and authorization to restrict user accesses and handling of activity data for different user roles This function provides the ability to print an activity data summary in an easy-to-read, print-friendly format (Adobe PDF) that can be tailored and customized to fit your company's business needs - Speeds up data integration between ERP and SCM - Enables easier detection and correction of faulty master data - Faster load of a larger number of PDS objects - Better distribution of processing load among servers based on parallelization Allows employees to maintain their travel passport of RF citizen and education information with Employee Self- Service Allows running off-cycle payroll calculations including vacation calculation, reconciliation by finish of labor contract, off-cycle bonus payment, and calculation only on retirement date without work-around solutions. - Minimize risk and prevent unauthorized access to activity data with enhanced data security and protection - Enhance system control and monitoring with flexible options to define security settings - Increase effectiveness and efficiency of EIC agents by limiting data access to relevant function, role, and tasks - Increase convenience and minimize risk by enabling a print summary and hard copy document of activity data - Enhance flexibility and

End-User Service Delivery Financials Financials Financials Financials EA-HR 604 Expanded data field options with flexible custom views FINBASIS, SEM-BW, _APPL FINBASIS, SEM-BW, _APPL FINBASIS, SEM-BW, _APPL FINBASIS, SEM-BW, _APPL Automated distribution to consuming systems Flexible and comfortable maintenance in one central system Flexible data model for entities to be maintained in central MDM System-controlled change process with flexible approval workflows personalization options by allowing customers to modify and customize the print template to fit their business needs - Improve the end-user experience by providing the ability to save and download activity data for future retrieval and storage - Maintain high security by restricting print capabilities to unauthorized users The function provides customers with - Greater flexibility for greater flexibility to create, display, and customers to create and store their own activity data fields using define custom views that custom views in the EIC application meet their business needs - Enhanced capability to define the most relevant and useful data fields for business users (end users) - Enhanced usability and reporting capabilities with additional data field options for employee search and activity view Sets of changes of an edition are distributed to several systems. Distribution preferably by enterprise SOA services (or upload and download) - Web UI with customer s - Customer-defined validations - Customer-defined authorizations - Mass change - Maintenance of hierarchies - Authorizations for entities and attributes The metadata model of the master data is the foundation for financial MDM: it defines the persistence structure (database tables) of the entities, their relationship, and their attributes. - Data Model delivered for standard objects (example: chart of accounts) - Reuse of existing data elements in - Use of existing ERP tables as look-up tables - Customer-defined s of data model Significant automation of the distribution process: reduce manual work and leverage fast close. Great flexibility and comfortable maintenance Ability to maintain and manage master data in a central system: - Customers can use multiple data models at the same time. That makes individual data models easier to understand and to maintain. Change request describes the Compliance with the business reasons for a required Sarbanes-Oxley Act: change of master data and controls the Corporations listed on U.S. approval and execution of the actual stock exchanges have to changes. Change has to be assigned comply with the Sarbanesto an edition (status: in process). Oxley Act Sarbanes-Oxley Change request ensures auditability of rules require: Four eyes for any change: what, when, who, and why certain transactions and Textual description, attachments, and changes: approval process comments Reporting of change Audit trail: tracking of requests with status history of changes and approvals Corporate CFO is responsible for

Financials FINBASIS, SEM-BW, _APPL Time and perioddependent versioning Financials FI-CAX Business partner locks s Financials FI-CAX Creation of billing orders and billing documents Financials FI-CAX Define champion and challenger collection strategies Financials _APPL Enhancement of Korean Tax Report and Automatic Payment Financials FI-CAX Enhancements for installment plans An edition defines changes of selected types of objects that will become valid at a certain period compliance of local processes to corporate guidelines. Local compliance is supported by enforcing corporate chart of accounts and guidelines in local ERP systems In financial master data management, time consistency is essentially for the customers for historical, current, and future validities of objects You can set preconfigured end-dates Automation and enhanced for business locks. Authorization flexibility concept is used at creation of business locks Billing cycles, such as monthly on the Fast and efficient creation 15th day of the month, can be used. of billing orders to enable Billing orders are generated and grouping and aggregation processed by the billing process. When of EDRs. Effective a billing account is billed, a billing processing of bills. period is created, which defines which Integration of non-edrbased invoice components. EDRs are to be billed. Billing in FI-CA also supports the billing of non-edrbased invoice component. When a invoicing process. Standard interface to billing account is billed, a billing period is created, which defines which EDRs are to be billed. Billing in FI-CA also supports the billing of non-edr-based invoice components, such as a basic charge of a service charge. Billing documents are forwarded to the invoicing process. The new feature allows defining test The new features allow series for champion and challenger testing the current collection strategies. For a certain collection strategies percentage of your champion collection against alternative strategies, you can define challenger collection approaches. If strategies, which are then assigned to the challenger strategy is the master data groups. more successful, you can replace the current champion strategy to improve collections. 1. Maintain the Korean specific Minimize manual fields(vat reg.no. Tax code1, type of adjustment and improve business, type of industry, system automation, Representative name) in improve data consistency. vendor&customer master timedependently. 2. To determin a due date of BOE and payment method automatically depending on a business type of vendor during the automatic payment program. Calculate interest at creation of an installment plan. Calculation and posting of fines, fees, and inflation surcharge based on the original items. Special reporting tool for installment plans which allows the open item evaluation to take the deferred due Because receivables with a due date more than one year in the future have to be reported separately; installment plans are considered in year-end closing

Financials FI-CAX Extended service for external cash desks Financials FI-CAX Fund accounting integration Financials FI-CAX Import billing accounts and event detail records Financials FI-CAX Manage correspondence in interaction center dates into account. Additional features of the enterprise service for external cash desks to be used in an internal scenario Use the service internally FM derivation and update: the Enhanced reporting reconciliation account is replaced in the capabilities FM derivation by the general ledger account that results from account determination. Grant-enabled FICA: the grant field can be used as an input field when posting FICA documents using transaction FPE1. GM Update: The Order, Cost Center, and WBS element are made available in the Grants Management Update for the receivable/payable line(s) coming from FICA. Splitting of Business Partner Lines: The user can enter one Business Partner Line and more than one General Ledger Lines and the system splits the Business Partner Line into as many lines as General Ledger Lines in the document. Import billing accounts from external Efficient import of billing systems: extract business partner accounts, integration with items in delta mode, dunning history in CRM, fast and delta mode, and NetWeaver BI efficient import and storage content based on business partner of EDRs, and integration items and dunning history. Import event with rating system detail records from external systems: import EDRs that are created in a rating system and process EDRs according to various categories. A comprehensive concept supports definition of project-specific EDR categories. Configure correspondence types Compose outbound correspondence Provide document management services Financials FI-CAX New archiving objects You can archive revenue distribution and doubtful receivables documents Financials FI-CAX New extractors into NetWeaver BI Financials FI-CAX New features for mass activities Financials FI-CAX New mass activity for credit card payments Payment and returns history can be extracted to NetWeaver BI In mass activities you can predefine a preselection, use generic variants, and configure log classes Automatically mass-process credit card payments The new feature allows collection agencies to set up new correspondence types flexibly for collection purposes and use them in the context of Collections Management TCO reduction Better analytics Usability and automation Automation

Financials AP-BP- PCA, SD- BIL-IV-PC Periodic key exchange New key versions for credit card The credit card key encryption can be generated with a exchange improves secure new transaction. It is possible to create handling of payment card an unlimited number of key versions. data. In addition to the The system always uses the most existing functionalities of recent version of the key for new an encrypted storage of encryptions. For decryption, old key credit card data in the versions are still used as long as data system, masked display of records for encrypted payment cards credit data in user that have been encrypted using the old interfaces, and so on, the version still exist in the system. The keys to encrypt payment encrypted, stored credit card data can data can be exchanged be migrated to the new key version, periodically and keys that and the key versions that are no longer are not used any more can used can be deleted. be deleted. Financials FI-CAX Service for legal dunning You can use an enterprise service to communicate with external collection agencies and legal dunning organizations Financials FI-CAX Use ledger groups for doubtful receivables Financials FI-CAX Enhanced revenue distribution Financials FI-CAX New mass activity for revenue distribution Financials Financials FINBASIS, FI-CA You can use ledger groups for doubtful receivables Consider distribution rates to distribute revenues, open items, and unassigned payments to final recipients The new mass activity for revenue distribution permits automatic posting of distributions. Two reports for analysis are also offered. Integration of dispute Enables integration of dispute management in FI-CA management in FI-CA and CRM with dispute management in CRM Accessibility and performance improvement with Interactive Forms Standardized communication Usability and more flexible handling of doubtful receivables The new feature allows revenue agencies to automate the distribution of revenues. Automation of event-based revenue and cost distribution in scenarios like season ticketing with enhanced deferred revenues functionality Integration of dispute management in FI-CA and CRM The output of the report programs Performance optimization would be displayed in Adobe form, for running reports and which makes the reports compliant with improved processing accessibility. Performance of the report capacity has been improved with the new Adobe split functionality. Financials BC-ILM-RW Archive context data In addition to the normal archive process, the context data (master data and customizing) can also be stored in a archive system Financials FI-GL Ledger-specific check of posting periods Using the ledger approach within the new G/L in, each accounting principle is represented by its own ledger. In general, the leading financial statement - relevant for the consolidated financial statement - needs to be completed earlier than the local financial statement. A different fiscal year variant using a different financial statement date can be assigned to each ledger. Therefore posting periods shall be handled ledger-specifically. Up to now, a Reduce total cost of ownership The financial department can postpone the local close; the consolidated close is finished at an earlier time. Using different fiscal year variants for different accounting principles, the system checks for each accounting principle (ledger) if the posting period is opened. A smooth period end-closing process with fewer

Financials FI-GL Separate check of posting periods for postings from CO to FI Financials FI-GL Tax handling for partly exempt organization Financials FI-GL Drill-down reporting from FI to CO Financials FI-GL Guided procedure for document split configuration Financials FI-GL Ledger group-specific display of documents Financials FI-GL Profit center assignment monitor posting to several ledgers was checked problems and less only against the posting period of the organizational coordination representative ledger. This function can be executed. The time offers an option to check a posting to of close can be determined several ledgers (accounting principles) by each accounting against the posting period variants of principle. each ledger. At the end of the period, closing activities are executed. Using CO realtime integration, CO creates postings that update FI. Up to now, the FI posting period had to remain open when postings from CO to FI are performed. These postings can now be handled via a separate (new) posting period interval. With this feature, you can map in the system the company areas that are completely or partially exempt from paying tax. You can define special tax codes for these areas and create tax reports as proof for the tax office. In addition, you can use a program for supplementary tax adjustments for variable tax deduction rates. Additional drill-down functionalities from financial reports into controlling and financial reports. Profit center and origin object type (example: cost center) information is a source for further drill-down into controlling reports. The target reports are called via a reporting interface. Target reports can be standard reports, custom or specific reports, and transactions. The wizards are a step-by-step aid to perform the document split customizing. The advantage over following the IMG is that the system performs checks and document simulation on the basis of existing documents. You can select documents according to ledger or ledger group within EhP 4 using standard reports RFBELJ00, RFBELJ00_NACC, and RFBUEB00 You can use the selection for customer-defined reports that are related to logical database BRF You can check the profit center assignment in sales order items and in real estate objects (RE-FX). You can select the items and objects with specific profit center assignments or with missing assignments. You can get an overview list of all items and objects. Period-end activities in the financial and controlling department can be executed one after the other without the necessity of organizational coordination. Smooth period-end closing process with fewer problems and errors can be executed. The time needed to close can be accelerated. Allows the handling of value-added tax (VAT) for partly exempt organizations Better reporting integration from FI to CO, value reconciliation between profit centers and cost objects (origin objects), transparency between FI and CO values, and less reconciliation effort Faster and more consistent customizing of the document split function Better understanding of overall document split functionality Customers running parallel accounting using the ledger approach covering different accounting principles can now select documents according to the ledger group and increase transparency Using this overview, you can find and correct missing assignments more easily.

Financials FI-GL Validation of combinations of new G/L characteristics Postings to Fimay possibly result in accepted entries that are incoherent from the point of view of teh combination of additional accoutn assignments. Example: a commission fee for a swap is to be entered against an HR cost center. Both account and cost centers are valid, but from a business point of view the posting does not make sense. The assumption that all these semantic controls are done in the feeder application does not protect against errors in manual postings or in the feeder applications themselves. That is especially true in applications not fully integrated with the G/L. This function simplifies this semantic check of GL posting data entry Financials FI-CAX Group items for automatic You can group selected items at clearing automatic clearing Financials FI-CA Customer field extension in Biller Direct Financials FI-CA Promise to pay in Biller Direct When entering an accounting entry, all fields are checked to see if they exist. However, combinations of the fields entered are never checked for validity. Fast close: by validating data individually and checking combinations of data like product group and customer group, the accounting close is accelerated because postings are checked when they are created and not at month-end during the close. Discovery of incorrect reporting lines at month-end leads to timeconsuming research and manual adjustment. Properly validated accounting information can reduce the time to close by several days. Usability Customer field extension (CFE) is The enables applied to Biller Direct processes: UI adjustments with Address data Bill information reduced effort and thus Bank data Credit cards The following lowers TCO is covered by this new development: Two classes that hold the functionality for the extension Extend all actions to instantiate and clear the list at the beginning of each self-service Enhance all JCO calls to the back end so they also have the extension-table in the interface - also enhance the function modules in the back end with this parameter Put a BADI method in all wrapper methods in the back end Open bills can be selected to create a promise-to-pay (P2P). Permitted P2P type, reason for the promise, and written confirmation can be chosen. The start date and payment method for the payment rates can be assigned. An eligibility check is performed to determine if the customer qualifies to initiate a P2P. A simulation screen with details for the promise to pay is displayed so that the customer can accept, reject, or create a new P2P. Saving the P2P can create a contact (optional) and correspondence in FI- CA. Existing active P2Ps can be displayed with drill-down details and original items. Customers can Call centers have less load when customers can create promises to pay by themselves in a selfservice. Companies can exhaust every possibility to get at least a deferred payment instead of initiating extensive collections to dun these receivables.

Financials Financials Financials Financials Financials Financials Financials Financials FIN-FSCM- All features: see DM-AR, FIN_FSCM_CCD_2 FIN-FSCM- CR-AD, FIN-FSCM- COL-AR FIN-FSCM- DM-DM, FIN-FSCM- COL-COL, FIN-FSCM- CR-CR FIN-FSCM- DM-DM, FIN-FSCM- COL-COL, FIN-FSCM- CR-CR FIN-FSCM- DM-DM, FIN-FSCM- COL-COL, FIN-FSCM- CR-CR FIN-FSCM- DM-DM, FIN-FSCM- COL-COL, FIN-FSCM- CR-CR Collecting receivables from customers with head office branch structures Collections with multiple back ends Create, change and search credit limit requests via enterprise services New UI for creating and changing credit limit requests FIN-FSCM- Create, change, and DM-DM, search dispute cases via FIN-FSCM- enterprise services COL-COL, FIN-FSCM- CR-CR FIN-FSCM- New UI for changing DM-DM, dispute cases FIN-FSCM- COL-COL, FIN-FSCM- CR-CR FIN-FSCM- BC-CON Billing consolidation connector withdraw P2Ps. Open invoices contained in a P2P are indicated with a drill-down option to display the details. See FIN_FSCM_CCD_2. Business function FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION requires FIN_FSCM_CCD_2 to be switched on. Help collection specialist collect receivables from customers with head office branch structures Allows users to manage business partners originating from multiple back ends in Collections Management Create, change, and search credit limit request via enterprise services Allows users to create or change credit limit requests via an easy-to-use, Web based UI Create, change, and search dispute cases via enterprise services Allows users to change dispute cases via a Web-based UI The billing consolidation connector provides a built-in capability to connect to service providers for business-tobusiness document exchange. The See FIN_FSCM_CCD_2 Collecting receivables from customers with head office branch structures made easy. Allows users to structure a work list based on customer's subsidiaries. Different collection specialists can work on different subsidiaries - a common requirement in the consumer products industry. Managing business partners originating from multiple back ends and possible overlapping number ranges enabled in Collections Management Easy integration of other applications to the credit limit request process in Credit Management; flexible custom-build user interfaces for credit limit request process Creating credit limit requests made easy, system-based collaboration of sales a credit department, and real-time information exchange between all participants of the credit limit request process Smoother integration, more flexibility for the UI, and ability for customers to build their own UIs Changing dispute cases by casual users made easy through a Web UI. No loss or delay of information because of no media breaks. The billing consolidation connector combines ERP functionality with a supplier network to provide

Financials Financials Financials Financials CA-TS-CO, CO-OM- CCA, CO- OM-OPA, CO-PC- OBJ, PS FIN-FSCM- TRM FIN-FSCM- TRM FIN-FSCM- TRM Value retrospective timesheet changes at prior-year rates Documentation of hedging relationships (hedged item and hedging instrument) Effectiveness test of hedging relationships Hedging relationship connection is tailored to meet the a comprehensive solution requirements of Billing for electronic document Consolidation, the software exchange running on the service provider's document exchange platform. With the connector delivered with, the customer can now easily and rapidly connect to these consolidator platforms. Federal agencies allow timesheet corrections in the 13 months preceding the document date. If a retrospective change is made to the number of hours worked, the rate selected for the associated activity allocation should not be the activity rate valid at the time of posting, but the activity rate valid on the key date for the change. Where complex funding sources with multiple funding types and varying expiration timeframes are in place, the funding should also be updated based on the prior-period account adjustments. Follow-on functions, such as overhead calculation, should also be based on the values used for time recording. Within hedging relationships, users can create documentation automatically or manually (upload or enter). The documentation is one of the prerequisites for the use of hedge accounting. The documents are stored with the document management service. Correct recording of fund usage in complex public sector organizations. Increased accuracy in cost center accounting. By connecting the documentation of the designation and the hedging relationship within software, customers have a single point of entry for information gathering during audits. Documentation can be easily created by using the automatic functionality based on PDF forms. Retrospective and prospective Streamlined, integrated effectiveness tests are prerequisites to process of executing the use of hedge accounting. The effectiveness tests effectiveness test uses the dollaroffset-method to calculate the retrospective) within the (prospective and effectiveness of a hedging relationship. system by using market The effectiveness test can also be data. The results are executed from the master data of the stored and a history is hedging relationship. available. Hedging relationships are used to assign hedged items (securities) to hedging instruments (forward security transactions). If prerequisites (examples: documentation and effectiveness test) are satisfied, the hedging relationship can be designated, and hedge accounting regulations can be used. As long as the hedging relationship is fulfilling the requirements for hedge accounting, the respective posting rules are used. Reduced number of external tools. Seamless integration of hedging relationships within position management by using subpositions to distinguish between the freestanding part of securities and the already designated or hedged portions. Documentation and effectiveness tests are stored related to the hedging relationship and

Financials Financials Financials Financials Financials FIN-FSCM- TRM FIN-FSCM- TRM FIN-FSCM- CLM-CM FIN-FSCM- BNK FIN-FSCM- BNK Position management and accounting Purchase GAAP accounting Additional account assignments for cash reporting Bank Communication Management (Enhancement Package 2) Simplified and enhanced bank communication management can be reported. Security position is split up according to Streamlined, integrated different subpositions. That enables a process for hedging customer to differentiate between financial assets within hedged portions of a security and software freestanding portions. The need to report values based on P- GAAP (next to the historical figures) is reflected by the introduction of three new book value components: value adjustment gains (VAD gains), value adjustment losses (VAD losses), and original value adjustment (original VAD). Meets auditing requirements, manages risk and compliance, and reduces error-prone manual work The Cash Management Enhanced reporting instruments for cash position and cash capabilities of cash position forecast are enhanced with new and liquidity forecast by accounting dimensions. By using these additional selection of dimensions, the reports can be split general and industryspecific fields according to business area (can now be turned off), segment, profit center, fund, and grant. If new general ledger accounting is active in FI and document splitting is performed there for FI documents for the relevant account assignments (business area, segment, profit center, fund, and grant), you can define for which account assignments in cash management the system should consider document splitting. Close integration with enterprise application functionality Logical structuring of payments into batches Multiple approval levels for outgoing payments Audit trail for payment approval decisions along with digital signatures for internal audit Analysis of payment status information and full payment-flow transparency as well as status monitoring for bank statements SWIFTNet Integration - Improved integration with cash management - Automated triggering of follow-up activities via BAdI - Indicate urgent payments in the payment monitor - Improved service-enabling - New services for paymemt advice - Enhanced SEPA support Enhanced reporting capabilities Capability to assign additional approval users for dual control (Security) Streamlined communication with house banks over a single communication channel (seamless SWIFTNet integration) Dramatically reduced TCO Significantly improved straight-through processing Increased payment flow transparency through status monitoring of payments and bank statements Enhanced compliance through multiple approval levels for outgoing payments - Standardization and automation of corporate to bank communication - Optimization of processes and increased payment flow transparency through status monitoring - Enhanced straight-throughprocessing (STP) rates with end-to-end SWIFTNet integration - Reduced maintenance costs by using global payment standards - Includes ES

Financials Financials Financials Financials Financials Human Capital Management FIN-FSCM- TRM FIN-FSCM- TRM FIN-FSCM- TRM FIN-FSCM- TRM FIN-FSCM- TRM Correspondence monitor - Supports correspondence process in the area of confirmation handling, trading, and settlement - flexible output channel (MT and FAX). Supports MT formats: MTs 300, 320, 395, 399, 502, Exposure management Forward security transaction Hedge of commodity positions New effectiveness test method 509, 515, 536, 540, 541, 542, 543, 544, 545, 546, 547, and 548 Exposure management delivers an option to upload foreign currency and commodity exposures from various sources to group and track them over their lifetime and use them as hedge items in hedge management. The exposures of the exposure management could be used to calculate NPVs or VAR in the market risk analyzer, which then are needed for effectiveness testing or reporting. - Supports the life cycle of a forward security transaction (rollover, advance maturity, delivery at maturity, dividend adjustment, and cash or physical delivery), in compliance with several accounting principles bundle for the creation and status tracking of payment orders as well as bank statements - Readiness for SEPA and ISO20022 Enables the customer to have real straight-throughprocessing from deal capture via correspondence matching to automatic accounting update. Mitigates the risk of errors and therefore strengthens compliance and enables a fast close Manage and track the complete lifetime of uploaded exposures Option use uploaded exposures as hedged items in hedge management to reduce manual interaction in hedge management Helps get risk key figures for uploaded exposures Straight-through processing: option to hedge the market price risk of an underlying; management of risk and compliance Offers the option to use hedge Ability to do hedge accounting for commodity positions accounting and coming from exposure management by management for using commodity paper deals (futures commodity, FX, and and forwards) from the transaction interest risks in one manager solution and therefore to have only a single source of truth for hedge management and hedge accounting Regression analysis compliance and reporting for IAS39 and FAS 133 hedge accounting standards in the area of effectiveness testing. This tool allows a hedge effectiveness test based on linear regression analysis of exposure, hedge item, and hedging instrument. PY-JP Corporate pension The corporate pension that corresponds to the third tier is a generic name of the following pension With regression analysis, you can evaluate an hedge relationship using a retrospective or prospective effectiveness test and calculate data points in the period. Regression analysis tool allows you to set parameters like slope, intercept, R-squared and adjusted R-square, T- statistic, and F-statistic, to determine the effectiveness of the hedging relationship. The two key points in offering the solution covering the entire

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital PY-PS-IT Legal reporting for Italian public sector systems among private pensions, which are designed and managed by companies based on the law. 1. Pension fund 2. Tax qualified pension plan 3. Defined benefit corporate pension 4. Defined contribution pension It provides main legal reports for the Italian public sector, including: - Social security report (DMA/INPDAP) - Yearly financial declaration (F24) - Contributive form (CUD) PY-JP Rehiring (retirement) The project objective is elimination of legal noncomplaince of the HR/Payroll Japanese solution concerning calculation of retirement and rehiring payment PA-PA-FR- TNM PY-PS-IT Training needs management for curriculum types and program courses Concurrent employment PS Italy Training administrators can plan training needs and valuate costs for curriculum types and program courses Basically all the functionality of TNM is supported for Learning Solution objects corporate pension scheme of Japan with HCM: 1. Support for a new pension plan (defined benefit corporate pension and defined contribution pension) 2. Enhancement of the supporting system for the existing corporate pension scheme (pension fund) Enables public sector companies to be legally compliant with Italian public sector legislation Mitigates the risk of legal compliance of HR/Payroll Japanese solution concerning calculation of retirement and rehiring payment Training needs management is available for the full spectrum of Learning Solution objects - It enables the concurrent employment - Large life customers will functionality at the master data level. have a solution to cover That means use of the person_id as an the company change issue upper link of different pernrs in the at the master data level - same system. It thus enables the New possible customers customer to change the pernrs of their are asking for the same system, maintaining a link with the solution before employee through the person_id and implementation - Some giving capabilities at the navigation and claims from customers query levels. about the product might be partially covered PY-JP Japan: flexible payroll New solution of JP flexible payroll that New solution of JP Flexible enables monthly, weekly, biweekly, and payroll enables monthly, semimonthly payment weekly, biweekly, and semimonthly payment PY-NO PY-ES PY-SE Municipality sector functionality for HCM Norway Off-cycle payroll for Spain for bonus payments and special payments PS functionality for HCM Sweden CA-GTF- Qualifications at person QR, PA-CE, ID level This functionality will enable customers Manage master data and to maintain master data for employees payroll handling for belonging to the municipality sector municipality sector and the corresponding payroll handling employees in payroll for Norway. A payroll specialist can run the payroll for bonus payments and special payments in Spain separately before the scheduled regular payroll run. A. Public sector customers can use concurrent employment (CE) functionality B. Payroll calculation algorithms specific to the public sector are available C. Legal reports specific to the public sector are delivered - Qualifications are maintained at person ID level and not for every Bonus payments and special payments need not wait until the pay day for the regular income. - CE makes HCM usable in PS areas - PS functionality makes the offer comparable to that of competitors - Reduction of administration effort;

Management PA-GE Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management PA-PD-PM Cascading goals PA-PD-PM Enhanced Learning Solution integration CA-GTF- AP-PM Simplified user interface PA-PD-PM Simplified user interface for a specific process PA-EC PA-EC Additional HR reporting capabilities Enhanced HR administration functionality personnel assignment - All authorized qualifications are not employees have access to all maintained several times qualifications of the employee for the same employee - (independent of personnel assignment) Applications dealing with - If a qualification is created, changed, qualifications (like profile delimited, or deleted, the change will match-up) are able to show be effective for all personnel and maintain qualifications assignments - Transactions and at the physical person level reports (like profile match-up) dealing in a proper and holistic with qualifications to show them at the manner person ID level Corporate, departmental, and team goals can be created and cascaded to the corresponding employees. Enhanced Learning Solution integration provides the following new capabilities: - Courses can be set as mandatory in an appraisal document - Implementation optimized because now the customers can use performance management for setting up corporate, departmental, and team goals Improved process efficiency due to enhanced integration (users can set courses as mandatory directly in an appraisal document) This cross-application component can - Customers can choose be used as basis for having a the simplified user WebDynpro user interface for interface, a more userfriendly display, and easier Performance Management. Simplification includes: - Web entry use of appraisal page to access appraisal documents documents (work list view). From there appraisal documents can be created, accessed, or downloaded. If enabled, mass creation of appraisal documents is possible. - Web page for administrators to administer appraisal documents. (Example: It can be defined which elements to group under which tab in the appraisal template.) - Overview of the appraisal document's progress and easier status handling in the appraisal document This user interface is for a specific performance management process. There are several reports to support HR with administering the compensation process. The reports support the planning process and progress (example: data on the status of planning by manager and organization), auditing the process (example: tracking of infotype 759), and additional administration tasks (example: changes made to compensation data). - Minimized configuration effort - Quick implementation Enhanced data visibility into actions and statuses associated with the company s compensation processes. The HR administrator is provided Reduced effort and enhanced functionality to make processing time due to the changes (adjustments, deletion, and so enhanced functionality to on) to certain compensation records en make mass changes.

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management PA-EC PE-LSO PE-LSO PE-LSO Enhanced planning and approval functionality BI data sources for course appraisals Course administrator portal role Enablement of concurrent and global employment masse. Corresponding reports for the functionality is noted in the additional HR reporting capabilities feature. In addition, functionality supports changes to guideline matrix values en masse. A new planning overview screen Increased flexibility and displays the planning information on an functionality to support the organizational level, including an planning and approval overview of the budget information process that allows for (allocated, spent, and deltas). The user multilevel approval and can drill down to view data for the direct changes to the organizational hierarchy, view the planning by higher level status of approval (including tracking of managers. changes made to the planning by subordinate managers), view the planning data for the employees for organization(s), and approve on organizational level. Notifications and multilevel approval process are customizable by the customer. Learners can give feedback on courses Evaluating training that they took through the Learning feedback is the first level of Portal. The new functionality provides assessing training predefined data sources that effectiveness (example: customers can use to build their own BI Kirkpatrick's model for reports to report and analyze feedback assessing training data. For instance, the data can be effectiveness) Standard used to improve specific aspects (such data sources that extract as content, duration, and so on) or the all possible information entire training program. needed for reporting on course appraisals are delivered with the solution. Customers can use these data sources and build BI reports that will suit their business requirements. A BI report developed in this manner can offer valuable information about course effectiveness. Training administrators can perform all their day-to-day activities through an intuitive and Web-based interface. Activities include: Scheduling courses Managing participation Monitoring resources and capacities Following up on courses Managing mandatory course assignments Managing courserelated correspondence Administrators are also provided and alerted with specific work lists that help them to keep track of courses' readiness, booking levels, and so on Learning Solution/ Enterprise Learning can now support learning management for employees with The course administrator portal role provides a simpler means of performing regular course administrative activities. The regular activities of a course administrator are arranged in logical work centers that will help them to access information easily and act on it. The portal role also includes work lists that help administrators be aware of course readiness statuses, resource fulfillment statuses, booking, and capacity-related alerts. 1. Learning for learners with multiple assignments can be more effectively

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management PE-LSO PE-LSO PE-LSO Learning management services for managers multiple or global assignments managed. 2. Learners can (concurrent and global employment). get a holistic picture of all Employees having multiple their learning activities for assignments might have varying all assignments and can training needs according to each differentiate them based on assignment. For instance, they might their assignments. 3. have different qualification gap analysis Administrators and results based on their qualification managers can manage and profile comparison with each of the report on the learning position that they hold. That requires activities of specific them to take different courses to fill assignments of learners. 4. these gaps. Course bookings might Instructors with multiple need to be authorized by different assignments can manage managers. Enterprise Learning is the courses that they now built considering these points and conduct as a part of their has appropriate processes from the different assignments. perspectives of the learner, administrator, instructor, and manager. Managers can manage the learning This feature allows activities of their team members much managers to take an active more effectively. Managers can now role in managing their manage mandatory course teams' learning activities assignments for their team members: and thereby manage the they can assign new mandatory overall talent in their assignments and change or delete teams. already-specified assignments. They can also track if such courses have been booked by the team member. They can book their team members for specific courses directly. Offline course distribution The new feature allows e-learning courses to be stored and distributed through CDs. Learners can take the course from the CDs. Progress can be then synchronized online. This method is particularly effective when learners are located in disparate, remote locations with limited connectivity to a LAN or the Internet. 1. Courses are distributed and taken offline, overcoming network limitations. 2. Courses from a CD can be copied to learners PCs and taken individually. That saves bandwidth when compared to all learners taking the course online. 3. Connectivity is needed only to synchronize learners progress in Enterprise Learning. 4. That is also suitable when it is expected that a group of learners is to take a set of e-learning courses at the same time. Rapid content publishing This functionality allows content 1. Content publishing is publishers to publish e-learning content made faster and simpler. 2. to the content repository through a Users do not have to wait simple Web-based interface. Content till the content is published, developers can store their content in a but can track the status central FTP folder. The content can later. 3. The authorization then be published through the interface for content publishing can by providing the FTP address. The be more controlled. status of whether the content was Content designers can correctly published can also be simply develop the content checked online. and store in a central FTP location. They do not need

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management PA-ER Activity management for applicant tracking any online connection to Learning Solution/ Enterprise Learning. Then, only authorized users can publish this content to the central repository. Activity management (or applicant Activity management tracking) is the core of any recruiting needs to get less complex system. As part of the recruiting and easier to use. Some process, recruiters carry out different activities need to be actions or activities with candidates as combined into one overall they evaluate them and take them activity. through the recruiting process. These activities need to be recorded or tracked, to ensure that the proper process is being followed. This is important for a couple of reasons. The first is for legal compliance reasons. In many countries companies need to be able to prove that they are recruiting fairly, and they therefore need to keep track of all interactions with candidates. Another reason is for reporting. PA-ER Candidate profile When working with candidates, it is Smooth and easily essential for a recruiter to get an understandable candidate overview of the basic data of a profile, which can be candidate in an easy way, because the reached from separate recruiter has to decide about the components of E- candidate s suitability for a job or the Recruiting candidate s suitability for the company and perform according actions on this candidate. Of course, the system provides a lot of tools to support the recruiter in making decisions, but nevertheless the recruiter s personal rating of the candidate is also required. In addition, the recruiter has to get an easy overview about the actions that have already performed on the candidate to decide about the next steps. PA-ER Candidate selection list The main objective of recruiters is to Making a point of hire the best people for an organization information readily as quickly and efficiently as possible. available and easily At the same time, recruiters needs to accessible will help keep a record of what actions or recruiters do their job more activities have been carried out on efficiently candidates: they need to perform applicant tracking. On average, recruiters are processing 15-25 requisitions at the same time, each with between 5 and 500 applicants, depending on the position in question. That means that recruiters have a lot of data to manage at the same time and a lot of information to keep track of, all while they are performing applicant tracking, evaluating candidates, coordinating with hiring managers, and so on.

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management PA-ER Requisition management This functionality includes the creation of requisitions and postings and maintenance. Also, new and easy status handling for the requisitions is included. Simplification of the user interface and improvement of usability concerning requisition creation and maintenance by replacing sequences by tabs reduces the number of fields that are necessary to give all required information and groups several containers into one tab. New process for requisition management. New UI for requsisition management. The main need is to convert the recruiters front end from BSP to Web Dynpro technology to get straightforward navigation in the requisition management process. PA-ER Search E-Recruiting provides functionality This UI should provide (at that helps companies find new employees, employ them in positions least) the same functionality as the current that suit their capabilities, promote their search UI, but it should be professional development, and retain them in the long term. The application more user-friendly and easier to handle handles almost the entire process chain, from planning and budgeting, through attracting, hiring, and retaining employees. The diversity of functions includes electronic screening, filtering, sorting, ranking, monitoring of activities and so on. A lot of functionalities have to be covered by the search solution. PA-ER PA-ER PA-ER Simplified user interface for the new role of recruiter Simplified user interface for the new role of recruiting administrator Work center for the role of recruiter The new portal role of recruiter includes fast access to and a task overview of all necessary activities like candidate or requisition quick searches, requisition creation services, fast activity creation options, and so on in the e-recruiting area In many processes during the overall recruitment cycle, an online system recruiting administrator is needed to support end users involved in the recruitment cycle with questions about user administration, system errors, central data maintenance, and so on. The role is typically used by a customer s system support groups (who support external as well as internal end users) or from HR system power users. The goal of the main user (recruiter) as such is to see all relevant information guiding daily work at a glance: open requisitions, view new applications, and have fast access to a quick search. Further, the recruiters aim at direct access from the work center to the tasks carried out within the system. The purpose of the recruiting work center is to bundle functionalities and services that are needed by recruiting administrators to work as quickly and efficiently as possible. - Minimal configuration effort - Quick implementation Recruiters and their supporting The purpose of the colleagues need to rely on a variety of recruiter's work center is to tools that support them in reacting bundle functionalities that quickly and smoothly to the are needed by recruitesr to requirements of their daily work. To do their work as quickly ensure fast and smooth access to their and efficiently as possible necessary daily activities, recruiters need an appropriate system entry page like a pilot has when looking into a airplane s cockpit. As a support for the fast access and task overview needed,

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management PA-TM Enhancements in job architecture and organizational foundation an organized work center with the necessary access possibilities to various activities like candidate or requisition quick searches, requisition creation services, or fast activity creation possibilities, is strongly desired. All these functionalities should be triggered from the work center. - The job architecture is enhanced by two new objects, the functional area and the job family. A job family allows users to group one or several jobs (or positions); the functional area allows users to group one or more job families. Qualifications can be stored on each level. Those belonging to a functional area can be inherited to job families; those on a job family to jobs. Qualifications on jobs are inherited to positions. - Positions and jobs can be marked as key positions and jobs for succession planning. Provides the flexibility to group jobs and positions according to more flexible criteria and views PA-TM Succession planning - This feature allows users to determine Address the needs of HR key positions - It allows to view update users and managers who succession information, such as wish to safeguard selected identifying successors for key positions key positions efficiently - It can rank successors by priority and determine their readiness for a key position - It can compare successors with others and with key position requirements - It provides an ability to monitor the successor bench strength of key positions at a glance PA-TM Talent development - The development of talent requires development plans to be set up as a follow-up to review meeting or succession decisions - Various types of development actions can be set up. - Progress and quality can be measured on actions or plans Set up and monitor the development of talent PA-TM Talent profile - This functionality allows users to update the talent-relevant information of an employee accurately - New and richer information can be entered - Update can be performed by managers, talent management specialists, or employees, depending on the context PA-TM Talent review - The functionality of talent reviews allows users to prepare and conduct talent review meetings - The preparation allows users to define the participants and easily link talent who will be discussed as agenda topics - Before the meeting takes place managers need to assess their talents according to performance and potential. - In addition, handouts for preparation can be printed - A talent review meeting allows users to discuss and review talents interactively by - Store and update talent data in a single source - Ability to retrieve accurate data quickly when required Interactively review and calibrate talent and follow the changes and agreements on talent with the projected screens

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Customer-defined business statuses: processes with HCM processes and forms Execute employee processes without starting object ( HCM processes and forms) Execute PD processes with HCM processes and forms Fast data entry for employee data through the portal viewing talent data - Interactive calibration of talents is allowed as well as the storage of confirmed results With this feature, users can replace rather technical statuses for processes (in process, finished, and so on) with customer-defined statuses (bonus payment requested, bonus paid, and so on) This feature allows users to start an employee process. Only a process step after the start technically assigns the employee for whom data will be updated in the form-based process. Allows users to execute processes based on Interactive Forms on PD objects like organizational units, positions, and jobs Maintenance of master data of multiple employees PA-PA Leave of absence This functionality supports the process for leave of absence (LoA) for employees with multiple assignments. When executing a LoA action the system now considers all personnel assignments. The LoA action can also be connected to the transactions for quota corrections and remunerations and to the benefits workbench. Mass processes for employees with HCM processes and forms Allows users to execute multiple employee processes with HCM processes and forms without a need to start multiple instances Up-to-date and businessrelated process status information Easy implementation for project organization situations without the need to change the long-term relationships and authorizations in organizational management Maintenance of organizational structure by users with less training The customer can now maintain multiple employees through the portal and is not forced to use the back end for this activity The process of inactivating personnel assignments within concurrent employment has been simplified and enhanced with functionality to assure master data accuracy, data consistency, and enhanced usability. The benefit is especially for managers, who gain time through the mass start and avoid handling multiple employees. PA-PA Organizational change When changing organizational data that results in a change of the legal The process for an organizational change employer, the system now supports the resulting in a change of the process of terminating the old personnel assignment and creating a new one with an option to transfer data into it. legal employer has been simplified and enhanced with functionality to assure master data accuracy, data consistency, and enhanced usability. PA-PA Payroll area change A system switch has been established for keeping the payroll area in synch within concurrent employment for multiple personnel assignments. Step-specific work item This features allows users to define delivery (UWL or mail) in (per process step) if the work item is HCM processes and delivered through the UWL or through forms an e-mail with a link Keeping the payroll area in synch for multiple personnel assignments assures master data accuracy and data consistency. The technical implementation of the stepspecific behavior can be achieved much quicker and

Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management Human Capital Management more easily PA-PA Termination This functionality supports the process The process of terminating of terminating assignments for personnel assignments employees with multiple assignments. within concurrent When executing a termination action, employment has been the system now provides an option to simplified and enhanced reassign data from a terminated with functionality to assure assignment to a remaining assignment. master data accuracy, data The termination action can also be consistency, and enhanced connected to the transactions for quota usability. corrections and remunerations and to the benefits workbench. CA-TS, PT- Enhanced time quota RC, PT-EV, service and new leave overview service CA-TS, PT- Time entry on multiple RC, PT-EV, personnel assignments via CATS regular Provides concurrent employed employees with a person-related view and information on shared quotas in Employee Self-Service service time quotas and Employee Self- Service service leave overview Provides concurrent employed employees with a person-related view for CATS regular Allows time entry on multiple personal assignment in one person view CA-TS, PT- Enablement of further Enablement of further functions and RC, PT-EV, functions and operation in operation in RPTIME01 for CE RPTIME01 for CE CA-TS Enhanced CATS classic with concurrent employment functionality CA-TS, PT- Enhancements to time RC, PT-EV, manager's workplace (TMW) Provides concurrently employed end users and decentralized time administrators with a person-related view for CATS classic Allows time entry on multiple personal assignment in one person view Provides decentralized time administrators with a person-related view for TMW Allows time data Streamline basic time management processes for employees who have several personnel assignments Offers more precise and efficient personnel assignments Streamline basic time management processes for employees who have several personnel assignments and thus reduce the administrative burden in time management for employees Offers more precise and efficient personnel assignments Streamline basic time management processes for employees who have several personnel assignments and thus reduce the administrative burden in time management for system administrators, time administrators, and the central human resources department Offers more precise and efficient personnel assignments Streamline basic time management processes for employees who have several personnel assignments and thus reduce the administrative burden in time management for employees, decentral time administrators, and the central human resources department Offers more precise and efficient personnel assignments Streamline basic time management processes for employees who have

Industries Industries Industries Industries maintenance on multiple personal assignment in one person view Industries is-dfp-pm Defense-specific line maintenance functionality for nondefense customers Flight order: A special type of IS-AD-MPN Enhancements to enter the structure code manually in a PM order component item IS-AD-MPN GATP with material exchange for the main component of a subcontracting order IS-AD-GPD Improved material movement support IS_ADEC- Improvements in rotables ROT/-SSP/- management and SUB/ -MP subcontracting functionalities maintenance order that also contains an aircraft s flight-specific data Flight plan: The flight plan lists all the flights that exist in the system for a given period Technical status: The technical status valuates the current technical status of an aircraft Operational status: This function provides information about the suitability of an aircraft for operation. Controlled usage rate: The use of aircraft must be monitored to ensure that too many maintenance tasks are not due at the same time. This operation is known as a controlled usage rate. Entry of aircraft accidents and incidents: If an aircraft accident occurs, the incident must be documented with all the relevant aircraft data several personnel assignments and thus reduce the administrative burden in time management for decentralized time administrators and the central human resources department Offers more precise and efficient personnel assignments 1) Address solution challenges and make the solution more complete. 2) Help improve the argument for upgrade business cases. 3) Improve the foundation that will be used by partners to enhance the MRO solution. 4) Improved support for flight operations. Entry of the manual structure code in Flexible and comfortable components of a PM order is entry of a structure code in enhanced. The controlling functions in a component item of a PM customizing were extended. An order existing customer BADI was enhanced. A rules-based ATP check can be performed for the main component of a subcontracting order. Material exchange and location substitution caused by transferring the GATP result are supported. Use of GATP in SCM and a rules-based ATP check to determine the unserviceable material in stock that can be sent to a subcontractor for an upgrade. Integration of SPP planning (repair-buy decision) with execution in. New movement type - Consumption Allow customers to posting to individual WBS (221/222Q) - integrate GPD better with Movement type - Groupto-group transfer with initial peg setting (inventory management) their standard MM (415/416Q) processes Material exchange: Perform forward exchange and unplanned material exchange in subcontract processing Subcontracting purchasing: Purchase requisition update after changes in PM/CS order Synchronization of purchase order account assignment and special stock indicator Inventory management All subcontracting goods movement can now be performed 1) Address solution challenges and make the solution more complete. 2) Help improve the argument for upgrade business cases. 3) Improve the MRO solution foundation that will be used by partners to enhance the MRO solution.

Industries Industries Industries Industries IS-AD-MPN Original demand capture and manual adjustment of ATP interchangeabilty IS-AD-GPD Redesign of pegging process IS-AD-MPN Support of issuing unit of measure for interchangeability in STOs IS-AD-MPN Upgrade orders with GATP and material exchange for the component to be upgraded using transaction MIGO Subsequent adjustments can be performed using transaction MIGO Handle valuated subcontractor stocks with project stocks and sales order stocks RMA processing Return material authorization processing fully integrated with subcontracting Customer stock: Enhance multiple movement types to work with customer stock If an -based ATP check is carried out for a stock transport order (STO) item, and the system cannot confirm the complete quantity, the system can be set up in a way to display the interchangeable materials and their available quantities and allow a manual adjustment of the materials and quantities. After adjustment, the system creates subitems within the STO to reflect this situation. The subitems behave like similar subitems in SD orders. That means that the quantities and dates in the main item can be changed and the ATP check can be triggered based on the main item change. The main item holds the original demand quantity and date. The ATP check creates a new proposal for subitem creation based on the main item. Better support for internal (stock transfer-based) replenishment processes that are based on STOs and interchangeability. Better tracking and fulfillment of the original demand. Improve existing pegging process with: Allows customers to - Performance tuning - Logging - understand pegging Rounding - Low-level code correction - accuracy in the GPD BAdI conversion to new kernel-based environment much better BAdIs - Run profile - Several other by providing more tools round-offs Creation of subitems in the issuing unit of measure during -based DIMP material exchange in STO The range of materials for which interchangeability in the STO can be used is spread out. That allows users to cover a broader area of replenishment processes and support interchangeability in these processes. For refurbishment orders marked as Integrated upgrade order upgrade orders, a rules-based ATP processing, GATP in check can be performed for the SCM for the component to component that is to be refurbished. A be upgraded, and transfer of the ATP results can perform integration of SPP planning a material exchange of the component. and execution On the header page of such an upgrade order, the from-material number can differ from the to-material number. The goods issue is posted for the from-material number; the goods receipt is posted for the to-material number. Industries IS-A-DP Spare parts management Parts order creation, order simulation, Easy and fast service parts

order tracking, parts catalog integration, material search, availability check, and return order process Industries IS-A-DP Vehicle management Vehicle search, vehicle configuration and pricing, end-customer management, vehicle sales, and vehicle transfer Industries LO-WTY Warranty management The dealer portal enables dealers to service and interact with end customers more effectively. Through the dealer portal, importers provide dealers with self-service capabilities and critical business transactions. Create warranty claims Receive notice about rejection or acceptance of a claim Display and update warranty claims Display a list of all recalled vehicles or vehicles with technical campaigns Display a list of parts to be returned and print all necessary labels Industries IS-B-BCA Enhanced account closure functions Industries IS-B-BCA Enhanced account management functions - Enhanced business checks and the ability to define customer checks - Option to simulate account closure - Flexible definition of the balancing date - Efficient handling of accounts that encounter errors during processing - Simplified troubleshooting by using logs - Information regarding archived payment items is displayed - The complex amount-dependent authorizations that are based on authorization groups is removed - Customer exit provided to save, display, and check customer-specific ordering of original parts and exchange parts for franchise dealers and independent service stations Order tracking Efficient and fast service parts supply as a competitive advantage Improved customer loyalty because of improved supply performance Realtime availability of data from importer warehouse systems Real-time information on availability of parts and prices Holistic distribution chain management, centralized around the vehicle and customer Individual business processes can be modeled very flexibly Data visibility and transparency is a given at all times Fast search and configuration via Web applications Rolebased access to vehicles and customer information Financials, materials management, controlling, and business analytics as integrated parts Interface to manufacturer, importer, or DMS provided (EDI/XML) Back-end integration into finance and controlling Faster response to dealer More transparency in warranty processing Cost reduction for processing of warranty claims Integration of business analytics - Ability to simulate account closure - User exits provided for defining additional customer checks - Error logging for single account closure - Balancing is carried out as part of the account closure process - Simpler definition of authorizations - Flexible through user exits

Industries FS-CML Enhanced integration of Loans Management and Syndications Management Industries IS-B-BCA Improvements in the area of the bank statement Industries IS-B-BCA Improvements in the area of the product configurator Industries FS-RBD Integration with bank customer accounts (BCA) Industries IS-B-BCA Integration with change document viewer Industries IS-B-BCA Integration with correspondence tool and print workbench Industries IS-B-BCA Integration with multiple financial accounting systems fields on the payment transaction screens To enable the scenario of portfolio funding, CML provides a report. The report is based on specific selection criteria and provides Syndications Management with information on the master data of new and changed loans along with details on the change pointer and flow data (actual and planned).the information is provided via a BADI, which customers can use to initiate their own implementations. Syndications Management will then update the funding status of selected loan contracts in CML. Can create up to 999999 bank statements for an account every year - Ability to copy the attribute hierarchy to other clients or transport the attribute hierarchy to other systems included in the product configurator - Ability to set up matrix attributes from customizing - Additional validation during attribute reassignment - Enhanced product checks and product attribute hierarch The Reserve for Bad Debts application is integrated with BCA so that value adjustments can be performed for BCA accounts Presents change documents in a unified, readable manner across all functions in Deposits - Asynchronous printing of correspondence requests - Correspondence scenarios integrated with print workbench (account create or change, account closure, account closure prenotification, fixing term agreements, prenotification of term agreement maturity, calling of term agreements, bank statements, and balance notifications) - Ability to view all correspondence requests that are created for an account - Standard implementation of user exits Enables recording of general ledger data in different financial accounting systems (general ledgers) for each Option to provide Syndications Management with the required details to further loans pooling and portfolio funding Ability to create greater number of bank statements for each BCA account - Ease of copying and transporting the product attribute hierarchy - Improved product attribute hierarchy facilitates easy access of data Improved credit risk management and accounting through integration with Reserve for Bad Debts - Improved selection criteria that enable viewing of only relevant change documents - Detailed view provides ability to compare the business and technical information - Improved presentation and printing of change details - Unified processes for correspondence production - Flexible configuration and optimization of actual data retrieval - Flexible concept (user exits) for use-specific adaptation - Central and user optimized form development platform - General and unified availability of al provided print techniques and externally available data formats International banks or companies can connect a central banking system to

bank area several local financial accounting (FI) systems Industries IS-B-BCA Integration with release tool Industries IS-B-BCA Integration with Reserve for Bad Debts Industries IS-CWM Inventory management and accounting of materials with two independent UoMs Industries LE-DSD Processing DEX-related information Industries IS-CWM Recording of inventory quantities in two independent units of measure Industries Industries IS-DFS-MA Back-end enablement for MDS 1.6 LO-MD-UID Integrated Auto ID Infrastructure and ERP Support for IUIDmanaged items - The release tool has been integrated with account closure, payment items, payment orders, forward orders, and standing orders. - When an object needs to be released, a workflow item is created in the inbox of the agent. Agents can access it from the business workplace and can release, reject, change, or display the object. - Based on the option exercised by agents, the release workflow makes status changes to the BCA objects during their life cycle. - Standard solution for handling release functionality - Automatic determinationof agents responsible - Flexible through user exits - Enhanced ability to define release relevance You can use functions of Reserve Standard solution and for Bad Debts to create individual value enhanced capability adjustment accounts and accounts at offered for handling value the business partner aggregation level adjustments and bad debts which can be used for the determination of the credit worthiness of a business partner Inventory values for materials with two managed inventory quantities (base unit and parallel unit) can be maintained in either unit. This approach introduces the valuation unit to ERP. - Provide data necessary for DEX communication for download to a mobile device - Ability to upload a DEX communication thread created on a mobile device to and store it there - Verification of a DEX communication thread by displaying, printing, or exporting it - Archiving of DEX communication threads Inventory quantities can be recorded and stored in two independent units of measure (UoM) in parallel. Unlike earlier versions of Catch Weight Management, the quantities are now stored in extended core tables. This functionality enables use of MDS 1.6 Auto ID Infrastructure provides a capability to support automated outbound and inbound processes for materials. Auto ID Infrastructure registers the delivery of a material within a delivery or within a packing In the target industries, inventory values are often based on a unit (KG) other than the base unit (PC). Customers gain significant advantages in the areas of inventory management, visibility and customer satisfaction. - Support of direct and paperless data communication between the retailer and the manufacturer onsite at the retailer, leading to less time-consuming paperwork and more correct data. - Availability of DEX communication threads for later verification and issue resolution. Materials without a fixed conversion factor between two UoMs can be managed correctly in without using additional DB tables outside core ERP. Prerequisite to use the new functionality Enable automated warehouse processes (based on barcode or RFID) for items that are assigned to IUIDs. Process automation based on

Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries LO-MD-UID IUID (item unique identification)-related message triggering IS-DFP-OF Line maintenance s IS-DFP-OF Maintenance s IS-DFP-OF Materials management s IS-DFP-OF Organizational flexibility and system architecture hierarchy and triggers the goods issue Auto ID Infrastructure) can for these materials in the be used to streamline system. This capability is enhanced to outbound and inbound support IUID. Auto ID processing when items are Infrastructure also can support inbound identified by IUIDs. processing by identifying the receipt of an inbound delivery and triggering the goods receipt in the system. This process also is enhanced to support IUIDs. This business function provides the interfaces needed to enable these processes. The new functionality provides the Process- and status-based capability to export electronic messaging for IUID-related messages to external systems if IUIDmanaged items are processed by the provides a capability to items is provided. It system and the items automate a lot of the change, which required reporting to an messages that need to be external system (a central database or sent to external systems. any other external system). Main areas for which we are providing such triggers for the creation of IUID-related messages include: inventory management (goods issue and consumption), changes of technical configuration, and subcontracting. The business function also provides a status monitor for IUID-managed items, which allows users to control statusdependent processing based on five new IUID-relevant statuses that are available for equipment. Provides better functionality with a new maintenance board that synchronizes the structure of the logbook and technical objects and supports distribution of logbook information Better support for maintenance activities in a deployed system landscape by supporting distribution of the master parts list (MPL) across the landscape. Adjustments in data relocation and distribution. Enhancements to get better system performance. Enhancements for change authorization of objects. Completing dynamic packing functionality, enhanced interchangeability support, and crosssystem relocation support Provides additional functionality in the area of organizational flexibility for faster setup of a deployed system landscape and functionality to archive DFPS-specific objects Better data consistency and transparency with respect to resources via the maintenance board. Better support for deployed operations because of the distributed logbook. Distribution of MPL Adjustments in relocation and distribution Enhancements to modification rights for objects (change authorization) Complete, end-to-end dynamic packing capability Cross-system relocation capability Expanded interchangeability and substitution functionality in DFPS Optimizes support of autarchy processes Improves robustness and scalability of landscapes Improves the capability to set up a deployed system

Industries IS-DFS-ICM Resource management It links a DFPS force element with an CRM case (the case ID is displayed on the operation/exercise tab). It also allows users to search, display, and import existing DFPS force elements and operations in CRM as operation organizational structures (OOS). Industries IS-HMED Application log Application log is an application for meeting the requirements of data security and privacy of clinical patient data. It can record every access (display, change, and so on) to a patient's electronic medical patient record in i.s.h.med. The logging messages are traceable for users with special authorization. Industries IS-H Communication with payers faster CRM now offers an option for integration with DFPS. With this feature, users can now preplan operations and scenarios for large criminal investigations and include them easily during the process of an investigation. You simply open the template and adapt it to the needs of your current operation (operation name, operation description, start and end date, maximum headcount, superior organization, operation task, operation category, and operation planner position). Improved transparency of access to clinical patient date Electronic data interchange for Billing rules easily electronic invoice addressed to adaptable to changing statutory health insurance (B2 protocol) legal requirements through Receipt of payment information from Customizing settings and statutory health insurance (NOEMIE customer s protocol) Displays invoice and related (Business Add-Ins) payment information on case basis Contract schemes can be flexibly defined and individually adjusted on a case-by-case basis Manual override of payment distribution possible with invoice creation System ready for direct billing of inpatient stays and outpatient visits (public hospitals) Industries IS-H Direct patient billing Physicians employed by the hospital have authorization to treat and bill the activity on their own account. However, the physician chooses to have the hospital create the invoices on account of the hospital first. Creates a list of fee services performed in a given period and the fees billed. This list also allows the calculation of the deduction and the amount to be transferred to the physician. Transfers the doctors' fees collected from the hospital account to the physician's account, minus a deduction. Hospital to offer direct patient billing option to physicians Direct patient billing as integral part of hospital information system Visibility of payment status related to billed physician fee

Industries IS-H-ACM Documentation work station: new documentation objects (enhanced) Industries IS-H DRG process support and reporting in acute hospital care area Industries IS-H Electronic reading of the French healthcare smartcard (Carte Vitale) Industries IS-H Enhancements of Patient Management The outpatient documentation work station in Ambulatory Care Management provides new documentation objects: renewable documents and accident data. - Support for PMSI MCO process - Creation of standardized discharge message (RSS) - Creation of standardized preparation summaries (RSP) for radiotherapy patients - Workstation for director of medical information with interface to French grouper program - Reporting of DRGrelated data to regional health authority Electronic reading of Carte Vitale and saving card data in software Patient search using smartcard data Use of smartcard data for creating new patient master record - Manual entry of replacement certificates - Automatic creation of insurance information for the case based on smartcard data or replacement certificate data The new functionality allows customers to define tasks regarding renewable documents, and capture accident data for use inside the documentation work station. This enhances transparency and efficiency in daily work. - Automatic creation of RSS file from patient and case data - PMSI MCO grouping result used automatically for reporting or billing Reduced manual entry effort Increased efficiency in admission process Increased reliability of patient data - Reduced duplicate patient records Enhancements of Patient Completeness of business Management regarding improved user processes and easier interactions and broader functionality in assignments of several different areas like material requisition, objects to each other coding, and billing processes. increases end-user Additional preassignments (example: productivity. Improved birth data), consistency checks consistency checks, (example: material catalogs), improved broader functionality, and checks (example: similar patients), better user interactions automatic generating features lead to increased (example: absence leaves), and further acceptance of Patient information (example: secondary view Management for several in clinical workstations) are major user roles. s of this business Preassignments, additional function. checks, and further automatic creation of business data support user productivity. Industries IS-H Enterprise services for Two ES bundles will be delivered: 1. Better integration with Patient Management Patient administration and medical activities 2. Patient billing and invoicing. The first bundle covers enterprise services intended to support patient identification and encounter management processes within healthcare provider organizations. It essentially offers enterprise services for the business objects patient and patient encounter. The second covers enterprise services intended to support the processes of documentation of clinical systems and other hospital systems (lab systems, department, and so on), especially in an IHE-compliant manner. Integrate functionality into the clinical UI the users are used to Avoid manual input and user errors Offers the possibility to adapt and configure business processes flexibly medical activities, patient invoicing, and to customer needs payment handling. It also supports the transfer of medical activities from

Industries IS-H France-specific service and diagnosis catalog maintenance Industries IS-H France-specific service rules and automatic service adjustments specialized clinical systems, devices, or departmental systems. Import programs for service catalogs Automatic update of (CCAM, UCD, LPP, GHS, and NABM) service catalogs History of Import program for diagnoses catalog time-dependent service (French ICD10 version) Service master attributes enhanced with service attributes specific to French service catalogs Automatic check and adjustment of services entered for the case: - Automatic fee per diem creation or adjustment - Automatic creation of daily hospital rate - Automatic calculation of fixed patient contribution ( 18) - DRGrelated service rules Industries IS-H French billing rules Offers rules for calculating the patient contribution based on per diem fees Offers rules for reimbursement by statutory health insurance Allows flexible customizing of contract schemes related to statutory health insurance and supplementary health insurance and special coverage schemes Allows blocking the posting of receivables for specific invoices (invoices related to activity financed by the hospital budget) Allows simulation of payment distribution and manual adjustment capabilities Industries IS-H Healthcare BP and OM transition to standard objects and structures Automatic generation and adjustment of billable service based on case data Service entry and control is performed where the services are performed, allowing for billing at discharge Billing rules easily adaptable to changing legal requirements through Customizing settings and customer s (Business Add-Ins) Contract schemes can be flexibly defined and individually adjusted on case-by-case basis Manual override of payment distribution possible with invoice creation System ready for direct billing of inpatient stays and outpatient visits (public hospitals) It moves proprietary for Standardized UI for the Healthcare objects and UI transactions (logically) same business into standard objects and the transactions corresponding standard UIs. Industries IS-HMED Implementation support Implementation support leverages easier application administration by creation of installation packages holding organization unit- or documentspecific customizing data and import of other systems. Implementation support provides: - Transfer of customizing data without changes - Transfer of customizing data including assignment to other organizational units Transparency and time savings in transferring and duplicating customizing related to clinical organizational units Industries IS-H New treatment To improve the existing solution, a Increased efficiency certificates rearranged user interface, the removal of not required data fields, the concentration of the most needed data fields, the investigation of a meaningful workflow, and intelligent points of accessibility have been implemented. A field pre-filled with the given data and according to the treatment certificate category and type is also implemented to avoid redundant data. Industries IS-H Patient registration, Coordinated care path Insurance Entry of billing-relevant

including France-specific information Industries IS-HMED Patient-centered inpatient work station coverage information Support for special coverage schemes such as the local health care scheme "Alsace- Moselle," universal medical coverage (CMU), and state medical aid (AME) Reasons for exoneration from patient contribution The patient-centered inpatient work station is an application for managing clinical information and documentation tasks for inpatients. It is configurable for various work scenarios like clinical admission or doctor's round. It provides: - Situation-driven task profiles - Patient's clinical summary as well as integrated presentation of the patient's clinical history - Charting component for graphical, timeline-oriented presentation of patient's vital signs, lab values, medication, treatment events, and documentation - Presentation and creation of progress notes for documenting daily status and observations - Creation of documentation like anamnesis, discharge reports, and so on - Acquisition of planned treatment steps Industries IS-HMED Radiology work station The radiology work station is an application for supporting the radiological findings process in i.s.h.med, including creation, validation, and presentation of radiological reports in i.s.h.med. It provides configurable workloads, task management, interfaces to image viewers, report creation, and in-place access to patient's previous findings. Industries IS-H-ACM Renewable document management Industries IS-H Selling drugs from hospital pharmacy information at admission Exhaustive management of insurance providers and flexible assignment of contract scheme Moving toward a paperless documentation in inpatient treatment documentation. Uniform look and feel for patient-centered process steps by use of the universal i.s.h.med work station concept for patientcentered documentation. Implementation of the radiological findings process by use of a universal workstation concept in i.s.h.med. - Less application administration and training effort - Efficient findings creation and validation - Improved transparency of tasks and completion of tasks Renewable document management Enhanced transparency enables users to issue initial and and efficiency renewed documents in the same place (example: work incapacity certificates). Special visit type for drug sale from Closed-loop process pharmacy Automatic creation of billable support for selling drugs service based on case-related material from hospital pharmacy consumption Creation of electronic including patient invoice file (B2) registration, material consumption, and billing Billing of patient treatment and billing of drugs supported in a single system: no redundancy in patient data Industries IS-HMED Surgery work station The surgery work station is an application for patient- and processoriented documentation of surgeries in i.s.h.med. It provides situationdependent task profiles for various documentation steps in an operation process. The surgery work station can therefore act as a surgeon's application Universal workstation concept for i.s.h.med documentation workplaces: - Less application administration - Less training effort - Increased documentation performance - Improved

Industries Industries Industries Industries IS-HER-CM Academic postprocessing framework IS-HER-CM Academic work UI s for documenting diagnoses, procedures, and the surgical report or as a nurse's application for documenting time stamps and the surgery log. A summary of the current surgery's documentation status and a patient viewer for accessing the patient's electronic medical record (EMR) without interrupting the documentation process are both integrated. - Changes to a student's academic history and to academic offerings can trigger an event in the new academic postprocessing framework. - Each event will carry a context that allows business rules (defined in the business rules framework) to determine what, if any, automated follow-up actions shall be performed. - Follow-up actions can be freely defined, including the ability to send messages to external applications via NetWeaver Process Integration). transparency of tasks and completion of tasks - Increased individualization for roles and situations - Follow-up actions for academic events can now be handled in an automated, real-time manner. - Costly and errorprone manual processing can be eliminated in most cases. - Academic work user interface (UI) can - Time savings and now be accessed directly (with student increased productivity. - search), rather than requiring Increased accuracy of navigation via the student file. - academic work data for Business add-ins are available for students. advanced validation of the academic work data entered. Industries IS-HER-CM Attendance tracking - Instructors can track each student's attendance and tardiness for each class. - Excused and unexcused absence reasons can be configured. - Pre-excused absences can be recorded for students. - Absence data can be automatically considered during appraisal calculations. IS-HER-CM Audit framework s IS-HER-CM Course registration selfservice - Instructors can easily track and view attendance data for students via a simple Web user interface, eliminating the need to maintain attendance data separately via spreadsheets or paper entry, and thus increasing the accuracy of information. - Automatic inclusion of attendance data in appraisals ensures compliance with attendance policies. - Audit rule containers can be - Audit runs can be largely automatically generated for the automated with accurate academic structure. - Audit results, reducing the time subequirements can be defined to spent by academic disallow reuse of academic work. - departments to adjust Audit subrequirements can be defined results manually. to use academic work in an incremental manner until the conditions are met. - Audit subrequirements can be prioritized for an audit run. - An out-of-the-box Web self-service application is provided (via Web Dynpro for ABAP) for student course registration. - The application is highly configurable to meet individual - Implementation costs are greatly reduced with this self-service application. - Universities can offer students the ability to

Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries Industries IS-HER-CM Enterprise services for third-party integration IS-HER-CM Event-offering business add-ins IS-HER- CM-NL requirements of universities. - The Web preselect courses in a self-service processing engine can be shopping cart even before decoupled from back-end productive their registration window system for increased security. opens. - Students can simulate tuition calculation from their selected courses. - Enterprise services provide standard Academic processes that interfaces for third-party learning span multiple applications management systems to be notified can be managed about changes to course offerings and seamlessly with enterprise course registrations. - Enterprise services. - Implementation services provide standard interfaces for costs of integration third-party applications, such as scenarios are reduced. financial aid systems, to be notified about changes to student and applicant status. - Enterprise services allow thirdparty applications to access information about students, registrations, and academic offerings through standard Web services. - Business add-ins for event offerings - Time savings during allow default and suggested creation of event offerings. abbreviations and names of events and - Compliance with event packages. - Business add-in institutional rules. - Alerts allows customer-specific validation to faculty workload rules of event offering data. exceptions. Integration with Studielink Enables the system to integrate with Master data and study data Studielink via NetWeaver XI. A for all students can be Web service enables Studielink to send maintained automatically information to Student Lifecycle with integration with Management, which can also send Studielink. information about students to Studielink. IS-HER-CM Module-based correspondence IS-HER-CM New booking check framework IS-HER-CM Online grading user interface IS-HER-CM Relaxable booking checks - Correspondence can be generated using a module or event as the context object, rather than student - Boolean combinations and set-based prerequisites and corequisites for module booking can be easily defined. - Non-course-based prerequisites can be defined without the use of VSR rules. - New framework is based on subrequirements (similar to audits). An alternative to the current Java Web Dynpro application for appraisal selfservice - Booking capacity checks at the module level can be relaxed. - Booking checks during wait-list move-up can be - Module-specific correspondence, such as completion certificates, can be easily generated. - Official communication correspondence regarding modules (such as cancellation) can be easily generated. - Creation and maintenance of complex booking checks is greatly simplified, reducing overall implementation cost and time. Customers will be able to easily adopt -issued corrections and s. - User interface is easily configurable to meet customer needs. - Wait-list move-ups will execute more quickly, allowing for more frequent

relaxed. evaluation of move-ups Industries IS-HER-CM Simplified graduation record creation for students - Graduation records for a student can now be created directly from the existing transaction: graduation per student. Previously, it could be done only from graduation per program. - Productivity will be improved Industries IS-HER-CM Stored performance indexes - Performance index calculation results can be persistently stored, rather than always dynamically calculated. - NetWeaver Business Intelligence extractors are delivered for flexible performance index reporting. - Changes to stored performance indexes can trigger postprocessing framework events. Industries IS-HER-CM Student portal role - A portal role is provided for students, assembling the previously released student self-service applications and the new, Web-based course registration application. - Student selfservice functionality is decoupled from the back-end core system for increased security. Industries ICM Industries FS-SR Adoption for internationalization The new functionality supports additional differentiation criteria which are defined in financial asset management (FAM) operational system Industries FS-CM Annuity management This functionality enables customers to handle annuities within their life benefit claims Industries FS-CM Approval of repetitive payment Industries FS-CM Best-practice customizing for personal auto line of business (USA and Germany) Industries FS-CD Business lock supplement for payment plan items - Analytical reporting of performance indexes. - Automated follow-up processes for students who pass into positive or negative alert thresholds can be managed, ensuring the accuracy of academic processes. -- Implementation costs are lowered by providing portal content for student services. - System security is improved. With the new functionality, the customer has more flexibility in using the differentiation criteria of the operational system. The available differentiation criteria are deposit, portfolio, deposit group, and a combination of them. By using this feature customers can now pay out life benefits as annuities An approval process is now possible Improve expense based on the repetitive payment controlling by approval of record, instead of being forced to complete repetitive approve each single payment, resulting payments records in one of one repetitive payment record step instead of generating single payments individually Best-practice-based delivery customizing for personal auto line of business in the United States and Germany - Reuse of standard customizing for production systems - Reduced implementation time and cost New functionality for processing locks For each processing lock, like clearing lock, payment lock, a number of days or a interest lock, and dunning lock in the validity period can be set. payment plan item. The processing Furthermore, users can locks can now be defined with a validity define the processing locks period. with a validity period in the payment plan items. Industries ICM Change of user interface The functionality remains unchanged. - Homogeneous Web

Enhanced documentation is also available. Industries FS-CD Check escheatment Escheatment is applicable only for the United States and consists of handing over abandoned or unclaimed property to a government authority. In the case of insurance companies, that applies to payments made to insurants, brokers, agents, and claimants when the issued check has not been negotiated after a period of time. Regulations differ from state to state, but after a specified period, the issued payments (most often a check or draft) are considered subject to escheatment and the funds must be turned over to the state. The funds become property of the state by Federal law. Industries FS-CM Claims archiving Archiving functionality for the objects claim, claim bundle, and service catalogues is provided Industries FS-CD Client-dependent, customer-specific account determination Industries FS-CM Data extraction for claims financial reporting Industries FS-CM Enhanced claim status upon claim closure Industries FS-CM Enhancements for service catalogs Industries FS-SR Flexibility of industry key business processes Dynpro technology base and reduced TCO for implementation and maintenance - Avoidance of unnecessary effort to operate the credentialing system properly The legal requirement for escheatment will be fulfilled Less storage space needed; better performance resulting in shorter claim processing times This functionality enables configuration Customers have now an of customer-specific account option to configure determination for each client. For each customer-specific account client, a posting area can be specified determination for each for the general ledger (G/L) account client determination of the business partner item (receivables and payables) and a posting area for G/L account determination of the G/L item (revenue and expenses). Up to eight features for account determination can be selected. The posting areas must therefore be maintained accordingly. New data extraction for as-of-point-intime analysis for financial key figures to be used as basis for NetWeaver BI 7.04 content Provide overview during claim closure attempt indicating all reasons preventing a claim closure - Service catalogs are extended by point values or business rules to calculate prices for services flexibly. In addition to existing direct service catalog assignments, indirect service catalog assignment via classifying attributes is possible. Flexibility of key industry business processes Out-of-the-box data basis for claims financial reporting available in NetWeaver BI More efficient claim closing process Point values or use of business rules enables customers to use more extended pricing models for their services described in service catalogs The new functionality allows customers to use all existing industry keys defined at the level of the

Industries FS-CD Flexible withholding tax in payment plan interface With package 4, you can enter variable withholding tax supplements that belong to a document by using the payment plan interface Industries FS-CM Inactive claims monitoring Identification of all claims that have been open and inactive for a certain period of time and notification all claim handlers responsible for these claims by triggering a task Industries FS-CM Interface with policy management for home contents and life Industries FS-SR Management of external data Industries FS-CM New enterprise services: find claim and read claim in ES bundle claim handling Industries FS-CM New summary screen in claim and subclaim Industries FS-CM Other new or extended functionality Industries FS-CD Positioning on individual payment plan item Industries FS-CD Shared reconciliation keys for broker report Interface including a default mapping for FS-PM to make all relevant policy data available for the policy snapshot in the claims management system (FS- CM) for the home contents and life lines of business The functionality allows customers to integrate external data at the point of list generation. Enterprise services are provided to search a claim and to read all details of a claim from an external system Provides a new summary screen on claim and subclaim level business partner in the statutory reporting module. The variable withholding tax supplements can be specified for a payment plan item and they are allocated appropriately to the payment plan subitem Improve claim inventory aging KPIs by identification of aged claims Reduced implementation time and costs for integration of policy systems The external data is uploaded and stored in the system. Customers can integrate external data at the point of list generation automatically. Reduce implementation costs of interfaces to external systems by use of enterprise services: provide claims data easily and in a consistent way to claim participants or other external parties - More streamlined claims handling - Improved first look at an insurance claim - Changing participant directly by Streamlines claimshandling process for entering BP number - Assigning text samples to settlement header of bulk different lines of business subrogation - Maintaining damaged object for auto - Improved selection of injured persons - Display of Performer's Office Telephone Number; - Clauses on coverage level in the policy snapshot This functionality enables the Faster and efficient way to positioning option for a payment plan select an item item within table control for the payment plan items. This approach makes it easier to find a specific item if an insurance object and business partner relationship has five or more payment plan items. Multiple broker reports can post to the same reconciliation key. No exclusively reserved reconciliation key is used for each broker report. When creating a broker report, the system does not create a reconciliation key but By having multiple broker reports posting to the same reconciliation key, greater summarization of the total records is ensured

Industries FS-CM Standard and fund-based benefit distribution for single and repetitive payments Industries FS-CM Support of general life benefit processes Industries FS-CM Ubiquitous start of notes handling Industries FS-CM Waiting period management Industries ICM User interface and usability determines a valid reconciliation key immediately after posting the broker report. The system then searches for reconciliation keys that have already been created and that are not being used. If none can be determined, the system creates a new reconciliation key. On any given day, the system requires the same number of reconciliation keys for posting broker reports as the maximum number of parallel processes that post broker reports. This functionality enables claims handler to distribute benefits for fundbased and non-fund-based insurance claim benefits FS-CM now supports handling life benefit processes Start creating notes on a claim from everywhere within the claim This feature lists all relevant waiting periods for a life benefit claim. It also takes waiting periods of related life benefit claims into account. Waiting periods can influence the payment of life insurance benefits. Customers can now distribute life benefits Customers can now handle claims in the life insurance line of business using this feature Improve claim processing speed by faster claim note creation Waiting periods can now be managed for life benefit claims using this feature The UI and functionality are consistent Reduced TCO by focusing with the previous UI, but the technology on one UI technology has switched to Web Dynpro for ABAP strategy The UIs for the roles of compensation analyst and credential manger provide easy-touse functionality for the most common tasks and reports Industries ICM Enhanced integration Improves standard integration scenarios for Incentive and Commission Management integrated for: - Automotive industry - Utility industry - FI-CA component Industries ICM Functional s - Lists open commission entitlements to update account reporting - Supports the approval process and partial release of commission payments Industries ICM Service bundle Provides services to create, change, reverse, and find commission cases and commission documents - Reduced implementation costs - Stable, standard integration - Standard integration maintained by - Customers can now easily determine accruals from Incentive and Commission Management - Customers can efficiently handle fast approval of commission payments Customers can now implement their own integration scenarios or composites more inexpensively and much faster by using the provided services. A clear picture of the service

landscape means lower costs for implementation and maintenance. Industries IS-M ABC reporting The following enhanced report functions are available for creating ABC reports: o You can identify discount subscriptions according to the following new characteristics: Price group Customer group Sales promotion Gift Billing frequency Service type Postal code o You can use the nth factor function to select each nth subscription randomly, based on a key date and a specified factor n. You can further restrict selection of the relevant subscriptions according to the following criteria: Sales area Publication Delivery type Sales document type Enhanced functionality Industries IS-M Assign cost center and profit center to booking units Industries IS-M Assign several condition types to a billing dataset Industries IS-M Automated mass chargeoff of open items from FI- AR Industries IS-M Automatic contract account creation Industries IS-M Automatic creation of shipping problem messages Industries IS-M Automatic unlocking of subscription credits Assign cost center and profit center to booking units Assign several condition types to a billing dataset that can come from several different scale-base contracts. Automated mass charge-off of open items (smallest amounts and unrecoverable receivables) from accounts receivable accounting (FI-AR) Enhancing transparency and control of business processes. Enhanced functionality lowers TCO. Enhanced functionality for mass transaction reduces costs in maintaining data You can use this function to have the Enhanced functionality system create a contract account automatically when you create a new business partner or a new role for an existing business partner. The system uses a contract account template. Thresholds defined in the system can Enhanced functionality be used to control whether a shipping problem message is created automatically for each carrier route. This function takes account of customer complaints and complaints for shipping orders. When the threshold is crossed, the agents at the customer service center automatically receive notification when they enter the next complaint so that they can react accordingly. When a customer terminates a renewal Enhanced functionality subscription, open credits resulting from a suspension or complaint can be reimbursed automatically. The monitoring procedure automatically removes the payment lock on the contract account and the system refunds the credit with the next payment run after the subscription has been terminated. The system does not unlock other active credit items that do

Industries IS-M Bundling of credit card authorization and delta authorization Industries FI CA, IS-M Business partner locks s Industries IS-M Change advertiser industry sector manually Industries IS-M Change the technical content component for unpublished schedule lines Industries IS-M Changing carriers in Product Sales and Distribution for Media Industries IS-M Check of ad dimensions during order processing Industries IS-M Check the ad content after the booking unit or content component is changed not result from this renewal subscription. You can use these functions to bundle Lower costs for maintaining billing datasets for authorization of data and third-party credit cards, and if a change is made to authorization costs the order, you can restrict the authorization of credit cards to the difference amount (delta authorization). You can set preconfigured end-dates Automation for business locks. Authorization concept is used at creation of business locks. You can change the industry sector defined on the advertiser screen. In items that have several advertisers, you can assign advertisers to different industry sectors. You can also use the industry sector for price calculation, reporting, sales agent determination, and contract determination. Enhanced flexibility increases transparency and control of the sales process Change the technical content Additional flexibility in sales component for unpublished schedule process increases lines even if a schedule line for the item customer satisfaction. has already been published. If you perform shipping by home delivery in the shipping interface in periodical sales and distribution, you can use this function in Product Sales and Distribution for Media to change the carrier automatically in all relevant contracts. This approach is based on a scenario whereby the carrier also works as a reseller and supplies retailers on the carrier route. A change of carrier can be necessary in the following cases: Carrier hands in his notice Carrier route is restructured Carrier needs to be replaced, perhaps temporarily, due to illness During order processing, you can check to see if the ad dimensions correspond to the defined rules (minimum and maximum rules). You can use this function when a manual change is made to trigger a new check of the ad content (style and design options according to the booking unit and content component) Enhanced functionality Better usability allows better control of the sales process. Enhanced functionality prevents errors and avoids potential legal trials Industries IS-M CIC scripting for bad You can use this function to indicate Better usability payers bad payers so that the agent in the CIC can identify them immediately from the scripting in the navigation area. Industries IS-M Complaint charge for You can use this function to charge the Enhanced functionality carriers carrier for customer complaints relating to a specific carrier route and received during the billing period. You can cumulate the complaints by weekday and weight them according to complaint reasons. Industries IS-M Configurable display of You can use this function to group Enhanced functionality

stock key figures Industries IS-M Contract determination using specific attributes Industries IS-M Convert units of measurement for ad sizes Industries IS-M Copy manual condition types Industries IS-M Creation of weekdaydependent zones fields from stock and display them in the applications in press distribution. The system displays the stock data that is relevant to the process step in question. You can take the configured stock key figures into account, for example in purchase quantity planning, in customer service, or when processing goods receipts or publisher returns. The element in a contract requirement Lowering TCO by means that a contract assignment to a enhanced functionality. billing dataset in an ad order is created only if the following attributes match, the minimum size of the ad is reached, and the maximum size of the ad is not exceeded: o Customer price group o Booking unit price group o Issue variant type o Positioning o Industry sector This function provides conversion rules that you can use according to the combination of booking unit, business content component, design ad type, and target unit of measurement involved to define how to perform conversion to the target unit of measurement You can copy all manual condition types, including those that were inserted on the condition screen directly and those that result from discounts and surcharges. Pricing is not repeated when the condition types are copied. You can use this function to assign ad orders for defined ad sales zones to the publication dates on available weekdays. Enhanced functionality provides additional transparency for customers and better control of the business Better usability lowers costs and reduces errors. Increases customer satisfaction. Better usability accelerates sales processes and decreases costs. Errors can be avoided, which increases customer satisfaction. Industries IS-M Customer return check You can use a return check procedure Enhanced functionality to define various checks for returns received from customers in customizing. That means you can correct and release processing of locked customer returns without having to postedit them manually. Industries FI CA, IS-M Define champion and challenger collection strategies Industries IS-M Define default advertiser price groups from the The new feature allows definition of test series for champion and challenger collection strategies. For a certain percentage of your champion collection strategies, you can define challenger strategies, which are then assigned to master data groups. Define default advertiser price groups from the payer or advertiser master The new features allow testing the current collection strategies against alternative collection approaches. If the challenger strategy is more successful, you can replace the current champion strategy to improve collections. Better usability and higher flexibility allows users to

payer or advertiser master data Industries IS-M Differentiated revenue and accruals account assignment data You can use this function to post accrual amounts for different cost accounting objects to basic booking units even if only one specific account is involved. Industries IS-M Dispatching You can use this function to process and monitor customer complaints or complaints regarding shipping orders based on workflows, which you can enhance according to your requirements. Subsequent deliveries are processed using workflows, which are triggered automatically and which control communication with the service runner. Monitoring takes place using the dispatching cockpit, which provides an overview of all complaints for the current date, classified by publication, home delivery district, and carrier route. You can refresh the display at any time. Industries IS-M Display public holiday information in the ad schedule line and in pricing. Industries IS-M Divide the ad size between several advertisers Industries Display public holiday information in the ad schedule line and in pricing. achieve coherent pricing and increase customer satisfaction with simultaneous increases in sales control Enhanced functionality for supporting commercial end-to-end processes reduces errors and supports compliance Enhanced functionality Enhanced functionality lowers TCO. Divide the ad size between several Enhanced functionality advertisers as a percentage or an provides increased absolute value in the price-relevant unit flexibility to control specific of measurement. business models better Industries IS-M Enhance agency orders You can use this function to transfer the business partner number for the advertiser for an agency to the store account number field in the accounting document segment (table BSEG) and therefore use standard reports and functions to select open items for a specific advertiser for an agency or an agency for specific advertisers. Industries IS-M Enhanced monitoring procedure determination for renewal subscriptions FI CA, IS-M Enhanced revenue distribution Industries IS-M Enhancement for checking the order deadline You can use this function in the same way as the condition technique to determine the monitoring procedure using flexible predefined look-ups. New key fields are available for each lookup. Consider distribution rates to distribute revenues, open items, and unassigned payments to final recipients Enhanced functionality provides a better view and control of the advertiseragency relationship level Enhanced functionality The new features allow revenue agencies to automate the distribution of revenues This function provides different offsets Additional control of the for creating, changing, and canceling sales and production an order for which you can define process reduces errors and access sequences in customizing. The provides more flexibility. order deadline is displayed as an offset Deadlines can be in days to the publication date and as a optimized, which can lead time. to increased revenue.

Industries FI CA, IS-M Enhancements for installment plans Industries IS-M Enhancements to sort word generation Industries IS-M Entering payments from head offices for stores Industries IS-M Event-based sales quantity planning Calculate interest at creation of an installment plan You can use this function to generate sort words using predefined rules that you implement using function modules or transfer to downstream technical systems (such as pagination). This function in contract accounts receivable and payable allows you to use payment lots to enter and assign payments made by a head office for its stores for billing documents from Product Sales and Distribution for Media. Before you can use the function, you must specify the head office in the business partner master data for the stores. Use of events has been enhanced and integrated in sales quantity planning. You classify an event according to a variety of configurable criteria. You define the effect of each event on the sales quantities. If the event then occurs, you apply the influencing criteria in sales quantity planning to a media issue. That gives you a clear overview of the planned sales quantities and planned quantity changes based on events. At the end of the life cycle of a media issue, you check the event used and, if necessary, define unexpected events to correct the sales quantities. You can search for similar events and use your influencing criteria for future issues in sales quantity planning. Industries IS-M Extend distribution list You can use the new functions to extend or restrict the number of points of sale that are to be supplied for a media issue. You use these functions to extend the list of customers to be supplied if the circulation figures or delivery quantity is unexpectedly high. If you use for Retail, you can use assortments to specify which points of sale are allowed for a title. You can start or end supply immediately on the customer's request in customer service. The system displays the potential distribution options for a media issue in the planning process in sales quantity planning. You can extend or restrict the customer distribution list directly. Industries IS-M Extended order processing in the customer interaction center (CIC) You can cancel ad items, select a predefined ad size rather than entering the ad size, and display the ad content in the technical editor used to design classified ads (IS-M/AMC) using a Usability and automation Enhanced functionality automates the sales process and decreases costs and errors Enhanced functions Enhanced functionality Enhanced functionality Better usability decreases errors and increases customer satisfaction

Industries IS-M Extended series pricing rule Industries Industries FI CA, IS-M Extended service for external cash desks Industries IS-M Fast entry of incoming payments for renewal subscriptions FI CA, IS-M Fund accounting integration Industries IS-M Generation of bonus days and up-give items Industries IS-M Generation of multiple renewal offers hotspot. Extended series pricing rule for defining the number of weekdays required in the series. Additional features of the enterprise service for external cash desks to be used in an internal scenario Enhanced functionality lowers TCO by providing the capability to map specific pricing models with standard means. New pricing models can attract additional customers and increase revenues. Use the service internally You can use these functions to enter Better usability incoming payments for credit card or check payments in the CIC using shortdialog function keys. A separate function is available for entering lockbox payments that could not be processed automatically. You can determine the correct assignment from the order number, as well as by entering the assignment number directly. You can also enter payment amounts as tips and donations. You can change these as you wish before updating the payment amounts. FM derivation and update: the Enhanced reporting reconciliation account is replaced in the capabilities FM derivation by the general Ledger account that results from the account determination. Grant-enabled FICA: the grant field can be used as an input field in posting FICA documents when using transaction FPE1. GM update: the order, cost center, and WBS element are made available in the GM update for the receivable/payable line(s) coming from FICA. Splitting of business partner lines: the user can enter one business partner line and more than one general ledger lines. The system splits the business partner line into as many lines as general ledger lines in the document. You can use these functions to increase circulation of your daily newspaper actively. The function for generating bonus days allows you to supply customers of a daily newspaper who do not have a full subscription with free copies on days on which they do not normally receive the newspaper. As part of a sales promotion, you can generate up-give items for partial subscriptions so that the orders switch to full subscriptions with daily delivery for a certain period. The promotion has no affect on the expiration date. You can use this function to generate several alternative offer items for an Enhanced functionality Enhanced functionality

Industries Industries order based on flexibly definable offer alternatives. The offer alternatives can be determined by a variety of access sequences, which you can define as you wish. The system generates the alternative offer items automatically during the monitoring run. You can select an offer alternative for a renewal offer in advance in the CIC. The system then uses this offer alternative during the monitoring run. FI CA, IS-M Group items for automatic At automatic clearing, you can group Usability clearing selected items Industries IS-M Increase the maximum number of contract in a client Industries IS-M Maintain business partner texts FI CA, IS-M Manage correspondence in interaction center Industries IS-M Mass processing functions Since you can now use alphanumeric Enhanced functionality contract numbers along with to purely allows higher flexibility to numeric contract numbers, the number map specific business of contracts in each client is no longer models. restricted to one million in each client. You can use this function to add texts to the business partner master data and then log notes and comments. A user can be assigned read-only or write authorization here. A change history is also available. Configure correspondence types Compose outbound correspondence Provide document management service Enhanced functionality The new features allow collection agencies to set up new correspondence types for collection purposes flexibly and then use them in the context of collections management The bulk order data import function Enhanced functionality creates the following data from external files in software: - New business partners and orders based on an offer or a campaign - Suspensions - Terminations You can use the mass change of customer data function to change the customer group, the price group, and the customer procedure for monitoring in the business partner sales area data. You can use the mass credit memo creation for complaints function to generate credit memos based on complaints, either for specific orders or for all orders in a selected carrier route, truck route, or geographical unit. In the case of renewal subscriptions, the credit memo can also be posted to the liability account. Enhanced functionality Industries IS-M Media issue archiving You can use this function to archive media issues. Archived media issues remain in the issue sequence and are assigned the status of archived Industries FI CA, IS-M New archiving objects You can archive revenue distribution and doubtful receivables documents TCO reduction

Industries Industries Industries Industries FI CA, IS-M New extractors to NetWeaver BI FI CA, IS-M New features for mass activities Industries IS-M New fields for order pricing FI CA, IS-M New mass activity for credit card payments FI CA, IS-M New mass activity for revenue distribution Payment and returns history can be extracted to NetWeaver BI In mass activities, you can predefine a preselection, use generic variants, and configure log classes Better analytics Usability and automation New fields for order pricing Higher flexibility to map specific pricing models. New functionality lowers TCO. Automatically mass-process credit card Automation payments The new mass activity for revenue distribution permits automatic posting of distributions. Two additional reports for analysis are offered. Industries IS-M Online up-selling You can use this function to make the indicator for the Web publication modifiable in the order and pricing. Industries IS-M Optimize performance for creating or changing media-specific business objects Industries IS-M Order block for advertisers and agencies Industries IS-M Planning issues due for shipping Optimized performance for creating or changing media-specific business objects You can use this function to prevent creation of orders for defined agency and advertiser combinations. You can continue to create orders that this agency places for other advertisers or this advertiser issues using a different agency. Automation Better usability provides increased flexibility and avoids errors in the sales process, which increases customer satisfaction Improved performance allows users to implement complex business models. Additional and more specific control of sales processes The new and enhanced functions give Enhanced functionality you an overview of the media issues that are due for shipping and an option to release shipping for each media issue or supply cycle. If you plan media issues for shipping after goods receipt, the system displays current stocks and weights, as well as the planned delivery quantities. If there are differences in the figures, you can move parts of the delivery quantities to other supply cycles. Complete planning by releasing the media issues for outbound delivery or transferring an outbound delivery cycle to transportation planning. Industries IS-M Postponed delivery You can use this new function to hold Enhanced functionality issues during a vacation suspension for a customer whose subscription is supplied by home delivery, and then deliver the issues on the customer's return. The process is controlled by a carrier change notification, which is

Industries IS-M Publication calendar for online items Industries IS-M Reassign sales agent contracts Industries IS-M Recalls for customer groups Industries IS-M Remote check blocking advertising management orders Industries IS-M Returns charge for carriers Industries IS-M Role-specific process check Industries IS-M Rounding the actual height Industries IS-M Sales agent assignment using the new requirement types triggered at the start of a suspension and instructs the carrier to hold the issues. After the suspension is over, the carrier receives a message indicating that it is time to deliver the issues that have been held. You can use this function to book individual or consecutive publication dates for specific online items. You can use this function to divide requirements or requirement elements or both and copy them into other sales agent contracts. You can calculate separate recall dates and take them into account for predefined customer groups (example: retail chains) when processing recalls of unsold copies RFC-enabled function module ISM_ORDER_ENQUEUE_CHECK to check the blocking of advertising management orders. If you perform shipping by home delivery in the shipping interface in periodical sales and distribution, you can use this function in Product Sales and Distribution for Media to generate debit memo requests for the carrier in addition to the credit memo requests that are generated for the retailer when releasing returns. You can use this function to configure the media issue work list for various user roles. When doing so, you can use specific views (for example, for plants, sales areas, or media issue basic data) according to your requirements. You can define the processing steps in media issue processing for specific roles. You can check key figures across several process steps. When checking the processing status, you can change the master data of the media issue and navigate to the required process steps. This function provides rounding rules that you can use according to the combination of booking unit, business content component, design ad type, and unit of measurement to define the values to be rounded up or down Additional pricing and placement models are supported by enhanced functionality. Enhanced functionality decreases costs for maintaining master data. Enhanced functionality Enhanced functionality lowers TCO and reduces errors in production process, which prevents further effort. Enhanced functionality Enhanced functionality Enhanced functionality increases transparency for advertisers and agencies and simplifies internal control. Customer satisfaction increases. Sales agent assignment using the new Higher flexibility in requirement types design type and item configuration to assign category agent contracts to orders. Lowering TCO by avoiding customer-specific s. Industries IS-M Search helps for an Search helps for an advertiser for an Decreasing costs by

Industries advertiser and an agency when maintaining contracts agency and an agency for an advertiser when creating and changing contracts. FI CA, IS-M Service for legal dunning You can use an enterprise service to communicate with external collection agencies and legal dunning organizations Industries IS-M Specify a time slice for online items Industries IS-M Suspension of monitoring steps Industries IS-M Transfer selected intermediate documents (IDocs) to partners using filters Specify a time slice for online items that defines the publication start and end of the banner. You can use this function to ensure that customers with suspended renewal subscriptions are not sent reminder letters triggered by the monitoring function during their absence. If the suspension extends into the tolerance period, the system skips the monitoring step that is scheduled to take place during the original tolerance period and postpones it by the number of suspension days in the tolerance period. Transfer selected intermediate documents (IDocs) to partners using filters. improved usability. Standardized communication Enhanced functionality allows users to implement new business models in online ad sales. Enhanced functionality Enhanced functionality lowers TCO. Industries IS-M Transportation planning You use the transportation planning Enhanced functionality functions to specify which truck routes are served from a plant and which vehicles are used. You can display the number of customers, media issues, and the weight for each truck route during planning. The planning overview also contains details such as excess weight and the assigned customers and issues for a truck route. If bottlenecks arise, you can use the processing functions to move the customers from one truck route to another. Industries IS-M Use default values to generate the credit You can use default values to generate Additional functionality the credit master data record for media provides increased master data record for media customers customers transparency of the sales process to prevent losses. Industries FI CA, IS-M Use ledger groups for doubtful receivables Industries IS-MP Fast data entry of variant configuration in production order Industries IS-MP Fast data entry of variant configuration in sales order You can use ledger groups for doubtful receivables Allows users to enter, change, and display variant configuration for multiple production order items in an item overview screen - Fast data entry significantly improves handling of variant configuration across multiple document items. - Fast data entry allows users to enter 10 characteristics from variant configuration in the item overview Usability - Improved usability and a better overview when working with production orders with multiple configured items - Faster and simplified entry of configured sales document items - Overview in one screen and inheritance across items to avoid typos and errors

Industries IS-MP Make-to-stock for configurable products with individual batch valuation Industries IS-MP Make-to-stock production with configurable products Industries IS-MP Multi-item production order and trim optimization interface (TOI) order Industries IS-OIL Flexible selection and easy adoption to user's needs Industries IS-OIL Freightliner offer to maintain schedules, routes, and stages of vehicles easily screen of the sales document. - Characteristics can be grouped in customizing into characteristic displays that can be selected in the sales document. - Fast data entry allows users to define global and local document items. Changes of configuration in global items can be directly inherited to all related local items. - Goods receipt for the production - Improved accounting orders valuates stocks using the transparency (product production order cost estimate - costing and stock Production order costs based on valuation) and support for valuations of component batches rather supply chain flexibility: than on standard prices - Support of requirements for cross-plant stock transfers for such a production planning process - User guidance and process consistency through improved status management and status overview report - Ability to create production orders for configurable products (KMAT) and configurable variants in a make-tostock scenario. - Ability to create and change variant configuration of such production orders. - Allows production orders with multiple production order items - Flexible quantity calculation from production order items (coproducts) to production order header - Enable to receive APO production orders created through the APO trim optimization interface - General selection of various criteria possible, additional and different selection criteria can be used for the individual tab strips, for example different date ranges for the general selection and for the stock projection worksheet tab - Additional selection criteria can be added - User can change in user-dependent setting the layout by adding, hiding, or moving columns - Layout of the graphics can be changed - Flexible aggregation and disaggregation of inventory data in stock projection worksheet tab strips - A nomination type and view can be used to maintain vehicle-relevant schedules (routes, stages, and dates) - Data will be visible in the transport available section in three-way pegging ( Trader s and Scheduler s Workbench and dynamic scheduling) - - Reduced amount of material master data - Increased flexibility to reassign stocks to specific customer demands - Enablement of postponement strategies and late order decoupling point (handover from MTS to MTO as late as possible) - Reduced scrap and setup times by connecting an external trim optimizer to APO - Improved flexibility for industries with coproduction Increased user acceptance Reduced implementation and customization effort

Industries IS-OIL Web transaction to combine scheduling and stock information and plan transports Industries CA-JVA Joint venture cutback reversal Industries AA-FM G/L account derivation check Industries PSM-GPR Account Assignment Distribution Industries PSM-FA Asset migration for fund accounting Relevant dates will be copied into distribution schedules - Use of freightliner offers cannot be maintained any longer - Ability for users to plan and create distribution schedules for transports combining demand and supply items with vehicles - Items to be scheduled and stock information are visible in the same transaction - Planning can be done either in a three-way pegging tab or from the stock projection worksheet by just entering or changing quantities in columns; the system will create simulated distribution schedules - Changes don't need to be saved to be seen on the other tab - Calculation of available capacity on the fly when data changes - Undo and redo functionality It automatically corrects reversals in FI and at the same time corrects the 4E cutback ledger. The correction would be for one period at a time, but a correction with the selection criteria of inception to date is also possible. Creates a double check on the GL account derivation when a request is being created. When a request is created if the user assigns a Commitment Item a GL account is derived. If in the same document an asset is assigned, a new GL account is derived. This check will allow the user to know if the FM and the AA GL Accounts are the same, and if they are not an error or warning is issued. Allows assignment of multiple account assignments to a PR based on either amount or percentage. - Transportation planning is an iterative process. Having all information on one place saves time. - Impact of interactive scheduling changes on inventory situation can be seen immediately without prior saving. It facilitates reversal of the results of all cutback postings in case of errors in a period This will improve the business performance, since this way all the documents created will be in the right GL account. Without this check there was a chance that with a wrong customizing, that is not checked in any other place, a document would be assigned to a wrong GL account. Customers can assign multiple account assignments to purchase requisitions or purchase orders based on either a percentage of the total or by specific amounts charged to each account assignment. - This feature supports the - Standard migration tools implementation of fund accounting for concerning asset asset management when you management for an implement the new general ledger implementation of fund accounting at the same time. - Central accounting are provided steps are the asset mass transfer, whereby asset master records are supplemented with the information on the fund, and the balance carry-forward posting from asset accounting per balancing unit, which creates the opening balance for asset values per fund. - Based on new general ledger migration Industries PSM-FA Average daily balance- - This functionality allocates amounts - You can distribute the

Industries PSM-FM- BCS based allocations Budget entry and distribution in a multi-level budget structure Industries PSM-FM Budget period as separate master data entity in PSM Industries Budgetary extension (copy budget documents) from one account assignment (the pool revenues or expenses assignment) to other account earned for a pooled cash assignments (the individual investment back to the assignments) based on average actual members of the pool - The balance information from the general distribution of the amounts ledger. - It is possible to define the earned or expensed of the balancing entity (fund, grant, and so pooled investment to the on) on which the cost or interest individual account allocation is done. - It is possible to assignment elements is define the pool of common investments based on the average daily from which the distribution of costs and balance of the elements in earnings is posted. Several rules can the pool - Simplified be set up in parallel. - A report will creation of a daily balance create the distribution postings ledger according to the rules. - Available in an environment where the new general ledger accounting with its document split functionality is active - Based on a nonleading daily ledger With a multi-level budget structure, the FM account assignments for entering budget can be defined. The multi-level budget structure supports top-down and bottom-up budget distribution. For top-down budget distribution, the budget is distributed along the hierarchy path from the upper account assignment to the lower account assignments. For bottom-up budget distribution, the budget is entered on a lower account assignment, and the system can automatically create the budget on superior account assignments in the multi-level budget structure. The multi-level budget structure can be used to enter budget and distribute budget along the hierarchy. An additional PSM master data entity, - Clear distinction of budget period, is introduced in individual master data ECC, extending the overall PSM entities by purpose - master data number to a maximum of Reduced master data six (plus grant). The new master data maintenance effort - object is available in the budget control Reduced and simplified system (BCS) and in many budget year-end closing activity execution processes. It is recorded in budget and commitment/actuals figures in funds management and can serve as a balancing entity in the new general ledger. Expiry and cancellation date functionality are moved from fund to budget period. This funcionality copy BCS entry documents between different versions and within the same fiscal year This new report shall copy budget values by generating new budget documents in the new version that contain references to budget documents in the old version. This new tool shall store the process information (for example, supplement (SUPL) and transfer (TRAN)). A copy

Industries PSM-FM Budgetary ledger configuration: new source fields to derive additional BL areas Additional source fields in budgetary ledger (BL) configuration: general ledger account, asset transaction type, business transaction, and budget process Industries PSM-FA-CL Cash flow reporting - Cash flow reporting provides readers with information about the sources of cash raised during the period, the purpose for which cash was used, and the cash balance on the reporting date. - Enables users to report cash flows by source account (such as expense, revenue, taxes, and inventory) - Reporting of the combination of cash clearing accounts and source accounts is also an option. - Cash flow reporting is an integral part of the new general ledger. - Cash flow reporting in terms of this solution is based on an accrual ledger and does not require an additional (cash) ledger. Industries PSM-FA-CL Cash-basis accounting - Users can establish cash-basis accounting by means of a separate cash ledger. - The cash ledger is a complete, balanced set of accounts required by and maintained for cashbasis accounting. It realizes expenses and revenue only at the time cash is paid or received. - Typically, the only accounts posted to in cash-basis accounting are cash and profit-and-loss accounts. - The cash ledger is an integral part of the new general ledger. It is a nonleading ledger in the new general ledger environment. Cashbasis accounting in the sense of this solution always needs a leading accrual ledger. - Migration tools for a subsequent introduction of cash-basis accounting are available. Industries PSM-FM Change management for posted invoices It is now possible to change posted invoices. When the user tries to change a posted invoice, the system creates a reversal (transaction MR11) in the background and creates a new invoice with the changed data. shall be created by version and in the same fiscal year. The new report shall copy the entire budget document. Flexible use of master data - Cash flow reporting requirements are fulfilled - Implementation of an additional (cash) ledger is unnecessary. Cash flow reporting is based on an accrual ledger (reduced data volume) - This solution fulfills the requirement for legal cashbasis accounting - The cash ledger ensures that expenses and revenues are realized only when cash is paid or received FISIO-compliant Industries Combined acceptance request posting and clearing (CARPC) A new document type is created. This document is used in a specific case, when a customer makes a payment, but no invoice was issued to him. This A faster an "cleaner" process is now available. The new document will improve the business new document will clear the initial bank performance and will free account post and at the same time (in the same LUW) will also clear the customer account. the users for other tasks, since without this process a long and harsh search was needed. Industries PSM-FM- Combined handling of In the budgeting workbench, several Budget officers can enter

Industries Industries BCS PSM-FM- BCS PSM-FM- BCS budget categories in the budgeting workbench Cover eligibility (CE) in budgeting Creation of a multi-level budget structure Industries PSM-FM Credit memo offset exclusion Industries IS-PS-CA Define champion and challenger collection strategies Industries PSM-FM Earmarked funds - down payment integration budget categories can be entered at the same time in one entry document several budget categories at the same time in one entry document in the budgeting workbench There are several s and Instead of RIB objects, new developments in the area of cover revenue cover groups can eligibility: - Support of revenue covergroup category in manual maintenance revenues for use with the be used to aggregate and mass transaction of cover groups - RIB process RIB rule (with call procedure) can be in the manual maintenance of cover groups assigned to automatic cover groups - Mass generation of covereligibility rules: create manual cover groups and revenue cover groups in addition to automatic cover groups - Mass generation of cover-eligibility rules: generate cover groups for multiple ledgers at the same time Generates the multi-level budget structure for a specific hierarchy ID. U.S. Federal agencies have two primary options to offset vendor delinquent debts: internal offset and external treasury offset. To support FSIO requirements, the system must provide a method to exclude an item from internal offset against another payment. The credit memo offset exclusion establishes a payment block on the document; the document is therefore excluded from the standard payment program (F110). The new feature allows collection agencies to define test series for champion and challenger collection strategies. For a certain percentage of your champion collection strategies, you can define challenger strategies, which are then assigned to the master data groups. With the multi-level budget structure customers can budget along the defined hierarchy. Increase control and flexibility of automatic payment offsets The new features allow collection agencies to test their current collection strategies against alternate collection approaches. If the challenger strategy is more successful, the collection agency can replace the current champion strategy to improve collections. Various improvements to the business Significant time savings process involving down payment and when recording earmarked funds: 1. Alternate documents. Simplified consumption logic for earmarked funds processes. when multiple down payments and invoices are recorded. Previously, documents where classified as relevant or not relevant based on which type of document total was higher (down payments or invoices). Now, documents are all combined, and the follow-on document reduces consumption of the previous document (additive consumption logic). 2. New transactions to simplify recording of

Industries PSM-FM Enhanced budgeting and active availability control (BCS) using budget period Industries PSM-FM Enhanced financial and budgetary accounting using budget period Industries IS-PS-CA Enhanced revenue distribution Industries PSM-FA Enhancements CO-FM integration Industries IS-PS-CA Enhancements for business partner locks Industries PSM-FM Enhancements for dunning down payment and down payment request against earmarked funds. 3. Automatic reduction of down payment when invoice is received. With the introduction of budget period as a new master data entity in funds management, budgets can now be distinguished by it. It is thus possible to have a budget for the same account assignment from approval cycle 2008 and from 2009: both may be valid for multiple fiscal years. Active availability control respects this separation of budgets, enabling checks for a single budget period or across multiple budget periods. - Compliance with legal requirements to support a budget period in budgeting - Simplified handling of budget maintenance and budget-related closing activities It enables a user to enter the - Separate input field is appropriate budget period manually as available for budget period an account assignment. The complete - Separate derivation and account assignment is then updated in control of budget period financial accounting (FI new GL) and independent of other FM budgetary accounting (FM). As an account assignments is alternative, the budget period may be possible - Financial and derived via the same derivation budgetary accounting by mechanism already supported for other budget period, including funds management account balance sheet by budget assignments (FMDERIVE). period (and fund) Consider distribution rates when The new features allow distributing revenues, open items, and revenue agencies to unassigned payments to final recipients automate the distribution of revenues 1. Several new CO reports that allow 1. The new reports will selecting for fund, grant, and functional contribute to reducing the area. A drilldown according to those total cost of ownership of entities is offered within the reports. 2. the fund accounting Call of FMDERIVE in CO planning scenario at the customer transactions can now be controlled by site and speed up its a BADI. In this BADI customer can implementation 2. implement check mode for FMDERIVE Improved performance by specific planning business transaction. You can set preconfigured end dates for business locks considering the authorization concept at creation of business locks Automate business processes 1. With the new functionality for Increases flexibility and dunning interest calculation, users can success in dunning generate an Adobe form for the notice procedures about penalty surcharges when using report RFFMINTCALC. A sample form, FM_INTCALC, is delivered for this purpose. 2. The new functionality of Interest Totaling for Private-Law Dunning Procedure concerns the rules for calculation of the dunning interest to be applied by German public sector customers, if those administrations use private law dunning. The development will enable a new interest calculation that will aggregate all calculated interests for a set of related

Industries IS-PS-CA Enhancements for installment plans Industries PSM-FM Enhancements for master data Industries PSM-FM Enhancements for real estate integration Industries PSM-FM Enhancements for reassignment Industries PSM-FM Enhancements for requests Industries PSM-FM Enhancements for yearend closing documents. Calculate interest at creation of an installment plan 1. Display of funded program in various transactions: FI posting transactions, earmarked funds transactions, MM contract with commitment plan, purchase requisition, purchase order, service entry sheet, goods movement, and LIV invoice transactions. 2.. Enhanced checking of allowed changes to funds management master data: when deleting or changing funds management master data, additional system checks are performed to ensure data integrity. 1. Rule-based splitting tool introduced into real estate: contract can now be automatically split among multiple account assignments based on predefined rules. 2. New function modules for FMDERIVE: funds management account assignment objects maintained on real estate objects can now be read when posting against real estate objects in financial transactions. Improve usability Automate business processes 1. Better control over data entered 2..System integrity for funds management master data is improved 1. Simplification of data entry with fewer user errors 2. Less data maintenance 1. Support for version management in - Changes caused by materials management (MM): The reassignments are reassignment of purchase orders and recorded in MM - Faster purchase requisitions in funds reassignment of document management now supports version chains to new posting management in MM 2. Reassigning address in funds document chains: With this new management function, users can select chains of commitment documents and reassign them to a new posting address (funds center, commitment item, and fund) in funds management. It offers: - Selection of document chains for reassignment with various selection criteria - Derivation strategy for deriving target posting addresses - Interactive choice among derived target addressees 1.Request journal for the request - Same look and feel in all search is now available on all request request transactions for transactions 2.Withholding tax lines are document selection - Better now displayed in document overview of control of data entered posted requests 3.The functional area field is available on all request screens 4. On the initial screen of a request transaction, the default values can transferred as fixed values for the entire request 5. Posting date can be defined as changeable for preliminary requests 1. Message FICUSTOM190 can be used to define (for each user) whether - Improved handling and traceability of the

Industries PSM-FM Enhancements in U.S. Federal functionality using budget period the commitment carry-forward can be commitment carry-forward reversed (FMJ3) to the previous fiscal in funds management - year. 2. Cascaded parallel processing Reduced runtime of the for commitment carry-forward. 3. New commitment carry-forward business add-in (BAdI), if large amounts of data are FM_CCF_APPLIC_CUST, available to processed - Simplification, update a table record in user-defined checking, and error table for each line item or line subitem prevention during funds carried forward in the commitment transfers in requests - carry-forward. 4. A new specific Improved handling during transaction for clearing requests the fiscal year change of (F891B) allows users to specify funds open items posted in FI-CA transfers in FI between a single sender and multiple receivers or vice versa. 5. Extended fiscal year change of open items posted in FI-CA Budget period is made available for U.S. Federal-specific processes. That includes U.S. Federal-specific ledgers 95, 96 and 97; budgetary ledger postings; and Federal-specific reports. The application of fund (AOF) is now also available on the budget period master record and takes precedence over the AOF on the fund master. Industries PSM-FA Enhancements of the FM New data providers have been reconciliation tool for new provided for the reconciliation tool: - general ledger tables General ledger provider (technical name FLGL) - General ledger provider for planning data (technical name FGLP) Industries PSM-FM Enhancements to IPAC Allows the clearing or posting of residual items for invoices and related items prior to running the payment program. Industries PSM-FM Enhancements to prompt pay functionality (PPA) Industries PSM-FM Enhancements to reporting: new prompt 1. Previously, vendors were identified as being relevant to the prompt payment act by setting the interest indicator field to 99. Now, we have added a new field to the U.S. Federal tab on the vendor master to identify if the vendor is subject to the PPA. The interest indicator field can now by used for its intended purpose. A new program is available to migrate to the new functionality (FMFG_PPA_TO_VENDOR) 2. Expands PPA functionality to the real estate application: the date entered on real estate contract will be transferred to accounting document and can be used in subsequent processes, such as payment and treasury confirmation. This report displays a listing of invoice documents that are warehoused and - Separate input field is available for budget period - Separate derivation and control of budget period independent of other FM account assignments is possible - Financial and budgetary accounting by budget period, including balance sheet by budget period (and fund) - Financial and budgetary accounting by budget period Further completes the existing reconciliation tool and its use across multiple data sources Eliminates manual clearing processes prior to payment program and allows more accurate calculation of payment. 1. Customers can now use the interest indicator field as intended. Previously, this field was taken to support the PPA functionality. 2. Real estate component is now fully compliant with PPA requirements. Provides U.S. Federalspecific payment details to

payment tracking report Industries PSM-FM Extension of MM tolerance checking Industries PSM-FA Extraction of new general ledger Industries PSM-FA FM update by depreciation run under modified accrual ready for payment. Warehoused AP clerks and managers documents can be reviewed to determine whether or not they meet contract terms and follow applicable Prompt Payment Act regulations. The report can also be used to verify that goods and services paid for were actually received. Document tolerance checking is Better budget control with supported for budget that is controlled document tolerance by funds management. A document support tolerance check allows you to define tolerances that describe how much a purchase order item is allowed to exceed the budget that has been assigned to the purchase requisition on which the item is based. A new IMG activity is provided for this purpose. If the defined tolerance is exceeded, the user is not allowed to save the purchase order. - The line item extractor for new general ledger accounting to extract documents from the leading ledger in new general ledger accounting for NetWeaver BI reporting (0FI_GL_14) is now enhanced for the following public sector fields: - Financial management area (FIKRS) - Fund (GEBER) - Grant (GRANT_NBR) - Partner fund (PGEBER) - Partner grant (PGRANT_NBR) - FM: budget period (BUDGET_PD) - FM: partner budget period (PBUDGET_PD) - This functionality allows users to distinguish between full accrual and modified accrual accounting in asset accounting. - This distinction is modeled via a second depreciation area for modified accrual accounting with 100% depreciation at the first run. - Funds management can be updated by asset depreciation so that FI and funds management remain reconciled for both full and modified accrual. Industries IS-PS-CA Form-based registration Define and process registration forms Set up rules for registration Upload registration forms Mass activity for validating tax forms Exception handling of registration in the tax officer cockpit Industries PSM-FA Functional area as balancing entity Industries IS-PS-CA Fund accounting integration This feature offers an option to define the functional area as document splitting characteristics for general ledger accounting (-> balancing entity) FM derivation and update: as of IS-PS- CA 604, the reconciliation account is replaced in FM derivation by the - The public sector fields are now available for NetWeaver BI reporting - Simplified reporting - Reporting on a full and modified accrual basis for assets is now easily achievable - FI and funds management remain reconciled for both full and modified accrual Configurable form processing utilizing business rules for setting up master data and relationships and for determining registration fees Support of automated and manual processes in the tax officer cockpit Public sector customers using the new general ledger can create balance sheets by functional area Enhanced reporting capabilities

Industries Industries Industries FIN-FSCM- TRM PSM-GM- GTR PSM-GM- GTR Fund and grant transfer Generic interface for CRM program replication Generic interface for CRM program replication general ledger account that results from account determination. Grantenabled FICA: the grant field can be used as input field in posting of FICA documents by using transaction FPE1. GM update: as of IS-PS-CA 604, the order, cost center, and WBS element are made available in the GM update for the receivable or payable line(s) coming from FICA. Splitting of business partner lines: as of IS-PS-CA 604, the user can enter one business partner line and more than one general ledger line: the system splits the business partner line into as many lines as there are general ledger lines in the document. The transaction manager allows a fund transfer. That means that the user can change the distribution among participating funds without changing the external cash flow. Provide a generic programming interface that allows users to map an account element other than funded program to an CRM program Provide a generic programming interface which allows users to map an account element than funded program to an CRM program Industries IS-PS-CA Group items for automatic At automatic clearing, you can group clearing selected items Industries PSM-FM Improvements to accountable property functionality Industries IS-PS-CA Inbound interface to PSCD for master data creation and update Industries IS-PS-CA Inbound interface to PSCD for payments and liabilities Allows creation of an asset master record based on purchase order data rather than goods receipt or invoice data Creation and update of business partner, address(es), bank details, contract accounts, and contract objects based on messages received from external social case management system Creation and reversal of PSCD posting documents based on messages received from external social case management systems Industries PSM-GPR Incremental Funding integration for incremental funding of business objects in Procurement for Easy way of changing the participation amounts of funds during a trade's term Flexibility to decide which account elements in ERP should map to the program object in CRM Flexibility to decide which account elements in ERP should map to the program object in CRM Improve usability Improved property management. Processes subsequent to creation of asset master data can now be started earlier and are available for goods receipt. This functionality is better aligned with standard asset creation for purchase orders. Central client financial accounts and central payment system for (multiple) external social case management systems Central client financial accounts and central payment system for (multiple) external social case management systems Users can create incrementally funded purchase orders in the

Public Sector (PPS). procurement system. Orders can be funded for less than the total value of the order, and additional funds can be added as they become available. Users can track the amount of funding applied to an order. Industries PSM-GPR Integration of Earmarked Funds with Industries PSM-GPR Integration of Smart Numbering with ERP Industries FIN-FSCM- TRM Investment pool Industries IS-PS-CA Ledger groups for doubtful receivables Industries Industries Industries PSM-FM- BCS PSM-FM- BCS PSM-FM- BCS Maintenance of a multilevel budget structure Maintenance of budget addresses in a multi-level budget structure Maintenance of posting addresses in a multi-level budget structure You can use earmarked funds on purchase requisitions (PRs) created in that are replicated to Supplier Relationship Management ( SRM). Allows customers to locate procurement documents using customer-based numbering schema in addition to document numbers in software. Customers can earmark funds for specific projects, cite the earmarked funds on the PR, and track the progress of the PR as it moves through the procurement process in SRM. Procurement documents will now contain both the customer agency-specified document number and the document number. Customers can search, locate, and report on documents using either the agency-specified smart number or the document number. Customers set up investment pools to - Easy way of handling enable the participating single funds to investment pools - System recognize a greater return on their support for buying and pooled investment than they could on selling pool certificates their individual investments. - If a fund wants to invest in an investment pool, it buys pool certificates for a given unit price. You can use ledger groups for doubtful Improve usability receivables Processing the multi-level budget Changes can be adapted structure by: - Inserting new nodes - to the multi-level budget Deleting existing nodes - Moving nodes structure. within the multi-level budget structure Maintain the budget addresses in a multi-level budget structure by: - Creating budget addresses - Deleting budget addresses Maintain the posting addresses in a multi-level budget structure by: - Creating posting addresses - Deleting posting addresses Industries IS-PS-CA Manage correspondence Configure correspondence types Compose outbound correspondence Provide document management services Review interaction history Manage inbound correspondence Print correspondence Create customer contacts Definition of budget addresses in the multi-level budget structure in a mass run. Definition of posting addresses in the multi-level budget structure in a mass run. The new features allow tax agencies to flexibly set up new correspondence types for tax purposes Industries IS-PS-CA Manage correspondence Configure correspondence types The new features allow

in interaction center Compose outbound correspondence Provide document management services Industries IS-PS-CA Manage tax work items Create work items for form processing Release new work items for form Industries PSM-FM Migration and s for the online payment update processing Change assignment of work items Change priority of work items - Enables migration from the enhanced payment selection (RFFMS200) functions to the online payment update in funds management - If online payment update is activated, the system automatically defines the following fields as document-splitting characteristics: KNBELNR, VOBELNR, and FIPOS. - Delivery of standard settings to enable online payment update for unassigned payments Industries MIP/MIE scenario In some cases when withholding tax (WT) is withheld by a government entity, it also reflects a revenue, as the government itself is the final recipient of the WT amount. This needs to be reflected in financial and budget accounting. If such a transfer of WT to a revenue account is to be carried out, the process is referred to as the MIP scenario. Otherwise, if additional postings are not required, the process is called MIE scenario. This functionality will create the above mentioned additional postings automatically. Also it has to be assured, that there is a link between the original document, and the additional documents which include the follow postings, so that the user can find related documents. Industries IS-PS-CA New archiving objects You can archive revenue distribution and doubtful receivables documents Industries IS-PS-CA New extractors to NetWeaver BI Industries IS-PS-CA New features for mass activities You can extract the payment and returns history to NetWeaver BI In mass activities you can predefine a preselection, use generic variants and collection agencies to set up new correspondence types for collection purposes flexibly and use them in the context of collections management The new features allow determination of tax officers, tax units, and tax divisions based on rules. Tax managers and supervisors can get an easy overview of the current workload and can determine the appropriate steps. - This feature offers tools to migrate from the enhanced payment selection (RFFMS200) functions to the online payment update in funds management - Existing customers already using the enhanced payment selection (RFFMS200) functions can move to the online payment update in funds management - Simplified configuration of the online payment update This new tool should automate the posting of these additional items to save manual work. Reduce TCO Better decisions through enhanced analytics capabilities Improve usability of mass activities Automate

Industries IS-PS-CA New mass activity for credit card payments configure log classes Process credit card payments automatically using new mass activity Industries PSM-FM Other s 1. Accessibility for archiving objects 2. Unification of various archiving objects: selection by fiscal year and period for the following objects: - FM_DOC_FI - archiving FI line items in funds management - FM_DOC_OI - archiving commitment line items in funds management - FM_DOC_CO - archiving CO line items in funds management - FM_ACTSUM - archiving commitment/actual totals records in funds management - FM_BUDHIE - archiving former budget hierarchy documents in funds management - FM_BUDENT - archiving former budget entry documents in funds management - FM_BUDSUM - archiving former budget totals records in funds management - FM_FUNRES - archiving of earmarked funds 3. Enhancement in ALE distribution Industries IS-PS-CA Outbound PSCD document status message Industries PSM-FM Parallelization of original payment selection (RFFMS200) function Capture and communicate the PSCD-internal processing status of financial items that were received from external social case management systems business processes Automate business processes - Archiving data can be broken down into smaller data slices (by fiscal year and period) - Disjunctive number ranges are no longer needed when updating actuals Central client financial accounts and central payment system for (multiple) external social case management systems Original payment selection - Reduced runtime of the (RFFMS200) function is now enabled original payment selection for parallel processing. Users can (RFFMS200) function define the number of parallel processes and, if necessary, the server.